DX800

User Manual: DX800

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 358

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

Order Number: MGCS020301C0
H13

Facsimile

DX-600 / 800

!

WARNING

This service information is designed for experienced repair technicians only and is not intended for use by the general public.
It does not contain warnings or cautions to advise non-technical individuals of potential dangers in attempting to service a product.
Products powered by electricity should be serviced or repaired only by experienced professional technicians. Any attempt to service
or repair the product or products dealt within this service information by anyone else could result in serious injury or death.

© 2002 Matsushita Graphic Communication Systems, Inc.
All rights reserved. Unauthorized copying and distribution is
a violation of law.

This Product Uses Lead (Pb) Free Solder Printed Circuit
Boards (PCBs).
Information regarding Lead-Free (PbF) solder;
Distinction of PbF PCB:
PCBs (manufactured) using lead free solder will have a
mark following
the PCB part numbers in a label on the PCB.
Caution:
Pb free solder has a higher melting point than standard solder; typically
the melting point is 50 - 70 F (30 - 40 C) higher. Please use a soldering iron
with temperature control and adjust it to 700 20 F (370 10 C). Exercise care
while using higher temperature soldering irons, do not heat the PCB for too long
to prevent solder splash or damage to the PCB.
Pb free solder will tend to splash when heated too high (about 1100 F/600 C).
ECO SOLDER M705 (available from Senju Metal Industry Co., Ltd.;
URL: http://www.senju-m.co.jp) is recommended when repairing PbF PCBs.

The contents of this Service Manual are subject to change without notice.
Published in Japan.

2

Table of Contents
Specifications Table ................................ 5
1.1.

Fax Function .............................................5

1.2.

Internet Fax Function..............................13

1.3.

Printer Function ......................................15

1.4.

External View..........................................17

1.5.

Control Panel ..........................................19

4.9.

Service Modes ..................................... 154
5.1.

General Disassembly Flowchart .............20

2.2.

Disassembly Instructions ........................21

2.3.

Screw Identification Template.................49

Service Modes (For Facsimile) ............ 154

System Description ............................. 199

Disassembly Instructions ..................... 20
2.1.

Diagnostic Codes (For Facsimile) ........ 147

6.1.

Mechanical Operation ......................... 199

6.2.

Electrical Circuit Explanation................ 208

General Network Information ............. 236

Maintenance, Adjustments and
Check Points .......................................... 50

7.1.

Network Protocol.................................. 236

7.2.

Layer Functions and Technology ......... 238

7.3.

Network Layer ...................................... 242

7.4.

Transport Layer .................................... 246

3.1.

Required Tools .......................................50

7.5.

Upper Layer ......................................... 248

3.2.

Periodic Check Points.............................50

7.6.

3.3.

Periodic Maintenance Check List ...........51

SMTP
(Simple Mail Transfer Protocol)............ 253

3.4.

Updating the Firmware ...........................52

7.7.

ITU T.37 and RFC2305........................ 254

3.5.

Glossary of Electrical Abbreviations .......56

7.8.

Communication Protocols .................... 260

3.6.

SC PC Board ..........................................60

7.9.

POP
(Post Office Protocol Version 3) ........... 263

3.7.

MJR PC Board........................................83

7.10. Troubleshooting from a PC .................. 266

3.8.

Power Supply Unit ..................................84

3.9.

PNL PC Board ........................................86

7.11. Verifying the Configuration and Mail
Account Type (SMTP or POP) ............. 267
7.12. Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
(DHCP) - Extended Feature ................. 268

3.10. SNS3 PC Board......................................88
3.11. SNS4 PC Board......................................89

7.13. Message Disposition Notifications
(MDN) - Extended Feature ................... 271

3.12. SNS1 PC Board......................................90
3.13. SNS2 PC Board......................................90

7.14. Lightweight Directory Access Protocol
(LDAP) - Extended Feature.................. 275

3.14. CCD PC Board .......................................90
3.15. ILS PC Board..........................................90

7.15. Lightweight Challenge-response
Mechanism POP (APOP)
- Extended Feature .............................. 275

3.16. ACI PC Board .........................................90
3.17. LANB PC Board......................................91

7.16. SMTP Service Extension
for Authentication (SMTP Auth)
- Extended Feature .............................. 277

3.18. LANC PC Board......................................91
3.19. CST2 PC Board (Optional) .....................92
3.20. SNS2 PC Board (Optional) .....................92
3.21. SRU PC Board (Optional).......................93

7.17. Direct SMTP Transfer
- Extended Feature .............................. 279

Troubleshooting .................................... 94

Installation............................................ 280

4.1.

Initial Troubleshooting Flowchart ............94

8.1.

Function Key ........................................ 280

4.2.

Improper LCD Display ............................95

8.2.

Main Unit and Accessories................... 281

4.3.

Information Codes (INFO. CODES)........96

8.3.

Installing the Accessories..................... 282

4.4.

Printed Copy Quality Problems.............108

8.4.

Installing the Toner Cartridge............... 283

4.5.

Document Feeder (ADF) ......................124

8.5.

Loading the Recording Paper .............. 286

4.6.

Communications ...................................127

8.6.

4.7.

Troubleshooting the LAN Interface .......133

Adjusting the Paper Cassette
for the Paper Length ............................ 288

4.8.

Information Codes Table
(For Facsimile)......................................141

8.7.

Adjusting the Paper Cassette
for the Paper Width .............................. 289

3

Table of Contents
8.8.

Connecting the Telephone Line Cable
and Power Cord ................................... 290

8.9.

Setting the Internet Parameters ........... 291

8.10. Programming or Retrieving
Parameters via Email........................... 294
8.11. Customizing Your Machine .................. 311

Options and Supplies.......................... 319
9.1

Options and Supplies........................... 319

9.2

Installing Optional 250 Sheet Paper
Cassette (UE-409070) ......................... 320

9.3

Installing Handset Kit (UE-403176)...... 322

Schematic Diagram ............................. 323
10.1. General Circuit Diagram ...................... 323
10.2. SC PC Board ....................................... 325
10.3. PNL1 PC Board ................................... 339
10.4. MJR PC Board ..................................... 341
10.5. SNS1 PC Board ................................... 342
10.6. SNS2 PC Board ................................... 343
10.7. SNS3 PC Board ................................... 344
10.8. SNS4 PC Board ................................... 345
10.9. CCD PC Board..................................... 346
10.10.ILS PC Board ....................................... 347
10.11.ACI PC Board ...................................... 348
10.12.Power Supply Unit ............................... 349
10.13.LANB PC Board ................................... 354
10.14.LANC PC Board................................... 356

4

DX-600/800

1 Specifications Table
1.1.

Fax Function

Items

Description
UF-590/790
DX-600/800
(Reference)

Remarks

Main Specifications
1 Compatibility
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

G3

PSTN Line Port
Leased Line Port
V.24 Line Port
Modem Speed
Coding Scheme
ECM
Short Protocol

Yes
No
No
33.6 - 2.4 kbps
MMR / MR / MH
Yes
Yes (B, D)

9 Transmission Speed

Approx. 3 sec

10

Transmission
Std
8 x 3.85
Fine
8 x 7.7
S-Fine
8 x 15.4
16 x 15.4*
Reception
Std
8 x 3.85
Fine
8 x 7.7
S-Fine
8 x 15.4
16 x 15.4

Communication Resolution
(pels / mm x lines / mm)

Scanner Mechanism
1 Scanning Device
2 Scanning Speed

2.8 sec
3.0 sec
5.0 sec
5.3 sec

Fine
S-Fine

4 Document Size (Max.)
5 Document Size (Min.)

With Automatic Fallback
Conforms to ITU-T
ITU-T Image No. 1
(A4, Std. Resolution)

* Interpolated 16 pels/mm

CCD

Std.

Scanning Resolution
3
(pel / mm x lines / mm)

ITU-T Std. & Non-Std.
(MGCS)

Std.
Fine
S-Fine

10.1 sec
10.6 sec
8 x 3.85
8 x 7.7
8 x 15.4
16 x 15.4*
10.1 x 78.7 in
(257 x 2000 mm)
5.8 x 5.0 in
(148 x 128 mm)
8.3 in (212 mm)

6 Effective Scanning Width
8.2 in (208 mm)
7 Reduction XMT

Letter size document
A4 size document
Letter size document
A4 size document
Letter size document
A4 size document

* Interpolated 16 pels/mm

Letter size for USA and
Canada
A4 size for Other
Destinations

No
5

Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

Items

Description
UF-590/790
DX-600/800
(Reference)

50 sheets*

8 ADF Capacity

30 sheets*

20 sheets
9 Collation Stack
Printer Mechanism
1 Recording Method
2 Recording Speed
3 Recording Resolution
Copy, Fax
PC Printing Data
4 Recording Paper Size

*For USA and Canada only,
documents must be
inserted by staggered feed
(stairs-shape).
Face Down, A4 / Letter;
0.0024 - 0.0039 in, 12 - 16
lb Bond (0.06 - 0.10 mm,
45 - 60 g/m2)
Operating Environment
68°F (20°C), 50%RH
*For Other Destinations
Face Down, A4 / Letter;
0.0024 - 0.0039 in, 12 - 16
lb Bond (0.06 - 0.10 mm,
45 - 60 g/m2)
Face Down, A4 / Letter;
0.0024 - 0.0039 in, 12 - 16
lb Bond (0.06 - 0.10 mm,
45 - 60 g/m2)

Yes (Face Down)
LP
6.5 ppm
6.2 ppm

Letter size paper
A4 size paper

406 x 391 dpi
600 x 600 dpi
300 x 300 dpi
Letter / A4 / Legal
8.2 in (208 mm)

5 Effective Printing Width
8.0 in (202 mm)
6 Recording Paper Capacity

Remarks

250 sheets

7 Collation Stack

Yes

8 Consumables

Letter size for USA and
Canada
A4 size for Other
Destinations
A4 / Letter / Legal
(20 lb / 75 g/m2)
Memory Collation
The Tray capacity is up to
100 sheets
See Options and Supplies
Section

Memory / Clock
1 Standard Memory

4 MB (240 pages)

2 MB (120 pages)

2 Memory Backup
3 Document Memory type

Yes
Flash ROM

4 Clock Backup

30 minutes

ITU-T Image No. 1
(A4, Std. Resolution)

By means of a Gold
Capacitor

6
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

Items

Description
UF-590/790
DX-600/800
(Reference)

Remarks

Copy Quality
1 Halftone (Tx)
Super Fine (Tx & Rx)
2 dpi x lpi
(pels / mm x lines / mm)
Original Contrast Selection
3
(Tx)
4 Smoothing (Rx)
Fax, Copy
PC Printing Data
Power Supply
1 Power Requirement
2 Power Consumption
Standby
Sleep Mode
ES=On
ES=Off
Transmission
Reception
Copy
Maximum
Standby
Sleep Mode
ES=On
ES=Off
Transmission
Reception
Copy
Maximum
Environment
1 Temperature
Operation
Storage
Transport (Max. 72 hours)
2 Relative Humidity
Operation
Storage
Transport
(Max. 480 hours)

64-Level Error Diffusion
* Halftone (S-Fine) only
with the Resolution key

Yes*
406 x 391*
(16 x 15.4)

* Interpolated 16 pels/mm

Yes

3-Levels
With Auto Picture / Text
Recognition

Yes
No
108 - 132 VAC, 47 - 63 Hz, Single Phase
198 - 255 VAC, 47 - 63 Hz, Single Phase

No
8 Wh
23 Wh
19 W
470 W
470 W
470 W

1.2 Wh
6 Wh
21 Wh
17 W
460 W
470 W
470 W

No
8 Wh
25 Wh
19 W
480 W
480 W
490 W

2.4 Wh
6.5 Wh
22 Wh
17 W
480 W
480 W
490 W

100 VAC Power Supply
200 VAC Power Supply

100 VAC Power Supply
(ES = Energy Saver)

200 VAC Power Supply
(ES = Energy Saver)

50 to 95°F ( 10 to 35°C)
-4 to 104°F (-20 to 40°C)
-4 to 122°F (-20 to 50°C)
15 to 70% RH
5 to 85% RH
15 to 85% RH

7
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

Items

Description
UF-590/790
DX-600/800
(Reference)

Remarks

Standards
1 PSTN
2 Safety
3 EMI

FCC Part 68
Industry Canada No. CS-03
UL1950 (UL60950 3rd edition)
CSA C22.2 No.950
Class A
Class B
computing device
computing device
in FCC Part 15
in FCC Part 15

Construction
1 Dimensions (W x D x H)

2 Weight (Excluding paper)
Attachment & Accessories
Toner Cartridge
Operating Instructions
CD-ROM
Power Cord
Tel Line Cable
Doc. Tray (Rx)
Consumables
1 Process Type
Yield
(3% Black, ITU-T
2
Image No. 1 Chart)
3 Low Toner Warning
Options
Cassette & Deck
1
250 sheets
2 Document Memory
3 Page Memory
4 Battery Backup 72 hours
G3 Optional
5
Communication Port

14.6 x 18.0 x 9.8 in
(370 x 457 x 250 mm)
14.6 x 18.7 x 9.8 in
(370 x 474 x 250 mm)
20 lb
(9.0 kg)
Yes (1)
Yes (1)
Yes (1) (PDMS)
Yes (1)
Yes (1)
Yes (1)

Excluding projections
LTR
Excluding projections
A4
Excluding consumable
supplies and options
UG-5510 for DX-800 /
UF-790

Toner Cartridge
Approx.
7,500 pages
Yes

Yes
Yes
2 / 4 / 8 MB
No
No

Multi Copy Mode Operation
Environment 68°F (20°C),
50% RH, using Letter/A4
paper.
Magnetic Sensor
A4 / Letter / Legal
(20 lb / 75 g/m2)
Flash Memory
D-RAM

No

6 Handset

Yes

7 V.24/Encryption Interface
8 PDL

No
No

Specific Destinations only.
New Option for DX-600 /
800 / UF-590 / 790.

8
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

Items
Parallel Port Interface
LAN (Network)
Printer Interface (GDI)
Scanner Interface (TWAIN)
Class 2 Fax Modem
9
Interface
PC Fax Interface (MGCS)
PC Fax Interface
(LaserFAX)
Document Manager
MFP Utilities
Languages
Control Panel
Function Label
LCD Display
Printouts
Operating Instructions
Multi-Task Operation
1 Multi Task Operation
2 Direct XMT Reserve
3 Memory XMT Reserve
Number of Memory Job
4
Files
Dialing/Telephone Features
1 One-Touch Keys
2 One-Touch / Program Keys
3 One-Touch Auto Dialers
4 Abbr. Auto Dialers
5 Total Auto Dialers
6 Max. Tel Number Digits
Max. Station Name
7
Characters
8 Directory Search Dialing
Full Number Dialing
9
(Buffered Dialing)

Description
UF-590/790
DX-600/800
(Reference)
No
Standard
Standard*

No

Standard
No

Standard
Standard

No

Standard

No

Standard

No*

No*

Standard
Standard

Standard
Standard
English
English
English
English
English

Remarks

*Ethernet 10Base-T /
100Base-Tx

*HydraFax / LaserFAX Not
Supported

English, C-French, Spanish
can be selected for USA,
Canada.
Determined by the
Destination.

Yes
Yes
Yes
70 files

10 files

28
4
32
100
132
36
15
Yes

With Directory Search key

Yes

Max. 12 stations

Direct Dialing
(Monitor Dialing)

Yes

Voice mode (Monitor
Dialing Mode)
Requires to press START
to start fax communication.
Automatic Redialing is not
available.

11 Automatic Redialing
12 Manual Redialing

Yes
Yes

13 Chain Dialing (Hybrid Dial)

Yes

14 Line Monitor Speaker

Yes

10

On Monitor Dialing mode
only

9
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

Items
15 Pulse / Tone Dialing
16 Pulse to Tone Change
17 Flash Key

Description
UF-590/790
DX-600/800
(Reference)
Yes
Yes
Yes

18 External Telephone Jack
Transmission Features
1 Direct Transmission
2 Memory Transmission
Quick Memory
3
Transmission
Multi-Station Transmission
4
(Sequential Broadcasting)
Direct Deferred
5
Transmission
Deferred Memory
6
Transmission
Deferred Multi-Station
7
Transmission
Priority Direct
8
Transmission
Priority Memory
9
Transmission
10 Batch Transmission
Reception Features
1 Substitute Reception

Yes
Yes
Yes

No

Yes (Max.144)

Yes (Max.112)

ADF Transmission
Page Retransmission
Dialing after 1st page
stored

Yes

ADF Deferred
Transmission

Yes

Max. 10 timers

Yes (Max.144)

Max. 10 timers

Yes

Priority ADF Transmission

No
No
Yes
Yes

3 Auto Reduction

Yes

4 Overlap Printing

Yes

LTR / A4: 70 - 100%,
LGL: 80 -100% (in 1%
Steps),
Top & Center Alignment
LTR / A4: 70 - 100%,
LGL: 80 -100% (in 1%
Steps),
Top & Center Alignment
Page End Approx. 0.39 in
(10 mm)

Yes

5 Receive to Memory
Distinctive Ring Detector
6
(DRD)
Receive Control
1 Fax / Tel Auto Switch

3 External TAM Interface
4 Remote Reception

10 pps / DTMF

Handset or External
Telephone

1

2 Fixed Reduction

2 Silent Reception

Remarks

Yes

Specific Destinations only

Yes

Specific Destinations only

No (PSTN)
Yes (LAN)

No (PSTN)

Yes
Yes (DTMF)

Specific Destinations only
Specific Destinations only

10
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

Items
Polling
1 Polling
2 Turnaround Polling
3 Multi-Station Polling
4 Deferred Polling
Deferred Multi-Station
5
Polling
6 Direct Polling Tx
7 Memory Polling Tx
8 Preset Polling Password
Temporary Polling
9
Password
10 Continuous Polling
Convenience
1 Panel Display
2 Voice Contact
3 Edit File Mode
4 Incomplete File Save
5 Automatic Cover Sheet
Copy Features
1 Single Copy
2 Multiple Copy
3 Reduction Copy
Copying Resolution
4 dpi x lpi
(pels / mm x lines / mm)
Certainty
1 Verification Stamp
2 Header / Total Page Print

Description
UF-590/790
DX-600/800
(Reference)

Remarks

Yes
No
Yes (Max.144)
Yes

Max. 10 timers

Yes (Max.144)

Max. 10 timers

No
Yes
Yes

1 File

Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
406 x 391*
(16 x 15.4)

20 x 2 Alphanumeric LCD
With View Mode
With View Mode

Multi Sort Copy only

* Interpolated 16 pels/mm

Yes
Yes

3 Transaction Journal

Yes

4 Comm. Journal
5 Last Ind. XMT Journal
6 Power Failure Report
List Printouts
1 One-Touch List
2 ABBR. No. List
3 Program List
4 Directory Search List
5 Fax Parameter List
6 File List
7 Ind. XMT Journal
8 Directory Sheet
9 Character Code List

Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No

32 Transactions /
with View Mode
With Image

With View Mode

11
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

Items

Description
UF-590/790
DX-600/800
(Reference)

Identifications
1 Logo
2 Multiple Logo
3 Character ID
4 Numeric ID
Special Communications
1 Password XMT / RCV
2 Selective Reception
3 Relay XMT Request
4 Relay XMT Center
5 Confidential XMT / Polling
6 Confidential Center
7 Mailbox XMT / Polling
8 Mailbox Center
9 File XMT
10 Fax Forward

Yes
No
Yes
Yes

Yes

12 Sub-Address XMT
13 Sub-Address RCV
14 OMR-XMT
Others
1 Access Code

Yes
No
No

16 Characters
20 Digits
Closed Network
TSI Check
Network
(Via a Center Station)

Received File Transfer
NYSE Feature
Specific Destinations only
T. Routing
T. Routing with PC interface

Yes

2 PIN Code Access

Yes

3 Intelligent Redial (AI)
4 Department Code
5 Energy Saver Mode

Yes
No
Yes

6 Daylight Saving Time

Yes

7 Self Diagnostic Function
Remote Diagnostic
8
Function
9 Check & Call Function
Firmware Update / Download
1 Remote Update
2 Local Update
Memory Card (FROM)
Parallel Port
3 Download to FROM Card

25 Characters

Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
Yes
10 Boxes
No
Yes

11 Auto Fax Archive

Remarks

For USA, Canada and
Hong Kong only
PBX Access Code
2 Files

USA, Canada and
Germany only

Yes
Specific Destinations only

Yes
Yes
Yes

Using G3 Protocol

Yes
No

Yes
Yes

12
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

1.2.

Internet Fax Function
Items

Main Specifications
1 Communication Protocols
2 Coding Scheme
3 Line Interface
Scanner Mechanism
1 Max. Document Size
Scanning Resolution
2
(pel/mm x lines/mm)

Description
DX-600/800
TCP / IP
MH / MMR
RJ-45 (Ethernet)
A4, Letter, Legal
8 x 3.85
8 x 7.7
8 x 15.4
16 x 15.4*

Remarks

SMTP / MIME
Ethernet LAN

LAN:16 x 15.4 Scanning Resolution is
available with Parameter setting.
* Interpolated 16 pels/mm.

Transmission Features
1 Multi-Task Operation

Yes

2 Memory Transmission
Sequential Multi-Station
3
Transmission
Simultaneous Multi-Station
4
Transmission
5 Sender Selection
G3 / Email Mixed
6
Broadcasting
7 Deferred Transmission

Yes

Yes

8 Fax Forward

Yes

9 Sub-address RCV

Yes

10 Mail Header
Email Header Print Selection
Subject Line
LAN Features

Yes
Yes
Yes

Yes
Random Entry

1 Internet Fax Communication

Yes

2 Internet Mail Reception
3 Internet Fax Server Features
Internet Fax Relay XMT
Email Relay MXT
Received Fax / Email
Forward
PC to FAX Transmission

Yes

Inbound Routing
Phone Book Registration from
PC
4 I-Fax Parameters
Registration via Email
5 Internet Delivery Confirmation

Simultaneous operation of G3 Fax and
LAN is available.

Received File Transfer, only with I-FAX
Option
Inbound Routing, only with I-FAX
Option
All or From / To / Subject only

A3 Communication is available with
Parameter setting.

Yes
Yes

iFAX → iFAX → G3FAX
PC → iFAX → G3FAX

Yes

Local print available

No
Yes

Using Sub-Address. Local print
available

Yes

Via Email

Yes
Yes

With MDN

13
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

Items
6 Network Scanning
7 Network Printing
LPR / LPD
GDI
PDL
8 Secondary DNS
9 DHCP Client

Description
DX-600/800
Yes (400 dpi*)
Yes (600 dpi)
Yes
No
Yes
Yes

Remarks
* Interpolated
Win 98 / Me

Yes

Lightweight Directory Access Protocol
(Directory Services)

1 Comm. Journal (w / Image)

Yes

Email from RCV side to Panasonic
I-Fax’s only.

1 Email Address

Yes

10 LDAP
Certainty

ID

14
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

1.3.

Printer Function

Items
Interface
Centronics Parallel I/F
1
(IEEE-1284)
2 LAN (Network)
3 USB Port
4 IEEE-1394
Printer Function
1 Printing Size
2 Bypass
3 Stapling
4 Printing Resolution
5 OS
6 GDI
7 PDL (PCL6)
8 PDL (PostScript 2)
9 Duplex Printing
10 Collation Stack

Description
UF-590/790
DX-600/800
(Reference)
No

Standard*

Standard*

No

Remarks

*ECP Mode
*Ethernet 10Base-T /
100Base-Tx

No
No
Letter / A4 / Legal
No
No
600 dpi
Win 9x / Me /
Win 9x / Me /
NT 4.0 / 2000/ XP
NT 4.0 / 2000
Yes
No
No
No
Yes

11 Status Monitor

No

Yes

12 Network Printing
13 Network Status Monitor
14 Smoothing
15 Applicable PC
16 Multi-Task Operation
Printing while Fax-XMT
from Memory
Printing while Fax-RCV
into Memory
Fax-XMT from Memory
while Printing
Fax-RCV into Memory
while Printing
Output to Separate Tray for
17
Printing, Fax, Copy
18 Font
19 Security Print

Yes

No

Yes*
No
IBM PC, AT or Compatible

MH Coding

Printer Driver setting
Win 9x / Me / NT 4.0 / 2000 :
Local Connection
*From June Production

Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No

15
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

Items

Description
UF-590/790
DX-600/800
(Reference)

Remarks

Yes

64 Level Error Diffusion
Letter size for USA and
Canada
A4 size for Other Destinations
* Interpolated
*Via Email

Scanning Function
1 Halftone

8.3 in (212 mm)

2 Scanning Width
3
4
5
6

Scanning Resolution
Network Scanning
Driver
2-Sided Scanning

8.2 in (208 mm)
400 dpi*
Yes*
-

No
TWAIN
No

16
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

1.4.

External View

(For USA only)
Product complies with DHHS Rules 21
CFR Subchapter J in effect at date
of manufacture.

Manufacturer's name and address Factory ID

3 inch
(75 mm)

14.6 inch
(370 mm)

16.9 inch
(430 mm)
9.8 inch
(250 mm)

7 inch
(177 mm)

LTR : 4.8 inch
(121 mm)
A4 : 5.4 inch
(138 mm)
LTR : 28.5 inch
(725 mm)

13.2 inch
(336 mm)

3.6 inch
(91 mm)

A4 : 29.2 inch
(742 mm)

17
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

1.4.1.

Serial Number Contents

The contents of the 11-digit Serial Number is as follows:
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

Sequential Production Number
5-Digit Sequential Production Number
00001 ~ 99999 = 1 ~ 99,999 units
A0001 ~ Y9999 = 100,000 ~ 329,976 units
(Letters “I” and “O” are skipped)

Model Number and Destination Code (Main Unit)
3-Digit number or alphanumeric representation
(Except Letters “I” and “O”)
For Example:
2MT = DX-600-EB
2MS = DX-800-AU

Production Facility

Production Year
Starting with Year 2001, the last 2-digits of the year is
represented as: A ~ T
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

01 (2001)
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10 (2010)

K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

11 (2011)
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20 (2020)

G
H
I
J
K
L

:
:
:
:
:
:

July
August
September
October
November
December

Production Month
A
B
C
D
E
F

:
:
:
:
:
:

January
February
March
April
May
June

18
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

1.5.

Control Panel

For USA and Canada

DX-800

TEL NO.
01

Q

02

12

22

W

A

SHIFT

03

13

23

E

S

04

14

R

D

05

15

T

F

06

16

07

Y

G

17

U

H

08

18

I

J

09

19

O

K

10

20

P

L

SYMBOL

11

@

21

Z

24

X

25

C

26

V

27

B

28

N

P1

M

P2

.

P3

-

P4

W

03

E

04

R

05

T

06

Y

07

U

08

I

09

O

10

P

11

SPACE

For Other Destinations

DX-600

01

Q

02

12

22

A

23

13

S

Z

24

14

D

X

25

15

F

C

26

16

G

V

17

27

H

28

B

18

J

N

P1

19

K

M

P2

20

L

.

P3

@

21

-

P4

6

19
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

Edition 1.0

Feed Roller
(302)
2.2.9

Scanning Glass
(308)
2.2.4

ADF Roller
(331)
2.2.8

Scanner Block
(321)
2.2.8

A4 LED Array
(329)
2.2.9

Stamp Solenoid
(327)
2.2.5

(1001)
2.2.10

SC PC Board

(1036)
2.2.10

SNS4 PC Board
(1007)
2.2.10

SNS3 PC Board
(1009)
2.2.18

Laser Unit
(512)
2.2.18
Eject Roller
(303)
2.2.6

Transmit Guide
(301) Assy
2.2.4

ILS PC Board
(1006)
2.2.10

Transmit Motor
(324)
2.2.7

Toner Sensor
(513)
2.2.18

SNS1 PC Board
(1008)
2.2.16

LANC
NCU PC
PCBoard
Board
(1037)
(402)
2.2.13
2.14

Printer Motor
(626)
2.2.12

Fuser Lamp
(732)
2.2.15
Exit Roller
(719)
2.2.15
Fuser Roller
(709)
2.2.15

Rear Chassis
(505) Assy
2.2.16
Transfer Guide
(601)
2.2.17
Feed Roller
(526)
2.2.17

Pressure Roller
(706)
2.2.15

Fuser Unit
(701)
2.2.14

PNL1 PC Board
(1005)
2.2.3

NCU
MJR PC Board
(1003)
(402)
2.2.13
2.14

Bias Transfer Roller
(604)
2.2.19

Rear Cover
(105)
2.2.12

Open Control
Panel Unit

Control Panel Chassis
(201)
2.2.3

Rear
Cover
Open
Open
Printer
Printer
Control
Cover
Cover
Panel
(XXX)
(106)
Unit
2.2.12
X.X

SNS2 PC Board
(1010)
2.2.20

Front Cover
(104)
2.2.2

Recording Paper Tray
Assy (1107)
2.2.1

Thermistor Assy
(728)
2.2.14

Power Supply Unit
(1002)
2.2.13

Printer Grease Points
2.2.21

Paper Feed Roller
(518)
2.2.11

Clutch Gear Assy
2.2.11

(531)
2.2.11

Paper Feed Solenoid

Right Cover
(102)
2.2.2

2.1.

LANB PC Board

Left Cover
(103)
2.2.2

Paper Cassette
2.2.1

DX-600/800

2 Disassembly Instructions
General Disassembly Flowchart

20

APR 2002

DX-600/800

2.2.

Disassembly Instructions
Power Cord (1108), Telephone Line Cable (1109), LAN Cable, Recording
Paper Tray Assembly (1107), Paper Cassette

2.2.1.

(1) Disconnect the Power Cord (1108).
(2) Disconnect the Telephone Line Cable (1109).
(3) Disconnect the LAN Cable.
(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) Remove the Recording Paper Tray Assembly
(1107).
(4)

(5) Remove the Paper Cassette.

(5)

21
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

2.2.2.

Left Cover (103), Right Cover (102), Front Cover (104), Speaker (117), Separation
Rubber (207)
(1) Open the Printer Cover (106).
(2) Open the Control Panel Unit.
(3) Remove 3 Silver Screws (B1).

(1)
(2)

(3)

(4) Remove the Left Cover (103).
(5) Disconnect Connector CN9 on the SC PC
Board (1001).

(5)

(4)

(6) Remove 2 Screws (C2) and 1 Screw (1Y).
(7) Remove the Speaker (117).

(6)

(7)

(8) Remove 2 Silver Screws (B1).
(9) Remove the SNT Cover (131).

(8)
(9)

22
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

(11)

(10) Remove 2 Silver Screws (B1).
(11) Remove the Right Cover (102).

(10)

(12) Release 3 Latch Hooks.
(13) Remove the Front Cover (104).

(12)

(13)


(1) Open the Control Panel Unit.
(2) Open the Printer Cover (106).
(3) Remove the Separation Rubber Holder Assy
(202).
(4) Clean the Separation Rubber (207) with a soft
cloth, saturated with isopropyl alcohol or replace
with a new one.

(4)

23
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

2.2.3.

Control Panel Unit, PNL1 PC Board (1004)
(1) Open the Printer Cover (106)
(2) Slightly open the Control Panel Unit.

(1)
(2)

(5)

(3) Remove the Left Cover (103) and the Right
Cover (102). (Refer to 2.2.2.)
(4) Disconnect Connector CN14 on the SC PC
Board.
(5) Release the Stopper Latch (210) and open the
Control Panel Unit.
(6) Remove the Control Panel Unit.

(6)

(4)

(7)

(8)

(12)

(9)

(7) Remove 2 Screws (19).
(8) Remove the Control Panel Chassis (201)
Assembly.
Note:
If noise occurs while scanning, clean the Roller
Shaft 2 (235) and the Feed Pinch Roller (236)
shaft hole with isopropyl alcohol.

(9) Remove 15 Screws (7B).
(10) Disconnect Connector CN50 on the PNL1 PC
Board.
(11) Release 1 Latch Hook.
(12) Remove the PNL1 PC Board (1004).

(10) (11)

24
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

2.2.4.

Transmit Guide (301) Assembly, Scanning Glass (308)
(1) Remove the Left Cover (103), Right Cover
(102), and Front Cover (104) (Refer to 2.2.2.).
(2) Remove the Control Panel Unit
(Refer to 2.2.3.).
(3) Release the Harnesses from the clamps.
(4) Remove 4 Screws (19).
(5) Disconnect 4 Connectors (CN1, 3, 5 and 7) on
the SC PC Board.
(6) Remove the Transmit Guide (301) Assembly.

(4)x4

(6)

(5)
(3)

(7) Carefully release the Latch Hook using a
Blade-tip Screwdriver.
(8) Remove the Scanning Glass (308).

(8)

(7)


(1)

(1) Open the Control Panel Unit.
(2) Clean the Scanning Glass (308) with a soft
cloth, soaked with isopropyl alcohol.

(2)



(1)

(1) Open the Control Panel Unit.
(2) Clean the Feed Roller (302), Eject Roller (303)
and ADF Roller (331) with a soft cloth,
soaked with isopropyl alcohol.

(2)

(2)

(2)

25
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

2.2.5.

Stamp Assembly, Stamp Solenoid (327)
(1) Remove the Transmit Guide (301) Assembly
(Refer to 2.2.4.).
(2) Remove the Stamp Assembly (325, 326).

(2)

(3) Remove 1 Screw (19).
(4) Remove the Stamp Solenoid (327).

(3)
(4)

26
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

2.2.6.

Eject Roller (303)
(1) Remove the Transmit Guide (301) Assembly
(Refer to 2.2.4.).
(2) Remove the Stamp Assembly (325, 326)
(Refer to 2.2.5.).
(3) Release 2 Latch Hooks.
(4) Remove the Ground Plate (317).

(3)

(4)

(3)

(5) Release the Latch Hook by using a small Bladetip Screwdriver.
(6) Remove 2 D25F Drive Gears (332).
(7) Remove D17 Gear (313) and D50 Gear (314).
(5)

(7)

(6)

(8) Remove 2 P6C Bushings (342).
(9) Remove the Roller Wire Spring (343).

(8)

(9)

Roller Spring

Caution:
Reinstall the Roller Wire Spring (343) as
illustrated.

27
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

(10)

(10) Remove 2 P6A Bushings (316).
(11) Remove the Eject Roller (303).

(11)

28
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

2.2.7.

Transmit Motor (324)

(3)
(4)

(5)

(6)

(1) Remove the Transmit Guide (301) Assembly
(Refer to 2.2.4.).
(2) Remove the Stamp Assembly (325, 326)
(Refer to 2.2.5.).
(3) Disconnect the Connector (1020) from the
Transmit Motor (324).
(4) Remove the ADF Gear (305) and ADF Angular
Shaft (338).
Caution:
When removing the ADF Gear, rotate the Transmit
Motor Gear by hand until the Gear Latch Hook can
be seen from the inside, under the Transmit Motor.
Push down on the Latch Hook to release the ADF
Gear.
(5) Remove 2 Screws (19).
(6) Remove the Transmit Motor (324).
Caution:
Reinstall the Transmit Motor (324) as illustrated.

Caution:
Before reassembling, apply EM-50L Grease to the
Gear Posts as illustrated.

29
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

2.2.8.

Scanner Block (321), Mirror 1 (334), Mirror 2 (335), Mirror 3 (336), ADF Roller (331)
(1) Remove the Transmit Guide (301) Assembly
(Refer to 2.2.4.).
(2) Remove the Stamp Assembly (325, 326)
(Refer to 2.2.5.).
(3) Remove 1 Screw (19).
(4) Remove the Harnesses from the hook.
(5) Remove the Scanner Block (321).

(3)

(5)
(4)

(6)

(6) Remove P10 and P6B Bushings (315, 318) by
using Blade-tip Screwdriver.
(7) Remove the ADF Roller (331).

(7)


Mirror 3

Clean the Mirror 1 (334), Mirror 2 (335) and Mirror 3
(336) with a soft cloth, soaked with isopropyl alcohol.

Mirror 2
Mirror 1

30
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

2.2.9.

LED Array (329), Feed Roller (302)
(1) Remove the Scanner Block (321)
(Refer to 2.2.8.).
(2) Remove the Ground Plate (317).
(3) Remove 4 Screws (19).
(4) Release the Harness from the hook.
(5) Remove the LED Bracket (306) Assembly.

(3)
(2)

(4)
(5)

(6)

(6) Remove 3 LED Clips (307).
(7) Remove the LED Array (329).
Caution:
When reinstalling the LED Array, position the
3 LED Clips at the appropriate locations.

(7)

(9)

(8) Remove the Gears, Bushings and the Roller
Wire Spring (Refer to 2.2.6.).
(9) Remove 2 P6A Bushings (316).
(10) Remove the Feed Roller (302).

(10)

31
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

2.2.10. LANB PC Board (1036), SC PC Board (1001), ILS PC Board (1006),
SNS4 PC Board (1007)
(1) Remove the Left Cover (Refer to 2.2.2.).
(2) Remove 1 Screw (19).
(3) Release 2 Locking Spacers (431) and remove
the LANB PC Board (1036).
(4) Disconnect the LANB-LANC Harness (1838) on
the LANB PC Board (CN97).

(3)
(4)
(2)

(5) Remove 2 Locking Spacers (431).
(6) Disconnect all Connectors on SC PC Board.
(7) Remove 7 Screws (19).
(8) Remove the LANB Bracket (430).
(9) Remove the SC PC Board (1001).
(6)
(5)
(7)x7
(8)

(10) Move all Harnesses away from the front of the
Door Sensor.
(11) Release the Latch Hook and remove the ILS PC
Board (1006).
(12) Disconnect Connector CN73 on the ILS PC
Board (1006).

(11)

(12)

(13) Disconnect Connectors CN85 and 87 on the
SNS4 PC Board.
(14) Remove 1 Screw (19).
(15) Lift up the Paper Exit Actuator (730) and
remove the SNS4 PC Board (1007).

(14)
(15)

(13)

32
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

2.2.11.

Paper Feed Solenoid (531), Clutch Gear Assembly, Paper Feed Roller (518)
(1) Remove the Right Cover (102) (Refer to 2.2.2.).
(2) Remove 1 Screw (19).
(3) Remove the Paper Feed Solenoid (531).
Note:
If the Paper Feed Solenoid does not work properly
due to dust, etc. Remove the spring to
disassemble and clean the magnet and plate as
illustrated.
(2)

(3)

(4) Remove 1 Screw (19).
(5) Remove the Feed Roller Ground Spring (628).
(6) Remove the Snap Ring (B9).
(7) Remove the Clutch Gear Assembly.

(7)
(6)
(5)
(4)

(8) Place the machine on its Rear side.
(9) Remove 2 Screws (19).
(10) Remove the Feed Roller Assembly.

(9)
(10)

Clean the Paper Feed Rollers (518) with a soft cloth,
soaked with isopropyl alcohol.

33
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

(11)

(11) Remove 2 Screws (4N).
(12) Remove the Paper Feed Rollers (518).

(12)

34
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

2.2.12. Printer Cover (106), Rear Cover (105), Printer Motor (626)
(1) Remove the Left Cover and the Right Cover
(Refer to 2.2.2.).
(2) Release the hooks and remove the Printer
Cover (106).

(2)

(3) Remove 2 Silver Screws (B1).
(4) Remove the Rear Cover (105).

(3)

(4)

(8)x5

(5)

(6)
(7)

(9)

(5) Remove 1 Screw (19).
(6) Remove the Ground Wire (542).
(7) Disconnect the Connector from the Printer
Motor.
(8) Remove 5 Screws (19).
(9) Remove the Printer Motor Bracket (616)
Assembly.
Caution:
The Gears underneath may dislodge when the
Motor Bracket is removed.
(10) Remove 2 Screws (4N).
(11) Remove the Printer Motor (626).

(10)
(11)

35
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

2.2.13. LANC PC Board (1037), MJR PC Board (1003), Power Supply Unit (1002)
(1) Remove 2 Screws (19).
(2) Remove the LANC PC Board (1037) Assembly.

(2)
(1)

(3) Disconnect the LANB-LANC Harness (1038).
(3)
(3)

(4) Remove 2 Screws (C8).
(5) Remove the LANC PC Board (1037).

(4)

(5)

(7)
(9)
(10)

(8)

Caution:
Make sure the Power Cord (1108) is unplugged.
Note:
If removing only the Power Supply Unit, skip
steps (8), (9) and (10).
(6) Remove the Rear Cover (105) (Refer to 2.2.12.).
(7) Disconnect the Connectors (CN28 and 29) on
the MJR PC Board.
(8) Remove 2 Screws (19).
(9) Release the Latch Hook of Locking Card
Spacer (405).
(10) Remove the MJR PC Board (1003).

36
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

(11) Remove 5 Screws (19).
(12) Remove the L Power Plate (401).

(11)x5
(12)
(13)
(15)
(16)

(14)x4

(13) Disconnect the Connectors (CN101, 102, 103,
201 and 202) on the Power Supply Unit (1002).
(14) Remove 4 Screws (19).
(15) Remove 1 Screw (19) and 1 Washer (G8).
(16) Remove the Power Supply Unit (1002).

(13)

37
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

2.2.14. Fuser Unit, Thermistor Assembly (728)
(1) Remove the Rear Cover (Refer to 2.2.12.).
(2) Remove 1 Screw (19).
(3) Remove the Fuser Top Cover (733).
(4) Disconnect the Connectors CN85 and CN87 on
the SNS4 PC Board (1007).

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) Disconnect the Connector CN102 on the Power
Supply Unit (423).
(6) Remove 1 Screw (4N).
(7) Remove the FG1 Harness (629).

(7)

(6)
(5)

(8) Remove 4 Screws (19).
(9) Remove the Fuser Unit.

(8)

(9)

(10) Remove 1 Screw (1Q).
(11) Remove the Thermistor Assembly (728).

(10)

(11)

38
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

2.2.15. Fuser Lamp (732), Exit Roller (719), Fuser Roller (709),
Pressure Roller (706)
(1) Remove the Rear Cover (Refer to 2.2.12.) and
the Fuser Unit (Refer to 2.2.14.).
(2) Remove 1 Screw (4N).
(3) Remove the PSU-Fuser Harness (1028) and
Fuser Lamp Terminal B (731).
(4) Remove the Fuser Lamp (732).
Caution:
When reinstalling the Fuser Lamp, make sure that
the Fuser Lamp is inserted into the Fuser Unit as
illustrated. Do not touch the glass portion of the
Fuser Lamp with bare hands. Grease from
fingerprints will shorten its life cycle, use isopropyl
alcohol to clean fingerprints.

(2)

(3)

(4)

Caution:
When reinstalling the Fuser Lamp, make sure that
both ends of the Fuser Lamp fit into the projected
area of the Fuser Lamp Terminal A (724) and the
Fuser Lamp Terminal B (731).

(6)

Black
(7)

(5) Remove the E22 Gear (722).
Caution:
You may need to use force to pull out the Gear.
(6) Remove the Right and Left P3.5L11.2
Bushings (720 and 721).
(7) Remove the Exit Roller (719).

White

(5)

(8) Remove 2 Screws (4N).
(9) Remove the Fuser Cover (723).

(8)

(9)

39
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

(10) Remove 2 Pressure Springs (708).

(10)

(11) Remove the E14 Gear (714).
Caution:
You may need to use force to pull out the Gear.
(14)

(12)

(12) Remove the 2 E18 Gears (713).
(13) Remove 2 C-Rings (712).
(14) Remove the E24 Drive Gear (711).
(15) Remove 2 P17L6.8 Bushings (710).

(15)
(11)
(13)

(16) Remove the Fuser Roller (709).
Caution:
Do not scratch the surface of the Fuser Roller
when removing or reinstalling it.

(16)

(17)
(18)

(17) Remove 1 Screw (4N).
(18) Remove the Lower Paper Exit Guide (703).

40
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

(19) Remove 2 P6L5.5 Bushings (707).
(20) Remove the Pressure Roller (706).
Caution:
Do not scratch the surface of the Pressure Roller
when removing or reinstalling it.
(20)

(19)

41
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

2.2.16. Rear Chassis (505), SNS1 PC Board (1008)
(1) Remove the Power Supply Unit
(Refer to 2.2.12.).
(2) Remove the SC PC Board (Refer to 2.2.12.).
(3) Remove the Fuser Unit (Refer to 2.2.14.).
(4) Remove 6 Screws (19).
(5) Remove the Bracket (403).
(6) Remove the Rear Chassis (505).

(4)

(6)
(5)

(4)

(7) Disconnect Connectors CN80 and CN81 on the
SNS1 PC Board (1008).
(8) Remove 1 Screw (19).
(9) Remove the SNS1 PC Board (1008).
(7)

(8)

(9)

42
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

2.2.17. Transfer Guide (601) Assembly, Feed Roller (526)
(1) Remove the Rear Chassis (Refer to 2.2.16.).
(2) Remove 2 Screws (C8).
(3) Disconnect Connector CN80 on the SNS1 PC
Board (1008).
(4) Remove the Transfer Guide (601) Assembly.

(2)

(3)
(4)

(5) Remove the 2 Snap Rings. (B9).
(6) Remove the Feed Roller (526).

(6)

(5)

(7) Remove the Roller Gear (529).
(8) Remove 2 P6L5 Bushings (527, 528).

(8)
(7)
White
Black

43
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

2.2.18. Toner Sensor (513), Laser Unit [LSU] (512), SNS3 PC Board (1009)
(1) Remove the Transmit Guide Assembly
(Refer to 2.2.4.).
(2) Remove 2 Screws (19).
(3) Remove Ground Wire (542).
(4) Remove the CCD Shield Plate (533).

(2)

(4)

(3)

(5) Remove 1 Screw (19).
(6) Disconnect Connector CN84 on the SNS3 PC
Board (1009).
(7) Remove the Toner Sensor Spring Plate (506)
Assembly.

(5)
(7)

(6)

Note:
When reinstalling, make sure that the Toner
Sensor Spring Plate is inserted into the 2 notches
in the main frame as shown in the illustration.
DX-600

(8) Remove the Toner Sensor (513).
(9) Disconnect the Connector on the Toner Sensor.

DX-800

(8)
DX-600

(9)
(9)
(8)

44
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

(11)x4

(12)
(11)

(10) Disconnect 2 Connectors on the Laser Unit
(512).
(11) Remove 4 Screws (1Y).
(12) Remove the Laser Unit (512).

(10)

(13)
(14)

(13) Disconnect Connectors CN83 and CN84 on the
SNS3 PC Board (1009).
(14) Remove 1 Screw (19).
(15) Lift up the No Paper Actuator (525) and
Remove the SNS3 PC Board (1009).

(13)

(15)
(14)

45
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

2.2.19. Bias Transfer Roller (604)
(1) Remove the CCD Shield Plate
(Refer to 2.2.18.).
(2) Remove 2 Screws (19).
(3) Remove the BTR Guide (602).

(2)

(3)

Black

White

(4)

(4) Release the Latch Hook on the Transfer Guide
(601) Assembly as illustrated and remove the
Bias Transfer Roller (604).
Caution:
• Do not touch the surface of the Bias Transfer
Roller. Clean the Bias Transfer Roller only with a
dry cloth.
• When cleaning or replacing the Bias Transfer
Roller, clean both sides of the Transfer Guide with
isopropyl alcohol.

46
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

2.2.20. SNS2 PC Board (1010)
(1) Place the machine on its rear side.
(2) Remove 1 Screw (19).
(3) Remove the Plate A (507).
(3)

(2)

(4) Remove 1 Screw (19).
(5) Disconnect Connector CN82 (538) on the SNS2
PC Board (1010).
(6) Remove the SNS2 PC Board (1010).

(5)

(4)
(6)

47
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

2.2.21. Printer Grease Points
Before reassembling, apply EM-50L Grease as
described below.
(1) B83D22 Gear G (622) : Gear surface
(2) D60D20 Gear B (621) : Rib surface
(3) D55 Gear F (619) : Gear surface
(4) D55 Gear F (619) : Gear Side surface

(3)

(2)

(4)

(1)

48
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

2.3.

Screw Identification Template
Ref No.

Part No.

Figure

Remark

19

XTB3+8J

Screw

23

XYN3+F8

Screw

24

XYN4+F8

Screw

1Q

XYN3+F10

Screw

1Y

XTB3+10J

Screw

4N

XSN3+W8FC

Screw

7B

XTB26+6J

Screw

A9

DZPA000001

Screw

B1

DZPB000007

Silver Screw

B4

XTB3+8JK

Screw

B5

XSB4+10BN

Screw

B9

DZJM000171

Snap Ring

C2

DZPB000020

Screw

C8

XTW3+8SFC

Screw

49
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

3 Maintenance, Adjustments and Check Points
3.1.

Required Tools
No.
1
2
3
4
5

3.2.

Tool
Soft Cloth
Isopropyl Alcohol
Phillips Screwdriver (#2)
Stubby Phillips Screwdriver (#2)
Blade-tip Screwdriver (3/32 in)

No.
6
7
8
9
10

Tool
Tweezer
Pliers
Cotton Swab
Brush
Molykote EM-50L Grease
(Available from Dow Corning,
URL: http://www.dowcorning.com)

Periodic Check Points

50
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

3.3.

Periodic Maintenance Check List

The chart outlined below is a general guideline for maintenance. The example list is for an average usage
of 50 transmitted and received documents per day. Needless to say, the environmental conditions and
actual use will vary these factors. The chart below is for reference only.

Mechanical Parts
Printer Motor

Ref.
No.
626

Toner Cartridge
Paper Feed Roller

518

Feed Roller

526
904
Receiver Bias Transfer Roller 604
Unit
Fuser Unit

701

Fuser Roller

709

Pressure Roller

706

Roller Shaft 2

235

Feed Pinch Roller
* Shaft Hole
ADF Roller

236
331

Separation Rubber 207
Feed Roller

302

Transmitter
Eject Roller
Unit

303

Scanning Glass

308

Mirrors

Transmit Motor

334
335
336
324

"x" Stamp Head

325

Cleaning
Replacement/Adjustment
Cycle
Procedure
Cycle
Procedure
100,000 documents Refer to
Ch 2.2.12.
approx 7,500 pages
(See Note)
12 months or 10,000
Refer to 30,000 documents
Refer to
documents
Ch 2.2.11.
Ch 2.2.11.
12 months or 10,000
Refer to
Refer to
documents
Ch 2.2.17.
Ch 2.2.17.
12 months or 10,000
Refer to 30,000 documents
Refer to
documents
Ch 2.2.19.
Ch 2.2.19.
When replacing Print
Cleaning 50,000 documents
Refer to
Cartridge
chart
Ch 2.2.14.
When the Recording
Refer to (Included as part of Refer to
Paper wraps itself
Ch 2.2.15. the Fuser Unit)
Ch 2.2.15.
around the roller.
When the Recording
Refer to (Included as part of Refer to
Paper wraps itself
Ch 2.2.15. the Fuser Unit)
Ch 2.2.15.
around the roller.
30,000 documents
Refer to
Ch 2.2.3.
30,000 documents
Refer to
Ch 2.2.3.
12 months or 10,000
Refer to 30,000 documents
Refer to
documents
Ch 2.2.4.
Ch 2.2.8.
12 months or 10,000
Refer to 30,000 documents
Refer to
documents
Ch 2.2.2.
Ch 2.2.2.
12 months or 10,000
Refer to 30,000 documents
Refer to
documents
Ch 2.2.4.
Ch 2.2.9.
12 months or 10,000
Refer to 30,000 documents
Refer to
documents
Ch 2.2.4.
Ch 2.2.6.
12 months or 10,000
Refer to
documents
Ch 2.2.4.
12 months or 10,000
Refer to
documents
Ch 2.2.8.
-

-

100,000 documents

-

-

5,000 documents

Refer to
Ch 2.2.7.
Refer to
Ch 2.2.5.

Note
The number of pages is based on the ITU-T Image No. 1 Test Chart using Multi-Copy mode.
Operation environment 68°F (20°C), 50% RH, using A4 paper.

51
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

3.4.

Updating the Firmware

Unlike other machines with removable EPROM (Erasable Programmable ROM), this machine is equipped
with a F-ROM (Flash ROM) as standard. The F-ROM offers the flexibility of quick and easy firmware
updates. The firmware of the machine can be updated with the removable F-ROM Card. (Refer to Section
5.1.9)
The following is the basic procedure to update the firmware of the machine. The details are described in the
Firmware Update Tool Operating Instructions.

3.4.1.

Creating a Master Firmware Card
A.Utilizing the Firmware Update Tool
1. Install the Firmware Update Tool.
2. Install a Flash Memory Card (2 MB x 2, 4 MB or higher) into the machine.
3. Follow the instructions included in the Firmware Update Tool Operating Instructions.
B.Copy the Firmware from an Existing Machine
1. Unplug the Power Cord to turn the machine OFF.
2. Install a Flash Memory Card (2 MB x 2, 4 MB or higher) into the machine with the Panasonic
Logo facing outwards.
3. Plug in the Power Cord to turn the machine ON.
4. Perform the Service Mode 9-2 (Firmware Backup).
5. The firmware is copied into the Flash Memory Card.
6. After the backup is completed, press "STOP" to return to standby.
7. Unplug the Power Cord to turn the machine OFF.
8. Remove the Master Firmware Card that you just created from the machine.
9. Plug in the Power Cord to turn the machine ON.
10. Use this Master Firmware Card to update the firmware on other machines.

3.4.2

Updating the Firmware using the Master Firmware Card
1. Before starting, print the Fax and Function Parameter Lists.
2. Unplug the Power Cord to turn the machine OFF.
3. Install the appropriate Master Firmware Card into the machine with the Panasonic Logo
facing outwards.
4. Plug in the Power Cord to turn the machine ON.
5. Perform the Service Mode 9-1-1 (Firmware Update).
6. The firmware is copied into the machine.
7. After the update is completed, the machine reboots itself and returns to standby.
8. Perform the Service Mode 6 (Parameter Initialization).
9. Unplug the Power Cord to turn the machine OFF.
10. Remove the Master Firmware Card from the machine.
11. Plug in the Power Cord to turn the machine ON.
12. Reprogram the Fax and/or Function Parameters according to the lists printed in Step 1
above if the settings are other than factory default.

52
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

3.4.3.

Erasing the Master Firmware Card
1. Unplug the Power Cord to turn the machine OFF.
2. Install the Master Firmware Card into the machine with the Panasonic Logo facing outwards.
3. Plug in the Power Cord to turn the machine ON.
4. Perform the Service Mode 9-5 (Erace Flash Card).
5. The firmware is erased from the card and return to Service Mode default display.
6. Press "STOP" twice to return to standby.
7. Unplug the Power Cord to turn the machine OFF.
8. Remove the blank Flash Memory Card from the machine.
9. Plug in the Power Cord to turn the machine ON.

3.4.4.

Firmware Version


HOST

: DX-800 A A V1.xxxx AU

Destination Code (Fax)
AU : USA / Canada
Firmware Version (V1.xxxx)
Language Code
A : US English, C-French & Spanish
B : US English, Spanish & Portuguese
b : English, French & Spanish
g : German, French & Italian
Firmware Type
A : Standard
B : Optional
Model Number

53
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800


HOST

: DX-600 A A V1.xxxx AB

Destination Code (Fax)
AB : UK
Firmware Version (V1.xxxx)
Language Code
A : US English, C-French & Spanish
B : US English, Spanish & Portuguese
b : English, French & Spanish
g : German, French & Italian
Firmware Type
A : Standard
B : Optional
Model Number

3.4.5.

Updating the DX-800 Firmware
(2)

(1) Unplug the Power Cord.
(2) Open the Printer Cover.
(3) Remove the Memory Card Cover.

Printer Cover

Memory Card
Cover
(3)

(4) Insert the Flash Memory Card gently into the
card slot with the Panasonic logo facing to the
outside of the machine.
Caution:
Installing the Flash Memory Card in the wrong
direction may damage the connecting pins
inside the machine.

Memory Card
(4)

54
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

Control Panel Unit
(5)

(6)

(5) Open the Control Panel Unit.
(6) Activate the Read Point Sensor with your finger
and plug in the Power Cord.
(7) Wait approximately 10 seconds, release the
Read Point Sensor, close the Control Panel Unit
(ADF) and the Printer Cover.
(8) Allow the unit to complete the Firmware Update
(approx. 1-minute). When completed, the unit
will reboot and progress to the Standby Mode.
(9) Unplug the Power Cord.
(10) Remove the Flash Memory Card.
(11) Re-install the Memory Card Cover.
(12) Plug in the Power Cord.
(13) Perform Parameter Initialization.

55
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

3.5.

Glossary of Electrical Abbreviations

Signal Name
+24V
+24VD
+24VM
+3.3V
+5V
+5VP
-5V
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
A19
A20
A21
A22
ACTIVITY
AGND
Black (L)
Charge
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9

Glossary of Electrical Abbreviations
Description
+24 VDC Power Supply
+24 VDC Power Supply
+24 VDC Power Supply (Motors)
+3.3 VDC Power Supply
+5 VDC Power Supply
+5 VDC Pilot Power Supply (Sleep Mode)
-5 VDC Power Supply
Address Signal
Address Signal
Address Signal
Address Signal
Address Signal
Address Signal
Address Signal
Address Signal
Address Signal
Address Signal
Address Signal
Address Signal
Address Signal
Address Signal
Address Signal
Address Signal
Address Signal
Address Signal
Address Signal
Address Signal
Address Signal
Address Signal
LANB PCB / LANC PCB Activity Signal
Ground
AC Power Supply
Charge Current: 200 µA (AC 300 Hz Sine Wave)
& DC Charge Voltage
Data Signal
Data Signal
Data Signal
Data Signal
Data Signal
Data Signal
Data Signal
Data Signal
Data Signal
Data Signal
56

Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

Signal Name
D10
D11
D12
D13
D14
D15
DB0
DB1
DB2
DB3
DB4
DB5
DB6
DB7
Development
DOS
E
FCK1
FCK2
FG
FR
FSG
GLED
GND
HLIN1
HLIN2
ID0
ID1
ID2
L+5V
L1 (R)
L2 (T)
LDRE
LDSC1
LDSP1
LINK
MGND
MIC (-)
MIC (+)
MMnA
MMnB
MMpA
MMpB
MTnA
MTnB

Glossary of Electrical Abbreviations
Description
Data Signal
Data Signal
Data Signal
Data Signal
Data Signal
Data Signal
Data Signal
Data Signal
Data Signal
Data Signal
Data Signal
Data Signal
Data Signal
Data Signal
Development Voltage (AC 1.65 kHz Square Wave)
& DC Voltage
Output Signal
Data Read/Write Enable Signal
Shift Register Clock
Shift Register Clock
Ground
Reset Signal
Data Transfer Enable Signal
GND for LED
Ground
Line Signal for the Fax Handset
Line Signal for the Fax Handset
Flash Memory Card ID
Flash Memory Card ID
Flash Memory Card ID
Laser Circuit +5 VDC Power Supply
Line Signal
Line Signal
Timing Sensor and No Cassette Sensor LED Drive Current
No Cassette Sensor LED Drive Current
No Paper Sensor LED Drive Current
LANB PCB/ LANC PCB Link Signal
Ground
Handset Microphone
Handset Microphone
Motor Drive Signal
Motor Drive Signal
Motor Drive Signal
Motor Drive Signal
Stepping Signal
Stepping Signal

57
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

Signal Name
MTpA
MTpB
nADF1
nADF2
nBPNT
nCCHK1
nCCHK2
nCD
nCE1
nCE2
nCR1
nCRCK
nDRCK
nESEN
nFAULT
nFAULT
nHSYNC
nINIT
nLDON
nLEDON
nMB4
nMPOFF
nOE
nOP
nPCHK1
nPCHK2
nPMCK
nPMON
nPMRY
nPWSAVE
nRSEN
nSSR
nSTAMPON
nS/H
nTR0
nVIDEO
nWEH
nWEL
OS
pADF2
pBZCLK
pPNLRD
pPNLRST
pPNLSD

Glossary of Electrical Abbreviations
Description
Stepping Signal
Stepping Signal
Paper Feed Roller Solenoid Control Signal
Paper Feed Roller Solenoid Control Signal
Read Point Detection Signal
No Cassette Detection Signal
No Cassette Detection Signal (2nd Cassette)
Flash Memory Card Detection Signal
+5 VDC Power Supply
Low Enable
Charge Control DC Output
Charge Control DC Output
Development +AC Clock
Paper Exit Signal
Data Available / Error Condition
(Peripheral→Host)
Fan Ready Signal
Horizontal Synchronous Signal
Reserve Request / Initialize
(Host→Peripheral)
Laser Control
LED Enable Signal
Flash Memory Size
Energy Saver Mode Control Signal
Read Signal - Low Enable
2nd Feeder Unit Detection Signal
No Paper Sensor Detection Signal
No Paper Detection Signal (2nd Cassette)
Tetragon Motor Clock
Tetragon Motor Control Signal
Tetragon Motor Ready Signal
Energy Saver Mode Transport Signal
Timing Sensor Detection Signal
Fuser Lamp Control Signal
Stamp Control Signal
Sample Hold Signal
Transfer Control Cleaning Output
Laser Control
Write H Signal - Low Enable
Write L Signal - Low Enable
Output Signal
Feed Roller Drive Clutch Control Signal (2nd Cassette)
Buzzer Signal
Reception Signal
Panel Reset Signal
Transmission Signal

58
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

Signal Name
pCMLD
pCTON
pHKOF
pSPKOT
R/W
RCV (-)
RCV (+)
RDY / nBSY
RS
RSV
RXRX+
SNCMN
TGND
TH1
TH2
TONER
Transfer
TXTX+
5V
nWAKUP
White (N)

Glossary of Electrical Abbreviations
Description
Line Switching Relay Drive Signal
Ring Detection Signal
External Phone Off-Hook Detection Signal
Line Signal, Key Tone, Ringer
Data Read/Write Select Signal
Handset Receiver
Handset Receiver
Not Used
Register Select Signal
Not Used
Reception Data "-" Signal
Reception Data "+" Signal
+2 VDC Power Supply
Ground
Thermistor Output Signal
Thermistor Output Signal
Remaining Toner Level Signal
Transfer Current: (+3 µA) & Cleaning Voltage: (-1500 V)
Transmission Data "-" Signal
Transmission Data "+" Signal
+5 VDC Power Supply
Energy Saver Mode Enable
AC Power Supply

59
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

3.6.

SC PC Board

CN1
SC PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN1-1
+24V
LED Array

CN1-2

nLEDON

LED Array

Signal Waveform

+24V

+24 VDC Power Supply

LED Enable Signal

Approx.+13V(H)
LED On

Function

LED Off
0V(L)

CN3
SC PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN3-1
+24V
Stamp Solenoid

CN3-2

N.C.

CN3-3

nSTAMPON

Signal Waveform

+24V

Function
+24 VDC Power Supply

Not Used

Stamp Solenoid

Stamp Off
0V

+24V

Stamp Control Signal

Stamp On

CN5
SC PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN5-1
MTnB
Transmit Motor

Signal Waveform

+24V

Function
Stepping Signal

0V
CN5-2

MTpB

Transmit Motor

+24V

Stepping Signal

0V
CN5-3

MTnA

Transmit Motor

+24V

Stepping Signal

0V
CN5-4

MTpA

Transmit Motor

+24V

Stepping Signal

0V

60
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

CN6
SC PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN6-1
+24V
POWER SUPPLY
UNIT
CN103-1
CN6-2

+24V

POWER SUPPLY
UNIT
CN103-2

CN6-3

GND

POWER SUPPLY
UNIT
CN103-3

CN6-4

CN6-5

GND

GND

Signal Waveform

Function

+24V

+24 VDC Power Supply

+24V

+24 VDC Power Supply

Ground

0V

POWER SUPPLY
UNIT
CN103-4

Ground

0V

POWER SUPPLY
UNIT
CN103-5

CN6-6

+3.3V

POWER SUPPLY
UNIT
CN103-6

CN6-7

+5V

POWER SUPPLY
UNIT
CN103-7

CN6-8

-5V

POWER SUPPLY
UNIT
CN103-8

CN6-9

+5VP

POWER SUPPLY
UNIT
CN103-9

CN6-10

nMPOFF

POWER SUPPLY
UNIT
CN103-10

Ground

0V
+3.3V

+5V

nSSR

+5 VDC Power Supply

-5 VDC Power Supply

-5V

+5V

+6

(Energy Saver Mode)
CN6-11

+3.3 VDC Power Supply

POWER SUPPLY
UNIT
CN103-11

7V

+5 VDC Pilot Power Supply,
that provides power to the
active components during
the Sleep Mode.
Energy Saver Mode Control
Signal

0V
Fuser Lamp Control Signal

Fuser Lamp
ON

61
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

CN7
SC PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN7-1
FR
CCD PCB
CN30-1

Signal Waveform

Function

+5V(H)

Reset Signal

0V(L)
1 s
CN7-2

FCK1

CCD PCB
CN30-2

Shift Register Clock

1 s1 s

+5V(H)
0V(H)

CN7-3

FCK2

CCD PCB
CN30-3

Shift Register Clock

1 s1 s
+5V(H)
0V(H)

CN7-4

FSG

CCD PCB
CN30-4

+5V(H)

Data Transfer Enable Signal

0V(L)
1 s
CN7-5

AGND

2.4ms

CCD PCB
CN30-5

Ground

0V
CN7-6

+5V

CCD PCB
CN30-6

CN7-7

DOS

CCD PCB
CN30-7

CN7-8

OS

CCD PCB
CN30-8

+5V

+5 VDC Power Supply

Output Signal

+3.0V

4.5V

Output Signal

2.4ms

3.5V
4.5V

Max.1.0V

CN9
SC PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN9-1
pSPKOT
SPEAKER

CN9-2

GND

Signal Waveform

Function

+2V
(Max)
-2V
(Min)

SPEAKER

Line Signal, Key Tone,
Ringer

Ground

0V

62
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

CN12
SC PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN12-1
GND
Flash Memory
Card

Signal Waveform

Function
Ground

0V
CN12-2

D3

Flash Memory
Card

Data Signal

+5V(H)
0V(L)

CN12-3

D4

Flash Memory
Card

Data Signal

+5V(H)
0V(L)

CN12-4

D5

Flash Memory
Card

Data Signal

+5V(H)
0V(L)

CN12-5

D6

Flash Memory
Card

Data Signal

+5V(H)
0V(L)

CN12-6

D7

Flash Memory
Card

Data Signal

+5V(H)
0V(L)

CN12-7

nCE1

Flash Memory
Card

CN12-8

A11

Flash Memory
Card

+5V

+5 VDC Power Supply

Address Signal

+5V(H)
0V(L)

CN12-9

nOE

Flash Memory
Card

Read Signal - Low Enable

+5V(H)
0V(L)

CN12-10

A12

Flash Memory
Card

+5V(H)

Address Signal

0V(L)
CN12-11

A10

Flash Memory
Card

+5V(H)

Address Signal

0V(L)

63
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

SC PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN12-12 A9
Flash Memory
Card

Signal Waveform

Function
Address Signal

+5V(H)
0V(L)

CN12-13

A14

Flash Memory
Card

Address Signal

+5V(H)
0V(L)

CN12-14

A15

Flash Memory
Card

Address Signal

+5V(H)
0V(L)

CN12-15

nWEL

Flash Memory
Card

Write L Signal - Low Enable

+5V(H)
0V(L)

CN12-16

RDY / nBSY Flash Memory
Card

CN12-17

+5V

Flash Memory
Card

CN12-18

N.C.

Flash Memory
Card

CN12-19

A17

Flash Memory
Card

Not Used

+5V

+5 VDC Power Supply

Not Used

+5V(H)

Address Signal

0V(L)
CN12-20

A16

Flash Memory
Card

+5V(H)

Address Signal

0V(L)
CN12-21

A13

Flash Memory
Card

+5V(H)

Address Signal

0V(L)
CN12-22

A8

Flash Memory
Card

+5V(H)

Address Signal

0V(L)

64
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

SC PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN12-23 A7
Flash Memory
Card

Signal Waveform

Function
Address Signal

+5V(H)
0V(L)

CN12-24

A6

Flash Memory
Card

Address Signal

+5V(H)
0V(L)

CN12-25

A5

Flash Memory
Card

Address Signal

+5V(H)
0V(L)

CN12-26

A4

Flash Memory
Card

Address Signal

+5V(H)
0V(L)

CN12-27

A3

Flash Memory
Card

Address Signal

+5V(H)
0V(L)

CN12-28

A2

Flash Memory
Card

Address Signal

+5V(H)
0V(L)

CN12-29

A1

Flash Memory
Card

Address Signal

+5V(H)
0V(L)

CN12-30

D0

Flash Memory
Card

Data Signal

+5V(H)
0V(L)

CN12-31

D1

Flash Memory
Card

Data Signal

+5V(H)
0V(L)

CN12-32

D2

Flash Memory
Card

Data Signal

+5V(H)
0V(L)

CN12-33

nWEH

Flash Memory
Card

Write H Signal - Low Enable

+5V(H)
0V(L)

65
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

SC PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN12-34 GND
Flash Memory
Card

Signal Waveform

Function
Ground

0V
CN12-35

GND

Flash Memory
Card

Ground

0V
CN12-36

nCD

Flash Memory
Card

CN12-37

D11

Flash Memory
Card

5V(H) Flash Memory Card
Detection Signal
H: Card Not Installed
0V(L) L: Card Installed
Data Signal

+5V(H)
0V(L)

CN12-38

D12

Flash Memory
Card

Data Signal

+5V(H)
0V(L)

CN12-39

D13

Flash Memory
Card

Data Signal

+5V(H)
0V(L)

CN12-40

D14

Flash Memory
Card

Data Signal

+5V(H)
0V(L)

CN12-41

D15

Flash Memory
Card

Data Signal

+5V(H)
0V(L)

CN12-42

nCE2

Flash Memory
Card

Low Enable

+5V(H)
0V(L)

CN12-43

N.C.

CN12-44

RSV

Not Used

Flash Memory
Card

Not Used

66
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

SC PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN12-45 RSV
Flash Memory
Card

CN12-46

A18

Flash Memory
Card

Signal Waveform

Function
Not Used

Address Signal

+5V(H)
0V(L)

CN12-47

A19

Flash Memory
Card

Address Signal

+5V(H)
0V(L)

CN12-48

A20

Flash Memory
Card

Address Signal

+5V(H)
0V(L)

CN12-49

A21

Flash Memory
Card

Address Signal

+5V(H)
0V(L)

CN12-50

A22

Flash Memory
Card

Address Signal

+5V(H)
0V(L)

CN12-51

+5V

Flash Memory
Card

CN12-52

N.C.

Flash Memory
Card

Not Used

CN12-53

GND

Flash Memory
Card

Ground

+5V

+5 VDC Power Supply

0V
CN12-5456

N.C.

Flash Memory
Card

Not Used

CN12-57

RSV

Flash Memory
Card

Not Used

CN12-58

N.C.

Flash Memory
Card

Not Used

67
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

SC PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN12-59 nMB4
Flash Memory
Card

Signal Waveform

or

Function

Flash Memory Size
+5V(H) H: 8MB
L: Others
0V(L)

CN12-60

RSV

Flash Memory
Card

Not Used

CN12-61

N.C.

Flash Memory
Card

Not Used

CN12-62

ID2

Flash Memory
Card

+5V(H)

Flash Memory Card ID

or
0V(L)

CN12-63

ID1

Flash Memory
Card

+5V(H)

Flash Memory Card ID

or
0V(L)

CN12-64

D8

Flash Memory
Card

Data Signal

+5V(H)
0V(L)

CN12-65

D9

Flash Memory
Card

Data Signal

+5V(H)
0V(L)

CN12-66

D10

Flash Memory
Card

Data Signal

+5V(H)
0V(L)

CN12-67

ID0

Flash Memory
Card

+5V(H)

Flash Memory Card ID

or
0V(L)

CN12-68

GND

Flash Memory
Card

Ground

0V

68
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

CN14
SC PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN14-1
GND
PNL PCB
CN50-1

Signal Waveform

Function
Ground

0V
CN14-2

+5V

PNL PCB
CN50-2

+5V

+5 VDC Power Supply

CN14-3

+5VP

PNL PCB
CN50-3

+5V

+5 VDC Pilot Power Supply,
that provides power to the
active components during
the Sleep Mode.

CN14-4

GND

PNL PCB
CN50-4

Ground

0V
CN14-5

pPNLSD

PNL PCB
CN50-5

+5V

Transmission Signal

0V
CN14-6

pPNLRD

PNL PCB
CN50-6

+5V

Reception Signal

0V
CN14-7

nPWSAVE

PNL PCB
CN50-7

Energy Saver Mode +5V
Standby

CN14-8

nWAKUP

0V

PNL PCB
CN50-8

+5V
0V

CN14-9

pPNLRST

PNL PCB
CN50-9

+5V
0V

CN4-10

pBZCLK

Energy Saver Mode
Transport Signal

PNL PCB
CN50-10

+5V

Energy Saver Mode Enable
H: Enable
L: Disable
Panel Reset Signal
H: Reset
L: Not Reset
Buzzer Signal

0V
CN4-11

nBPNT

PNL PCB
CN50-11

+3.3V

Read Point Detection Signal
L: Detect

ON

69
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

CN18
SC PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN18-1
L2 (T)
MJR PCB
CN28-1

CN18-3

L1 (R)

Signal Waveform

Function
Line Transformer Input
Signal

MJR PCB
CN28-3

Ground

0V
CN18-6

+24V

MJR PCB
CN29-1

+24V

+24 VDC Power Supply

CN18-7

+5VP

MJR PCB
CN29-2

+5V

+5 VDC Power Supply

CN18-8

GND

MJR PCB
CN29-3

Ground

0V
CN18-9

pCMLD

MJR PCB
CN29-4

Line Switching Relay Drive
Signal
H : CML On
L : CML Off

+5V(H)
0V(L)

CN18-10

pCTON

MJR PCB
CN29-5

CN18-11

pHKOF

MJR PCB
CN29-6

Ring Detection Signal
above +3V(H) Ring Detected H : Ring Detected
L : Ring Not Detected
0V
External Phone Off-Hook
Detection Signal
(Phone Line must be
connected)
H : Off Hook
L : On Hook

+5V(H)
0V(L)

CN52
SC PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN52-1
TH1
Thermistor
Assembly

Signal Waveform

Function

5V

Thermistor Output Signal

0V
CN52-2

TH2

Thermistor
Assembly

5V

Thermistor Output Signal

0V

70
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

CN53
SC PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN53-1
+24VM
POWER SUPPLY
UNIT
CN103-12
CN53-2

nDRCK

POWER SUPPLY
UNIT
CN103-13

Signal Waveform

Function

+24V

+24 VDC Power Supply

Development +AC Clock

+24V
0V

CN53-3

nCRCK

POWER SUPPLY
UNIT
CN103-14

+24V

Charge Control DC Output

0V
CN53-4

nCR1

POWER SUPPLY
UNIT
CN103-15

+24V

Charge Control DC Output

0V
CN53-5

nTR0

POWER SUPPLY
UNIT
CN103-16

+24V

Transfer Control Cleaning
Output

0V
CN54
SC PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN54-1
MMpA
Main Motor
CN118-1

Signal Waveform

Function

+24V

Motor Drive Signal

0V
CN54-2

+24VM

Main Motor
CN118-2

+24V

CN54-3

MMnA

Main Motor
CN118-3

+24V

+24 VDC Power Supply

Motor Drive Signal

0V
CN54-4

MMpB

Main Motor
CN118-4

+24V

Motor Drive Signal

0V
CN54-5

+24VM

Main Motor
CN118-5

+24V

+24 VDC Power Supply

71
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

SC PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN54-6
MMnB
Main Motor
CN118-6

Signal Waveform

Function

+24V

Motor Drive Signal

0V
CN56
SC PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN56-1
+24VM
Paper Feed
Solenoid

CN56-2

nADF1

Signal Waveform

Function

+24V

Paper Feed
Solenoid

ON

+24V (H)

+24 VDC Power Supply

Paper Feed Roller Solenoid
Control Signal

0V (L)
CN57
SC PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN57-1
+24V
ILS PCB
CN73-1

CN57-2

N.C.

CN57-3

+24VD

Signal Waveform

Function

+24V

+24 VDC Power Supply

Not Used

ILS PCB
CN73-3

Cover Open
0V (L)

Printer Cover Detection
+24V (H) Signal
Cover Closed

CN58
SC PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN58-1
nCCHK1
SNS4 PCB
CN87-1

Signal Waveform

Function
No Cassette Detection
Signal
L: No Cassette

+5V(H)
0V(L)

CN58-2

GND

SNS4 PCB
CN87-2

Ground

0V
CN58-3

nRSEN

SNS4 PCB
CN87-3

+5V(H)

Timing Sensor Detection
Signal
L: Detect

0V(L)

72
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

SC PCB
Signal Name
Pin No.
CN58-4
N.C.

Destination

Signal Waveform

Function
Not Used

CN58-5

+5V

SNS4 PCB
CN87-5

CN58-6

nESEN

SNS4 PCB
CN87-6

+5V

+5 VDC Power Supply

Paper Exit Sensor Detection
Signal
L: Detect

+5V(H)
0V(L)

CN59
SC PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN59-1
nPCHK1
SNS3 PCB
CN83-1

Signal Waveform

Function
No Paper Sensor Detection
Signal
H: No Paper

+5V(H)
0V(L)

CN59-2

CN59-3

LDSP1

GND

SNS3 PCB
CN83-2

No Paper Sensor LED Drive
Current

Approx. +1 VDC

SNS3 PCB
CN83-3

Ground

0V
CN59-4

CN59-5

TONER

+5V

SNS3 PCB
CN83-4

Remaining Toner Level
Signal

Approx. +2 VDC

SNS3 PCB
CN83-5

+5V

+5 VDC Power Supply

CN66
SC PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN66-1
+24VM
CST2 PCB
CN70-1

CN66-2

GND

Signal Waveform

Function

+24V

CST2 PCB
CN70-2

+24 VDC Power Supply

Ground

0V

73
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

SC PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN66-3
+5V
CST2 PCB
CN70-3

CN66-4

nPCHK2

CST2 PCB
CN70-4

Signal Waveform

Function

+5V

No Paper Detection Signal
(2nd Cassette)
H: No Paper
L: Paper

+5V(H)
0V(L)

CN66-5

CN66-6

pADF2

nCCHK2

CST2 PCB
CN70-5

CST2 PCB
CN70-6

+5V (H)
ON

+5 VDC Power Supply

0V (L)

Feed Roller Drive Clutch
Control Signal
(2nd Cassette)
No Cassette Detection
Signal (2nd Cassette)
L: No Cassette

+5V(H)
0V(L)

CN66-7

nOP

CST2 PCB
CN70-7

2nd Feeder Unit Detection
Signal
H: No Feeder Unit

+5V(H)
0V(L)

CN68
SC PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
LSU
CN68-1
nS/H
CN1-1

Signal Waveform

Function
Laser Power Sample/Hold
Timing Signal
L : Sampling
H : Holding

+5V(H)
0V(L)

CN68-2

nHSYNC

LSU
CN1-2

Horizontal Synchronous
Signal
2.136 ms (400 dpi)
1.393 ms (600 dpi)

+5V(H)
0V(L)

CN68-3

L+5V

LSU
CN1-3

CN68-4

GND

LSU
CN1-4

+5V

Laser Circuit +5 VDC Power
Supply
(Supplied only while the LP
is operating)
Ground

0V
CN68-5

nLDON

LSU
CN1-5

+5V(H)

Laser Control

0V(L)
CN68-6

nVIDEO

LSU
CN1-6

+5V(H)

Video Data
L: Black
H: White

0V(L)
74
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

SC PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
LSU
CN68-7
GND
CN1-7

Signal Waveform

Function
Ground

0V
CN69
SC PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN69-1
nPMCK
LSU
CN15-1

CN69-2

nPMRY

LSU
CN15-2

Signal Waveform

Function

Tetragon Motor Clock
+5V(H) 0.702 kHz (400 dpi)
1.076 kHz (600 dpi)
0V(H)
Tetragon Motor Ready
Signal
H: Not Ready
L: Ready

+5V(H)
0V(L)

CN69-3

nPMON

LSU
CN15-3

Tetragon Motor Control
Signal
H: OFF
L: ON

+5V(H)
0V(L)

CN69-4

MGND

LSU
CN15-4

Ground

0V
CN69-5

+24VM

LSU
CN15-5

+24V

+24 VDC Power Supply

75
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

CN93

SC PCB
Pin No.
CN93-1

LEDV

LANB PCB CN95-1

+5V

+5V Power Supply for LED

CN93-2

LEDV

LANB PCB CN95-2

+5V

+5V Power Supply for LED

CN93-3

GND

LANB PCB CN95-3

Signal Name

Destination

Signal Waveform

Function

Ground
0V

CN93-4

A16

LANB PCB CN95-4

Not Used

CN93-5

A15

LANB PCB CN95-5

Not Used

CN93-6

A14

LANB PCB CN95-6

Not Used

CN93-7

A13

LANB PCB CN95-7

Not Used

CN93-8

A12

LANB PCB CN95-8

Not Used

CN93-9

A11

LANB PCB CN95-9

Not Used

CN93-10

A10

LANB PCB CN95-10

Not Used

CN93-11

A9

LANB PCB CN95-11

Not Used

CN93-12

A21

LANB PCB CN95-12

Not Used

CN93-13

*WE

LANB PCB CN95-13

Not Used

CN93-14

*RESET

LANB PCB CN95-14

Not Used

CN93-15

A20

LANB PCB CN95-15

Not Used

CN93-16

A19

LANB PCB CN95-16

Not Used

76
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

SC PCB
Pin No.

Signal Name

Destination

Signal Waveform

Function

1CN93-17

A18

LANB PCB CN95-17

Not Used

CN93-18

A17

LANB PCB CN95-18

Not Used

CN93-19

A8

LANB PCB CN95-19

Not Used

CN93-20

A7

LANB PCB CN95-20

Not Used

CN93-21

A6

LANB PCB CN95-21

Not Used

CN93-22

A5

LANB PCB CN95-22

Not Used

CN93-23

A4

LANB PCB CN95-23

Not Used

CN93-24

A3

LANB PCB CN95-24

Not Used

CN93-25

A2

LANB PCB CN95-25

Not Used

CN93-26

A1

LANB PCB CN95-26

Not Used

CN93-27

Vdd

LANB PCB CN95-27

+3.3V

+3.3VDC Power Supply

CN93-28

Vdd

LANB PCB CN95-28

+3.3V

+3.3VDC Power Supply

CN93-29

*CE

LANB PCB CN95-29

CN93-30

DD0

LANB PCB CN95-30

+3.3V(H)

LANB PCB CN95-31

+3.3V(H)

LANB PCB CN95-32

+3.3V(H)

Not Used

Data Signal

0V(L)

CN93-31

DD1

Data Signal

0V(L)

CN93-32

DD2

Data Signal

0V(L)

77
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

SC PCB
Pin No.
CN93-33

CN93-34

CN93-35

CN93-36

CN93-37

CN93-38

CN93-39

CN93-40

CN93-41

CN93-42

CN93-43

CN93-44

CN93-45

CN93-46

CN93-47

CN93-48

Signal Name
DD3

DD4

DD5

DD6

DD7

DD8

DD9

DD10

DD11

DD12

DD13

DD14

DD15

*WR

*RD

RESET

Destination

Signal Waveform

LANB PCB CN95-33

LANB PCB CN95-34

LANB PCB CN95-35

LANB PCB CN95-36

LANB PCB CN95-37

LANB PCB CN95-38

LANB PCB CN95-39

LANB PCB CN95-40

LANB PCB CN95-41

LANB PCB CN95-42

LANB PCB CN95-43

LANB PCB CN95-44

LANB PCB CN95-45

LANB PCB CN95-46

LANB PCB CN95-47

LANB PCB CN95-48

+3.3V(H)

0V(L)
+3.3V(H)

0V(L)
+3.3V(H)

0V(L)
+3.3V(H)

0V(L)
+3.3V(H)

0V(L)
+3.3V(H)

0V(L)
+3.3V(H)

0V(L)
+3.3V(H)

0V(L)
+3.3V(H)

0V(L)
+3.3V(H)

0V(L)
+3.3V(H)

0V(L)
+3.3V(H)

0V(L)
+3.3V(H)

0V(L)
+3.3V(H)

0V(L)
+3.3V(H)

0V(L)
+3.3V(H)

0V(L)

Function
Data Signal

Data Signal

Data Signal

Data Signal

Data Signal

Data Signal

Data Signal

Data Signal

Data Signal

Data Signal

Data Signal

Data Signal

Data Signal

Write Signal - Low Enable

Read Signal - Low Enable

LAN Reset Signal
H: Reset
L: Not Reset

78
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

SC PCB
Pin No.
CN93-49

Signal Name
INTR0

Destination

Signal Waveform

LANB PCB CN95-49

+3.3V(H)

Function
High Enable

0V(L)

CN93-50

GND

LANB PCB CN95-50

Ground
0V

CN93-51

*LAN

LANB PCB CN95-51

+3.3V(H)
0V (L)

CN93-52

GND

LANB PCB CN95-52

LANB PCB Connected
Detection Signal
H: LANB PCB not connect
Ground

0V

CN93-53

GND

LANB PCB CN95-53

Ground
0V

CN93-54

GND

LANB PCB CN95-54

Ground
0V

CN93-55

D11

LANB PCB CN95-55

Not Used

CN93-56

D7

LANB PCB CN95-56

Not Used

CN93-57

D14

LANB PCB CN95-57

Not Used

CN93-58

D6

LANB PCB CN95-58

Not Used

CN93-59

D13

LANB PCB CN95-59

Not Used

CN93-60

D5

LANB PCB CN95-60

Not Used

CN93-61

D12

LANB PCB CN95-61

Not Used

CN93-62

D4

LANB PCB CN95-62

Not Used

CN93-63

Vcc

LANB PCB CN95-63

+3.3V

+3.3VDC Power Supply

CN93-64

Vcc

LANB PCB CN95-64

+3.3V

+3.3VDC Power Supply

79
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

SC PCB
Pin No.

Signal Name

Destination

Signal Waveform

Function

CN93-65

D11

LANB PCB CN95-65

Not Used

CN93-66

D3

LANB PCB CN95-66

Not Used

CN93-67

D10

LANB PCB CN95-67

Not Used

CN93-68

D2

LANB PCB CN95-68

Not Used

CN93-69

D9

LANB PCB CN95-69

Not Used

CN93-70

D1

LANB PCB CN95-70

Not Used

CN93-71

D8

LANB PCB CN95-71

Not Used

CN93-72

D0

LANB PCB CN95-72

Not Used

CN93-73

*OE

LANB PCB CN95-73

Not Used

CN93-74

GND

LANB PCB CN95-74

Ground
0V

CN93-75

GND

LANB PCB CN95-75

Ground
0V

CN93-76

Vdd

LANB PCB CN95-76

+3.3V

+3.3VDC Power Supply

CN93-77

Vdd

LANB PCB CN95-77

+3.3V

+3.3VDC Power Supply

CN93-78

AD15

LANB PCB CN95-78

+3.3V(H)

Address Signal

0V(L)

CN93-79

AD14

LANB PCB CN95-79

+3.3V(H)

Address Signal

0V(L)

CN93-80

AD13

LANB PCB CN95-80

+3.3V(H)

Address Signal

0V(L)

80
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

SC PCB
Pin No.
CN93-81

Signal Name
AD12

Destination

Signal Waveform

LANB PCB CN95-81

Function
Address Signal

+3.3V(H)
0V(L)

CN93-82

AD11

LANB PCB CN95-82

Address Signal

+3.3V(H)
0V(L)

CN93-83

AD10

LANB PCB CN95-83

Address Signal

+3.3V(H)
0V(L)

CN93-84

AD9

LANB PCB CN95-84

Address Signal

+3.3V(H)
0V(L)

CN93-85

AD8

LANB PCB CN95-85

Address Signal

+3.3V(H)
0V(L)

CN93-86

AD7

LANB PCB CN95-86

Address Signal

+3.3V(H)
0V(L)

CN93-87

AD6

LANB PCB CN95-87

Address Signal

+3.3V(H)
0V(L)

CN93-88

AD5

LANB PCB CN95-88

Address Signal

+3.3V(H)
0V(L)

CN93-89

AD4

LANB PCB CN95-89

Address Signal

+3.3V(H)
0V(L)

CN93-90

AD3

LANB PCB CN95-90

Address Signal

+3.3V(H)
0V(L)

CN93-91

AD2

LANB PCB CN95-91

Address Signal

+3.3V(H)
0V(L)

CN93-92

AD1

LANB PCB CN95-92

Address Signal

+3.3V(H)
0V(L)

CN93-93

Vdd

LANB PCB CN95-93

+3.3V

+3.3VDC Power Supply

CN93-94

Vdd

LANB PCB CN95-94

+3.3V

+3.3VDC Power Supply

CN93-95

AEN

LANB PCB CN95-95

+3.3V(H)

Low Enable

0V(L)

CN93-96

ARDY

LANB PCB CN95-96

+3.3V(H)

Low Enable

0V(L)

81
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

SC PCB
Pin No.
CN93-97

Signal Name
GND

Destination

Signal Waveform

LANB PCB CN95-97

Function
Ground

0V

CN93-98

GND

LANB PCB CN95-98

Ground
0V

CN93-99

GND

LANB PCB CN95-99

Ground
0V

CN93-100

GND

LANB PCB
CN95-100

Ground
0V

82
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

3.7.

MJR PC Board

CN20
MJR PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN20-3
LT2(T)
Telephone Line

CN20-4

LT1(R)

Signal Waveform

Function
Line Signal

Telephone Line

Line Signal

CN23
MJR PCB
Signal Name
Pin No.
CN23-1
N.C.

Destination

Signal Waveform

Function
Not Used

CN23-2

N.C.

Not Used

CN23-3

HLIN1

SRU PCB
CN90-1

Line Signal for the Fax
Handset

CN23-4

HLIN2

SRU PCB
CN90-2

Line Signal for the Fax
Handset

CN23-5

N.C.

Not Used

CN28 and CN29
Refer to SC PC Board CN18.

83
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

3.8.

Power Supply Unit

CN101
PS Unit
Pin No.
CN101-1

Signal Name
Black (L)

Destination

Signal Waveform

ACI PC Board

Function
AC Power Supply

AC100V
CN101-2

N.C.

CN101-3

White (N)

Not Used

ACI PC Board

AC Power Supply

AC100V
CN102
PS Unit
Pin No.
CN102-1

Signal Name
Black (L)

Destination

Signal Waveform

Fuser Lamp

Function
AC Power Supply

AC100V
CN102-2

N.C.

CN102-3

White (N)

Not Used

Thermostat
Thermal Fuse

AC Power Supply

AC100V
CN103
Refer to SC PC Board CN6 and CN53.

84
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

CN201
PS Unit
Pin No.
CN201-1

Signal Name

Destination

Development Development
Roller

Signal Waveform

Development Voltage
(AC 1.65 kHz Square Wave)
& DC Voltage

0V
-300V

Function

1650Vp-p

CN201-2

N.C.

Not Used

CN201-3

N.C.

Not Used

CN201-4

N.C.

Not Used

CN201-5

Charge

Bias Charge
Roller

Charge Current: 200 µA
(AC 300 Hz Sine Wave)
& DC Charge Voltage

0V
-650V
200 A

CN202
PS Unit
Pin No.
CN202

Signal Name
Transfer

Destination

Signal Waveform

Bias Transfer
Roller

+3 A
0V

Function
(1)Transfer Current: (+3 µA)
(2)Cleaning Voltage: (-1500
V)

-1500V

85
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

3.9.

PNL PC Board

CN50
Refer to SC PC Board CN14.
LCD
PNL PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
LCD-1
RS
LCD Module-1

Signal Waveform

Function
Register Select Signal
H: Data Register
L: Instruction Register

+5V
0V
LCD-2

R/W

LCD Module-2

Data Read/Write Select
Signal
H: Read
0V L: Write

+5V

LCD-3

E

LCD Module-3

Data Read/Write Enable
Signal
H: Enable
0V L: Disable

+5V

LCD-4

DB0

LCD Module-4

Data Signal

+5V
0V
LCD-5

DB1

LCD Module-5

Data Signal

+5V
0V
LCD-6

DB2

LCD Module-6

Data Signal

+5V
0V
LCD-7

DB3

LCD Module-7

Data Signal

+5V
0V
LCD-8

DB4

LCD Module-8

Data Signal

+5V
0V
LCD-9

DB5

LCD Module-9

Data Signal

+5V
0V
LCD-10

DB6

LCD Module-10

Data Signal

+5V
0V

86
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

PNL PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
LCD-11
DB7
LCD Module-11

Signal Waveform

Function
Data Signal

+5V
0V
LCD-12

GND

LCD Module-12

Ground

0V
LCD-13

+5V

LCD Module-13

+5V

+5 VDC Power Supply

LCD-14

+5V

LCD Module-14

+5V

+5 VDC Power Supply

LCD-15

V5

LCD Module-15

LCD-16

GND

LCD Module-16

+4.8V(Max)

Power Supply for LCD

Ground

0V

87
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

3.10. SNS3 PC Board
CN83
Refer to SC PC Board CN59.
CN84
SNS3 PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN84-1
GND
Toner Sensor

Signal Waveform

Function
Ground

0V
CN84-2

TONER

Toner Sensor

Remaining Toner Level
Signal

Approx. +2 VDC

CN84-3

+5V

Toner Sensor

+5V

+5 VDC Power Supply

88
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

3.11. SNS4 PC Board
CN85
SNS3 PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
SNS1 PCB
CN85-1
nCCHK1
CN81-1

Signal Waveform

Function
No Cassette Detection
Signal
L: No Cassette

+5V(H)
0V(L)

CN85-2

GND

SNS1 PCB
CN81-2

Ground

0V
CN85-3

nRSEN

SNS1 PCB
CN81-3

+5V(H)

Timing Sensor Detection
Signal
L: Detect

0V(L)
CN85-4

LDRE

SNS1 PCB
CN81-4

Approx. +2 VDC

Timing Sensor and No
Cassette Sensor LED Drive
Current

CN87
Refer to SC PC Board CN58.

89
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

3.12. SNS1 PC Board
CN80
SNS1 PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
SNS2 PCB
CN80-1
nCCHK1
CN82-1

Signal Waveform

Function
No Cassette Detection
Signal
L: No Cassette

+5V(H)
0V(L)

CN80-2

GND

SNS2 PCB
CN82-2

Ground

0V
CN80-3

LDSC1

SNS2 PCB
CN82-3

Approx. +1 VDC

No Cassette Sensor LED
Drive Current

CN81
Refer to SNS4 PC Board CN85.

3.13. SNS2 PC Board
CN82
Refer to SNS1 PC Board CN80.

3.14. CCD PC Board
CN30
Refer to SC PC Board CN7.

3.15. ILS PC Board
CN73
Refer to SC PC Board CN57.

3.16. ACI PC Board
Refer to Power Supply Unit CN101.

90
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

3.17. LANB PC Board
CN96
Refer to SC PC Board CN93.
CN97
LANB PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN97-1
ACTIVITY
LANC PCB
CN202-1

Signal Waveform

Function
LANB PCB / LANC PCB
Activity Signal

+5V
0V

CN97-2

+5V

LANC PCB
CN202-2

CN97-3

LINK

LANC PCB
CN202-3

+5V

+5V

+5 VDC Power Supply

LANB PCB/ LANC PCB Link
Signal

0V
CN97-4

N.C.

Not Used

CN97-5

RX-

LANC PCB
CN200-1

Reception Data "-" Signal

CN97-6

RX+

LANC PCB
CN200-2

Reception Data "+" Signal

CN97-7

TX-

LANC PCB
CN200-3

Transmission Data "-" Signal

CN97-8

TX+

LANC PCB
CN200-4

Transmission Data "+"
Signal

3.18. LANC PC Board
CN200
Refer to LANB PC Board CN97.
CN202
Refer to LANB PC Board CN97.

91
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

3.19. CST2 PC Board (Optional)
CN70
Refer to SC PC Board CN66.
CN71
CST2 PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN71-1
+24VM
Paper Feed
Solenoid

CN70-2

nADF2

Signal Waveform

Function

+24V

Paper Feed
Solenoid

ON

+24V (H)

+24 VDC Power Supply

Paper Feed Roller Solenoid
Control Signal

0V (L)
CN74
CST2 PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN74-1
SNS2 PCB
nCCHK2
(Optional)
CN82-1

Signal Waveform

Function
No Cassette Detection
Signal (2nd Cassette)
L: No Cassette

+5V(H)
0V(L)

CN74-2

CN74-3

GND

SNCMN

SNS2 PCB
(Optional)
CN82-2

Ground

0V

SNS2 PCB
(Optional)
CN82-3

+2V

+2 VDC Power Supply

3.20. SNS2 PC Board (Optional)
CN82
Refer to CST2 PC Board CN74.

92
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

3.21. SRU PC Board (Optional)
CN90
Refer to MJR PC Board CN23.
CN91
SRU PCB
Signal Name
Pin No.
CN91-1
N.C.

Destination

Signal Waveform

Function
Not Used

CN91-2

MIC (+)

Telephone
Handset CN

Handset Microphone

CN91-3

RCV (+)

Telephone
Handset CN

Handset Receiver

CN91-4

RCV (-)

Telephone
Handset CN

Handset Receiver

CN91-5

MIC (-)

Telephone
Handset CN

Handset Microphone

CN91-6

TGND

Ground

0V

93
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

4 Troubleshooting
4.1.

Initial Troubleshooting Flowchart
START

Plug-in the Power Cord to turn
the machine ON.

Does the unit power up
normally?

No
Does the LCD display
and function correctly?

Yes

No

Yes

Troubleshoot Improper
LCD Display (Sect. 4.2).

Troubleshoot any 3-digit
INFO. CODE displayed
(Sect. 4.3).

Does the unit produce
normal copies?

No

Yes

Does the original document No
feed through correctly?
Troubleshoot the
Yes
Document Feeder
(Sect. 4.5)
Does the recording paper No
exit the unit?
Yes

Troubleshoot communication
problems (transmission,
reception, dialing, polling,
information codes, or
diagnostic codes.)
(Sect. 4.6)

Check for recording
paper path problems.

Troubleshoot printed
copy quality problems
(Sect. 4.4).

94
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

4.2.

Improper LCD Display
START

Check connectors: CN14
(SC PCB) and CN50
(PNL1 PCB).

When pressing any key,
do you hear the 'Pi-' sound from
the Speaker?
Yes

No
Does CN14, pin 2 and pin 3
on the SC PCB
measure +5VDC?

No

Yes
Replace the PNL1 PCB.

Replace the SC PCB.
Reinstall the firmware.

END

95
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

4.3.

Information Codes (INFO. CODES)

The 3-digit information codes display to show the unit’s status. These codes also print on the journal.
The following table indicates appropriate sections for troubleshooting.
Code
001, 002, 007
010
030
031
400
401, 402
403
404, 405, 407
408, 409
411, 414
415
416
417, 418
420
422
434
459, 494, 495
490
630
634
711 - 731
800 - 870

Explanation
Recording paper jam
No recording paper
Document misfeeding
Document too long
Transmission error
Transmission error
Polling reception error
Transmission error
Transmission error
Polling reception error
Remote side mis-operation
Reception error
Reception error
Reception error
Transmission error
Signal noise level too high
Reception error
Reception error
Remote unit Busy
No busy tone detected
LAN communication error
Advanced Communication error

Phase
C, D
B, C
B
C
B
B
B
B
D
B
B
D
C
B
B
B
C
C
B
B
LAN
--

Section
4.3.8.
4.3.9.
4.3.10.
4.3.10.
4.3.1.
4.3.2.
4.3.12.
4.3.3.
4.3.5.
4.3.12.
4.3.12.
4.3.4.
4.3.5.
4.3.1.
4.3.2.
4.3.6.
4.3.7.
4.3.5.
4.3.11.
----

Phase
Phase A

Phase B

Phase C

Phase D

Phase E

Message
Transmission
Facsimile Communication Procedure
Facsimile Call

Phase A
Phase B
Phase C
Phase D
Phase E

:
:
:
:
:

Call establishment
Pre-message procedure
Message transmission
Post-message procedure
Call release

96
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

4.3.1.

Information Codes: 400, 420
400
START

420
START

Enable the monitor
speaker. (Refer to Sect.
5.1 Parameter No. 008)

Perform a transmission
test to the remote unit in
question.

Does the remote unit
send the CED and 300
bps Fax signal ?

No

Is reception from a
reference unit
successful?
Yes

No

Check the line
connection from the wall
jack to the "Line" on the
MJR PCB.

1. Misdialed call.
2. Check the remote unit.
(Remote unit is defective)
3. Refer to Sect. 4.6.

Replace the SC PCB.

END

Yes
Does the remote unit
repeat the 300 bps
signal every 3 sec.?
Yes

No

No
Is transmission to the
reference unit successful?
Yes

1. Check the remote unit.
(Remote unit is defective)
2. Check the telephone
number to the remote unit.

1. Replace the MJR PCB.
2. Replace the SC PCB.

Does the trouble still occur?

No

Yes
1. Refer to Sect. 4.6.
2. Check the remote unit.
(Remote unit is defective)

END

END

97
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

4.3.2.

Information Codes: 401, 402, 422
402, 422
START

Is Communication with the
reference unit successful?

No

Yes
Replace the SC PCB.
Check the remote unit in question.
(Remote unit is defective)

401
START

Is the ID Number programmed
into your machine?

END

No

Yes

Is the Receiving unit set up for
Selective Receive?

Program the ID Number.

Yes

No

Is the Receiving unit set up for
Password Reception?

Check the Selective Receive
settings at the receiving unit.

Yes

No

Are you sending a Confidential
Mail?

Program the Receive Password
to match the receiving unit.
(Fax Parameter No. 44)
Yes

No

Are you sending a document
by Relayed Transmission?
No

Check with the receiving end,
the mailboxes may be full.

Yes
Check the Relayed Transmission
settings at the Relay Station.

END

98
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

4.3.3.

Information Codes: 404, 405, 407
START

Is communication with reference
unit successful?

No
1. Replace the MJR PCB.
2. Replace the SC PCB.

Yes

Change Function Parameter #010:
Reduce Tx Attenuation Level
Does the problem still occur?

No

Yes
No

Does the problem still occur?
Yes

Check the telephone line condition.

END

Change Function Parameter #017:
Reduce Tx Modem Speed

No

Check the remote unit.
(Recording paper may have run
out or paper may have jammed.)

Does the problem still occur?
Yes

Change Funciotn Parameter #014:
Increase G3 Tx Equalization

No

Does the problem still occur?
Yes

Change Function Parameter #025:
Communication Startup to 2nd

Does the problem still occur?

No

Yes

Does the problem still occur?

Yes

Refer to Sect. 4.6.

No

END

99
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

4.3.4.

Information Code: 416
START

Is communication with the
reference unit successful?
Yes

No
1. Replace the MJR PCB.
2. Replace the SC PCB.

Change Function Parameter
#011: Reduce Rx Sensitivity
Level

Does the problem still occur?

No

Yes
No

Does the problem still occur?
Yes

Check the telephone line
condition.
END

Change Function Parameter
#023: Increase Training
Check Period

No

Does the problem still occur?
Yes

Change Function Parameter
#013: Increase G3 Rx
Equalization

No

Does the problem still occur?

Yes
Refer to Sect. 4.6.

END

100
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

4.3.5.

Information Codes: 408, 409, 417, 418, 490
START

Is communication with
the reference unit
successful?
Yes

No

Is the unit transmitting or
receiving?

Transmitting

1. Replace the MJR PCB.
2. Replace the SC PCB.

Does the problem still occur?

Receiving
Change Function
Parameter #071: Increase
Error Tolerance

Change Function
Parameter #010: Reduce
Tx Attenuation Level

Does the problem still
occur?

No Does the problem still
occur?
Yes

No

Yes
Check the telephone line
condition.
No

END

Yes

Change Function
Parameter #011: Reduce
Rx Sensitivity Level

Change Function
Parameter #017: Reduce
Tx Modem Speed
Does the problem still
occur?

No Does the problem still
occur?
Yes

No

Yes
Change Function
Parameter #014: Increase
G3 Tx Equalization

Change Function
Parameter #018: Reduce
Rx Modem Speed

Does the problem still
occur?

No Does the problem still
occur?
Yes

No

Yes

Change Function
Parameter #013: Increase
G3 Rx Equalization
No Does the problem still
occur?

Yes The telephone line may have
a high level of white noise
and/or frequent impulse noise.
Ask the telephone company
to check the line.

END

101
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

4.3.6.

Information Code: 434
START

Is communication with the
reference unit successful?

No

Yes

Replace the SC PCB.

No
Does the trouble occur
regardless of the remote unit?
Yes

The telephone line may have
a high level of white noise
and/or frequent impulse noise.
Ask the telephone company
to check the line.

Can the transmitter in
question transmit to the
other units?
No

Yes

Check the remote unit in
question.
(Remote unit is defective)

Change the parameter in Service Mode 1.
(Refer to Sect. 5.1.2.)
for transmitter: #010: Increase Tx Level
for receiver : #011: Reduce Rx Sensitivity Level

END

102
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

4.3.7.

Information Codes: 459, 494, 495
START
Check the line connection
between the telephone jack on
the wall and the MJR PCB.

Is communication with the
reference unit successful?
Yes

No
1. Replace the MJR PCB.
2. Replace the SC PCB.

Does the problem still occur?

No

Yes

Check the telephone line
condition.

END
Does the trouble occur
regardless of the remote unit?
Yes

No
1. Check the remote unit in
question.
(Remote unit is defective)
2. Refer to Sect. 4.6.

If the telephone line frequently
disconnects at the beginning of
each communication, ask the
telephone company to check
the line.

END

103
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

4.3.8.

Information Codes: 001, 002, 007 (Recording Paper Jam)
START

Is the recording paper size and
thickness within specification?

No
Replace with correct paper.

Yes

Is the recording paper loaded in
the Cassette properly?
Yes

No
Load the paper correctly.

No
Is the paper cassette functional?
Yes

Replace the paper cassette.

Check the Paper Feed Roller
Assembly.

Check all Sensors and Actuators
(No Paper Sensor, Timing
Sensor, Paper Exit Sensor).

Check the Paper Feed Solenoid.

END

104
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

4.3.9.

Information Code: 010 (No Recording Paper)
START

Is the Paper Cassette seated
properly

No
Reseat the cassette.

Yes

Is the recording paper loaded in
the cassette?
Yes

Is the No Paper Actuator
operational?
Yes

Is the No Paper Sensor
operational?
Yes

No
Load the paper.

No
Replace the Actuator.

No
Replace the No Paper Sensor.

No
Does the Paper Feed Roller turn?
Overhaul the Clutch Gear
Assembly.

Yes

END

105
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

4.3.10. Information Codes: 030, 031 (Document Jam)
START

Yes
Is the document path blocked?
Remove the blockage.

No

No
Does the Tx Motor rotate?
1. Replace the Tx Motor.
2. Replace the SC PCB.

Yes

Does the document feed into the
unit?
Yes

Does the voltage on A-Point and
B-Point Sensor Pin 2 of PNL1
PCB, vary between 0 and +5V
when a document is set and
removed?

No
Check all gears and rollers.

No

Replace the PNL1 PCB.

Yes

END

4.3.11.

Information Code: 630 (Dialing Error)
START

Is there a dial tone when
MONITOR button is
pressed?
Yes

No
1. Connect the telephone
line correctly.
2. Check the telephone line.
No

Is the remote machine busy?
Yes

Can the unit dial the
reference unit?
Yes

No
1. Check all connectors.
2. Replace the SC PCB.

Press the REDIAL button to
retry connection.
1. The remote machine is
defective.
2. Telephone line quality is
poor.
(Refer to Sect. 4.6.)
END

END

106
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

4.3.12. Information Codes: 403, 411, 414, 415 (Polling Operator Trouble)
415

403, 411, 414

START

START

Inform the remote side
(receiving side) that their
machine does not have
polling transmission
capability.

Review the polling operation
referring to the Operating
Instructions.

Does the remote side have
polling transmission
capability?
Yes

No

Is the remote side set to
polling transmission
(Polled) Mode?

No

END

END

Yes

Ask the remote side to set
their unit for polling operation.

Check the password
between the two units to
ensure it matches.

END

Polling communication with 4-digit password is not an ITU-T Standard feature.
If the transmitter and receiver are of different manufacturers, polling communication
with password may not be possible.

107
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

4.4.

Black Copy
Paper Travel

4.4.1.

Printed Copy Quality Problems

START

Is the printout in Service
Mode 3 normal?

Yes
Check the Scanner mechanism.

No

Is the Toner Cartridge
operational?
Yes

Is the Power Supply
Unit normal?

No
Replace the Toner Cartridge.

No
1. Check all connectors and voltages
on the Power Supply Unit.
2. Check the contacts between
PSU and Toner Cartridge.
3. Replace the PSU.

Yes

Is the SC PCB normal?

No

Yes

1. Check all connectors and voltages
on the SC PCB.
2. Replace the SC PCB.

END

108
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

Blank Copy
Paper Travel

4.4.2.

START

Is the printout in Service
Mode 3 normal?

Yes

No

Is the Toner Cartridge
operational?

Check the Scanner mechanism.

No
Replace the Toner Cartridge .

Yes
Are there any foreign particles
or stains on the BTR?
No

Yes

Is the Power Supply Unit
normal?

No

1. Clean the BTR with a soft,
dry cloth.
2. Replace the BTR.

1. Check all connectors and
voltages on the Power Supply
Unit.
2. Check the Connector and
voltage on the Power
Supply Unit.
3. Replace the Power Supply Unit.

Yes

Are there any foreign particles
or stains blocking the Laser
Beam path?
No

Is the SC PCB normal?

Yes
1. Remove the particles from the
laser beam path or clean the stains.
2. Replace the Laser Unit (LSU).

No

Yes

1. Check all connectors and
voltages on the SC PCB.
2. Replace the SC PCB.

END

109
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

Vertical White Lines

P

Paper Travel

4.4.3.

START

Is the printout in Service
Mode 3 normal?

Yes

No

Is the recording paper damp?

Check the Scanner mechanism.

Yes

No

Is the Toner Cartridge
operational?

Replace the recording paper.

No
Replace the Toner Cartridge .

Yes
Are there any foreign particles
or stains blocking the Laser
Beam path?
No

Yes
1. Remove the particles from
the laser beam path or clean the stains.
2. Replace the Laser Unit (LSU).

Are there any foreign particles Yes
or stains on the BTR?
No

Are the Fuser and Pressure
Roller surfaces clean?
Yes

1. Clean the BTR with a soft, dry cloth.
2. Replace the BTR.

No
Clean or replace the rollers.

END

110
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

Ghost Images

A
AAA
A

Paper Travel

4.4.4.

START

Is the printout in Service
Mode 3 normal?

Yes

No

Is the recording paper damp?

Check the Scanner mechanism.

Yes

No

Is the Toner Cartridge
operational?

Replace the recording paper.

No
Replace the Toner Cartridge.

Yes
Are there any foreign particles
or stains on the BTR?
No

Yes

Are the Fuser and Pressure
Roller surfaces clean?
Yes

No

1. Clean the BTR with a soft,
dry cloth.
2. Replace the BTR.

Clean or replace the rollers.

END

111
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

Vertical Dark Lines

P

Paper Travel

4.4.5.

START

Is the printout in Service
Mode 3 normal?

Yes
Check the Scanner mechanism.

No

Is the Toner Cartridge
operational?

No
Replace the Toner Cartridge.

Yes

Are there any foreign particles
or stains on the BTR?
No

Yes

Is the Laser Unit (LSU)
normal?
Yes

No

Are the Fuser and Pressure
Roller surfaces clean?
Yes

No

1. Clean the BTR with a soft, dry
cloth.
2. Replace the BTR.

Replace the Laser Unit (LSU).

Clean or replace the rollers.

END

112
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

Horizontal Dark Lines

P

Paper Travel

4.4.6.

START

Is the printout in Service
Mode 3 normal?
No

Yes

Check the Scanner mechanism.

Is the Toner Cartridge
operational?
Yes

No
Replace the Toner Cartridge.

Yes
Are there any foreign
particles or stains on the BTR?
1. Clean the BTR with a soft,
dry cloth.
2. Replace the BTR.

No

No

Is the Laser Unit (LSU) normal?
Yes

Is the Power Supply Unit
normal?

Replace the Laser Unit (LSU).

No
1. Check all connectors and
voltages on the Power
Supply Unit .
2. Check the Connector and
voltage on the Power
Supply Unit.
3. Replace the Power Supply
Unit.

Yes

Are the Fuser and Pressure
Roller surfaces clean?

No

Yes

Clean or replace the rollers.

END

113
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

Dark Background

P

Paper Travel

4.4.7.

START

Is the printout in Service
Mode 3 normal?

Yes
Check the Scanner mechanism.

No

Is the recording paper damp?

Yes

No

Is the Toner Cartridge
operational?

Replace the recording paper.

No
Replace the Toner Cartridge.

Yes

Is the Laser Unit (LSU) normal?

No

Yes

Is the Power Supply Unit
normal?

Replace the Laser Unit (LSU).

No
1. Check all connectors and
voltages on the Power Supply
Unit.
2. Check the Connector and
voltages on the Power
Supply Unit.
3. Replace the Power Supply Unit.

Yes

Are the Fuser and Pressure
Roller surfaces clean?
Yes

No
Clean or replace the rollers.

END

114
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

Light Print
Paper Travel

4.4.8.

START

Is the printout in Service
Mode 3 normal?
No

Is the recording paper damp?

Yes
Check the Scanner mechanism.

Yes

No

Is the Toner Cartridge
operational?

Replace the paper.

No
Replace the Toner Cartridge.

Yes

Are there any foreign particles or
stains blocking the Laser Unit
path?
No

Is the Power Supply Unit normal?

Yes
1. Remove the particles from the
laser beam path or clean the stains.
2. Replace the LSU.

No

Yes

Are the Fuser and Pressure Roller
surfaces clean?
Yes

1. Check all connectors and
voltages on the Power Supply Unit.
2. Replace the Power Supply Unit.
No
Clean or replace the rollers.

END

115
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

Horizontal White Lines

P

Paper Travel

4.4.9.

START

Is the printout in Service
Mode 3 normal?

Yes

No

Is the recording paper damp?

Check the Scanner mechanism.

Yes

No

Is the Toner Cartridge
operational?

Replace the recording paper.

No
Replace the Toner Cartridge.

Yes

Are there any foreign particles
or stains on the BTR?
No

Yes

Is the Power Supply Unit
normal?
Yes

No

Are the Fuser and Pressure
Roller surfaces clean?
Yes

No

1. Clean the BTR with a soft, dry
cloth.
2. Replace the BTR.

1. Check all connectors and
voltages on the Power Supply
Unit.
2. Replace the Power Supply Unit.

Clean or replace the rollers.

END

116
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

4.4.10. Improper Fusing (Printed image does not bond to the paper)

P
START

Is the recording paper damp?

Yes

No

Is the Fuser Unit normal?

Replace the recording paper.

No

Yes

Replace the Fuser Unit. (See Note)

END

Note:
Replace the entire Fuser Unit when the Thermostat, the Thermal Fuse or the Thermistor Assembly
becomes an open-circuit.

117
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

Voids in Solid Areas

P

Paper Travel

4.4.11.

START

Is the recording paper damp?

Yes

No

Is the Toner Cartridge
operational?

Replace the recording paper.

No
Replace the Toner Cartridge.

Yes
Are the Fuser and Pressure
Roller surfaces clean?
Yes

No
Clean or replace the rollers.

END

118
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

P

Paper Travel

4.4.12. Black Dots

START

Is the Toner Cartridge
operational?

No
Replace the Toner Cartridge.

Yes
Are the Fuser and Pressure
Roller surfaces clean?
Yes

No
Clean or replace the rollers.

END

119
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

Paper Travel

4.4.13. Recording Paper Creases

START

Is the recording paper damp?

Yes

No

Replace the recording paper.

Are there any foreign particles
or stains in the paper path?
No

Yes

Is the recording paper skewing?

Yes

Remove any obstructions and
clean the paper path.

No

Are there any foreign particles
or stains in the Fuser Unit?

Ensure the paper is set under the
Paper Separation Clips in the
Cassette.

Yes
1. Remove any foreign particles
or clean the stains.
2. Replace the Fuser Unit.

No

END

120
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

4.4.14. Poor Printed Copy Quality
START

Is the Test Pattern printout
in Service Mode 3 normal?

No
1. Replace the SC PCB.
2. Replace the Laser Unit (LSU).
3. Replace the Power Supply Unit.
4. Replace the Toner Cartridge .

Yes

Make a local copy.

Is the printed copy correct?

No

Yes

Check the Transmission Block
(CN30 on the CCD PCB and CN7 on
the SC PCB.

Perform a receiving test
with the reference fax unit.

Is the received copy correct?

No

Yes

Is a poor copy printed only
when receiving from a
specific transmitter?
Yes

1. Check the CN18 on the SC PCB.
2. Check the CN28 and 29 on the
MJR PCB.
3. Check the Telephone Line Cable.
4. Replace the SC PCB.

No
Telephone line quality is poor.
(Refer to 4.6.)

The transmitting machine
may be defective.

END

121
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

4.4.15. Abnormal Printing
START

Is the recording paper loaded
in the Cassette properly?

No

Yes

Is the recording paper size and
thickness within specification?

1. Adjust the Paper Width Guide.
2. Adjust the Paper Length Guide.
3. Ensure the paper is under the Paper
Separation Clips.

No

Yes

Is a Panasonic Toner
Cartridge being used?

Replace with correct paper.

No

Yes

Are all switches and sensors
operating properly?

Replace with a Panasonic Toner Cartridge.

No

Yes

Are there any foreign particles
or paper pieces in the receiver
unit?
No

Do the rollers rotate properly?

Adjust, clean or replace.

Yes
Remove the foreign particles or paper pieces
from the receiver unit.
No
1. Check all rollers, gears, drive clutches and
springs.
2. Adjust or replace any defective parts.

Yes

Is the receiving mechanism
operating correctly?
Yes

No
Adjust or replace any defective parts.

END

122
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

4.4.16. Scanned Copy Quality Problems
START

Is the LED Array abnormal?

Yes

No

Are there any foreign particles or
paper pieces in the scanning area?

Replace the LED Array.

Yes
Remove the foreign particles or paper
pieces from the scanning area.

No

Is the scanning area dirty?

Yes

No

Are the Transmitting Rollers
dirty?

1. Clean the Scanning Glass (Sect. 2.2.4.).
2. Clean Mirrors 1, 2 and 3 (Sect. 2.2.8.).

Yes

No

Clean the rollers (Sect. 2.2.4.).

Yes
Is the Scanner Assembly abnormal?
No

1. Check CN7 (SC PCB).
2. Check CN30 (CCD PCB).
3. Replace the Scanner Block (321) (Sect. 2.2.8.).
4. Replace the SC PCB (Sect. 2.2.10).

END

123
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

4.5.
4.5.1.

Document Feeder (ADF)
No Document Feed
START

No
Is the document set properly?
Set the document properly.

Yes
Is the document thickness or size
within specification?
Yes

No

Is the "Pi.." tone generated when
the document is set?
Yes

No

Make a copy or cut the document
to the specification size.

Does the ADF Sensor actuator
move smoothly?

No
Adjust or replace the actuator.

Yes
Replace the PNL PCB.
No
Does the ADF Roller rotate?
Replace the Transmit Motor.

Yes

Is the trouble solved?

No

Yes

Replace the PNL PCB.

END
Is the ADF Roller surface dirty?
Yes

No
Adjust the separator pressure.

Clean the ADF Roller surface.
Is the trouble solved?
Yes

No
Replace the ADF Roller or
Separation Rubber or both.

END

124
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

4.5.2.

Document Does Not Feed or Multiple Feeds
START

Is the Control Panel Unit locked?

No

Yes

Is the adjustment of the
Separation Rubber normal?

Close the Control Panel Unit firmly.

No

Yes

Is the Separation Rubber worn
out?

No

Yes

Clean or adjust the Separation
Rubber Pressure (Sect. 2.2.2).

Replace the Separation Rubber.

Is the ADF Roller clean?

No

Yes

Is the ADF Roller worn out?

Clean the surface of the roller
with isopropyl alcohol (Sect. 2.2.4)

Yes
Replace the ADF Roller
(Sect. 2.2.8).

No

Does the ADF Roller drive
properly?
Yes

No
Does the ADF Roller's gear
system function properly?
Yes

No
Adjust the gear system or replace
defective parts.

END

125
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

4.5.3.

Document Jam (030) or Skew
START

Mode
Copy le
Samp

Is the Control Panel Unit
closed?

No
Close the Control Panel Unit
firmly.

Yes

Do all sensors on the PNL1
PCB operate normally?

No
Clean or replace PNL1 PCB.

Yes

Does the Feed Roller have
drive and sufficient friction?

No
Clean the surface of roller
with isopropyl alcohol
(Sect.2.2.4).

Yes

No
Is the document path clear
of foreign particles or paper?
Remove the foreign particles
or papers from the document
path.

Yes

Is the Transmitting
mechanism operating
properly?

Yes

No
Adjust or replace any
defective parts.

END

126
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

4.6.

Communications

This section explains general troubleshooting procedures for the 400 series of Information Codes. These
errors are primarily caused by poor telephone line quality (loss, noise, echo, etc.). This unit is furnished with
Service Mode 1 to assist in troubleshooting line quality problems.
It is suggested that both the transmitting unit and receiving unit be adjusted. This section gives relevant
parameters in Service Mode 1 for the transmitting and receiving sides. If no improvement is realized after
the parameters are adjusted, it is recommended that the parameters be returned to the default settings.

4.6.1.

Communication Trouble
Perform a communication test after changing settings.

START

Is this an international
communication?

Yes

No

Transmitting Side
#021 : Off
#025 : 1st

On
2nd

Receiving Side
#018 : 14400 bps 12000 to 2400 bps
#024 : 2100 Hz 1080 Hz
#030 : 75 ms 1 sec
#033 : 33600 bps
31200 to 2400 bps/
TC9600/TC7200

To equalize loss (Amplitude Distortion) between the fax unit
and the phone company exchange
Transmitting Side
#014 : 0 dBm

4, 8, 12 dBm

Receiving Side
#013 : 0 dBm

4, 8, 12 dBm

To improve a poor S/N (signal-to-noise ratio)
Transmitting Side

Receiving Side

#010 : -9 dBm 0 to -15 dBm
#017 : 14400 bps 12000 to 2400 bps
#032 : 33600 bps 31200 to 2400 bps

#011 : -43 dBm -33 dBm or -38 dBm
#018 : 14400 bps 12000 to 2400 bps
#023 : Normal
Long
#032 : 33600 bps 31200 to 2400 bps

To cope with impulse noise
Receiving Side
#070 : 128

256 to 2048

To cope with shifted signal sequences caused by an echo
Transmitting Side
#025 : 1st 2nd

Receiving Side
#024 : 2100 Hz 1080 Hz
#030 : 75 ms 1 sec

127
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

4.6.2.

Poor Transmitted Copy Quality
START

Make a copy.

Is the printed copy normal?
Yes

No
No

Is the LED Array lit?

Does CN1, pin 1 on the
SC PCB measure
+24 VDC?

Yes

Yes
Does nLEDON go Low
when the scan starts?
Yes
Perform a transmission test
to a reference fax unit.

No
Replace the LVPS.
No
Replace the SC PCB.

Check CN1 on the SC
PCB and the LED
harness.

Does the problem still
occur?
Yes
Replace the LED Array.
No

Are CN7 (SC PCB)
and CN30 (CCD PCB)
connected properly?
Yes

Connect them correctly.

1. Replace the Scanner
Block.
2. Replace the SC PCB.
Is the transmitted copy
normal?
Yes

No

Does poor transmitted copy
appear when transmitting to
a specific receiver?
Yes

No

1. Check CN18 (SC PCB)
and CN28 and 29 (MJR PCB).
2. Check the telephone line cable.
Replace if necessary.

Telephone line quality is
poor.

The receiving unit may be
defective.

END

128
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

4.6.3.

Dialing Problems
START

Does the unit proceed to
Phase B?
No

Are you using One-Touch
or ABBR dialing?

Yes
1. Set documents on the ADF correctly.
2. Check the telephone line connection.
3. The called party is busy.
4. Refer to Sect. 4.6.

Yes
Check the registered telephone number.

No

Are you using direct dialing?

Yes

No

Is the Monitor Volume
too loud or too low?
No

Check the dialed telephone number.

Yes
Adjust the monitor volume by pressing the
"/\" or "\/" curser keys.

END

129
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

4.6.4.

Transmission Problems
START

Does the ID display?

No

Yes

Does the Verification Stamp
operate?

1. No ID function at the remote unit.
2. The ID is not set for the remote unit.

No
1. Set "STAMP=ON"
2. Check CN3 (SC PCB).
3. Replace the Stamp Solenoid.
4. Replace the SC PCB.

Yes

Is the copy quality OK?

No

Yes

Any other problems?
No

Make a copy and refer to Sect. 4.4.

Yes
See Sect. 4.3. (Troubleshooting with the
Information Codes).

END

130
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

4.6.5.

Reception Problems
START

Does the machine answer
the Ringing signal?
Yes

Is the received copy OK?

No
1. Set "RCV = AUTO"
2. Check that all covers are closed firmly.
3. Check the telephone line connection.
4. Check the Ringer Timing or DRD setting.
5. Check the recording paper path.
6. Check CN18 (SC PCB) and CN28 and
29 (MJR PCB).
7. Replace the MJR PCB.
8. Replace the SC PCB.

No

Yes

Any other problems?
No

Make a copy and refer to Sect. 4.4.14.

Yes
See Sect. 4.3. (Troubleshooting with the
Information Codes).

END

131
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

4.6.6.

Polling Problems
START

Is Polling reception OK?

No

Yes

Is Polling transmission OK?

1. Set the same polling password as the other party
is using.
2. Check the password of the remote unit.

No

Yes

Any other problems?
No

1. Set the polling password or no - check mode.*
2. Check the password of the remote unit.

Yes
See Sect. 4.3. (Troubleshooting using information codes).

END

Note:
No-check Mode means that password is not set.

132
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

4.7.
4.7.1.

Troubleshooting the LAN Interface
Checking Network Configuration
START
Print the current Internet Parameters List
Ask the customer for the Pre-Installation
Information form filled out by the Network
Administrator.
Verify this information with the Internet
Parameters List that you just printed.
Are the Internet Parameters entered
correctly into the unit?

No
Re-enter the Internet Parameters correctly.

Yes
Locate a PC connected to the same Subnet
Mask as the unit
From the DOS Prompt, enter the following
command-line utility: ipconfig /all
Does the displayed Network configuration,
match the following settings of the unit
Internet Parameters ?
Default Gateway IP Address:
DNS Server IP Address:
Subnet Mask:

No
Ask the Network Administrator to
verify the proper information.

Yes
From the DOS Prompt, enter the following
command-line utility: "route print"
Does the current routing table for the
Gateway match ?

No
Ask the Network Administrator to correct
the routing table on that Gateway.
No

Yes
Does the Default Gateway respond to the
"ping IP" command ?
Yes

Check the power switch, cables and the
current settings of unit.

Does the DNS Server respond to the
"ping IP" command ?

No
Ask the Network Administrator to check the
Default Gateway and system status.
No

Yes
Does the unit respond to the
"ping host name" command ?

Ask the Network Administrator to check the
Default Gateway and system status.
No

Yes
Does the unit respond to the
"telnet" command ?

Replace the SC and/or LANB PCB

Yes
Ask the Network Administrator to verify the
POP/SMTP account and system status.

133
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

4.7.2.

Testing the TCP/IP Network

It is beyond the scope of this Service Manual to cover Networking in detail, there are many excellent
manuals on this subject, but we hope the information in this section will aid with your troubleshooting efforts.
In most cases, the Network Administrator will be able to provide you with needed information or assistance.
When encountering Network problems during an onsite service call or during the installation stage, try to
isolate the steps that are not being completed so that you can quickly locate the components that don’t
work. It is best to organize your troubleshooting efforts by understanding what should be happening, then
you can trace the path and see where the problem is occurring.
In our case, we use TCP/IP for transportation of data from one system to another, which involves a whole
series of events occurring throughout a number of different layers.
As with all networking, TCP/IP works better when its plugged in, therefore, start your troubleshooting by
checking the Physical Connectivity first, the cable(s).
In our examples, we’ll use several simple tools readily available in the DOS command-line utility for
troubleshooting. There are many other utilities available for checking more detailed information, some are
Free of charge, others are available for a nominal fee.
1. System Diagram Model
Ask the customer to provide you with the Pre-Installation Information form, that was filled out by the
Network Administrator.
A description or system diagram for the unit, including its physical address, email server and DNS
server is required.
Network Configuration
Domain Name: labo.mgcs.com

Network D
PC Client
[210.232.71.18]
js2.labo.mgcs.com
WAN

SMTP/POP DNS
Server
Server
sv2.labo.mgcs.com
[192.168.1.2]

Network A
[192.168.3.0]

sv1.labo.mgcs.com
[192.168.1.1]

[192.168.3.254]
Router (R1)

[192.168.1.253]
Network B
[192.168.1.0]

"ping"

PC Client
[192.168.1.4]
ec5.labo.mgcs.com

Hub
PC Client
[192.168.3.4]
ec4.labo.mgcs.com

DX-600/800
[192.168.3.5]
ef1.labo.mgcs.com

Network C
[192.168.4.0]

PC Client
[192.168.4.1]
fmrt7.labo.mgcs.com

134
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

2. Checking the Current Configuration
Print the current unit Internet Parameters configuration.
Locate a PC connected to the same Subnet Mask as the unit, then from the DOS Prompt, type the
following command-line utility: "ipconfig /all" for Windows 98/Me/XP/2000/NT.
Verify that the displayed Network configuration on the PC, matches the following Internet Parameter
settings of the unit:
Default Gateway IP Address:
DNS Server IP Address:
Subnet Mask: (whether it is valid)
For Windows 98 / Me / XP / 2000 / NT
The following example shows the output after you type "ipconfig /all" at a command prompt:
C:\>ipconfig /all
Windows NT IP Configuration
Host Name
DNS Servers
Node Type
NetBIOS Scope ID
IP Routing Enabled.
WINS Proxy Enabled
NetBIOS Resolution Uses DNS

: ec4.labo.mgcs.com
: 192.168.1.1
: Hybrid
:
: No
: No
: No

Ethernet adapter IBMFE1
Description

:
: IBM 100/10 EtherJet PCI Adapter

Physical Address
DHCP Enabled
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway
Primary WINS Server

: 00-04-AC-EE-9C-E8
: No
: 192.168.3.4
: 255.255.255.0
: 192.168.3.254
: 192.168.3.18

From the above examples, you know the Network configuration for the specified Subnet Mask is as
follows: IP Address: 192.168.3.4; Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0; Default Gateway (Default Router IP
Address): 192.168.3.254; DNS Server: 192.168.1.1 and the Domain Name: labo.mgcs.com
(obtained from the Host Name).
3. Using "PING" to Test Physical Connectivity
The Packet Internet Groper (PING) is a command-line tool included with every Microsoft TCP/IP client
(any DOS or Windows client with the TCP/IP protocol installed). PING is a simple utility that is used to
send a test packet to a specified IP Address or Hostname, then, if everything is working properly, the
packet is echoed back (returned).
Sample command-line PINGing and parameters are shown below. There are several available options
that can be specified with the PING command. However, for our examples, we will use two options (-n
and -w) which are commonly used when the response from the destination location is too long.
-n count
:
-w timeout :

The number of echo requests that the command should send. The default is four.
Specifies the period PING will wait for the reply before deciding that the host is not
responding.

135
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

PINGing the Unit
C:\WINDOWS>ping ef1.labo.mgcs.com
Pinging ef1.labo.mgcs.com [192.168.3.5] with 32 bytes of data:
Reply from 192.168.3.5: bytes=32 time=5ms TTL=253
Reply from 192.168.3.5: bytes=32 time=4ms TTL=253
Reply from 192.168.3.5: bytes=32 time=4ms TTL=253
Reply from 192.168.3.5: bytes=32 time=4ms TTL=253

PINGing the Default Gateway (Default Router IP Address)
C:\WINDOWS>ping 192.168.3.254
Pinging 192.168.3.254 with 32 bytes of data:
Reply from 192.168.3.254: bytes=32 time=5ms TTL=253
Reply from 192.168.3.254: bytes=32 time=4ms TTL=253
Reply from 192.168.3.254: bytes=32 time=4ms TTL=253
Reply from 192.168.3.254: bytes=32 time=4ms TTL=253

PINGing the SMTP/POP Server
C:\WINDOWS>ping sv2.labo.mgcs.com
Pinging sv2.labo.mgcs.com [192.168.1.2] with 32 bytes of data:
Reply from 192.168.1.2: bytes=32 time=5ms TTL=253
Reply from 192.168.1.2: bytes=32 time=5ms TTL=253
Reply from 192.168.1.2: bytes=32 time=5ms TTL=253
Reply from 192.168.1.2: bytes=32 time=5ms TTL=253

If for some reason, the physical connection is missing, the echo reply will not be received from the
destination and the following output is displayed:
C:\WINDOWS>ping fmrt7.labo.mgcs.com
Pinging fmrt7.labo.mgcs.com [192.168.4.1] with 32 bytes of data:
Request timed out.
Request timed out.
Request timed out.
Request timed out.
Ping statistics for 192.168.4.1:
Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 0, Lost = 4 (100% loss),
Approximate round trip times in milli-seconds:
Minimum = 0ms, Maximum = 0ms, Average = 0ms

136
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

If the physical destination is far and it’s connected by WAN (Wide Area Network), the PING option
command default value must be changed to compensate for the expected delayed response.
e.g.
-n 10
-w 2000

:
:

The number of echo requests that the command should send.
Specifies the period PING will wait for the reply before deciding that the host is not
responding.
C:\WINDOWS>ping js2.labo.mgcs.com -n 10 -w 2000
Pinging js2.labo.mgcs.com [210.232.71.18] with 32 bytes of data:
Reply from 210.232.71.18: bytes=32 time=633ms TTL=252
Reply from 210.232.71.18: bytes=32 time=645ms TTL=252
Reply from 210.232.71.18: bytes=32 time=810ms TTL=252
Reply from 210.232.71.18: bytes=32 time=455ms TTL=252
Reply from 210.232.71.18: bytes=32 time=645ms TTL=252
Reply from 210.232.71.18: bytes=32 time=633ms TTL=252
Reply from 210.232.71.18: bytes=32 time=677ms TTL=252
Reply from 210.232.71.18: bytes=32 time=703ms TTL=252
Reply from 210.232.71.18: bytes=32 time=633ms TTL=252
Reply from 210.232.71.18: bytes=32 time=633ms TTL=252

4. Tracing a Packet Route
Another useful command-line utility is TRACERT, which is used to verify the route a packet takes to
reach its destination. The result shows each router crossed and how long it took to get through each
particular router to reach the specified destination.
The time it takes to get through a particular router is calculated three times and displayed for each
router hop along with the IP Address of each router crossed. If a FQDN (Fully Qualified Domain
Name) is available, it will be displayed as well.
This utility is useful for two diagnostic purposes:
a. To detect whether a particular router is malfunctioning along a known path. For example, if you
know that packets on a network always go through London to get from New York to Berlin, but the
communication is failing. A TRACERT to the Berlin address shows all the hops up to the point
where the router in London should respond. If it does not respond, the time values are shown with
an asterisk (*), indicating the packet timed out.
b. To determine whether a router is slow and needs to be upgraded or additional routers should be
installed on the network. You can determine this by simply comparing the time it takes for a packet
to get through a particular router. If its return time is significantly higher than the other routers, it
should be upgraded.
To use this utility, from the DOS command-line, type: tracert 
Tracing the Route to SMTP/POP Server
C:\WINDOWS>tracert sv2.labo.mgcs.com
Tracing route to sv2.labo.mgcs.com [192.168.1.2]
over a maximum of 30 hops:
1
2

4 ms
4 ms

2 ms
5 ms

2 ms 192.168.3.254
5 ms sv2.labo.mgcs.com [192.168.1.2]

Trace complete.

137
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

5. Managing Network Route Tables
In the simplest case a router connects two network segments. In this model, the system used to join
the two segments needs to know only about these segments.
The routing table for router R1 in this case is simple; the following table shows its key routes:
Network Address
192.168.3.0
192.168.1.0

Netmask
255.255.255.0
255.255.255.0

Gateway
192.168.3.254
192.168.1.253

Interface
192.168.3.254
192.168.1.253

When the Unit at 192.168.3.5 attempts to communicate with the Unit at 192.168.1.x, IP performs the
ANDing process to find two things: The local network ID is 192.168.3.0, and the destination network ID
is not. This means, that the destination host is not on the local network.
IP, is responsible to find a route to the remote network, and therefore, it consults the routing table.
Here, the local host normally determines that the next step in the route is the Default Gateway, and
sends the packet to router R1.
The router R1, receives the packet. After determining that the packet is for another host and not the
router itself, it checks the routing table. It finds the route to 192.168.1.0 and sends the packet through
the interface to the Unit at 192.168.1.x, which receives the packet. This is a simple route that took
only a single hop.
When another network is added as the number of hosts grows, it gets complicated, and the systems on
the most distant networks cannot communicate. When the router receives a packet in this case, it
cannot find a route to the remote network. It then discards the packet and a message indicating
"destination host unreachable" is sent to the originator.
Here, is where the ROUTE command-line utility is useful when dealing with more than two networks,
and is used by Administrators to statically manage a route table by adding, deleting, changing and
clearing the route table. It has a number of options that are used to manipulate the routing tables,
some are shown below:
• MASK
If this switch is present, the next parameter is interpreted as the netmask parameter.
• Netmask
If included, specifies a sub-net mask value to be associated with this route entry. If not specified, it
defaults to 255.255.255.255.
• Gateway
Specifies the gateway.
• METRIC
Specifies the metric / cost for the destination.
All symbolic names used for the destination are looked up in the network database file NETWORKS.
The symbolic names for the gateway are looked up the host name database file HOSTS.

138
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

When the packet does not reach the specified destination even when the physical connection is
properly made, check the registered persistent routes on the same subnet as the Unit by typing "route
print" in the DOS command-line. The output display is shown below:
C:\WINDOWS>route print
Active Routes:
Network Address
0.0.0.0
127.0.0.0
192.168.3.0
192.168.3.2
192.168.3.255
224.0.0.0
255.255.255.255

Netmask
0.0.0.0
255.0.0.0
255.255.255.0
255.255.255.255
255.255.255.255
224.0.0.0
255.255.255.255

Gateway Address
192.168.3.254
127.0.0.1
192.168.3.2
127.0.0.1
192.168.3.2
192.168.3.2
192.168.3.2

Interface
192.168.3.2
127.0.0.1
192.168.3.2
127.0.0.1
192.168.3.2
192.168.3.2
192.168.3.2

Metric
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

6. Host Name Query on DNS Server
Windows XP/2000/NT 4.0 also has a tool that enables you to test DNS to verify that it is working
properly. This utility is not available on Windows 98/Me.
From the DOS command-line, type "NSLOOKUP" to display the following output:
C:\>nslookup
Default Server: sv1.labo.mgcs.com
Address: 192.168.1.1

NS(Name Server) Record in Domain
From the DOS command-line, type "Is -t NS " to display the following output:
> ls -t NS labo.mgcs.com.
[sv1.labo.mgcs.com.]
labo.mgcs.com.
NS server = sv1.labo.mgcs.com

MX(Mail Exchange) Record in Domain
From the DOS command-line, type "Is -t MX " to display the following output:
> ls -t MX labo.mgcs.com
[sv1.labo.mgcs.com]
labo.mgcs.com.
MX

10 sv2.labo.mgcs.com

A (Address) Record in Domain
From the DOS command-line, type "Is -t A " to display the following output:
> ls -t A labo.mgcs.com
[sv1.labo.mgcs.com]
labo.mgcs.com.
NS
sv1
A
sv2
A
ec5
A
A
ec4
A
ef1

server = sv1.labo.mgcs.com
192.168.1.1
192.168.1.2
192.168.1.4
192.168.3.4
192.168.3.5

(To leave from this menu, type "exit" on the command-line.)

139
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

7. Testing Unit Using the TELNET Command
TELNET is a terminal emulation protocol. TELNET enables PCs and workstations to function as dumb
terminals in sessions with hosts on internet works.
From Windows 98/Me/XP/2000/NT, use the TELNET to test the communication of TCP/IP and SMTP
Protocol manually to the Unit. This method eliminates the SMTP Server.
For better understanding, type "telnet" in the DOS Command-line to bring up the Telnet screen. Then,
click on the Terminal menu and on Preferences, check the "Local Echo" and "Block Cursor" radio dials
and click on the OK button.
Click on the Connect menu, then click on Remote System.
Enter "25" in the "Port:" field and click on Connect button.
For example,
C:\WINDOWS>telnet
telnet to ef1.labo.mgcs.com[192.168.3.5]
220 ef1.labo.mgcs.com DP18xx V.xx
helo
250 Hello
mail from:test
250 Sender OK
rcpt to:fax@labo.mgcs.com
250 Receipient OK
data
354 Email, end with "CRLF . CR LF"
[Press the Enter Key]
Panasonic Internet Fax
test
test
[Press the Enter Key]
[Press the Enter Key]
[Press the Enter Key]
250 OK, Mail accept
quit
221 Closing transaction channel

140
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

4.8.

Information Codes Table (For Facsimile)

Code
001

Mode
RCV
COPY

002

RCV
COPY

007

RCV
COPY

008
010

RCV
COPY

011

STANDBY

017
030

XMT

031

045

XMT
COPY
STANDBY
RCV
COPY
STANDBY
RCV
COPY
STANDBY

060

041

043

Fax Information Codes
Phase
Description of Problem
Cause
C, D Leading edge of the recording
Recording paper jam.
paper fails to reach the Timing
Timing Sensor abnormal.
Sensor. (1st Cassette)
C, D Leading edge of the recording
Recording paper jam.
paper fails to reach the Timing
Timing Sensor abnormal.
Sensor. (2nd Cassette)
C, D 1. Leading edge of the recording Recording paper jam.
paper fails to reach the Paper Paper Exit Sensor abnormal.
Exit Sensor.
2. Recording paper has not
completely passed the Paper
Exit Sensor.
Paper cassette is opened while
Paper cassette is opened.
paper is feeding.
B, C No recording paper.
No recording paper or paper is not set
properly.
No Paper Sensor is defective.
B, C Paper Cassette is not installed
Connector is not installed properly.
properly.
Incorrect paper size loaded in the Paper size is incorrect.
Paper Cassette.
B
Read Point Sensor does not go
Document is not set properly.
ON within 10 seconds after the
Defective Read Point Sensor.
document starts feeding.
C
Transmitting document was longer The document may jam.
than 2 meter (or 78.7 in).
Defective Read Point Sensor.
B, C, D Out of toner.
No toner.
Defective Toner Sensor.
B, C, D Low toner.

Toner is getting low.
Defective Toner Sensor.

-

No Toner Cartridge.

-

A

Printer Cover is open.

061

-

A

ADF Door is open.

400

XMT

B

T1 timer (35 ± 5 sec.) elapsed
without detecting 300 bps signal.

Toner Cartridge has not been installed.
Defective Toner Sensor
(Cartridge Sensor).
Cover is not firmly closed.
Connectors are not firmly connected.
Door is not firmly closed.
Connectors are not firmly connected.
Wrong number is dialed and the START
button is pushed.
Telephone line is disconnected while
dialing.
SC PCB (Modem) or MJR PCB are
defective.
Receiver is defective. (It may only be
transmitting CED)

141
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

Code
401

Mode
XMT

402

XMT

403

RCV
(Polling)

404

XMT

405

XMT

406

RCV
(Password
Comm.)

407

XMT

408

XMT

409

XMT

410

RCV

411

RCV
(Polling)

412

G3 RX

Fax Information Codes
Phase
Description of Problem
Cause
B
DCN was returned from receiver Your machine’s ID Number is not
while transmitter is waiting for CFR programmed.
or FTT.
Possible incompatibility or incorrect
Password.
B
DCN was returned from receiver Receiver working in non-CCITT mode
while transmitter is waiting for
only. (Possible incompatibility)
NSF/DIS.
B
Transmitter had no polling
"POLLED=ON" (polling XMT ready) is
function.
not set at the transmitter.
Document to be transmitted is not
placed at the transmitter.
B
Transmitter sent NSS (or DCS)
Receiver is defective. (Modem, MJR
followed by TCF three times, but PCB, etc.)
the receiver did not respond. (CFR SC PCB or MJR PCB are defective.
or FTT is usually returned)
Receiver disconnects line during first
NSS (or DCS) is transmitted.
B
Transmitter received FTT after it
Line quality is poor. (TCF is damaged
transmitted TCF at 2400bps.
due to line noise)
Received RTN after
Receiver is defective. (Modem, etc.)
communicating at 2400 bps.
SC PCB or MJR PCB are defective.
B
XMT-Password mismatched.
XMT, RCV password does not match.
RCV-Password mismatched.
Last 4 digits of TSI does not match with
Selective RCV incomplete.
the last 4 digits of ONE-TOUCH, ABBR
telephone number.
D
Transmitter received no response Receiver is defective. (No paper, paper
after it transmitted post message, jamming, etc.)
such as EOP, MPS, EOM, etc...or Receiver ceased receiving because of
received DCN.
excessive error. (Line quality is poor)
SC PCB (Modem) or MJR PCB are
defective.
D
Transmitter received RTN after it Receiver receives data with error. (Line
transmitted EOP, MPS, or EOM.
quality is poor)
Receiver is defective. (Modem, etc.)
SC PCB or MJR PCB are defective.
D
Transmitter receives PIN after it
Receiver receives data with error due to
transmitted a post message, such poor line quality, and receiving operator
as EOP, MPS, EOM, etc.
requests voice contact.
Receiver is defective. (Modem, etc.)
SC PCB or MJR PCB are defective.
D
Received DCN while waiting for
Interface or line is faulty.
post command. (EOP, MPS, EOM, Transmitter is defective.
etc.)
B
Received DCN after transmitting Transmitter is not ready for polling
NSC.
communication.
Password does not match between
transmitter and receiver.
B, D No response within 12 seconds in Transmitter is defective.
NSS/DCS/MPS wait state. (After SC PCB is defective.
transmitting FTT)

142
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

Code
414

415

416

417

418

420

421
422
427
434

436
456

490

494

495

501

Fax Information Codes
Mode
Phase
Description of Problem
Cause
RCV
B
No response received after
Password does not match between
(Polling)
transmitting 3rd NSC.
transmitter and receiver.
Transmitter is defective. (No original,
document jam, etc.)
XMT
B
Remote side attempted to receive Inform the remote side that your
(Polling)
message from your machine in
machine does not have the polling
polling communication.
transmission feature.
RCV
D
Receiver did not detect post
Transmitter is defective.
command, such as EOP, MPS,
Line quality is poor. (RTC signal is
EOM, etc.
distorted due to line noise)
SC PCB or MJR PCB are defective.
RCV
C
Receiver returned RTN in
Line quality is poor. (There are
response to post message.
excessive errors in received data)
SC PCB or MJR PCB are defective.
RCV
C
Receiver transmitted PIN in
Line quality is poor. (There are
response to PRI-Q from
excessive errors in received data)
transmitter. (Transmitting operator SC PCB or MJR PCB are defective.
requests voice contact)
RCV
B
T1 timer (35 sec.) elapsed without There is wrong incoming call.
detecting 300 bps signal.
(Non-facsimile communication)
Transmitter is defective.
SC PCB or MJR PCB are defective.
RCV
B
Busy Tone is detected after
Remote station disconnected the line.
sending NSF Signal.
Wrong number is dialed.
XMT
B
Content of NSF (or DIS) or NSC
There is an incompatibility.
(or DTC) was invalid.
G3
B
DCN received to NSF/CSI/DIS
The interface is incompatible.
RCV
transmitted.
XMT or RCV
B
CD (response from Modem) did
Remote unit is defective.
not turn OFF within 180 sec. after SC PCB or MJR PCB are defective.
receiver detected FLAG signal.
G3 RX
C
DCN received after transmitting
Transmitter is defective or incompatible.
FTT.
Line quality is poor.
RCV
B
Received relay transfer request or
confidential document to distribute
to an end receiving station or all
confidential mailboxes are used.
RCV
C
Sum of error lines exceeded the
Line quality is poor.
limit (Function Parameter No. 70) SC PCB or MJR PCB are defective.
of 64 lines.
RCV
C
Interval between two EOLs was
Transmitter is defective.
more than 10 sec. when receiver Line quality is poor. (EOL is damaged
received message data.
due to line noise)
SC PCB or MJR PCB are defective.
XMT
C
During reception, CD turned OFF Line is disconnected.
RCV
or continued ON for long time.
Transmitter is defective.
During communication, lost loop - SC PCB or MJR PCB are defective.
current.
XMT/
B
Remote unit does not have
RCV(V.34)
compatible Modem.

143
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

Code
502

540
541
542
543
544
550
554
555
580

581

601
623

630

631
634

638

Fax Information Codes
Mode
Phase
Description of Problem
Cause
XMT/
B, C, D During reception, CD turned OFF Line is disconnected.
RCV(V.34)
or continued ON for long time.
Transmitter is defective.
During communication, lost loop - SC PCB or MJR PCB are defective.
current.
XMT ECM
B
No response after transmitting 3rd Incompatible interface.
CTC or DCN received.
XMT ECM
D
No response after transmitting 3rd Line is faulty.
EOR or received DCN.
MJR PCB abnormal.
XMT ECM
D
No response to the 3rd RR
Remote unit is abnormal.
transmitted or received DCN.
XMT ECM
D
T5 timer (60 sec.) elapsed without Remote unit is abnormal.
MCF.
XMT ECM
D
Stopped Transmission after EOR Line is faulty.
Transmission.
MJR PCB abnormal.
RCV ECM
C
Timer between frames in phase C Defective remote station.
has elapsed.
RCV ECM
D
Transmitted ERR after receiving
Line is faulty.
EOR.
RCV ECM
D
Transmitted PIN after receiving
Line is faulty and Operator Call
EOR.
requested by RX side.
XMT
B
Sub-address transmission to a unit Sub-address transmission to a unit that
that has their DIS bit 49 (NSF bit has no Sub-address function.
155) OFF.
XMT
B
Sub-address Password
Sub-address transmission to a unit that
transmission to a unit that has their has no Sub-address function.
DIS bit 50 (NSF bit 156) OFF.
XMT
ADF Door was opened during ADF
transmission.
XMT
A
No original was in the ADF. (Built- Operator removed the original from the
in dialer engaged)
ADF after dialing was completed.
Original was not set properly in the ADF.
XMT or RCV
B
Redial count over.
No dial tone detected. Sensor dial tone
(Polling)
is not detected. (destination dependent)
Busy tone is detected. (destination
dependent) T1 timer (35 ± 5 sec.)
elapsed without a signal from the
receiver.
XMT
A
"STOP" button was pressed during
Auto Dialing.
XMT
B
Redial count over with no
Telephone line cable is disconnected.
response or busy tone was not
Wrong number is dialed.
detected.
SC or MJR PCB is abnormal.
Note:
U.S.A. and Canadian models
will redial only once if a busy
tone is not detected.
XMT
LAN Power turned Off with applicable Power switched off.
data in memory or during
Power failure occurred.
communication.

144
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

Code
711

Mode
RCV

712

XMT

714

XMT
RCV

715

XMT

716

XMT

717

XMT

718

XMT

719

RCV

720

POP

721

POP

722

RCV

725

729

XMT
POP
XMT
POP
XMT

730

RCV

726

Fax Information Codes
Phase
Description of Problem
Cause
LAN Incorrect LDAP settings.
LDAP Server Name, LDAP Login
Name, LDAP Password and/or LDAP
Search Base are incorrect.
LAN Unknown email address replied
Mail Server received an incorrect email
from the Mail Server.
address. (Dependent on Server’s Mail
application)
LAN LAN Interface error.
The 10Base-T/100Base-TX cable is not
Cannot logon to the LAN.
connected.
An unexpected LAN problem occurred.
Check the LANC/LANB PCB connector.
LAN TCP/IP connection timed out.
Incorrect IP Address is set.
Verify the IP Address, Default Router IP
Address, SMTP Server IP Address.
LAN Cannot logon to the LAN.
Incorrect SMTP Server IP Address is
set.
No email application is activated on the
Mail Server.
LAN Incomplete SMTP Protocol
Mail Server’s hard disk may be full.
transmission.
Mail Server is defective.
LAN Page Memory Overflow occurred Check the document size and
while receiving printing data. The resolution.
Ask originator to re-send in a supported
paper size selected within your
application to print is larger than size and resolution.
the paper size loaded in the
cassette(s).
LAN Received data via LAN is in a
Ask the originator to re-send with a
format that is not supported.
supported file attachment:
* In a TIFF-F format.
* Image data conforming to A4/Letter
size.
LAN Unable to connect with the POP
Incorrect POP Server address is set.
Server.
POP Server is down.
LAN Unable to login to the POP Server. Incorrect User Name or Password is
set.
LAN Cable is disconnected.
LAN Failed to obtain the Network
Parameters (such as: IP Address, DHCP is not available.
Subnet Mask, Default Gateway IP (Contact the Network Administrator.)
Address, etc.) from the DHCP
server.
LAN DNS Server connection timed out. Incorrect DNS Server address is set.
DNS Server is down.
LAN Received an error response from Incorrect POP Server address is set.
the DNS Server.
Incorrect SMTP Server address is set.
LAN Failed to authenticate (SMTP
SMTP AUTHENTICATION, User Name
AUTHENTICATION) when
and/or Password are incorrect.
connecting with the SMTP server. (Contact the Network Administrator.)
LAN Unable to program the Internet
Verify that the Fax Parameter #158 is
parameters or the autodialer with set to 2: Valid.
Email from a PC.

145
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

Fax Information Codes
Code
Mode
Phase
Description of Problem
Cause
731
RCV
LAN Dialer full while Relayed
Dial buffer for manual number dialing
Transmission Request was
(70 stations) are being used.
received.
800
Relay
The machine was requested to
Comm.
relay a document but has no Relay
Hub capability.
815 Conf. RCV
Mailbox is full.
816 Conf. Polled
"The received Polling Password
did not match. The machine does
not have Confidential Comm.
capability."
825 Conf. RCV
Parameter settings of the initial
Conf. Polled
sending station are not properly
set.
870 MEM XMT
Memory overflow occurred while
Multi-Copy
storing documents into memory.

146
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

4.9.

Diagnostic Codes (For Facsimile)

The 13-digit Diagnostic Code is provided for the service engineer to analyze how the communication was
performed. The code is recorded on the Journal.
Journal Example
************* -JOURNAL- ************************* DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 09:39********
NO. COMM. PAGES
01

OK

001

FILE DURATION X/R
129

00:00'42

XMT

IDENTIFICATION
123 456 789

DATE
MMM-dd

TIME
01:55

DIAGNOSTIC
C8649003C0000

1st digit

13th digit

- PANASONIC PANAFAX DX-800

********************************** - PANAFAX DX-800 - ****** -12345678901234567890- *******

1st Digit: Manufacturer Code
-: Not used/defined
Fax Diagnostic Codes
Definition
Data
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F

Manufacturer
Code
Casio
Canon
Sanyo
Sharp
Tamura
Toshiba
NEC
Oki
Hitachi
Xerox
Fujitsu
Matsushita
Mitsubishi
Murata
Ricoh

147
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

2nd Digit
-: Not used/defined

Data
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F

Fax Diagnostic Codes
Definition
ID (TSI, CSI, CIG)
RTN
DCN
Received
Received
Received
Received
Received
Received
Received
Received
Received
Received
Received
Received
Received
Received
Received
Received
Received
Received
Received
Received
Received
Received
Received
Received

STOP Button
Pressed
Pressed
Pressed
Pressed
Pressed
Pressed
Pressed
Pressed

3rd Digit
-: Not used/defined

Data
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F

Resolution (dpi)
S-Fine
400 x 400
300 x 300
-

Fax Diagnostic Codes
Definition
Paper Width
A4
A4
A4
A4
-

148
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

4th Digit
-: Not used/defined

Data

Scanning Rate
20 ms/line
5 ms/line
10 ms/line
40 ms/line
0 ms/line
20 ms/line
5 ms/line
10 ms/line
40 ms/line
0 ms/line

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F

Fax Diagnostic Codes
Definition
Resolution
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Fine
Fine
Fine
Fine
Fine
Fine
Fine
Fine

5th Digit
-: Not used/defined

Data
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F

Fax Diagnostic Codes
Definition
Memory/
Deferred Comm.
Dialing/RCV
Non-Memory
Manual
Non-Memory
Communication
Used
Manual
Non-Memory
Communication
Auto Dialing
Non-Memory
Used
Auto Dialing
Non-Memory
Auto RCV
Non-Memory
Used
Auto RCV
Non-Memory
Remote RCV
Non-Memory
Used
Remote RCV
Non-Memory
Manual
Memory
Communication
Used
Manual
Memory
Communication
Auto Dialing
Memory
Used
Auto Dialing
Memory
Auto RCV
Memory
Used
Auto RCV
Memory
Remote RCV
Memory
Used
Remote RCV
Memory
149

Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

6th Digit
-: Not used/defined
Fax Diagnostic Codes
Definition
Data
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F

Polling

XMT/RCV

Selective Comm.

Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

RCV
RCV
XMT
XMT
RCV
RCV
XMT
XMT
RCV
RCV
XMT
XMT
RCV
RCV
XMT
XMT

Off
Off
Off
Off
On
On
On
On
Off
Off
Off
Off
On
On
On
On

Password
Comm.
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On

7th Digit
-: Not used/defined

Data
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F

Sub-Address
Comm.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

Fax Diagnostic Codes
Definition
Confidential
Relayed Comm.
Comm.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

Turnaround
Polling
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

150
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

8th Digit
-: Not used/defined

Data
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F

Advanced
Comm.
Report XMT
Check & Call
Memory Transfer
Report XMT
Check & Call
Memory Transfer
-

Fax Diagnostic Codes
Definition
Cover Sheet
XMT
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

9th Digit
-: Not used/defined

Data
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F

Short Protocol
B
D
-

Fax Diagnostic Codes
Definition
Standard/ NonStandard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Non-Standard
Non-Standard
Non-Standard
Non-Standard
Non-Standard
Non-Standard
Non-Standard
Non-Standard

151
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

10th Digit
-: Not used/defined

Data
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F

Coding
MH
MR
MMR
MH
MR
MMR
-

Fax Diagnostic Codes
Definition
ECM
Yes
Yes
Yes
-

11th Digit
-: Not used/defined
Fax Diagnostic Codes
Definition
Data
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F

Symbol Rate
(V.34)
2400 sr
2800 sr
3000 sr
3200 sr
3429 sr
-

V.34
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-

152
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

12th Digit
-: Not used/defined

Data
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F

Modem Speed
2400 bps
4800 bps
7200 bps
9600 bps
TC 7200 bps
TC 9600 bps
12000 bps
14400 bps
-

Fax Diagnostic Codes
Definition
Modem Speed
(V.34)
2400 bps
4800 bps
7200 bps
9600 bps
12000 bps
14400 bps
16800 bps
19200 bps
21600 bps
24000 bps
26400 bps
28800 bps
31200 bps
33600 bps
-

13th Digit
-: Not used/defined

Data
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F

Fax Diagnostic Codes
Definition
Line Status
Private Line
-

153
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

5 Service Modes
5.1.
5.1.1.

Service Modes (For Facsimile)
Service Mode Table

The following service modes are provided to assist you in setting operational functions of the unit and
determining the condition of the unit.
No.
Service Mode
1 Function Parameter Setting
2
3

RAM Edit Mode
Print Parameter List / Reports

4

Modem Tests

5
6

Diagnostic
RAM Initialization

7
8

LBP Service Mode
Check & Call

9

System Maintenance

Description
Allows changes to the function parameters
(the home position, etc.).
Factory use only.
Prints the Function Parameter List, Page Memory Test, Printer
Report, All Document File, Protocol Trace, Toner Order Form.
Generates various binary, tonal and DTMF signals, by the
modem.
Performs various hardware tests.
Initialize RAM and restore the default value of the function
parameters.
Changes the Printer Parameters.
Allows input of information for Service Alert Report,
Maintenance Alert Report, Toner Order Form.
Used for Firmware Update and Sending a Received File
during a fatal printer error.

154
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

5.1.2.

Service Mode 1 (Function Parameter Setting)

Use the following procedure to change the function parameters.

Step
1

Service Mode 1
Operation or Unit Condition
Standby

LCD Display
MMM-dd-yyyy

15:00
00%

2

Press “FUNCTION” and then “7”.

3

Press “MONITOR” four times, then press “*”.

4

Press “1”.

5

6

Enter the Function Parameter Number.
Ex: Changing the "ALARM STATUS" -- Enter "001" and
press [SET].
Press “START”.

7

Enter the new setting value. Ex: Enter "3" for Constant.

8

Press “START”. The new value will be stored and the
next parameter will be displayed.

PARAMETER
#002
STOP COMM.JRNL?

9

Repeat steps 4 through 7 to change other Function
Parameters or Press “STOP” twice to return to standby.

MMM-dd-yyyy

SET MODE
ENTER NO. OR

(1-8)

SERVICE MODE
ENTER NO. OR
PARAMETER (000-199)
ENTER PARAMETER #_
PARAMETER
ALARM STATUS?

#001

ALARM STATUS:Timer
1:OFF 2:Tmr 3:CONST
ALARM STATUS:Const.
1:OFF 2:Tmr 3:CONST

15:00
00%

Note:
The following buttons provide these functions in the Service Mode:
“START”
“V”
“/\”

:
:
:

The new setting value is stored in the machine.
Scroll the function parameter number down.
Scroll the function parameter number up.

155
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

No.
000

001

002

003

004
005
006
007
008

009
010

011

012

013

014

Service Mode 1 : Function Parameter Table
Parameter
Selections
Function
MON/TEL DIAL 1 = Monitor
Selects whether the machine starts to TX
2 = TEL/DIAL
automatically during On-Hook dialing.
Monitor
: Start to TX after pressing START
TEL/DIAL : Start to TX automatically
ALARM STATUS 1 = OFF
Selects the No Paper or No Toner alarm status.
2 = Timer (6 sec.)
OFF
: Alarm is disabled.
3 = Constant
Timer
: Alarm will shut off after 6 seconds.
Constant : Alarm will not stop until "STOP" is
pressed or the error is cleared/
corrected.
STOP COMM.
1 = Off
Selects whether the machine prompts to print the
JRNL
2 = On
COMM. Journal when the printout condition is set to
INC and STOP is pressed during communication.
CONTINUOUS 1 = Off
Selects whether the Continuous Polling feature is
POLL
2 = Stn (Tx only)
enabled.
Stn:
Place the document(s) on the ADF then press the
Program Key [P4] to store or add the document(s)
into a polled file. (See Note 4)
NUMERIC ID
1 = Off (will not accept)
Selects whether the machine accepts and allows to
SET
2 = On (accepts)
set or change the Numeric ID.
Not Used
ID DISPLAY
1 = Number (Numeric ID)
Selects the priority of displaying the ID.
2 = Chara (Character ID)
JNL COLUMN
1 = Preset station name
Selects the contents of the ID to display on the
2 = Received ID
Journal.
MONITOR
1 = Off
Selects whether the Monitor is ON/OFF for
2 = On
monitoring fax signals.
(FOR SERVICE USE ONLY)
DC LOOP
1 = Off (Normal)
Selects a false Off Hook state for back to back
2 = On (Off Hook)
communication test.
TX LEVEL
00 = 0 dBm
Selects the TX signal output level, 0 to -15 dBm in 1
~
dBm steps. (Refer to Chapter 4.3.)
15 = -15 dBm
RX LEVEL
1 = -43 dBm
Selects the receiving sensitivity of -33/-38/-43/-48
2 = -38 dBm
dBm.
3 = -33 dBm
4 = -48 dBm
DTMF LEVEL
00 = 0 dBm
Selects the DTMF output level, 0 to -15 dBm in 1
~
dBm steps.
15 = -15 dBm
G3 RX EQL
1 = 0 dB
Selects the cable equalizer for G3 reception mode,
2 = 4 dB
0dB, 4dB, 8dB or 12dB.
3 = 8 dB
4 = 12 dB
G3 TX EQL
1 = 0 dB
Selects the cable equalizer for G3 transmission
2 = 4 dB
mode, 0dB, 4dB, 8dB or 12dB.
3 = 8 dB
4 = 12 dB

156
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

No.
Parameter
015 Not Used
~
016
017 TX START

018 RX START

019 ITU-T V.34

020 ITU-T ECM
021 EP TONE

Service Mode 1 : Function Parameter Table
Selections
Function

1 = 2400 bps
2 = 4800 bps
3 = 7200 bps
4 = 9600 bps
5 = TC7200 bps
6 = TC9600 bps
7 = 12000 bps
8 = 14400 bps
1 = 2400 bps
2 = 4800 bps
3 = 7200 bps
4 = 9600 bps
5 = TC7200 bps
6 = TC9600 bps
7 = 12000 bps
8 = 14400 bps
1 = Off
2 = On
3 = Select
1 = Off (Invalid)
2 = On (Valid)
1 = Off (without EP Tone)
2 = On (with EP Tone)

022 SIGNAL
INTERVAL

1 = 100 ms
2 = 200 ms
3 = 500 ms
023 TCF CHECK
1 = Normal (Short)
2 = Long
024 CED
1 = 1080 Hz (non ITU-T)
FREQUENCY
2 = 2100 Hz
025 COMM. START- 1 = 1’st response
UP
2 = 2’nd response
026 NONSTANDARD
027 SHORT
PROTOCOL B
028 SHORT
PROTOCOL D

1 = Off (Invalid)
2 = On (Valid)
1 = Off (Invalid)
2 = On (Valid)
1 = Off (Invalid)
2 = On (Valid)

029 REMOTE
DIAGNOSTICS

1 = Off (will not accept)
2 = On (accepts)

Selects the transmission modem start speed, 14400/
12000/TC9600/TC7200/9600/7200/4800/2400 bps.
Note:
This parameter is applicable only when
communicating with regular G3 machines. When
communicating with Super G3 (V.34) machines,
use Parameter No. 32.
Selects the reception modem start speed, 14400/
12000/TC9600/TC7200/9600/7200/4800/2400 bps.
Note:
This parameter is applicable only when
communicating with regular G3 machines. When
communicating with Super G3 (V.34) machines,
use Parameter No. 33.
Selects whether the ITU-T V.34 is Off, On or Select.
Select: Select whether the ITU-T V.34 is Off or On,
when entering Phone Book Dialing Numbers
or Manual Number Dialing.
Select the ECM mode.
Selects whether to add the echo protect tone on V.29
mode.
(Used when Echo Suppression is disabled.)
On : Add
Off : Do not add
Selects the time interval between the receiving
signal and the transmitting signal.
Selects the TCF check interval Long/Short
Selects the CED frequency 2100/1080 Hz
Selects the communication start-up condition (XMT
and Polling).
(Used when Echo Suppression is disabled.)
Selects own mode (Panafax mode).
Selects the short protocol mode.
Selects the short protocol mode. When activated, it
allows the machine to automatically store the
modem speed for each Auto Dial Number.
Selects whether the machine accepts Remote
Diagnostics from the service station.

157
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

No.
030

031
032
033
034

035

036
037

038
039

040

041

042
043

044

045

046

047

048
049

Service Mode 1 : Function Parameter Table
Parameter
Selections
Function
CED & 300 bps 1 = 75 ms
Selects the pause interval between the CED and the
2 = 1 sec
300 bps signal.
(Used when Echo Suppression is disabled.)
RTC = EOLx12 1 = Off (EOLx6)
Selects the RTC signal, EOLx6 or EOLx12.
2 = On (EOLx12)
V34 TX START 2400-33600bps
Selects the transmission modem start speed for V.34
communication, 33600-2400 bps.
V34 RX START 2400-33600bps
Selects the receiving modem start speed for V.34
communication, 33600-2400 bps.
V34 TX Symbol 2400-3429sr
Selects the transmission symbol rate for V.34, 3429/
Rate
3200/3000/2800/2400 sr.
Press “V” or “/\ “ to select the symbol rate.
V34 RX Symbol 2400-3429sr
Selects receiving symbol rate for V.34, 3429/3429/
Rate
3200/3000/2800/2400 sr.
Press “V” or “/\ “ to select the symbol rate.
Not Used
PROTOCOL
1 = Off (not displayed)
Selects whether to display the modem speed during
DISPLAY
2 = On (displayed)
communication.
Press “V” or “/\ “ to display.
Not Used
FLASH TIME
5 = 50 ms
Selects the pause interval before activating the Flash
~
key.
100 = 1000 ms
E/F TIME
5 = 50 ms
Selects the pause interval before activating the Flash
(Except for USA ~
key.
and Canada)
100 = 1000 ms
PAUSE TIME
1 = 1 sec.
Selects the pause interval from 1 sec. ~ 10 sec. for
~
dialing through a switchboard or for international
10 = 10 sec.
calls.
Not Used
REDIAL
0 = no waiting
Selects the redial interval from 0 to 15 minutes in 1
INTERVAL
~
minute steps.
15 = 15 minutes
REDIAL COUNT 0 = no redial
Selects the redial count from 0 to 15 times in 1 step
~
intervals.
15 = 15 times
Note:
In order to comply with the requirements TBR21
in the EC destinations, do not select 15 times.
RING DETECT 1 = 1 ring
Selects the ring detection count from 1 to 9 rings in 1
COUNT
~
ring step intervals.
9 = 9 rings
ON-HOOK TIME 0 = 0 sec.
Selects the on-hook time between sequential
~
communication calls in 1 second step intervals.
90 = 90 sec.
RESPONSE
1 = 1 sec.
Selects the waiting interval for the response after
WAIT
~
completing the dialing.
90 = 90 sec.
Not Used

158
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

No.
Parameter
050 RING DETECT
MODE
051 Not Used
052 PULSE RATE
053 Not Used
054
055 BUSY TONE
CHECK
056 DIAL TONE
CHECK
(Except for USA
and Canada)
057 DC LOOP
CHECK
(Except for USA
and Canada)
058 COMM.JRNL
+IMAGE
059 CONF. RCV
REPORT ON
060 VERSION
061
062

063
064

065

066

067
068

069

Service Mode 1 : Function Parameter Table
Selections
Function
1 = Normal
Selects the quality of ringer detection. Use if the line
2 = Rough
signal is out of regulation, set to "Rough" so that the
unit may detect the ringing signals.
1 = 10 pps
2 = 20 pps

Selects the dial pulse rate 10/20 pps.

1 = Off
2 = On
1 = Off
2 = On

Selects whether to detect the Busy Tone.

1 = Off (will not check)
2 = On (checks)

Selects whether the unit checks the DC Loop during
communication.

Selects whether to detect dial tone before dialing the
telephone number.

1 = Off (without image)
Selects whether the machine prints the COMM.
2 = On (with image)
Journal with image.
1 = Off
2 = On
Indicates the Host software
version.
TX/RX/PRT/CPY TX/RX/PRT/CPY
Displays the transmitted, received, total printed and
COUNTER
copied document count.
PRINT
1 = Off
Selects whether to print in the Fax Parameter List,
COUNTER
2 = On
the counter information that is displayed in the
Function Parameter No. 61.
Not Used
SILENT
01 = 1 sec.
Select silent detection timeout time (TAM I/F).
DETECTION
~
TIME OUT
60 = 60 sec.
SILENT
01 = 1 sec.
Select ring detection integration time (TAM I/F).
INTEGRATION ~
TIME
10 = 10 sec.
RING COUNT
01 = 1 sec.
Select ring detection count 1 to 99 times in one step
(TAM)
~
intervals on TAM I/F mode.
99 = 99 sec.
Not Used
NYSE FAX
1 = Off
Selects whether the machine will forward the
FORWARD
2 = On
incoming and outgoing faxes to a specified station.
(For USA and
Canada only)
Note:
Once this parameter is activated, Fax Forwarding
via Fax Parameter 054 is automatically disabled.
NYSE LOCAL
1 = INC
Selects the printing condition for the incoming faxes
PRINT
2 = ON (Always)
after FAX Forwarding.
INC. : Prints only if FAX Forwarding fails.
ON : Always prints.

159
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

No.
070

071

072

073
074
075

076
077

Service Mode 1 : Function Parameter Table
Parameter
Selections
Function
1. Selects the line disconnect condition during
LINE ERROR
1 = 128 lines
reception. If the number of line errors exceed this
2 = 256 lines
setting, the unit will disconnect the line.
3 = 512 lines
2. Selects the transmit condition of RTP/PIP or RTN/
4 = 1024 lines
PIN.
5 = 2048 lines
(Available if No.73 Error Detect is set to "LINES")
6 = Off
(See Note 1)
(will not disconnect line)
TOTAL ERROR 1 = 5%
Selects the transmit condition of RTP/PIP or RTN/
2 = 10%
PIN.
3 = 15%
(Available if No.73 Error Detect is set to "RATE".)
4 = 20%
(See Note 2)
CONTINUOUS 1 = Off (unlimited)
Selects the continuous total error criteria of Off/3/6 or
ERROR
2 = 3 lines/STD
12 lines in Standard mode. If continuous total error
3 = 6 lines/STD
exceeds this setting, the unit will transmit RTN/PIN.
4 = 12 lines/STD
(Available if No.73 Error Detect is set to "RATE".)
ERROR
1 = Lines
Selects the error detect condition Lines/Rate.
DETECT
2 = Rate
RTN RECEIVE 1 = Disconnect
Selects whether to disconnect the phone line or
2 = Continue
continue when "RTN" is received.
CODING
1 = MH (MH only)
Selects the coding scheme.
2 = MR (MH or MR)
3 = MMR
(MH or MR or MMR)
Not Used
RX JAM
1 = Off (unlimited)
Selects the maximum length of a received
LENGTH
2=2m
document that can be printed.
3=8m
Not Used

078
079
080 DOC. TOP
FEED

081 DOC. END
FEED
082 JAM LENGTH

-5.0 mm
~
+5.0 mm
-5.0 mm
~
+5.0 mm
1=1m
2=2m
3=8m
4 = Unlimited

Adjusts the distance between the scanning sensor
ON position and the scanning start position.
Adjusts the distance between the scanning sensor
OFF position and the scanning end position.
Selects the maximum length of the original that can
be scanned.

083 Not Used
084 LINE AS NO
PAPER

1 = Ring (ring)
2 = Busy (keep line busy)

Selects whether to ring or send a busy tone to the
remote station when the recording paper runs out or
the unit cannot receive because of any trouble.

085 Not Used
086 REDUCTION
FINE

1 = Off
2 = On

Selects whether the resolution is preset to Fine,
when sending with reduction B4→A4.
(For B4 Scanning Model only)

160
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

No.
087
088
089

Service Mode 1 : Function Parameter Table
Parameter
Selections
Function
DARKER LEVEL 0 = Lightest Contrast
Selects the contrast level.
~
0←
→15
NORMAL
15
=
Darkest
Contrast
Lightest←
→Darkest
LEVEL
LIGHTER
LEVEL
Not Used

090
091
092 SMOOTHING
093
~
109
110
111
112

1 = Off
2 = On

Selects whether the smoothing function is available.

Not Used

MAC ADDRESS
Not Used
INSERT EMAIL 1 = Off
TXT
2 = On

113 Not Used
114 SYMBOL SET
115 TIME ZONE

116 OVERWRITE
WARNING

1 = Standard
2 = Extended
1 = Scroll
2 = Direct

1 = Yes
2 = No

117 Not Used
~
119
120 FORWARD ALL 1 = Off
COM.
2 = On
(Except for USA
and Canada)

121 FAC LOCAL
1 = INC
PRINT
2 = ON (Always)
(Except for USA
and Canada)
122 LDAP
1 = Off
2 = On

Indicates the MAC Address.
Selects whether the Text Template (email message)
is programmable and added on all email sent in the
message body above the top line of text. (Up to 40
characters Programmed in the User Parameters.)
Note:
After enabling this feature, aside from entering
the text in the User Parameters, it also has to be
activated in each Auto Dial Number before it will
take effect. It does not work for Direct Dialed
Numbers.
Selects whether the extended symbols other than
"%" is available for Internet Parameters entry.
Selects the setting method for Time Zone.
Scroll : Allows using "Scroll Keys" to scroll through
the Time Zone Table.
Direct : Allows you to input the Time Zone directly,
(*) key to be used as a switch between +/-.
Selects whether the Overwrite Warning is included
on the Internet FAX Result Receipt when
programming the Auto Dialer via email.

Selects whether the machine will forward the
incoming and outgoing faxes to a specified station.
Note:
If Fax Parameter 054 is activated, Fax
Forwarding is enable.
Selects the printing condition for the incoming faxes
after FAX Forwarding.
INC. : Prints only if FAX Forwarding fails.
ON : Always prints.
When LDAP is used, specialize characters may be
displayed as different characters.
Available from May production.

161
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

No.
Parameter
123 Not Used
~
129
130 BUSY-ACK
TIMING
131

132

133

134

135
~
199

Service Mode 1 : Function Parameter Table
Selections
Function

• In Busy
• After Busy
• While Busy
CMD RCV GRD 1 min.
TIMER
~
15 min.
PRT DATA
1 min.
TIMER
~
15 min.
COLLATION
1 = Off
(PRT)
2 = On
3 = Auto
COLLATION
1 = Off
(PC I/F)
2 = On
3 = Auto
Not Used

Selects the signal timing between the BUSY and
ACK signal in Printer Interface Mode.
Selects the Guard Timer between each GDI
Command in Printer Interface Mode.
Selects the Guard Timer between each GDI Data
Frame in Printer Interface Mode.
Selects the Print Collation in Printer Interface Mode.
When “Auto” is selected, print collation will operate
according to the setting in Fax Parameter #65.
Selects the Print Collation in PC Interface Mode.
When “Auto” is selected, print collation will operate
according to the setting in Fax Parameter #65.

Note 1: Function Parameter No. 070 (Line Error) - Transmit condition of RTP/PIP or RTN/PIN

Signal
MCF/PIP
RTP/PIP
RTN/PIN

1:128
0-31
32-63
64-127

2:256
0-63
64-127
128-255

Setting
3:512
4:1024
0-127
0-255
128-255
256-511
256-511
512-1023

5:2048
0-511
512-1023
1024-2047

6:Off
Always
-

Note 2: Function Parameter No. 071 (Total Error) - Transmit condition of RTP/PIP or RTN/PIN

Signal
MCF/PIP
RTP/PIP
RTN/PIN

1:5%
0-2
3-4
5-

Setting
2:10%
3:15%
0-4
0-7
5-9
8-14
1015-

4:20%
0-9
10-19
20-

Note 3: The default setting of parameters depends on the destination’s specifications or regulations.
Print the Function Parameter List to confirm the default settings.
Note 4:
Continuous Polling (Station Mode)
This feature allows you to store or add documents into a polled file in memory.
To enable the Continuous Polling feature set Function Parameter No. 003 to "2:Station". The Program
Key [P4] will be assigned with the "Store-4-Polling" name automatically and cannot be changed.
To prepare the document(s) to be polled, simply place the document(s) on the ADF and then press the
Program Key [P4] to store or add the document(s) into a polled file.
(Note: If a regular polled file ([FUNCTION][3][2]) is stored in memory, the Program Key [P4] for
Continuous Polling will not be accepted.)
162
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

5.1.3.

Service Mode 3 (Printout of Lists, Reports and Test Results)

From this Service Mode you can print the Function Parameter List, Page Memory Test, Printer Report, All
Document File, Protocol Trace and the Toner Order Form.

5.1.3.1.

Function Parameter List

A list of all Function Parameters can be printed by the following procedure.

Step
1

Service Mode 3 - Function Parameter List
Operation or Unit Condition
Standby

LCD Display

MMM-dd-yyyy

2

Press “FUNCTION” and then “7”.

3

Press “MONITOR” four times, then press “*”.

4

Press “3”.

5

Press “START”.

6

After printing is completed, the unit returns to the
display in step 3.

SERVICE MODE
ENTER NO. OR

7

Press “STOP” to return to standby.

MMM-dd-yyyy

SET MODE
ENTER NO. OR

15:00
00%
(1-8)

SERVICE MODE
ENTER NO. OR
PRINTOUT (1-7)
1:FUNC. PARAM. LIST
* PRINTING *
FUNC. PARAMETER LIST

15:00
00%

163
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

Function Parameter List (Sample)
*************** -FUNCTION PARAMETER- ************** DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 12:07 *** P.01
000
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009

MON/TEL DIAL:[Monitor] Monitor
ALARM STATUS:[Timer] Timer
STOP COMM.JRNL:[On] On
CONTINUOUS POLL:[Off] Off
NUMERIC ID SET:[On] On
--------ID DISPLAY:[Chara] Chara
JNL COLUMN:[Station] Station
MONITOR:[Off] Off
DC LOOP:[Off] Off

050
051
052
053
054
055
056
057
058
059

RING DET MODE:[Normal] Normal
---------PULSE RATE:[10pps] 10pps
------------------BUSY TONE CHECK:[On] On
------------------COMM. JRNL +IMAGE:[On] On
CONF.RCV REPORT:[On] On

010
011
012
013
014
015
016
017
018
019

TX LEVEL:[-11dBm] -11dBm
RX LEVEL:[-43dBm] -43dBm
DTMF LEVEL:[-5dBm] -5dBm
G3 RX EQL:[ 0dB] 0dB
G3 TX EQL:[ 0dB] 0dB
----------------TX START:[14400bps ] 14400bps
RX START:[14400bps ] 14400bps
ITU-T V34:[On] On

060
061
062
063
064
065
066
067
068
069

VERSION:
DX-800 AAV11100AU
TX/RX/PRT/CPY:000050/000058/000074/000001
PRINT COUNTER:[Off] Off
---------SILENT DET.T.OUT:[60] 60
SILENT INT. TIME:[5sec] 5sec
RING COUNT(TAM):[5] 5
---------NYSE FAX FORWARD:[Off] Off
NYSE LOCAL PRINT:[Inc] Inc

020
021
022
023
024
025
026
027
028
029

ITU-T ECM:[On] On
EP TONE:[Off] Off
SIG. INTERVAL:[500ms] 500ms
TCF CHECK:[Normal] Normal
CED FREQ.:[2100Hz] 2100Hz
COMM. START-UP:[1'st] 1'st
NON-STANDARD:[On] On
SHORT PROTOCOL B:[On] On
SHORT PROTOCOL D:[On] On
REMOTE DIAG.:[On] On

070
071
072
073
074
075
076
077
078
079

LINE ERROR:[128] 128
TOTAL ERROR:[ 10] 10
CONTI. ERROR:[Off] Off
ERROR DETECT:[Rate] Rate
RTN RECEIVE:[Discon] Discon
CODING:[MMR] MMR
---------RX JAM LENGTH:[Off] Off
-------------------

030
031
032
033
034
035
036
037
038
039

CED & 300bps:[75ms] 75ms
RTC=EQL x 12:[Off] Off
V34 TX START:[33600bps] 33600bps
V34 RX START:[33600bps] 33600bps
V34 TX SR:[3429sr] 3429sr
V34 RX SR:[3429sr] 3429sr
--------PROTOCOL DISPLAY:[Off] Off
--------FLASH TIME:[500ms] 500ms

080
081
082
083
084
085
086
087
088
089

DOC TOP FEED:[0.0mm] 0.0mm
DOC END FEED:[0.0mm] 0.0mm
JAM LENGTH:[ 2 m] 2 m
---------LINE AS NOPAPER:[Ring] Ring
------------------DARKER LEVEL:[4] 4
NORMAL LEVEL:[8] 8
LIGHTER LEVEL:[12] 12

040
041
042
043
044
045
046
047
048
049

--------PAUSE TIME:[3sec] 3 sec
--------REDIAL INTERVAL:[3min] 3 min
REDIAL COUNT:[5] 5
RING DET. COUNT:[2] 2
ON-HOOK TIME:[5sec] 5 sec
RESPONSE WAIT:[55sec] 55 sec
-----------------

090
091
092
093
094
095
096
097
098
099

------------------SMOOTHING:[On] On
----------------------------------------------------------------

Note:The power must be reset for the new parameter settings to take effect.
- PANASONIC ******************************** - PANAFAX DX-800 - ******* - 12345678901234567890 -*********

164
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

Function Parameter List (Sample)
************* -FUNCTION PARAMETER- ************* DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 12:07 ***P.02
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119

MAC ADRESS:0800230078DE
---------INSERT EMAIL TXT:[Off] Off
---------SYMBOL SET:[Std] Std
TIME ZONE:[Scroll] Scroll
OVERWRITE WARNING:[Yes] Yes
---------PRT FWD COMM JNL:[Inc] Inc
----------

160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139

BUSY-ACK TIMING:[In Busy] In Busy
CMD RCV GRD TIMER:[3min] 3min
PRT DATA TIMER:[3min] 3min
COLLATION(PRT):[Off] Off
COLLATION (PC):[Auto] Auto
----------------------------------------------

180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Note:The power must be reset for the new parameter settings to take effect.
-PANASONIC ******************************** -PANAFAX DX-800- ****** -12345678901234567890- ***********

Note:
1. [ ] - Factory Default
2. The contents of the Function Parameter List may vary depending on the destination’s regulations.
3. “ * ” mark will be shown on the left side of number when setting was changed from default.

165
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

5.1.3.2.

Page Memory Test

A test pattern prints out for checking the page memory and the printer mechanism using the following
procedure.

Step
1
Standby

Service Mode 3 - Page Memory Test
Operation or Unit Condition

LCD Display
MMM-dd-yyyy

2

Press “FUNCTION” and then “7”.

3

Press “MONITOR” four times, then press “*”.

4

Press “3”.

5

Press “3” and “START”.

6

After printing is completed, the unit returns to the
display in step 3.

SERVICE MODE
ENTER NO. OR

7

Press “STOP” to return to standby.

MMM-dd-yyyy

SET MODE
ENTER NO. OR

15:00
00%
(1-8)

SERVICE MODE
ENTER NO. OR
PRINTOUT (1-7)
1:FUNC. PARAM. LIST
* PRINTING *
PAGE MEMORY TEST

15:00
00%

MMM-dd-yyyy 15:00
VERSION: DX-800 AAV1xxxxAU
OPTION BOARD:
MEMORY SIZE:
(4MB)
TX/RX/PRT/CPY:000123/000456/000789/000333
MAC ADRESS:0800230078DE
SHIPMENT SET

166
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

5.1.3.3.

Printer Report

All printer errors are logged on the Printer Report which can be printed by the following procedure.

Step
1

Service Mode 3 - Printer Report
Operation or Unit Condition
Standby

LCD Display
MMM-dd-yyyy

2

Press “FUNCTION” and then “7”.

3

Press “MONITOR” four times, then press “*”.

4

Press “3”.

5

Press “4” and “START”.

7

After printing is completed, the unit returns to the
display in step 3.

SERVICE MODE
ENTER NO. OR

8

Press “STOP” to return to standby.

MMM-dd-yyyy

15:00
00%

SET MODE
ENTER NO. OR

(1-8)

SERVICE MODE
ENTER NO. OR
PRINTOUT (1-7)
1:FUNC. PARAM. LIST
* PRINTING *
PRINTER REPORT

15:00
00%

167
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

**************-PRINTER REPORT-********************* DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 19:02********
LAST PRINT ERROR

: MMM-dd 15:38 NO. 001-12

CUSTOMER ID

: 1234567890123456

FAX ROM VERSION

: DX-800 AAV1xxxxAU

TRANSMIT COUNTER
RECEIVE COUNTER
COPY COUNTER
PRINT COUNTER

:
:
:
:

PRINT ERROR

:

****************************** -

000475
000398
001083
001575
1.MMM-dd-yyyy 15:38 NO.001-12
2.MMM-dd-yyyy 10:48 NO.001-11
3.MMM-dd-yyyy 15:23 NO.004-36

PANAFAX DX-800

PANASONIC
- ***** - 12345678901234567890

- ******

168
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

1. Printer Error Code Table
Printer Error Code Table
Error
Description of Problems
Code
00 No problem detected.
11 Timing Sensor did not turn ON within a
certain period of time.
(Original Cassette Feeder)

Cause

12

Timing Sensor did not turn ON within a
certain period of time.
(250 sheet Optional Cassette Feeder)

14

Timing Sensor did not turn OFF within a
certain period of time.

15

Paper Exit Sensor did not turn ON within a
certain period of time.
Paper Exit Sensor did not turn OFF within a
certain period of time.
Timing Sensor detected paper while
initializing the unit.
Paper Exit Sensor detected paper while
initializing the unit.
The temperature of the Fuser Roller
remained low even after the circuit was
activated.
Abnormally high Fuser Roller temperature
after the circuit was de-activated.

16
17
18
22

23

1. Recording Paper misfeeding, Paper Feed
Roller defective.
2. Drive Clutch defective.
3. Timing Sensor defective.
1. Recording Paper misfeeding, Paper Feed
Roller defective.
2. Drive Clutch defective.
3. Timing Sensor defective.
1. Recording Paper Jam.
2. Timing Sensor defective.
3. Incorrect paper size setting.
1. Recording Paper Jam.
2. Paper Exit Sensor defective.
1. Recording Paper Jam.
2. Paper Exit Sensor defective.
1. Recording Paper jammed in the unit.
2. Timing Sensor defective.
1. Recording Paper jammed in the unit.
2. Paper Exit Sensor defective.
1. Fuser Unit defective.
2. SC PCB defective.
3. Power Supply Unit defective.
1. Fuser Unit defective.
2. SC PCB defective.
3. Power Supply Unit defective.
1. Fuser Unit defective.
2. SC PCB defective.
3. Power Supply Unit defective.
1. Thermistor defective (Fuser Unit).
2. SC PCB defective.
1. Thermistor defective (Fuser Unit).
2. SC PCB defective.
3. Power Supply Unit defective.
1. LSU defective.

24

The temperature of the Fuser Roller was not
controlled within a certain margin.

25

Thermistor open.
(See Note)
Thermistor detected temperature over 392°F
(200°C).
(See Note)
The Tetragon Motor did not reach a constant
speed of 8,898 rpm (400 dpi)/13,347 rpm
(600 dpi) within a specified period of time.
The Tetragon Motor did not maintain a
1. LSU defective.
constant speed of 8,898 rpm (400 dpi)/
13,347 rpm (600 dpi).
HSYNC signal abnormal.
1. LSU defective.
2. SC PCB defective.
A/D Converter error.
1. SC PCB defective.
Unit detected “No Toner Cartridge”.
1. Toner Cartridge not installed.
2. Toner Sensor defective.
Unit detected “Printer Cover Open”.
1. Printer Cover is not closed.
2. ILS PCB defective.

26

31

32

36
54
61
63

169
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

Printer Error Code Table
Error
Description of Problems
Code
64 Unit detected “No Cassette”.

Cause
1.
2.
1.
2.
1.
1.

65 Unit detected “Out of Paper”.
81 No response from LP Controller.
82 Illegal response from LP Controller.

Cassette not installed or partially open.
Cassette Sensor defective.
The Paper Cassette is empty.
Paper Detect Sensor defective.
SC PCB defective.
SC PCB defective.

Note:
If an 021 series Error Code occurs, 021-25 (Thermistor Open) or 021-26 (Thermistor detected
temperarure over 392°F (200°C), a pre-programmed recovery safety software is activated to protect the
unit and the service personnel during abnormal increase in temperature.
Once activated, this program is downloaded into the LPC PC Board’s SRAM, disabling the Fuser Lamp
and preventing it from turning ON again.
In order to reset this circuit, please follow the procedure below.
1) Reset the LBP Fuser by using Service Mode 7-1-2 (Section 5.1.7.) and Power OFF/ON.
2) Replace the Thermistor or Fuser Unit. If the problem persists.
3) Replace the SC PCB.

170
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

2. Printer Error Detail Explanation
Recording Paper Jam Detection
Feed Solenoid
(nADF1) (CN14, 2)

Recording
Paper
Size Setting

A sec

Legal

0.2

A

A4

0.2

Letter

0.2

Timing Sensor
(nRSEN)

1.35s
E11
Timing Sensor
did not turn ON
0.55s
E14
Timing Sensor
did no turn OFF

4.5s

E001 will be logged when
nRSEN does not go low
between 0.55 sec to 4.5 sec
after pADF1 goes high.

E007 will be logged when nRSEN
does not go OFF between B sec to
C sec after nRSENA goes ON.

B C

Recording
Paper
Size Setting

B sec

C sec

Legal

9.05

10.25

A4

7.48

8.68

Letter

7.00

8.20

Paper Exit
Sensor Timing
(nESEN) (CN7, 4)

E15
Paper Exit
Sensor did not
turn ON

E16
Paper Exit
Sensor did not
turn OFF

4.25s
3.85s
5.05s

E007 will be logged when nESEN does not go low
between 3.85 sec or 5.05 sec after Timing Sensor goes low.

E007 will be logged when nESEN does not go high
between D sec or E sec after nESEN goes low.

D

E

Recording
Paper
Size Setting

D sec

E sec

Legal

8.12

10.25

A4

6.56

8.68

Letter

6.08

8.20

171
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

Fuser Error Detection
( C)
E26 will be logged.

200
E24 will be logged if Thermistor detects 180 C
for more than 3 sec. (Thermostat will open.)

180

170

E23 will be logged if Thermistor
detects 175 C or higher for 5 min.
after Fuser Lamp is turned Off.

OFF
165

160
155

Fuser Roller Temperature

150

E24 will be logged if
Thermistor detects less
than 140 C for 3 sec during
the print process.

70

E22 will be logged when
temperature does not rise.

25
E25 will be logged when
temperature does not go up
at low temperature
environment.

14

Approx. 30 sec
Time

172
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

Laser Unit (LSU) Error Detection
nPRNT
Print Start

nPMON
(CN69-3)
Tetragon Motor ON

nPMRY
(CN69-2)

Normal Condition

Tetragon Motor Ready

Motor ON

20 sec

3 sec

E31
nPMRY
Tetragon Motor does not
reach constant speed
during wake up state.

nPMRY does not go low for more than 2 sec during 3 sec to
20 sec after nPMON goes low.

E32
nPMRY
Tetragon Motor does not
maintain constant speed.

nPMON

nPMRY:ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

nPMRY goes high 4 times during printing.

nVIDEO
(CN68-6)
Laser Timing Signal

1.7 ms (400 dpi)
1.1 ms (600 dpi)

Normal Condition

nHSYNC
(CN68-2)
Laser Timing Detection

E36
nHSYNC
(CN68-2)
Can not detect
Laser Timing
nHSYNC timing signal is less than 60% of nVIDEO signal.

173
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

Out of Toner Detection
Toner Sensor Output Signal
Status A
(Enough toner in the cartridge)

Max. - min. voltage is less than 1.0V
3V

Min. voltage is more than 1.4V

Status B
2V

(Remaining toner
is getting low)

Max. - min. voltage is less than 0.25V
Min. voltage is less than 1.4V
1.4V
Status C
(Almost no toner)
1V

Mixing blade
rotating cycle

Max. - min. voltage is less than 0.08V
Min. voltage is less than 1.4V

0V

Toner Sensor output may change when the mixing blade passes above the Toner Sensor. Therefore
the output signal has a max. voltage and min. voltage during mixing blade rotation cycle (4.6 sec.).
E043
If the unit detects Status B, 10 times during printing, the machine recognizes that the remaining toner is
low and the display shows "REPLACE TONER CARTRIDGE".
E041
After detecting E043 and the LBP Print Available Counter Value reaches "0" (after 100 pages are
printed), the unit logs E041 (OUT OF TONER).
E045
If the unit detects Status C when power is On, the unit logs E045 and displays "NO CARTRIDGE". The
unit will recover when detecting Status A after a new toner cartridge is installed.

174
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

5.1.3.4.

All Document Files

Print the document files from the Flash Memory.

Step
1

Service Mode 3 - All Document Files
Operation or Unit Condition
Standby

LCD Display
MMM-dd-yyyy

2

Press “FUNCTION” and then “7”.

3

Press “MONITOR” four times, then press “*”.

4

Press “3”.

5

Press “5” and “START”.

6

After printing is completed, the unit returns to the
display in step 3.

SERVICE MODE
ENTER NO. OR

7

Press “STOP” to return to standby.

MMM-dd-yyyy

SET MODE
ENTER NO. OR

15:00
00%
(1-8)

SERVICE MODE
ENTER NO. OR
PRINTOUT (1-7)
1:FUNC. PARAM. LIST
* PRINTING *
ALL DOCUMENT FILES

15:00
00%

Note:
Documents received with a Confidential Code will not be printed by this operation.

175
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

5.1.3.5.

Protocol Trace

Print a Protocol Trace Report for the previous communication.

Step
1
Standby

Service Mode 3 - Protocol Trace
Operation or Unit Condition

MMM-dd-yyyy

2

Press “FUNCTION” and then “7”.

3

Press “MONITOR” four times, then press “*”.

4

Press “3”.

5

Press “6” and “START”.
Note:
If there were no transmission or reception mode
after the power is last tured on, you cannot print the
Protocol Trace Report.
After printing is completed, the unit returns to the
display in step 3.

6
7

LCD Display
15:00
00%

SET MODE
ENTER NO. OR

(1-8)

SERVICE MODE
ENTER NO. OR
PRINTOUT (1-7)
1:FUNC. PARAM. LIST

Press “STOP” to return to standby.

* PRINTING *
PROTOCOL TRACE

SERVICE MODE
ENTER NO. OR
MMM-dd-yyyy

15:00
00%

*************** PROTOCOL LOG REPORT ****************** DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 16:56 ***P.01

STATUS
MODE
SPEED
REMOTE CAPA.
LOCAL CAPA.

:
:
:
:
:

OK
ECM-TX (STANDARD)
9600bps 00MS/L
DIS 00 CE B9 C4 80 12
TSI 2B 20 20 20 38 37 2B 2B 2B 2B
39 38 36 36 35 34 37 38 38 30
DCS 00 C6 F8 44

COMMAND LOG.
REMOTE
: NSF
CSI
DIS
CFR
LOCAL
:
TSI
DCS
PIX
PPS-EOP
-----------------------------------------------------------------REMOTE
: MCF
LOCAL
:
DCN
-PANASONIC************************************ -PANAFAX DX-800- ***********-12345678901234567890-******

176
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

5.1.3.6.

Toner Cartridge Order Form

The Toner Cartridge Order Form can be printed out manually by the following procedure.

Step
1

Service Mode 3 - Toner Cartridge Order Form
Operation or Unit Condition
LCD Display
Standby

MMM-dd-yyyy

2

Press “FUNCTION” and then “7”.

3

Press “MONITOR” four times, then press “*”.

4

Press “3”.

5

Press “7” and “START”.

6

After printing is completed, the unit returns to the
display in step 3.

SERVICE MODE
ENTER NO. OR

7

Press “STOP” to return to standby.

MMM-dd-yyyy

SET MODE
ENTER NO. OR

15:00
00%
(1-8)

SERVICE MODE
ENTER NO. OR
PRINTOUT (1-7)
1:FUNC. PARAM. LIST
* PRINTING *
TONER ORDER FORM

15:00
00%

177
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

For USA and Canada
*************************************
>
TONER CARTRIDGE ORDER FORM
<
*************************************

**** The toner supply in your facsimile machine is running low **** (1)
To order a replacement Cartridge from your Authorized Dealer
Panafax Corp.(2)
by Phone:
by Fax:

1 201 111 5555 (3)
1 201 111 4444 (4)

Thank you for your order.

Customer Name and Address
=========================
Ship to:

Bill to:

Attention:

Attention:

Phone No.:

Phone No.:

Customer ID: ABC COMPANY (5)

P.O. No.(if required):

Toner Cartridge: UG-5510

(6)

Serial No.:

Quantity Required:

/
Print your name and title

/

Signature & Date

Explanation of Contents
(1) Low Toner Message (Fixed)

“The toner supply in your machine is running low”

(2) Dealer Name

Up to 25 digits

(3) Order Tel #

Up to 36 digits

(4) Order Fax #

Up to 36 digits

(5) Customer ID

Up to 16 characters (User Identification Code)

(6) Toner Cartridge #

UG-5510 (For USA / Canada) for DX-800

178
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

For Other Destinations
*************************************
>
TONER CARTRIDGE ORDER FORM
<
*************************************

**** The toner supply in your facsimile machine is running low **** (1)
To order a replacement Cartridge from your Authorized Dealer
Panafax Corp.(2)
by Phone:
by Fax:

1 201 111 5555 (3)
1 201 111 4444 (4)

Thank you for your order.

Customer Name and Address
=========================
Ship to:

Bill to:

Attention:

Attention:

Phone No.:

Phone No.:

Customer ID: ABC COMPANY (5)

P.O. No.(if required):

Toner Cartridge: UG-3350

(6)

Serial No.:

Quantity Required:

/
Print your name and title

/

Signature & Date

Explanation of Contents
(1) Low Toner Message (Fixed)

“The toner supply in your machine is running low”

(2) Dealer Name

Up to 25 digits

(3) Order Tel #

Up to 36 digits

(4) Order Fax #

Up to 36 digits

(5) Customer ID

Up to 16 characters (User Identification Code)

(6) Toner Cartridge #

UG-3350 (For Other Destinations) for DX-600

179
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

5.1.4.

Service Mode 4 (Modem Test)

5.1.4.1.

Binary Signal

This Service Mode is used to check the binary signal output.
Signals can be output to the line using the following procedure.

Step
1
Standby

Service Mode 4 - Binary Signal
Operation or Unit Condition

LCD Display
MMM-dd-yyyy

15:00
00%

2

Press “FUNCTION” and then “7”.

3

Press “MONITOR” four times, then press “*”.

4

Press “4”.

5

Press “START”.

6

Enter the signal number (1-9) to select the binary
signal.

SIGNAL TEST
300bps

7

Press "CLEAR" to end the signal generation. To select
another signal, repeat step 6.

SIGNAL TEST
IDLE (ENTER 1-9)

8

Press "STOP" twice to return to standby.

MMM-dd-yyyy

SET MODE
ENTER NO. OR

(1-8)

SERVICE MODE
ENTER NO. OR
MODEM TEST (1-5)
1:SIGNAL TEST
SIGNAL TEST
IDLE (ENTER 1-9)

15:00
00%

Binary Signal Table
Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Signals
V21 300bps
V27ter 2400bps
V27ter 4800bps
V29 7200bps
V29 9600bps
V17 TC7200bps
V17 TC9600bps
V33 12000bps
V33 14400bps

180
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

5.1.4.2.

Tonal Signal

This Service Mode is used to check the tonal signal output.
Signals can be output to the line using the following procedure.

Step
1

Service Mode 4 - Tonal Signal
Operation or Unit Condition
Standby

LCD Display
MMM-dd-yyyy

15:00
00%

2

Press “FUNCTION” and then “7”.

3

Press “MONITOR” four times, then press “*”.

4

Press “4”.

5

Press “2” and “START”.

6

Enter the signal number (1-7) to select the binary
signal.

TONAL TEST
1080Hz

7

Press "CLEAR" to end the signal generation. To select
another signal, repeat step 6.

TONAL TEST
IDLE (ENTER 1-7)

8

Press "STOP" twice to return to standby.

MMM-dd-yyyy

SET MODE
ENTER NO. OR

(1-8)

SERVICE MODE
ENTER NO. OR
MODEM TEST (1-5)
1:SIGNAL TEST
TONAL TEST
IDLE (ENTER 1-7)

15:00
00%

Tonal Signal Table
Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Signals
462 Hz
1080 Hz
1100 Hz
1300 Hz
1650 Hz
1850 Hz
2100 Hz

181
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

5.1.4.3.

DTMF Signal

This Service Mode is used to check the DTMF (Dual Tone Multi Frequency) signal output.
The DTMF signal can be generated using the following procedure.

Step
1
Standby

Service Mode 4 - DTMF Signal
Operation or Unit Condition

LCD Display
MMM-dd-yyyy

2

Press “FUNCTION” and then “7”.

3

Press “MONITOR” four times, then press “*”.

4

Press “4”.

5

Press “3” and “START”.

6a

Press "START" for DTMF Single Tone Generation.

7a

Enter the signal number (1-8) to select the DTMF
signal.

6b

Press "2" and "START" for Dual Tone Generation.

7b

Enter the signal number (0-#) to select the DTMF Dual
tone.

DUAL TONE
(0)

8

Press "CLEAR" to end the signal generation. To select
another signal, repeat step 7a or 7b.

SINGLE TONE
ENTER (1-8)

9

Press "STOP" twice to return to standby.

MMM-dd-yyyy

15:00
00%

SET MODE
ENTER NO. OR

(1-8)

SERVICE MODE
ENTER NO. OR
MODEM TEST (1-5)
1:SIGNAL TEST
DTMF TEST (1-2)
1.SINGLE

DTMF Single Tone Table
Number
DTMF Signal Tones
1
697 Hz
2
770 Hz
3
852 Hz
4
941 Hz
5
1209 Hz
6
1336 Hz
7
1477 Hz
8
1633 Hz

SINGLE TONE
ENTER (1-8)
SINGLE TONE
697Hz
DUAL TONE
ENTER (0-#)

15:00
00%

DTMF Dual Tone Table
Number
DTMF Dual Tones
0
941 Hz + 1336 Hz
1
697 Hz + 1209 Hz
2
697 Hz + 1336 Hz
3
697 Hz + 1477 Hz
4
770 Hz + 1209 Hz
5
770 Hz + 1336 Hz
6
770 Hz + 1477 Hz
7
852 Hz + 1209 Hz
8
852 Hz + 1336 Hz
9
852 Hz + 1477 Hz
*
941 Hz + 1209 Hz
#
941 Hz + 1477 Hz

182
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

5.1.4.4.

Binary Signal (V.34)

This Service Mode is used to check the binary signal output.
Signals can be output to the line using the following procedure. (V.34)

Step
1

Service Mode 4 - Binary Signal
Operation or Unit Condition
Standby

LCD Display
MMM-dd-yyyy

15:00
00%

2

Press “FUNCTION” and then “7”.

3

Press “MONITOR” four times, then press “*”.

4

Press “4”.

5

Press “5” and “START”.

6

Enter the signal number (01-61) and press [START] to
select the binary signal.

V.34 MODEM TEST
V34 2400sr 2400bps

7

Press "CLEAR" to end the signal generation. To select
another signal, repeat step 6.

V.34 MODEM TEST
ENTER NO.

8

Press "STOP" twice to return to standby.

MMM-dd-yyyy

SET MODE
ENTER NO. OR

(1-8)

SERVICE MODE
ENTER NO. OR
MODEM TEST (1-5)
1:SIGNAL TEST
V.34 MODEM TEST
ENTER NO.

15:00
00%

Binary Signal Table
Number
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Signals
V34 2400 sr 2400 bps
V34 2400 sr 4800 bps
V34 2400 sr 7200 bps
V34 2400 sr 9600 bps
V34 2400 sr 12000 bps
V34 2400 sr 14400 bps
V34 2400 sr 16800 bps
V34 2400 sr 19200 bps
V34 2400 sr 21600 bps
V34 2800 sr 4800 bps
V34 2800 sr 7200 bps
V34 2800 sr 9600 bps
V34 2800 sr 12000 bps
V34 2800 sr 14400 bps
V34 2800 sr 16800 bps
V34 2800 sr 19200 bps
V34 2800 sr 21600 bps
V34 2800 sr 24000 bps
V34 2800 sr 26400 bps
V34 3000 sr 4800 bps
V34 3000 sr 7200 bps

Number
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42

Signals
V34 3000 sr 9600 bps
V34 3000 sr 12000 bps
V34 3000 sr 14400 bps
V34 3000 sr 16800 bps
V34 3000 sr 19200 bps
V34 3000 sr 21600 bps
V34 3000 sr 24000 bps
V34 3000 sr 26400 bps
V34 3000 sr 28800 bps
V34 3200 sr 4800 bps
V34 3200 sr 7200 bps
V34 3200 sr 9600 bps
V34 3200 sr 12000 bps
V34 3200 sr 14400 bps
V34 3200 sr 16800 bps
V34 3200 sr 19200 bps
V34 3200 sr 21600 bps
V34 3200 sr 24000 bps
V34 3200 sr 26400 bps
V34 3200 sr 28800 bps
V34 3200 sr 31200 bps

Number
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61

Signals
V34 3429 sr 4800 bps
V34 3429 sr 7200 bps
V34 3429 sr 9600 bps
V34 3429 sr 12000 bps
V34 3429 sr 14400 bps
V34 3429 sr 16800 bps
V34 3429 sr 19200 bps
V34 3429 sr 21600 bps
V34 3429 sr 24000 bps
V34 3429 sr 26400 bps
V34 3429 sr 28800 bps
V34 3429 sr 31200 bps
V34 3429 sr 33600 bps
ANSam
CM
JM
INFO0c & TONEB
INFO0c & TONEA
PPh & AC & ALT

183
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

5.1.5.

Service Mode 5 (Diagnostic)

5.1.5.1.

CCD Test

This Service Mode is used to check the CCD.
Use the following procedure to initiate the test.

Step
1
Standby

Service Mode 5
Operation or Unit Condition

LCD Display
MMM-dd-yyyy

2

Press “FUNCTION” and then “7”.

3

Press “MONITOR” four times, then press “*”.

4

Press “5”.

5

Press “START”.
The Scanner will be active.

1:CCD TEST
* CHECK NOW *

6

Press "STOP" twice to return to standby.

MMM-dd-yyyy

SET MODE
ENTER NO. OR

15:00
00%
(1-8)

SERVICE MODE
ENTER NO. OR
DIAGNOSTIC (1-2)
1:CCD TEST

15:00
00%

184
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

5.1.5.2.

LCD / LED Test

This Service Mode is used to check the LCD and LEDs on the Control Panel.
Use the following procedure to initiate the test.

Step
1

Service Mode 5
Operation or Unit Condition
Standby

LCD Display
MMM-dd-yyyy

2

Press “FUNCTION” and then “7”.

3

Press “MONITOR” four times, then press “*”.

4

Press “5”.

5

Press ”2” and “START”.
1) LCDs display as shown at right.
2) All LEDs will be lit.

6

Press "STOP" twice to return to standby.

15:00
00%

SET MODE
ENTER NO. OR

(1-8)

SERVICE MODE
ENTER NO. OR
DIAGNOSTIC (1-2)
1:CCD TEST
2:LCD/LED TEST
* CHECK NOW *

MMM-dd-yyyy

15:00
00%

185
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

5.1.6.

Service Mode 6 (RAM Initialization)

Initializes the RAM and restores the Function Parameters to their default values.
Note:
This operation should be performed when the unit is first installed.

Step
1
Standby

Service Mode 6
Operation or Unit Condition

LCD Display
MMM-dd-yyyy

2

Press “FUNCTION” and then “7”.

3

Press “MONITOR” four times, then press “*”.

4

Press “6”.

5

Press “V” or “/\ “ to select the initialization mode.
(See Table)

6

Press “START”.

7

Press "STOP" twice to return to standby.

SET MODE
ENTER NO. OR

15:00
00%
(1-8)

SERVICE MODE
ENTER NO. OR
* RAM INITIALIZE *
ENTER NO. OR
* RAM INITIALIZE *
LOGO/ID/PSWD CLEAR
LOGO/ID/PSWD CLEAR
* COMPLETED *
MMM-dd-yyyy

15:00
00%

RAM Initialization Table
No.
Initialize Mode
99 SHIPMENT SET (A)
98

SHIPMENT SET (B)

97
16
15
14
13
12
11
*

FLASH MEMORY CLEAR
LBP LOG CLEAR
LOGO/ID/PSWD CLR
ALL JOB CLEAR
PROG. DIAL CLEAR
AUTO DIAL CLEAR
JOURNAL CLEAR
PARAMETER INIT.

Description
Deletes all setting information, except parameter number
80 and 81, then set default values. (See Note)
Deletes all setting information, except parameter number
61, 80 and 81, then set default values. (See Note)
Deletes all information in the Flash Memory.
Clears the Printer Error Log.
Clears the Logo, ID, Polling Password.
Clears all Jobs stored in Flash Memory.
Clears the Program keys.
Clears the One-touch, ABBR Numbers and Phone Books.
Clears the Journal contents.
Restores the Fax and Function Parameters to default
values.

186
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

5.1.7.

Service Mode 7 (LBP Service Mode)

This Service Mode is used to change printer parameters and verify printer information.
Use the following procedure to change printer parameter.

Step
1

Service Mode 7
Operation or Unit Condition
Standby

MMM-dd-yyyy

2

Press “FUNCTION” and then “7”.

3

Press “MONITOR” four times, then press “*”.

4

Press “7”.

5

1) Press "START" for printer parameter settings.
Press "2" and "START" to get the printer information.
Ex: Enter "START" for printer parameter settings.
Press "3" and “START”.
Then enter the number of pages.
Ex: Enter "50" and press "START".
Press "\/" or "/\" to select another Parameter Name
(See Table) or press "CLEAR" to return to step 4.

6

7
8

1

SET MODE
ENTER NO. OR

2
3

Parameter Name
PRINTER COUNTER
LBP FUSER RESET
OUT OF TONER

\/ /\

PRINT AVAILABLE

\/ /\

LBP MEMORY CAPACITY

2

15:00
00%
(1-8)

SERVICE MODE
ENTER NO. OR
LP SERVICE MODE (1-2)
1:LBP PARAMETER SET

Repeat step 5 through 7 to request operation, or press
"STOP" twice to return to standby.

Sub-Code
1

LCD Display

LBP PARAMETER SET
1.PRINTER COUNTER

LBP PARAMETER SET
3.OUT OF TONER

LP SERVICE MODE (1-2)
1.LBP PARAMETER SET
MMM-dd-yyyy

15:00
00%

Description
Displays and resets the Printer and Paper
Cassette(s) counters.
Clears the LBP Fuser Error.
Sets the number of pages to print after low toner
is detected. (Factory default = 100, adjustable
from 0 - 999)
Shows the remaining number of allowable
printable pages after low toner has been
detected (Counter Only).
Shows the Page Memory Capacity.

187
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

5.1.8.
5.1.8.1.

Service Mode 8 (Check & Call)
Overview

This feature enables the Authorized Servicing Dealers to manage and improve the Fax machine
maintenance to their customers by alerting them of equipment problems. It also can be used as a Supply
Sales Tool by alerting the Dealer that the unit is running Low on Toner. The function overview is as follows:
1. The machine’s printer error information is stored in the Printer Report.
2. The printer report can be manually printed when required.
3. When printer errors occurs, the unit can automatically transmit the Service Alert Report to the preregistered telephone number.
4. When the unit detects Low Toner, it can automatically transmit the Maintenance Alert Report to the preregistered telephone number.
5. When the unit detects Low Toner, it can automatically print out the Toner Order Form with preregistered order information.

5.1.8.2.

Printer Reports

• Conditions under which a report can be printed or transmitted
1. Manual print
The Printer Report can be printed by Service Mode 3. (See Sect. 5.1.3.1.)
2. Automatic transmission/printout
3. Service Alert Report
When the unit detects an Emergency Printer Error, the unit will immediately transmit the Service Alert
Report to the pre-registered telephone number. However, the unit will not transmit the Service Alert
Report if it finds the same error within the same date in the error log.
4. Maintenance Alert Report
When the unit detects Low Toner, the unit can automatically transmit the Maintenance Alert Report to
the pre-registered telephone number. Refer to the Printer Error Code Table.
5. Toner Cartridge Order Form
When the unit detects Low Toner, the unit can automatically print the Toner Order Form with the preregistered order information.
Note:
The Service and Maintenance Alert Reports are managed in the same manner as the normal memory
transmission (Retry, Incomplete, File List, Display while it is transmitting, Journal).
• Printer Error Code Table
Printer Error Code Table
Log
Tx
Condition
Content of Error
Only Report
O
R/C
Paper Jam 1st Cassette.
O
R/C
Paper Jam 2nd Cassette.
O
R/C
Paper Exit Error.
No Paper in 1st or 2nd
NO PAPER
R/C
Cassette.
NO
S
No 1st or 2nd Cassette.
Cassette
Fuser Problem / LP
R/C
O
S
Thermistor disconnected
Problem
TONER
O
S/R/C No Toner
TONER
O
M
S/R/C Low Toner Warning
TONER
O
S
No Toner Cartridge

Info.
Printer
LED/LCD
Code Error Code
001
11
JAM
002
12
JAM
007
14-18
JAM
010

00

011

64, 65

021

22-26

041
043
045

00
00
61

188
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

Printer Error Code Table
Info.
Printer
Log
Tx
LED/LCD
Condition
Content of Error
Code Error Code
Only Report
051
54
O
S
R/C
Printer Error
054
31,32,36
O
S
R/C
LSU Problem
No response from LP
055
81, 82
R/C
O
S
Controller
060
Rx Door Open
Note:
1. Tx Report: S = Service Alert Report, M = Maintenance Alert Report
2. Condition : R = Receive Mode, C = Copy Mode, S = Standby Mode, T = Transmit Mode

189
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

5.1.8.3.

Setting Operation
8:CHECK & CALL
PRESS SET TO SELECT
SET or START
1
CLEAR

CHECK & CALL (1-7)
1:SVC. ALERT FAX #

SET or START

SERVICE ALERT FAX #

CLEAR
SET or START
Enter a destination fax number for the Service Alert Report.
When it is entered, the automatic transmission of the Service
Alert Report becomes effective.
Max. 36 digits (i.e. 201 111 2222)

2
CLEAR

CHECK & CALL (1-7)
2:MAINT. ALERT FAX #

SET or START

MAINT. ALERT FAX #

CLEAR
SET or START
Enter a destination fax number for the Maintenance Alert
Report. When it is entered, the automatic transmission of the
Maintenance Alert Report becomes effective.
Max. 36 digits (i.e. 201 111 3333)

3
CLEAR

CHECK & CALL (1-7)
3:TONER ORDER FAX #

SET or START

TONER ORDER FAX #

CLEAR
SET or START
Enter the supply fax number to be printed on the Toner Order
Form. When it is entered, the automatic print of the Toner
Order Form becomes effective.
Max. 36 digits (i.e. 201 111 4444)

4
CLEAR

CHECK & CALL (1-7)
4:TONER ORDER TEL #

SET or START

TONER ORDER TEL #

CLEAR
SET or START
Enter the supply telephone number to be printed on the Toner
Order Form.
Max. 36 digits (i.e. 201 111 5555)

5
CLEAR

CHECK & CALL (1-7)
5:DEALER NAME

SET or START

DEALER NAME

CLEAR
SET or START
Enter the Dealer's Name to be printed on the Toner Order
Form.
Max. 25 digits (i.e. Panafax Corp.)

6
CLEAR

CHECK & CALL (1-7)
6:CUSTOMER ID

SET or START

CUSTOMER ID

CLEAR
SET or START
Enter a Customer ID code to be printed on the Service Alert
Report, Maintenance Alert Report and Toner Order Form.
Max. 16 characters (i.e. ABC Company)

7
CLEAR

CHECK & CALL (1-7)
7:PRINTER REPORT XMT

SET or START

PRINTER REP XMT:Off
1:OFF 2:ON
1+
SET or START

2+
SET or START

* DIALING *
555 1234

After the Service Alert Report is faxed to
the pre-registered FAX #, the machine
returns to standby mode.

190
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

Note
1. Service Alert Report
To enable the automatic transmission of Service Alert Report, enter the destination fax telephone
number in the “SERVICE ALERT (FAX #)” field. When a printer error occurs, the Service Alert Report is
transmitted to the designated number automatically. A blank entry in this field, disables the Automatic
transmission of the Service Alert Report.
2. Maintenance Alert Report
To enable the automatic transmission of Maintenance Alert Report, enter the destination fax telephone
number in the “MAINT. ALERT (FAX #)” field. When a printer error occurs, the Maintenance Alert
Report is transmitted to the designated number automatically. A blank entry in this field, disables the
Automatic transmission of the Maintenance Alert Report.
3. Toner Cartridge Order Form
To enable the automatic printout of the Toner Cartridge Order Form, enter the destination fax telephone
numbers in the “Order FAX #” field. When a low toner error occurs, the Toner Order Form is printed
automatically.
4. SERVICE ALERT FAX #, this would be the fax telephone number for the Dealer's Service Department.
MAINT. ALERT FAX #, this could be the fax telephone number for the Dealer's Supply Sales Desk.
ORDER FAX #, this could be the fax telephone number for the Dealer's Supply Sales Desk.
ORDER TEL #, this could be the voice telephone number for the Dealer's Supply Sales Desk.
DEALER NAME, this name is printed on the Toner Order Form.
CUSTOMER ID, to identify your customer, enter up to 16 characters user code in this field. This name
will be printed on the Service Alert Report, Maintenance Alert Report and Toner Order Form.
5. Printer Report XMT
To manually transmit the Service Alert Report to the pre-registered SERVICE ALERT REPORT FAX #,
set the Printer Report XMT to "2:ON".

191
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

5.1.8.4.

SERVICE ALERT REPORT FORMAT

*************************************************** DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 12:14 ********
****************************
>
SERVICE ALERT REPORT
<
****************************

(1)
LAST PRINT ERROR : MM-dd-yy 12:10

(2) (3)
No.999-00

ABC COMPANY (4)

CUSTOMER ID

:

FAX ROM VERSION

: DX-800 AAV1xxxxAU

TRANSMIT COUNTER
RECEIVE COUNTER
COPY COUNTER
PRINT COUNTER

:
:
:
:

PRINT ERROR

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

(5)

999999 (6)
999999
999999
999999
MM-dd-yy 12:10
MM-dd-yy 10:15
MM-dd-yy 13:48
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
MM-dd-yy 17:10
MM-dd-yy 12:10
MM-dd-yy 08:10

No.999-00
No.999-00
No.999-00

(7)

No.999-00
No.999-00
No.999-00
-LOGO PANASONIC

************************************ -CHARACTER ID

-

- ***** -31415926535897932384-***********

Explanation of Contents
(1) Date & Time when a problem occurred
(2) Information Code
(3) Printer Error Code

Refer to Service Manual

(4) Customer ID

Up to 16 characters (User Identification Code)

(5) Fax ROM Version
(6) Transmission / Reception / Copy / Print Counters
(7) Print Error

Last 30 records (Latest on top)

192
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

5.1.8.5.

MAINTENANCE ALERT REPORT FORMAT

*************************************************** DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 12:14 ********
****************************
> MAINTENANCE ALERT REPORT <
****************************

LAST PRINT ERROR : MACHINE IS RUNNING OUT OF TONER (1)
CUSTOMER ID

: ABC COMPANY (2)

FAX ROM VERSION

: DX-800 AAV1xxxxAU

TRANSMIT COUNTER
RECEIVE COUNTER
COPY COUNTER
PRINT COUNTER

:
:
:
:

(3)

999999 (4)
999999
999999
999999

-LOGO PANASONIC
************************************ -CHARACTER ID

-

- ***** -31415926535897932384-***********

Explanation of Contents
(1) Low Toner Message (Fixed)

“MACHINE IS RUNNING OUT OF TONER”

(2) Customer ID

Up to 16 characters (User Identification Code)

(3) Fax ROM Version
(4) Transmission / Reception / Copy / Print Counters

193
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

5.1.9.

Service Mode 9 (System Maintenance)

5.1.9.1.

Overview

This Service Mode is used to maintain and/or update the firmware of the machine.
Use the following procedure for System Maintenance.

Step
1

Service Mode 9
Operation or Unit Condition
Standby

LCD Display
MMM-dd-yyyy

2

Press “FUNCTION” and then “7”.

3

Press “MONITOR” four times, then press “*”.

4

Press “9”.

5

6

Press “START” to update the firmware.
Enter No. or press "\/" or "/\" to select the maintenance
to be performed.
Ex: Enter “2”.
Press “SET” and “START”.

7

Press “SET” or “START”.

8

After the backup is completed, repeat step 4 through 6
to request an operation.

SERVICE MODE
ENTER NO. OR

9

Press "STOP" twice to return to standby.

MMM-dd-yyyy

15:00
00%

SET MODE
ENTER NO. OR

(1-8)

SERVICE MODE
ENTER NO. OR
SYSTEM MAINT. (1-8)
1:FIRMWARE UPDATE
SYSTEM MAINT. (1-8)
2:FIRMWARE BACKUP

FIRMWARE BACKUP (1-3)
1:HOST PROGRAM <4MB>
FIRMWARE BACKUP
* IN PROGRESS *

15:00
00%

194
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

System Maintenance Table
No.
Maintenance Mode
1 FIRMWARE UPDATE

Description
Updates the firmware in the machine with the Master Firmware
Card. Updates the firmware in the machine with the Master
Firmware from the PC. After the firmware is updated, the
machine reboots automatically and returns to standby. See Note.
1: HOST PROGRAM <4MB>
2: HOST PART A <2MB>
3: HOST PART B <3MB>
Creates a Backup Card of the machine’s firmware.
(A 2 MB or higher Flash Memory Card is required) See Note.
1: HOST PROGRAM <4MB>
2: HOST PART A <2MB>
3: HOST PART B <3MB>
Restores the parameters from the Backup Card into the
machine.
Creates a Backup Card of the machine’s parameters.

2

FIRMWARE BACKUP

3

PARAMETER
RESTORE
PARAMETER
BACKUP
ERASE FLASH CARD Erase a Master Firmware Card.
SEND RECEIVED
Transfers documents from memory to another fax machine
FILE
during a fatal printer error.

4
5
8

Note:
The created Backup Card must be removed from the machine.

195
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

5.1.9.2.

Operation

9:SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
PRESS SET TO SELECT
SET
or
START

1

2
SET or START

SET or START

1

CLEAR

SYSTEM MAINT.(1-8)
1:FIRMWARE UPDATE

1

CLEAR

FIRMWARE UPDATE(1-3)
1:HOST PROGRAM <4MB>

CLEAR

Display card version

*

SET or START

DX-800AAV1xxxxAU
PRESS SET TO START

FIRMWARE UPDATE
* IN PROGRESS *

* If the card is not installed,
SET/START will be refused.
If the card has no information (Blank),
the 1st row displaying the card version
will be blank.

SET or START
2
CLEAR

FIRMWARE UPDATE(1-3)
2:HOST PART A <2MB>

CLEAR

Display Host version

SET or START

DX-800AAV1xxxxAU
PRESS SET TO START
Reboot the machine
after updating

SET or START
3
CLEAR

2

FIRMWARE UPDATE(1-3)
3:HOST PART B <2MB>

SET or START

SET or START

CLEAR

SYSTEM MAINT.(1-8)
2:FIRMWARE BACKUP

1
CLEAR

CLEAR

FIRMWARE BACKUP(1-3)
1:HOST PROGRAM <4MB>

CLEAR

Display card version

DX-800AAV1xxxxAU
PRESS SET TO START

SET or START
2
CLEAR

SET or START

FIRMWARE BACKUP(1-3)
2:HOST PART A <2MB>

CLEAR

FIRMWARE BACKUP
* IN PROGRESS *
After Uploading

SET or START
3
CLEAR

3

FIRMWARE BACKUP(1-3)
3:HOST PART B <2MB>

Display 1.5sec

FIRMWARE BACKUP
* COMPLETED *

CLEAR

SET or START

CLEAR

SYSTEM MAINT.(1-8)
3:PARAMETER RESTORE

CLEAR

DX-800 PARAMETER
PRESS SET TO START

SET or START

PARAMETER RESTORE
* IN PROGRESS *
After Downloading

Display 1.5sec

PARAMETER RESTORE
* COMPLETED *

Display card version
4

SET or START

CLEAR

SYSTEM MAINT.(1-8)
4:PARAMETER BACKUP

CLEAR

DX-800AAV1xxxxAU
PRESS SET TO START

SET or START

PARAMETER BACKUP
* IN PROGRESS *
After Uploading

Display 1.5sec

PARAMETER BACKUP
* COMPLETED *

Display card version
5

SET or START

CLEAR

SYSTEM MAINT.(1-8)
5:ERACE FLASH CARD

CLEAR

DX-800AAV1xxxxAU
PRESS SET TO START

SET or START

ERACE FLASH CARD
* ERASING NOW *

After Erasing

Service Mode default display

8

CLEAR

1 MAINT.(1-8)
2
SYSTEM
8:SEND RCV'D FILE

1

Refer to the Sect. 5.9.4

2

196
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

5.1.10. Recovering from a Firmware Update Failure
If the Firmware Update is interrupted before completion, the machine will not be able to progress into the
Standby Mode and the LCD display will remain Blank. If this happens, please follow the steps described
below to recover from a failed firmware update.
(2)

Printer Cover

(1) Unplug the Power Cord.
(2) Open the Printer Cover.
(3) Remove the Memory Card Cover.

Memory Card
Cover
(3)

Memory Card
(4)

Control Panel Unit
(5)

(6)

(4) Insert the Flash Memory Card gently into the
card slot with the Panasonic logo facing to the
outside of the machine.
Caution:
Installing the Flash Memory Card in the wrong
direction may damage the connecting pins
inside the machine.

(5) Open the Control Panel Unit.
(6) Activate the Read Point Sensor with your finger
and plug in the Power Cord.
(7) Wait approximately 10 seconds, release the
Read Point Sensor, close the Control Panel Unit
(ADF) and the Printer Cover.
(8) Allow the unit to complete the Firmware Update
(approx. 1-minute). When completed, the unit
will reboot and progress to the Standby Mode.
(9) Unplug the Power Cord.
(10) Remove the Flash Memory Card.
(11) Re-install the Memory Card Cover.
(12) Plug in the Power Cord.
(13) Perform Parameter Initialization.

Note:
For Updating the Firmware Remotely through the Phone Line, please refer to the Firmware Update
Tool (Remote) Operating Instructions.
Please inform to the Customer prior to proceeding with the Remote Firmware Update, to Never
Unplug the Power Cord or turn the machine OFF. If the machine is turned OFF during the Remote
Firmware Update, it may not be re-coverable at all. During the Remote Firmware Update, the LCD
display shows ON LINE * DIAG *.

197
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

5.1.10.1. Send Received File
This function is the relief mode which makes it possible to retrieve memory received documents during a
fatal printer error by transferring the documents to another fax machine.
MMM-dd-yyyy 15:00
nn%
FUNC

7

MON X 4

*

SERVICE MODE
ENTER NO. OR v
9

8

Pi-pi-pi

CLR

SYSTEM MAINT.(1-8)
8:SEND RCV'D FILE
SET

or

START
If no file was received

Pi-pi-pi
CLR

ENTER STATION(S)
THEN PRESS START
Enter station
CLR

<01> NEW YORK OFFICE
212 555 1234
Enter another station
CLR

<02> LONDON OFFICE
011 44 123 4567

START

SET
CLR

2 STN(S) ARE SET
ADD MORE OR START
SET

*STORE*

START

No,nnn

Note:
1. After the received document file is successfully transmitted, unit will
NOT delete the file automatically.
2. Under certain conditions there could be two (2) received files stored
separately. In this case, transmission will be made separately.
3. Only normal received document will be transmitted.
Document received with a confidential code will NOT be transmitted by
this operation.
4. Documents received with a confidential code, can be retrieved by using
Confidential Polling from a remote station.

MMM-dd-yyyy 15:00
nn%

* DIALING * NO.nnn
212 555 1234

198
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

6 System Description
6.1.
6.1.1.

Mechanical Operation
Transmit Mechanism

The Transmit Mechanism consists of components which feed, scan and eject documents, as well as send
signals. These components and their functions are as follows:

ADF Mechanism
The ADF (Automatic Document Feeder) automatically feeds paper into the unit, and consists of ADF
Roller and Separation Rubber. Each document is placed face-down on the Printer Cover (106) before
being fed into the unit.
● The ADF Roller (331) feeds individual pages into the scanning area.
● The Separation Rubber (207) separates documents placed on the ADF, preventing multiple feeding.
LED Array (329)
The DX-600/800 has one LED Array, used as a light source to illuminate the document. The LED Array
turns ON when the Read Point Sensor is activated by the document leading edge.
Transmit Guide Unit
The Transmit Guide Unit is an auxiliary part used for feeding and ejecting documents. It consists of the
Transmit Guide (301), Control Panel Chassis (201), Feed Roller (302), Eject Roller (303), and Eject
Pinch Roller (206) and Feed Pinch Roller (236). This unit also provides the white scanning area and
serves as a base for electronic white reference.
Transmit Mechanism Drive System
This system feeds documents through the transmitting mechanism, and consists of rollers, gears and a
stepper motor.
● The Transmit Motor (324), a stepper motor, controlled by the CPU, drives the ADF Roller, Feed Roller
and Eject Roller, with the speed based on the density of the picture information.
● The Feed Roller (302) feeds the document to the scanning point.
● The Eject Roller (303) feeds and ejects the document out of the machine.

199
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

Transmit Mechanism Sensors
The ADF Sensor (PC1), activated by Actuator A (224), detects the presence of documents on the ADF
Tray and multiple pages.
The RP (Read Point) Sensor (PC3), activated by Actuator B (225), detects the lead and trail edges of
the document, controlling the reading position. The CPU determines that a document is jammed if
Actuator B is not tripped within a specified time after the ADF Roller starts feeding, and disengages the
ADF Roller by reversing the Transmit Motor direction.
The ADF Door Sensor (PC2), activated by ADF Door Actuator (226), halts all scanning operations
when the Control Panel Unit is opened.
Verification Stamp Unit
The Verification Stamp Unit stamps an “X” mark on the front of the document after the document is
successfully transmitted or stored. It consists of the Stamp Head (325), Stamp Holder (326) and Stamp
Solenoid (327).
Scanner Block (321)
The Scanner Block consists of three mirrors, a Lens, and a CCD PC Board (1014).
● The mirrors, Mirror 1 (334), Mirror 2 (335) and Mirror 3 (336) reflect image information, in the form of
light, through the Lens.
● The Lens focuses the image information and passes it to the CCD.
● The CCD, mounted on the CCD PC Board, converts the image information into an electronic signal.

200
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

Drive System
Eject Roller (303)

Feed Roller (302)

ADF Roller (331)

Document

B55D16
Gear (312)
ADF Gear (305)
D17 Gear (313)
D25F Drive Gear (332)

Transmit Motor (324)
D50 Gear (314)

6.1.2

B55D30 Gear (311)

B54B22 Gear (310)

Control Panel

The Control Panel consists of the PNL PC Board (1004) and LCD Unit, which displays the various status
messages, and a membrane-type panel.

201
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

6.1.3.

Printing Mechanism

The Receive Mechanism consists of the Laser Unit (LSU), OPC (Organic Photo Conductor) Drum, and
various other parts which ensure the normal feeding of recording paper. These components and their
functions are as follows:
Fuser Unit (701)

Paper Direction

OPC Drum
Feed Roller (526)

Paper Exit Actuator (730)

Toner Cartridge
Paper Feed Roller (518)

Bias Transfer Roller (604)

Laser Unit (512)
Paper Feed Solenoid (531)

Timing Actuator (609)

No Paper Actuator (525)
Printer Motor (626)

2nd Cassette (Option)

No Paper Actuator (525)

Feed Roller 2 (904)
Paper Feed Roller (518)
Paper Feed Solenoid (908)

Paper Feed Units No.1 and 2
The Paper Feeder Unit No. 2 is available as an option.
Paper Feed Unit No.1 Operation
1. The printing operation begins when the nPRNT (Print Request) output signal level goes Low. The
Printer Motor (626) is initialized.
2. The Paper Feed Solenoid (531) is energized for a specified period of time and turned ON. This
activates the Paper Feed Roller (518), which rotates one revolution. The paper is separated into
individual sheets by the L and R Paper Separation Clips (809 and 811) and transported to the Feed
Roller (526).
3. After one revolution the Paper Feed Roller (518) stops, releasing the paper. The Feed Roller (526)
transports the paper to the drum area.
4. The actual printing process starts at a specified time after the Timing Actuator (609) is activated and
stops at a a specified period of time after the trailing edge clears the Timing Actuator (609).

202
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

Paper Feed Unit No. 2 (Optional) Operation
The Paper Feed Unit No.1 always takes priority. The Paper Feed Unit No. 2 becomes operational only
when the cassette No.1 runs out of paper and the NP Sensor is deactivated, causing the nPCHK1 output
signal level to go High.
1. The printing operation begins when the nPRNT (Print Request) output signal level goes Low. The
Printer Motor (626) is initialized.
2. The Paper Feed Solenoid (908) is energized for a specified period of time and is turned ON. This
activates the Paper Feed Roller (518), which rotates one revolution. The paper is separated into
individual sheets by the L and R Paper Separation Clips (809, 811) and transported to the Feed
Roller 2 (904).
3. After one revolution the Paper Feed Roller (518) stops, releasing the paper. The Feed Roller 2 (904)
and the Feed Roller (526) transports the paper to the drum area.
4. The actual printing process starts at a specified time after the Timing Actuator (609) is activated and
stops at a a specified period of time after the trailing edge clears the Timing Actuator (609).
Paper Feed Roller (518)
L and R Paper Separation Clips (809, 811)
Clutch Gear Assembly
Feed Roller (526)

SNS3 PC Board (1009)
No Paper Actuator (525)

SNS1 PC Board (1008)

Timing Actuator (609)
Pinch Roller (607)
Paper Feed Solenoid (531)

Feed Roller (904)
Pinch Roller (607)

CST2 PC Board (1009)

No Paper Actuator (525)
Paper Feed Roller (518)
Paper Feed Solenoid (908)

Clutch Gear Assembly

L and R Paper Separation Clips
(809, 811)

203
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

6.1.4.

Printing Process Operation
Handle
Toner Waste Box
Waste Toner
Bias Transfer Roller

Cleaning Blade

OPC Drum

Laser Beam

Development Roller
Developing Blade
Toner

Agitator Sweeper

Hopper
Mixing Blade

Charge
In the dark, the Bias Charge Roller (BCR) applies a high, uniform negative charge to the surface of the
OPC Drum. The surface potential is approximately -650 VDC and remains because the drum has a high
electric resistance in the dark.
Exposure
A portion of the laser beam is deflected to the timing sensor [Beam Detection (BD) Sensor], which
controls the start timing of scanning on the OPC Drum. The CPU also uses the timing sensor to detect
abnormal signals. The light beam from the laser diode is modulated by the digital signal (nVIDEO) and
converted to parallel light waves by the collimator lens. The beam is then directed to the rotating tetragon
mirror, where it is reflected to the f-θ lens and then focused onto the OPC Drum surface. The laser beam
moves across the surface of the OPC Drum in the scanning direction. Where the laser beam is applied,
the negative charge on the drum dissipates, and where the laser is not applied, the negative charge
remains. This action forms a latent, electrostatic image on the OPC Drum, corresponding to the original
image.
Development
This development process uses a conventional method, where toner coats a Development Roller and
transfers to the latent image on the OPC Drum. In the Toner Cartridge, the (mono-component) toner is
negatively charged by the friction between the rotating Development Roller (Mag Roller) and the
Developing Blade. This combination and the rotation of the Mixing Blade transfers the toner from the
reservoir and forms a brush effect on the Mag roller. Where the magnetic brush lightly touches the OPC
Drum, the negatively charged toner is attracted to the latent image on the drum, forming a mirror image
of the original on the drum. Any remaining toner is removed from the Mag Roller by the Developing
Blade and is recycled back into the toner reservoir. A bias voltage of approximately 1.65 kVACp-p at
1.875 kHz, riding on a -300 VDC bias is applied to the magnetic brush to achieve maximum print quality.
The Toner Sensor (513), a magnetic sensor, detects the remaining quantity of toner in the Toner
Cartridge. When the “TONER” lamp starts to blink, there is still enough toner left in the cartridge to print
100 pages (based on ITU-T Image No.1). When the toner runs out, the display will show: “OUT OF
204
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

TONER & INFO CODE 041” and the machine is disabled from printing any copies.
The Toner Cartridge consists of OPC Drum, Bias Charge Roller, Development Roller, Developing
Blade, Cleaning Blade, Mixing Blades and Toner Waste Box. The OPC Drum is an aluminum cylinder
coated with an OPC (Organic Photo Conductor) sensitive material. This surface is photoelectric (retains
the charge in the dark and releases the charge in the light). The potential differences on the surface (a
static latent image) form a printed image. The Bias Charge Roller provides a uniform charge on the
OPC Drum surface. The Development Roller supplies toner to the drum by rotating over the magnet.
The Developing Blade evens the toner on the Development Roller surface and also charges the toner
by friction. The Cleaning Blade cleans by scraping the remaining toner off the OPC Drum surface after
transfer.
Transfer and Separation
As the paper is fed between the OPC Drum and the Bias Transfer Roller (BTR) (604), a positive charge
of approximately +3.0 µA steady current is applied to the backside of the paper by the BTR. The toner
particles are attracted away from the drum towards the surface of the paper. During cleaning, the BTR is
charged to approximately -1500 VDC to repel toner on the OPC Drum and prevent toner from being
attracted to the BTR. After transfer has occurred, the paper passes over the Discharge Plate (612) in
the Transfer Guide (601), reducing the difference of potential between the OPC Drum and the paper.
The stiffness of the paper causes the paper to separate from the drum.
Cleaning
After transfer, some toner may remain on the surface of the OPC Drum. A Cleaning Blade scrapes the
OPC Drum surface, and the removed toner is moved into the Toner Waste Box, inside the Toner
Cartridge.
Laser Unit
LD PCB

Beam Detection
Sensor

F Lens

Bean Detection Lens

Laser Housing

Tetragon Mirror

Laser Diode

Collimator Lens

Aperture

Cylindrical Lens

Tetragon Motor

205
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

Laser
A 5 mW Laser Diode, with a wave length of 780 nm (±20 nm), provides a modulated beam controlled by
nVIDEO. The beam power on the drum surface is approximately 0.15 mW, and is controlled by the
monitor circuit.
Collimator Lens
This lens converges and focuses the laser beam, converting it to parallel light.
Aperture
This controls the size of the laser beam.
Tetragon Mirror and Motor
The tetragon scanner consists of a 4-sided mirror, directly driven by a tetragon motor, revolving at 8,898
rpm (400 dpi) or 13,347 rpm (600 dpi). Scanning speed for 400 dpi and 600 dpi are controlled by motor
clock supplied from SC PCB. Motor clock for 400 dpi is 890 Hz and 600 dpi is 1,335 Hz. The laser beam
is reflected against these mirrors and swept over the recorded width in the scanning direction. This unit
features a stable line scanning speed, a precision mirror reflection angle, a reflection free surface, and
instant start.
Beam Detection (BD) Lens and Beam Detection (BD) Sensor
The BD Lens receives the reflected light from the Polygon Mirror and redirects it into the BD Sensor,
which converts the laser beam into electrical signals and sets the start timing for the scanning line.
f-θ Lens
This amorphous plastic, molded lens is designed to provide parallel laser light across the surface of the
drum, providing a constant scanning speed.
Fusing and Paper Exit
Fuser Unit (701)
Exit Roller (719)
Thermistor Assembly (728)

Thermal Fuse (726)
Paper Exit Actuator (730)
Thermostat (725)

Fuser Roller (709)
Pressure Roller (706)

Fuser Lamp (732)

Fuser Unit (701)
The Fuser Unit, consisting of the Fuser Lamp, Fuser Roller, Pressure Roller, Thermistor, and
Thermostat, bonds the toner into the paper using heat and pressure.

206
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

Fuser Lamp (732)
Located in the Fuser Roller is a Halogen lamp that serves as the heat source for the Fuser Roller.
Fuser Roller (709)
A Teflon coated roller supplies the heat for bonding the toner to the paper. The temperature of the
surface is kept constant at approximately 160 ± 5°C or (320°F).
Pressure Roller (706)
This converted PFA tube Silicon Rubber Roller applies pressure to the Fuser Roller, assisting in bonding
the toner to the paper.
Thermistor Assembly (728)
The Thermistor, a heat sensitive resistor, in contact with the Fuser Roller, monitors the surface
temperature. The temperature detected is used to control the ON/OFF switching of the Fuser Lamp. It
also acts as the primary overheat prevention device. A comparator circuit on the FCB PC Board acts as
a secondary overheat protection and becomes active at approximately 185°C (365°F).
Thermostat (725)
A Thermostatic Fuse, part of the power line for the Fuser Lamp, provides an extra overheat protection by
opening when the Fuser Roller surface temperature reaches approximately 200°C (392°F) and remains
there for 1 minute. If the primary and secondary overheat protection does not halt the rise in
temperature, the thermostat opens, removing power from the Fuser Lamp. When the Thermostat opens,
it must be replaced.
SNS4 PC Board (1007) [Paper Exit Sensor]
This sensor detects the presence of printed paper at the exit. If no paper passes, or if paper is over the
sensor too long, a “RECORDING PAPER JAM” message is displayed. When paper passes over the
sensor, the output is Low (Low Active).
Thermal Fuse (726)
It is placed in series with the Thermostat on the power line of the Fuser Lamp and performs the tertiary
overheating prevention (in case the Thermostat fails) by opening when the surrounding temperature
reaches approximately 216°C (420.8°F).

6.1.5

Covers and Enclosures

The Printer Cover (106) contains the R and L Document Guides (107 and 108), which adjust to the paper
width to properly feed the original documents. The Left Cover (103) has a Speaker (117) mounted inside
and shields the circuit boards. The Rear Cover (105) contains the Recording Paper Tray (111) and
Recording Paper Sub Tray (112), used to support legal size documents.

207
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

Array

AC

Main
Motor

LSU UNIT

Scanner
Motor

LED

CCD
(TCD1208ACY)

Motor
Driver

Motor
Driver

+5VP

+5V

+24V

ACI
PCB

Low Voltage
Power Supply

+3.3V

SC PCB

-5V

Edition 1.0
Heater
Control

Thermistor

16MHz

4.9152
MHz

50MHz

3V--> 5V

48MHz

C
D
T

8.9813MHz

3.9656 x 2MHz

ThermalFuse

Thermostat

Fuser LAMP

High Voltage
Power Supply

for 600dpi
Printing

for 16pels/mm
Printing

for Scaner

ASIC
(DZAC000273)

16MHz

MN86075

32KB

RAM

Line Memory

(Option)

Paper Exit
Sensor

Timing
Sensor

SNS1 PCB

Toner
Sensor

No Paper
Sensor

Casette
Detect
Sensor

SNS2 PCB

Cover
Sensor

ILS PCB

CPU
(V850/MA1)

Work Memory
Page Memory
SDRAM
8MB

SNS3 PCB

Program
FROM
4MB

SNS4 PCB

FROM CARD
(Image)
2/4/8MB

Pick up
Solenoid

Pick up
Solenoid

Option

Stamp

LANB PCB

No Paper
Sensor

CST2 PCB

3V--> 3V

25MHz

Image
FROM
4MB

UART

Casette
Detect
Sensor

SNS2 PCB

Si3021

LED

Key Matrix
and

CPU

LCD Unit

ACTIVITY
LED

LINK LED

RJ45

Si3014

24.576MHz

LANC PCB

MN195006

(LAN91C111)

Controller

MAC/PHY

Magnetics
*

Speaker

MJR PCB

B4 Width
Sensor

SDoor
Sensor

B-point
Sensor

A-point
Sensor

PNL1PCB

Option

EXIT
TEL
Handset
(option)

6.2.1.

TEL

6.2.

LINE

DX-800 Block Diagram

DX-600/800

Electrical Circuit Explanation
Fax Block Diagram

208

APR 2002

DX-600/800

6.2.2.

Signal Routing

1. ADF Transmission
(1)

Laser Printer

MN86075
(IC30)

CCD PCB

LANB
PCB

SHINE
DZAC000273
(IC3)

transFormer
(T1)

RJ45

INTERNET
(10Base-T/100Base-TX)

LANC
PCB

S-DRAM 8MB
(IC7)

LINK

LAN Controller
(IC1)
Page
Line
Memory Memory

ACTIVITY

(2)
D-BUS

ECM
Buffer

(3)

FROM 4MB
Program
(IC9)

CPU
V850E/MA1
(IC1)

FROM 4MB
Image Memory
(IC10)

MODEM
MN195006
(I22)

DAA
Si3021,
Si3015
(IC23,24)

Line

2. Memory Transmission
Laser Printer
MN86075
(IC30)

CCD PCB

LANB
PCB

SHINE
DZAC000273
(IC3)

transFormer
(T1)

RJ45

INTERNET
(10Base-T/100Base-TX)

LANC
PCB

S-DRAM 8MB
(IC7)

LINK

LAN Controller
(IC1)
Page
Line
Memory Memory

ACTIVITY

(2)
D-BUS

ECM
Buffer

(3)

(1)
FROM 4MB
Image Memory
(IC10)

FROM 4MB
Program
(IC9)

CPU
V850E/MA1
(IC1)

MODEM
MN195006
(I22)

DAA
Si3021,
Si3015
(IC23,24)

Line

209
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

3. Direct Reception

Laser Printer

MN86075
(IC30)

CCD PCB

LANB
PCB

SHINE
DZAC000273
(IC3)

transFormer
(T1)

INTERNET
(10Base-T/100Base-TX)

RJ45

LANC
PCB

S-DRAM 8MB
(IC7)

LINK

LAN Controller
(IC1)

ACTIVITY

(3)
Page
Line
Memory Memory

D-BUS

ECM
Buffer

(2)

FROM 4MB
Program
(IC9)

CPU
V850E/MA1
(IC1)

FROM 4MB
Image Memory
(IC10)

MODEM
MN195006
(I22)

(1)

DAA
Si3021,
Si3015
(IC23,24)

Line

4. Memory Reception

Laser Printer

MN86075
(IC30)

CCD PCB

LANB
PCB

SHINE
DZAC000273
(IC3)

transFormer
(T1)

INTERNET
(10Base-T/100Base-TX)

RJ45

LANC
PCB

S-DRAM 8MB
(IC7)

LINK

LAN Controller
(IC1)

ACTIVITY

Page
Line
Memory Memory
(3)
D-BUS

ECM
Buffer

(2)

FROM 4MB
Image Memory
(IC10)

FROM 4MB
Program
(IC9)

CPU
V850E/MA1
(IC1)

MODEM
MN195006
(I22)

DAA
Si3021,
Si3015
(IC23,24)

(1)
Line

210
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

5. Scan into Memory
(1)
MN86075
(IC30)

CCD PCB

LANB
PCB

SHINE
DZAC000273
(IC3)

transFormer
(T1)

RJ45

INTERNET
(10Base-T/100Base-TX)

LANC
PCB

S-DRAM 8MB
(IC7)

LINK

LAN Controller
(IC1)

ACTIVITY

Page
Line
(2)
Memory Memory

D-BUS

ECM
Buffer

FROM 4MB
Program
(IC9)

CPU
V850E/MA1
(IC1)

FROM 4MB
Image Memory
(IC10)

MODEM
MN195006
(I22)

DAA
Si3021,
Si3015
(IC23,24)

Line

6. File Print from Memory

Laser Printer

MN86075
(IC30)

CCD PCB

LANB
PCB

SHINE
DZAC000273
(IC3)

transFormer
(T1)

RJ45

INTERNET
(10Base-T/100Base-TX)

LANC
PCB

S-DRAM 8MB
(IC7)

LINK

LAN Controller
(IC1)

ACTIVITY

(2)
Page
Line
Memory Memory

D-BUS

ECM
Buffer

(1)
FROM 4MB
Image Memory
(IC10)

FROM 4MB
Program
(IC9)

CPU
V850E/MA1
(IC1)

MODEM
MN195006
(I22)

DAA
Si3021,
Si3015
(IC23,24)

Line

211
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

7. Single Copy
(1)

Laser Printer

MN86075
(IC30)

CCD PCB

LANB
PCB

SHINE
DZAC000273
(IC3)

transFormer
(T1)

INTERNET
(10Base-T/100Base-TX)

RJ45

LANC
PCB

S-DRAM 8MB
(IC7)

LINK

LAN Controller
(IC1)

ACTIVITY

Page
Line
(2)
Memory Memory

D-BUS

ECM
Buffer

FROM 4MB
Program
(IC9)

CPU
V850E/MA1
(IC1)

FROM 4MB
Image Memory
(IC10)

MODEM
MN195006
(I22)

DAA
Si3021,
Si3015
(IC23,24)

Line

8. Multiple Copies
(1)

Laser Printer

MN86075
(IC30)

CCD PCB

LANB
PCB

SHINE
DZAC000273
(IC3)

transFormer
(T1)

RJ45

INTERNET
(10Base-T/100Base-TX)

LANC
PCB

S-DRAM 8MB
(IC7)

LINK

LAN Controller
(IC1)
Page
Line
Memory Memory

ACTIVITY

(4)
(2)
D-BUS

ECM
Buffer

FROM 4MB
Program
(IC9)

(3)
FROM 4MB
Image Memory
(IC10)

CPU
V850E/MA1
(IC1)

MODEM
MN195006
(I22)

DAA
Si3021,
Si3015
(IC23,24)

Line

212
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

9. Report/List Printing
Laser Printer

MN86075
(IC30)

CCD PCB

LANB
PCB

SHINE
DZAC000273
(IC3)

transFormer
(T1)

RJ45

INTERNET
(10Base-T/100Base-TX)

LANC
PCB

S-DRAM 8MB
(IC7)

LINK

LAN Controller
(IC1)
Page
Line
Memory Memory

ACTIVITY

(2)

D-BUS

ECM
Buffer
(1)
FROM 4MB
Program
(IC9)

CPU
V850E/MA1
(IC1)

FROM 4MB
Image Memory
(IC10)

MODEM
MN195006
(I22)

DAA
Si3021,
Si3015
(IC23,24)

Line

10. Report with Image Data
Laser Printer

MN86075
(IC30)

CCD PCB

LANB
PCB

SHINE
DZAC000273
(IC3)

transFormer
(T1)

RJ45

INTERNET
(10Base-T/100Base-TX)

LANC
PCB

S-DRAM 8MB
(IC7)

LINK

LAN Controller
(IC1)
Page
Line
Memory Memory

ACTIVITY

(3)

D-BUS

ECM
Buffer

(2)
FROM 4MB
Image Memory
(IC10)

(1)
FROM 4MB
Program
(IC9)

CPU
V850E/MA1
(IC1)

MODEM
MN195006
(I22)

DAA
Si3021,
Si3015
(IC23,24)

Line

213
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

11. LAN Transmission
Laser Printer
MN86075
(IC30)

CCD PCB

LANB
PCB

SHINE
DZAC000273
(IC3)

transFormer
(T1)

RJ45

INTERNET
(10Base-T/100Base-TX)

LANC
PCB

S-DRAM 8MB
(IC7)

LINK

LAN Controller
(IC1)

ACTIVITY

Page
Line
(2)
Memory Memory

D-BUS

ECM
Buffer

(1)

FROM 4MB
Program
(IC9)

CPU
V850E/MA1
(IC1)

FROM 4MB
Image Memory
(IC10)

MODEM
MN195006
(I22)

DAA
Si3021,
Si3015
(IC23,24)

Line

12. LAN Reception
Laser Printer
MN86075
(IC30)

CCD PCB

LANB
PCB

SHINE
DZAC000273
(IC3)

Transformer
(T1)

RJ45

INTERNET
(10Base-T/100Base-TX)
(1)

LANC
PCB

S-DRAM 8MB
(IC7)

LINK

LAN Controller
(IC1)

ACTIVITY

Page
Line
Memory Memory
(2)
D-BUS

ECM
Buffer

FROM 4MB
Image Memory
(IC10)

FROM 4MB
Program
(IC9)

CPU
V850E/MA1
(IC1)

MODEM
MN195006
(I22)

DAA
Si3021,
Si3015
(IC23,24)

Line

214
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

6.2.3

Picture Signal Scanning Block

The image data read by the optical unit is input to the CCD mounted on the CCD PC Board, then
transferred to the SC PC Board after the optical information is converted into an electrical signal by the
CCD. The following shows a block diagram of the picture signal scanning circuit. This picture signal
scanning circuit consists of (1) ABC circuit, (2) shading correction circuit, (3) offset control circuit, (4) picture
signal binary coding correction circuit and (5) reducing circuit.

Differential
Amplifier

CCD

Delay

TCD 1208P

IC3
DZAC000273

CCD
Drive
Circuit
[SC]
IC30
MN86075

CCD PC Board

SC PC Board

W
1728 bit
B
Effective Scan Width
ABC Circuit
This circuit consists of IC28, IC30, C175, R288 and R285. Its function is to prevent deterioration of
picture quality due to dirt on the document or degrading of the luminous energy of the Xenon Lamp light
source. The picture signal from the CCD is amplified in IC28 and input to IC30, where it is converted
from analog to digital and the shading is corrected. When the signal exceeds +5V as the result of this
amplification and correction, capacitor C175 is charged through R288. This charging voltage lowers the
level of the picture signal input to IC28. When the picture signal voltage rises, this charge voltage
becomes higher. When the picture signal level lowers due to the background color, etc., of a transmitting
document, the voltage of the charged capacitor C175 is discharged through R285. Consequently, the
output of the ABC circuit is kept constant to maintain the picture quality, regardless of changes in the
CCD output level.

215
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

3V
0V

0V

ABC Circuit Output

CCD Output

32

OS
IC28, 2

IC28, 1

DOS

IC30

37
19

+5V
R288
Q15

41

Q13

39
C175

Control
Circuit

40
R285

-5V
Shading Correction Circuit
The Shading Correction Circuit, included in IC30, is provided to correct for reduction in LED lamp
intensity around the optical lens and LED lamp intensity distortion due to shading of each bit. This circuit
scans the white reference on the transmitting document plate immediately before the document reaches
the scanning position and writes a compensation value according to the distortion of the waveform, at
the time, into the S-RAM (IC31).When the actual picture signal is input, the circuit corrects the picture
signal shading, according to this compensation value. This shading is carried out for each page during
transmission or copy.
Offset Control Circuit
The Offset Control Circuit consists of Q15, Q13, IC30 and IC28, and controls the black level of the CCD
output to be at 0V by using the input.
Picture Signal Binary Coding Correction Circuit
The Picture Signal Binary Coding Correction Circuit is included in IC30. It is used to obtain a binary
coding signal which is a corrected picture and error diffused signal of a false halftone signal, which is
detected from a shaded picture signal.

216
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

6.2.4

CCD Drive Clock Generator Circuit

This circuit is also contained in IC30. Its function is to generate FSG, FCK1, FCK2 and RS clock signals,
which are required for driving the CCD. These clock signals are generated by the system clock generator
circuit derived from the 4 MHz clock signal that is input to IC30. Its timing chart is shown below.The FR
clock supplied to the CCD is output from the RS of IC3. The RS clock of IC3 is derived from the FR clock of
IC30 [MN86075] generates the timing of the RS clock to drive the CCD.

FCK1
FCK2
RS
FSG

CCD
FR

RS
IC3
SHINE

FCK1
FCK2
FSG

IC30
86075
FR

217
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

6.2.5

Line Monitor Circuit

The Line Monitor Circuit consists of an operational DAA (The secondary side chip) and its peripheral
circuits. Its function is to monitor the dial tone, DTMF tone, response signals, etc. over the speaker. It also
sounds the output of the key touch tones, alarm tones, etc. from the panel CPU over the speaker. The
Received Signals are output from DAA of Secondary circuit, and through Analog AGC, Electronic Volume,
Amplifier and over the speaker.
The monitor tone from the phone line and the buzzer tone from the panel can be adjusted from the Control
Panel.

Line Monitor Signal
(from AGC Circuit)

Volume
Control
Circuit
(IC21)

(IC20, 2)
+

Buzzer Clock
(from Control Panel Unit)

Buzzer Tone Switch
(from Output Port)

Speaker
Amplifier
(Q4,5)
Speaker

AGD
(+2.5VDC)

Level Control
Circuit
(Q3)

Line Monitor Circuit
Block Diagram

218
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

6.2.6

Transmit Motor Control Circuit

The transmit motor is a PM type, two-phase bi-polar motor. The stepping signal and chopping current
control signals (pTAPH, pTBPH, pTA10, pTA11, pTB10 and pTB11) are sent to the chopper drive circuit,
comprised of IC36, IC37 and its peripheral circuitry, from IC3 SHINE output port. The motor is powered by
+24 VDC and is driven by a 1/2-phase excitation, and greater step division is provided by controlling the
phase circuit in steps (micro-step control).

+24V

Motor
Driver

Tx Stepper
Motor

IC36

R370

SHINE
IC3
+24V

Motor
Driver
IC37

R371

Tx Motor Driver Circuit Block Diagram

219
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

6.2.7

Line Control Circuit

The Line Control Circuit consists of CML relay, DP circuit, DAA (Direct Access Arrangement), Ring Detect
Circuit for power-save and DC hold circuit. A Jack for an external telephone, which can be used for either
an external telephone or an optional Handset Kit. The block diagram of the Line Control Circuit is shown
below.

SC PCB

Ringer Signal Detection,
TAM I/F,
DTMF Remote Detection
Off-Hook
Detection
10MW

DP
Circuit

Line

CML Relay

DC Hold
Circuit

DAA
Line
I/F
Si3015
(IC23)

DAA
Control
I/F
Si3021
(IC24)

MODEM
MN195006

DP Control

Connect only to
one module

Ringer Signal
Detector
for Wake-up
(PC2)

External
Telephone
Jack

PNL

CPU

MJR PCB
Line Control Circuit
Ringer
IC

+ ~
- ~
Hook SW

Speech
IC

+ ~
- ~

Optional Handset Kit

220
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

Dial Pulse Generator
The Dial Pulse Generator consists of a CML relay, a DC hold circuit, a dial pulse generate circuit and their
peripheral circuits. The generator generates dial pulses. The CPU on the SC PC Board controls all dial
pulse generation sequences. When the absence of the terminating message is confirmed by the Off-Hook
detector in DAA (IC23), the CPU turns the CML relay ON and the dial pulse generate circuit ON through
DAA to develop loop status (DC loop). After a few seconds, the CPU turns the PLS relay ON and OFF to
generate dial pulses, making and breaking the loop. The line status during dialing is shown below.
break
CML Relay
make

Dial Pulse
Generate Circuit

break
make

Line release

Speech
condition

break

Prepause

First
digit

Speech
condition

Second
digit

Speech
condition

Inter-digit
pause

Line status
make

DTMF Tone Generator
The DTMF Tone Generator is incorporated in the MODEM on the SC PC Board. The DTMF tone is
conveyed to the telephone line using the same route as the facsimile signal. The DTMF tone selection is
controlled by the CPU. Digital amplitude signal is conveyed as analog amplitude signal through D/A
converter in the DAA (IC23). The line status during dialing is shown below.
break
CML Relay
make
Line release

Speech
condition

First
digit

Speech
condition

Signal time

Inter-digit
pause

break

Second
digit

Speech
condition

Line status
make

DTMF signal

Ring Detector
When the unit is in the Sleep Mode status, a Ringing signal is detected by a photo-coupler (PC2) in Ring
Detector to cancel the power-save for waking up. Then DAA (IC23) detects the ringing signal for receive
mode.
When the unit is normal operating status, DAA (IC23) detects the ringing signal immediately.

221
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

6.2.8

SNS PC Board

Each sensor consists of an LED and photo transistor. When documents are placed on the ADF tray or are
moving, a shutter in the document sensor opens. The light from the LED turns the photo transistor “ON”,
and the output voltage from the sensor becomes a “Low” level. With no document on the ADF tray, the
shutter interrupts the light path, and output from the sensor is kept at a “High” level. Operation of the RP
Sensor is exactly the same as the ADF Sensor. The ADF Cover Sensor operation is similar, except that the
output from the sensor is kept at a “Low” level when the cover is closed and becomes a “High” level when
the Printer Cover is opened.
+5V

Shutter

ADF Cover Sensor
(ILS PC Board)

A
PC2
K

+5V

nBPNT

Shutter

Read Point
Sensor

CPU
(IC1)

A
PC3

MPU

+5VP

K

GND

+5VP

Shutter

PNL CPU
IC1

A
PC1
K

ADF
Sensor

GND

PNL1 PC Board

SC PC Board

222
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

6.2.9

Control Panel

The Control Panel consists of the Display PCB and Panel Unit, which display various status information.It is
normally interfaced to the main CPU. Keyed input signals are received by the Panel CPU and the data is
transferred to the main CPU on the SC PC Board.
The Control Panel performs the following processes simultaneously:
• Key inputting
• LED, LCD display
• Data transmission / reception
Interface to main CPU
The interfacing between the main CPU and the panel CPU are all executed with commands and responses
in the following two formats:
• Command / response (1 byte) + number of data + check sum
• Command / response (1 byte) + number of data + data 1 + data 2........................ + data n + check sum.

From
/to
SC
PCB

11

20 characters, 2 lines, 5x7 dots control
LED, KEY scanning

PNLCK
PNLRD

LEDCT (1:0)

PNLSD
PNLRST

2

BZCLK

8

+5V
+5VP

LED

LED (1:0)

GND
GND
nPWSAVE
nWAKEUP
nBPNT

8

BATLVL

Key matrix
(59 keys)

SCN (7:0) 8
KIN (7:0)

PNL1 PC Board

223
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

6.2.10

Printer Motor Drive Circuit

Motor Drive Circuit
The Printer Motor is a 4-phase uni-polar PM-type step motor. The step signals (pMMP0A to pMMP3A)
are transmitted to IC38 (the Chopper Drive Circuit) from IC3 SHINE output ports. The chopper current is
determined by the voltage at IC38, Pin3 and Pin13. The Printer Motor has two speeds, Slow and
Constant. The Printer Motor is powered by a +24 VDC supply. When the interlocks are open, the +24
VDC supply is cut off and the Printer Motor stops rotating.

CN54

SHINE
IC3

+24 VM

3

pMMP0a

Motor
Driver

1

nMMP0a

IC38

6

pMMP2a

4

nMMP2a

Pulse
Motor

Laser Printer Motor Drive Circuit Block Diagram

224
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

Fuser Lamp Drive Circuit

Thermal Fuse
Thermostat

R112

C109 1

4

R127

nSSR

9

SC PCB

CN103

9

+24V

1
2

PC102

6

R111

3

2

TRC100

L301

R111

C108

L101

LVPS

2

CN102

Fuser Lamp

CN102
1

1
Fuse

2

H

The Fuser Lamp is powered by 100 VAC (200 VAC). It is driven by the LVPS and controlled by the nSSR
signal from the SC PC Board. When the CN103, Pin11 (nSSR) on the LVPS goes LOW, the Fuser Lamp
turns ON. This lights up the PC102 LED and activates the TRC100 photo-triac, and VAC 115 VAC is sent
to the Fuser Lamp. The time at which TRC100 is actually activated depends on the 100 VAC (200 VAC)
sine wave. When the cross-voltage for Pin 6 and Pin 4 of PC102 is other than 0 Volts (sine wave
exceeds 0 volts), PC102 inhibits the activation of the triac and turns ON the Fuser Lamp.

Fuser Lamp Drive Circuit Diagram

225
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

Fuser Temperature Control Circuit
The fuser temperature is controlled by IC1 on the SC PC Board, which contains A/D (Analog/Digital)
converters ANI0 to ANI7. The Fuser Temperature Control Circuit uses A/D converter, ANI1. When the
PC001 drive current is transmitted from the SC PC Board to the PSU (LVPS), the Fuser Lamp turns ON.
IC32 is a comparator with open output at pins 1 and 7 and is used as an abnormal temperature detection
circuit. IC32, pin 7, has a high impedance when Q44 is activated, turning ON the Fuser Lamp.
An abnormal temperature is detected when the VTH voltage level becomes higher than V+, forcing IC32,
pin 7 Low and deactivating Q44.
Abnormally low and high temperatures, as well as Thermistor release status, are detected by IC1 (CPU)
programming.

CN6

IC3
SHINE

11

CN103

11

R221

+24v

PC001
1

6

2

4

3

R401

2

pSSRA

Q44
1

GND

+3.3V

PSU (LVPS)

CN52

+3.3V

TH2

2
1

R394

D26
+24V
R396

8

5

D25

7
6

IC32

4

GND
+3.3V

Q42
C214

2

GND
79

(ANI1)

Q43

3
1

TH2

1

GND

R395

IC1
C263

3
2

R400

Thermistor

R399

R398

R397

R78

+5v

CPU

SC PCB

GND

Fuser Temperature Control Circuit Diagram

226
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

High Voltage Drive Circuit (Charging, Development and Transfer)
High Voltage is provided through a DC to DC converter, which changes the +24 VDC supply voltage to 650 VDC, and output approximately 0.64 KVAC (Steady current: 200 µA) for the Charging Block. The
Developer Circuit converts the +24 VDC to between -300 VDC for the development bias, and outputs
1,500 VAC (p-p) at a frequency of 1.650 kHz to charge the toner. The Transfer Circuit changes the +24
VDC supply voltage to approximately +280 VDC (MAX) (steady current:3 µA/-1500 VDC steady voltage).

CN53
pCR0

3

nCRCK

3

nCR1

4

2

Q40

Discharge Plate

3

1

pCR1

2

Q39
1

CPU

nTR0

5

T

Bias Transfer Roller

C

Bias Charge Roller
Toner
Cartridge
Development Roller

3

pTR0

2

D

Q3

FG

1

GND

nDRCK
pDRCK

2

3
2

Q41
1

HVPS
SC PCB
GND

High Voltage Drive Circuit

227
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

6.2.11.

Interlock Safety Circuit

This safety circuit turns OFF the +24 VDC supply voltages when the Cover is opened. When the Cover is
opened, the microswitch(es) on the ILS PC Board are de-actuated, turning OFF +24 VDC to the Printer
Drive Circuit, the High Voltage Power Supply, and the Paper Feed Solenoid Circuits, turning OFF the +5
VDC supply voltage for the Laser Driver circuits on the Laser Unit.

+24V
+24V

+24V

Cover

ILS PCB
LVPS
(Power Supply Unit)

+24VD
Rush Current
Protection Circuit

+24VM

Motor

pMPOW

+24VM

+24VM

HVPS
(Power Supply Unit)
Paper Feed Solenoid

DC/DC
Converter
+24VM

L+5V

Laser Unit

(SC PCB)

Interlock Safety Circuit Block Diagram

228
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

6.2.12 Laser Unit (LSU) Control Circuit
The laser control signals are described below.
nLDEN
The LSU is activated when this output signal is LOW. If an error occurs, the nLDEN output signal level
goes High and the LSU is deactivated.
nVIDEO
This is the actual Data Signal. The Laser is ON when the nVIDEO output signal level is LOW.
nHSYNC
This horizontal synchronization signal transmitted from the Beam Detection Sensor sets the horizontal
position of the laser beam as it crosses the OPC Drum.
nSTART
This is the Scanner Motor Control Signal. The Scanner Motor rotates when the nSTART output signal
level is LOW.
nREADY
A Phased-Lock Loop (PLL) circuit keeps the Scanner Motor speed constant when the nREADY is at a
Low output signal level.
CLK
This is the Scanner Motor Clock.
nS/H
This is the Sample Hold Signal in order to adjust the Laser power. When the Laser switches on compulsorily, the Laser Power is adjusted to a suitable level and held until the next duty cycle in order to keep
the Laser Power stable.

CN68
1 nS/H

Q24

20

3

2

19

1

IC34

6 nVIDEO

4

2

Laser
Q23
+5V
IC3

4

2

IC35
23

nHSYNC

Circuit

1

R328

Laser

3

2

C189

30

Timing
Sensor

3 nPMON

Q21
1

21

2

Drive

R330

24
163

nLDON

3

+5V

R181

C190

SHINE

2

5

R326

2

nPMRY

1

nPMCK

Scanner
Motor
Drive
Circuit

3

2
1

Q22

Scanner
Motor

CN69

GND

LSU

SC PCB

Laser Unit Control Circuit Block Diagram

229
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

Edition 1.0
0

0

E-F, G-H Voltage

C-D Voltage

B

C103

RECTIFIER A
CIRCUIT

A-B Voltage

INPUT
CIRCUIT

OVER CURRENT
LIMITTER

CONTROL
CIRCUIT

D

CONVERTER
CIRCUIT
(Q100)
C

ERROR DETECTION
CIRCUIT

+24 VDC
OUTPUT
CIRCUIT

-5 VDC
OUTPUT
CIRCUIT

+5 VDC
OUTPUT
CIRCUIT

GND

+24 VDC OUTPUT

-5 VDC OUTPUT

GND

GND

+5 VP OUTPUT

GND

+5 VP OUTPUT

6.2.13

0

INPUT

+5 VP OUTPUT
CIRCUIT

DX-600/800

Power Supply Unit (LVPS)

Block Diagram of DZEA000057

230

APR 2002

DX-600/800

DZEA000057
Input Circuit
AC line voltage travels to the rectifying circuit through the line filter. The line filter eliminates RFI noise
which may otherwise pass to the AC line from the power supply unit. It also protects the power supply
unit from transient noise which may pass into the unit from the AC line.
Rectifying Circuit
AC power is rectified by D100 and charges C103 to make high DC voltage, then supply power to
converter circuit.
Kick-on voltage for control IC (IC105) is supplied AC power through R134, R135 and R136.
Inrush current is limited by TH100.
Converter Circuit
A IC (IC105), in combination with transformer T100, form a switching power supply circuit using the RCC
(Ringing Choke Converter) system.
As soon as power is applied to the Power Supply Unit, AC line voltage is rectified by D100 and is
smoothed by capacitor C103. The protection circuit at the time of start-up is controlled by an IC (IC105)
and resistors R134, R135 and R136.
T100
Ei

P --- Primary Winding
S --- Secondary Winding
B --- Control Winding

D102
Eo
P

+

S

Q100
B

Control Circuit

Main Switching Circuit
In the above circuit, when the main switching transistor, Q100, is turned On, input voltage, Ei, is supplied
to the primary winding of transformer T100. However, no current will flow through diode D102 of the
secondary side, due to reverse polarity of the secondary winding causing no current flow within T100.
But the transformer charges with energy. When Q100 is turned Off, the supply voltage to the primary
winding shuts off and the windings of T100 change polarity, allowing D102 to conduct, releasing the
energy accumulated in T100 to the circuit. When the energy is discharged through D102, Q100 turns on,
once again reversing the polarity on T100 windings, creating a self-oscillation circuit.

231
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

The value of output voltage is
Eo=d/(1-d)*Ei

Ton : ON time of Q100

d=Ton/Ts

Ts : Period of oscillation

Equivalent circuit model for the RCC.
SW
Ei

D(D102)

Eo

(Q100)

L

VL

C

RL

T100

In the equivalent circuit ; When SW is ON, current
flows
SW
L
When SW is OFF, current flows
L
D
RL
The value of inductance increase current between
ON period. (d*Ts)
IL=Ei/L*d*Ts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .(1)
The value of inductance decrease current between
OFF period. ((1-d)*Ts) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .(2)
From equation (1) and (2),
E0=d/(1-d)*Ei

VL
Ei
T
Eo

Ts

dTs

IL

(1-d)Ts

dTs

In the actual circuit, the fixed output voltages are obtained by changing the winding ratio of transformer
T100. In this converter circuit, the output voltages are stabilized by controlling the duty cycle of the ON
and OFF timing of the transistor. In this power supply, the bias winding is built into the transformer. The
power supply has four outputs, +24 VDC, -5 VDC, +5 VP and +5 VDC. The +24 VDC output is protected
by the Error Detection Circuit, and the +5VDC, +5 VP and -5 VDC outputs are protected by the circuitry
inside of the voltage regulator IC.
Control Circuit and Error Detection Circuit
The control circuit amplifies the output of the duty cycle according to the error voltage detected by the
Error Detection Circuit, and drives the main transistor Q100. The method used to change the duty cycle
is to change the ON time period. When the output voltage of the +24 VDC circuit rises, the current of
photo coupler PC103 increases, the output pulse width of the control circuit decreases and the ON time
period of Q100 decreases. This control circuit decides the minimum OFF time period by itself. When the
oscillation frequency becomes higher and the OFF time period becomes minimum, the OFF time period
remains unchanged and only the ON time period decreases. This way, there is a upper limit of the
oscillation frequency and the duty cycle is expanded.

232
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

Over Current Limiter (O.C.L)
The +24 VDC output is limited by Ton MAX Limiter (ON time period of transistor Q100) which is part of
the control circuit. The +5 VP, -5 VDC and +5 VDC outputs have over current limiters provided inside the
voltage regulator.

233
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

6.2.14

LAN Control Circuit

LAN Controller
Laser Printer
MN86075
(IC30)

CCD PCB

LANB
PCB

SHINE
DZAC000273
(IC3)

Transformer
(T1)

RJ45

INTERNET
(10Base-T/100Base-TX)
(1)

LANC
PCB

S-DRAM 8MB
(IC7)

LINK

LAN Controller
(IC1)

ACTIVITY

Page
Line
Memory Memory
(2)
D-BUS

ECM
Buffer

FROM 4MB
Image Memory
(IC10)

FROM 4MB
Program
(IC9)

CPU
V850E/MA1
(IC1)

MODEM
MN195006
(I22)

DAA
Si3021,
Si3015
(IC23,24)

Line

1. LAN Controller (IC1)
This conforms to IEEE 802.3 Ethernet Controller. The CPU (SC PCB) bus is directly connected and the
data interrupt is controlled by pLANINT. The 25 MHz clock is supplied by OSC 1. The LAN Controller
for the system timing clock divides the frequency provided from OSC1. The clock signal is also
supplied for the Manchester encoding/decoding circuit for data conversion.
The LAN Controller is a mixed signal Analog/Digital device that implements the MAC and PHY portion
of the CSMA/CD protocol at 10 and 100Mbps.
The LAN controller contains a built in 8 KByte RAM for transmission and reception buffer.
2. EEPROM (IC2)
This memory stores the configuration registers and MAC (Media Access Control) address for the LAN
controller. Data is transferred to LAN controller (serial transfer) when the power is turned "On". The
MAC address for the LAN controller represents the location on the LAN.
3. Filter Transformer (T1)
A choke module transformer with a EMI filter. The output TX signal from the LAN controller is
differentiated and transmitted on to the LAN via this module. Similarly, the input RX signal
(differential input pair) is terminated by an externally connected 75 ohms resistor and input to the LAN
controller via this module.
4. Ethernet Interface
Provides the 10Base-T/100Base-TX Ethernet interface.

234
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

LED
1. LINK LED (LED1)
The LINK LED normally illuminates when the LAN cable is connected and when a link pulse is
detected. Consequently, LED can be used to determine whether the 10Base-T/100Base-TX cable has
become disconnected (RX side).
2. Activity LED (LED2)
This LED illuminates when reception data is present on the LAN.
(The LED also illuminates when reception data for other devices is present.)
Signal Routing
1. LAN Transmission
a. Transfers the MMR coded data from Image Memory (FROM) to CPU (SC PCB) and converts the
MH coded data.
b. Transfer the MH coded data of CPU (SC PCB) to SDRAM.
c. Transfer the converted text data to buffer RAM on LAN controller (LANB PCB) sequentially.
d. The transmission packet is processed by FIFO transfer to buffer RAM and then converted for
Manchester code. Finally, they are converted for differential pair signal and transmitted to Internet.
2. LAN Reception
a. Processed received data for Manchester coded signal at LAN controller.
b. The decoded received packet goes to buffer RAM through the FIFO. The data stored in buffer RAM
is transferred to SDRAM (SC PCB) by requests from SC PCB.
c. Decodes the Base 64 for MH coded image data at SDRAM and transfers CPU (SC PCB).
d. Inputs MMR coded data from CPU transfers Image Memory (FROM).

235
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

7 General Network Information
7.1.
7.1.1.

Network Protocol
OSI Reference Mode

Having a model in mind helps you understand how the pieces of the network puzzle fit together. The most
commonly used model is the Open System Interconnection (OSI) reference model. The OSI model, first
released in 1984 by the International Standards Organization (ISO), provides a useful structure for defining
and describing the various processes underlying networking communications.
The OSI model organizes communication protocols into seven layers. Layer 1, the Physical (Hardware)
layer, consists of protocols that deal with how data is transferred across the transmission media. At the
opposite end, Layer 7, the Application layer, interfaces the network services with the applications (software)
in use on the computer. The five layers in between, Data Link, Network, Transport, Session and
Presentation - perform intermediate communication tasks. In essence the OSI model is a framework that
describes how a function from one computer is transmitted to another computer on the network.

Layer

Name

Function

7

Application

6

Presentation

5

Session

Protocol
SMB
SMTP
FTP
DNS
HTTP
Telnet
etc...

NetBIOS, Windows, Sockets, etc...
TDI

4

Transport

3

Network

TCP, UDP

IP, IPX, etc...

TCP/IP
IPX/SPX
Net BEUI
Apple Talk
IP Address etc...
etc...

ODI Driver, NDIS Driver

2

1

Datalink

Physical

Router

PPP...
NIC
SW Hub
Repeater
Hub

Ethernet
Token Ring
FDDI
ATM
etc...
RS-232C, X21...

MAC Address

OSI Reference Model and Network Terms

236
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

7.1.2.

Protocol

One reason for the popularity of TCP/IP is that no one vendor owns it, unlike the IPX/SPX, DNA, SNA or
Apple Talk protocol suites, all of which are controlled by specific companies. TCP/IP evolved in response to
input from a wide variety of industry sources. Consequently, it is the most open of the protocol suites and is
supported by the widest variety of vendors. One huge advantage of using TCP/IP is that, it is required for
communication over the Internet, thus the Internet can be used as a communication backbone.
TCP/IP was originally designed by ARPANET (Advanced Research Project Agency) in 1969 for the UNIX
operating system. In early 1980, UNIX 4.2 BSD version was released. For more detailed information, an
RFC (Request for Comment) document is available from the IETF (Internet Engineering Task Force) on the
Internet at http://www.ietf.org/.
The Internet protocols do no map cleanly to the OSI reference model. The model for the Internet protocol
suite has four layers. From the illustration below, you can see the approximate relationship of the layers.

Layer
7
6
5
4

3

2

1

OSI Reference Model TCP/IP Base
Function
Application
This layer embraces functions of the OSI
Application
Session, Presentation and Application
Presentation
layers. Protocols at this layer provide
Session
network services.
Compares to OSI Transport layer.
Transport
Transport
Enables peer communication between
hosts on the internetwork.
Network
Internet
Corresponds roughly to the OSI Network
layer. Protocols move data between
devices on networks.
Corresponds to the bottom two layers of
Data Link
Network
the OSI model. This correspondence
Interface
enables the TCP/IP protocols to coexist
with existing Data Link and Physical layer
Physical
standards. This layer is concerned with all
aspects of transmitting and receiving data
on the network.
Comparison of the TCP/IP layers to the OSI model

7.1.3.

Cable

For the network transmission media at the Physical layer on the OSI reference model, there are several
cable categories available. Category 5, 8 wire Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) cable is commonly used.
Shielded Twisted Pair cables are also available. The Impedance for the STP / UTP Ethernet cable is 100 Ω.
Category 3 is also used for the 10Base-T Ethernet.
Category
1
2
3
4
5

Purpose
Voice grade telephone line
ISDN
10Base-T Token Ring (4M)
Token Ring (16M)
100Base-TX, ATM (155M)

237
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

7.2.
7.2.1.

Layer Functions and Technology
MAC (Media Access Control)

The MAC address is burnt into each network card for establishing addresses for nodes on the network.
These addresses are hexadecimal in nature and are unique for each card. The First three bytes from the
left end identify the manufacturer’s code that must be approved by IEEE (Institute of Electrical and
Electronics Engineers). The Remaining three bytes on the right half should be kept in a unique manner. For
Ethernet connections, multiple stations share the topology, therefore, the identification packet from each
station should be unique.

XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX
Unique value
Manufacturer ID
MGCS:080023
7.2.2.

Network Control

CSMA/CD (Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection) If a node is trying to make a link to the
network, transmission from another station is prohibited and halted until the data transfer is completed and
the link is off. CSMA/CD and Token Passing are typical techniques used to control the connection. The
General sequence is as follows:
Wait for the next available timing to send,
Send out a frame,
Perform collision sensing simultaneously,
Retry to send the same frame up to 16 times if necessary.
(Sequence goes by a binary exponential back-off algorithm to avoid periodical incident)
802.3 (Ethernet) Frame Format

Least significant bit
Most significant bit
Pre-amble Destination MAC address Source MAC address Data type Data
FCS
8 byte
6 byte
6 byte
2 byte
46 1500 byte 4 byte
Destination MAC address: 6 byte (uni-cast or broadcast)
If all "1" on 6 byte (FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF) means broadcast frame, it is detected by an applicable node, it
must be passed to the upper layer.
Also, if the destination MAC address is not matched with that node, the frame is discarded at that node
immediately.
Token Passing
Token passing utilizes a frame called a token, which circulates around the network. A computer that needs
to transmit must wait until it receives the token, at which time the computer is permitted to transmit. When
the computer is done transmitting, it passes the token frame to the next station on the network.
The first station that is powered up on a token-ring network automatically becomes the active monitor
station. Its responsibility is to announce itself to the next active downstream station as the active monitor
station and request that station to announce itself to its next active downstream station. After each station
announces itself to its next active downstream neighbor, the announcing station becomes the nearest active
upstream neighbor (NAUN) to the downstream station. After each station becomes aware of its NAUN, the
beaconing process continues every seven seconds.

238
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

A computer in the ring captures the token, if it has data to transmit, it holds the token and transmits a data
frame. This data frame is passed to each computer in the ring, which checks whether it is the intended
recipient of the frame.
When the frame reaches the destination address, the destination PC copies the frame to a receive buffer,
updates the frame status field of the data frame and puts the frame back on the ring.When the computer
that originally sent the frame receives it back from the ring, it acknowledges a successful transmission,
takes the frame off the ring, and places the token back on the ring.
Token Frame indicates that the network is available for transmission.
Data Frame indicates that the network is busy processing a transmission.
Token Frame Format

Least significant bit
Most significant bit
Start De-limiter (SFD) P P P S M R R R End De-limiter (ED)
1 byte
1 byte
P: priority
S: Status
0 = Token Frame
1 = Data Frame
R: Reserved
Data Frame Format

Most significant bit
Access Frame
SFD
1 byte Control control
1 byte 1 byte

Destination Source
Data
MAC
MAC
6 or 2 byte 6 or 2 byte

Least significant bit
FCS
ED
Frame
4 byte 1 byte Status
1 byte

Data: Max 4429 byte (4M)
Max 17779 (16M)
There are several different bit types assigned for Frame Status. For example, 1 and 5 bit indicates that the
token has been read, 2 and 6 bit indicates that the frame has been copied by another station. Thus, we can
confirm whether the Data Frame was delivered.

239
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

7.2.3.

Ethernet

Ethernet is a very popular local area network architecture based on the CSMA/CD access method. The
original ethernet specification was the basis for the IEEE 802.3 specifications. Typically, ethernet networks
can use a bus physical topology, although, many varieties of ethernet such as 10Base-T uses a star
physical topology and a bus logical topology. (Microsoft uses the term "star bus topology" to describe
10Base-T)

10Base-5

Speed (bps) Topology
Cable Type
10M
Bus
Yellow cable

10Base-T
10M
100Base-TX 100M

Star
Star

Max Length
500 m (1640 ft)

Twisted Pair (Cat. 3, 4, 5) 100 m (328 ft)
Twisted Pair (Cat. 5)
200 m (656 ft)

802.3 (CSMA/CD) Network Type

Max length (x 100m)
10

BASE

Logical speed
(Mbps)

5
BASE : baseband (digital)
BROAD: broadband (analog)

10

BASE

-

T
TP Twisted Pair

hyphen "-" means type of cable
no "-" means max length
Ethernet Configuration

240
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

1
2
3
6

TX (+)
TX (-)
RX (+)
RX (-)

1

1

TX (+)

1

2

2

TX (-)

2

3

3

RX (+)

3

6

6

RX (-)

6

Straight Cable

Crossed Cable

Ethernet Cable Pin Configuration
All eight pins on the Ethernet cable are normally wired in this configuration accordingly.
The Electrical level follows the Manchester code configuration.

"1"

"0"
0V

-2.05 V
Out of balance in electrical levels indicates that a collision is occurring in a certain area. To avoid from
further malfunctions, terminating the physical end is required for coaxial cables.
If a collision is detected, transmission is stopped and a maximum of 4.8 usec. of JAM packet is sent. The
node that receives the JAM packet, discards the applicable received data. The maximum timing for collision
detection is called slot time, normally set to 49.9 usec. The interval of 9.6 usec to 10 usec after the end of
transmission frame is reserved for non-transmission period.
There are several merits to Ethernet wiring, the physical connection is easy and flexible for future expansion
due to the star topology.

7.2.4.

Repeater

The main purpose of a repeater is to extend the maximum range for the network cabling. They operate at
the OSI Physical layer, and do not filter or interpret the signal - they merely repeat (regenerate) the signal,
passing all network traffic in all directions.
They perform signal amplitude, delete errors and reschedule the timing. Repeaters also follow the 5-4-3
rule, where no more than 5 network segments connected by 4 repeaters, with no more than 3 of the
segments being populated.
Active Hubs function in part as repeaters (amplify and regenerate network signals), they occasionally are
called multiport repeaters.

7.2.5.

NIC (Network Interface Card)

NIC is an acronym for Network Interface Card, which plugs into a computer and adapts the network
interface to the appropriate standard. ISA, PCI, and PCMCIA cards are all examples of NICs.

241
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

7.3.
7.3.1.

Network Layer
IP Address

An IP address is a set of four numbers, or octets, that can range in value between 0 and 255. Each octet is
separated by a period (i.e. 192.168.31.1). All devices on a network that runs the TCP/IP protocol suite need
a unique IP address. Most machines use a Domain Name, which are easier for people to remember.
The IP addresses are actually broken down into three distinct classes, knows as class A, class B and class
C addresses.
Class A IP addresses contain a number between 1 and 127 before the first dot. In class A address, this first
octet represents the network address, and the last three octets represent the node or host number.
Class B IP addresses can range in value from 128 to 191 for the first octet, but it is the first two octets that
make up the network address, and the last two octets that make up the host ID.
Class C IP addresses can range in value from 192 to 223 for the first octet, and the first three octets make
up the host ID.
There are class D and E addresses as well. For these addresses, the first octet is a number greater than
223. These addresses are not currently available to be used and are reserved for other purposes.
Class A : First octet reserved for the network address
Class B : First two octets reserved for the network address
Class C : First three octets reserved for the network address

Class A 0
Class B 1 0
Class C 1 1 0
Network address represented as
Private networks that do not connect to the Internet (operate internally) allow additional flexibility with IP
addresses. Three classifications are available as shown below:
Class A : 10.0.0.0 - 10.255.255.255
Class B : 172.16.0.0 - 172.31.255.255
Class C : 192.168.0.0 - 192.168.255.255

242
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

7.3.2.

Subnet Mask

A subnet mask defines how sub-segments of a network are treated.

IP
192.168.32.1
Subnet Mask
255.255.255.0

Network
Address
192.168.32.0

1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
192
168
32
1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
255
255
0
255
IP
Subnet Mask

1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Network Address Configuration

Global IP
Address
190.0.0.0
255.255.0.0

190.0.3.1
255.255.255.0

190.0.3.2
255.255.255.0

190.0.3.3
255.255.255.0

190.0.2.2
255.255.255.0

190.0.2.3
255.255.255.0

Router
190.0.2.1
255.255.255.0

Note
Upper: IP address
Lower: Subnet mask

190.0.1.1
255.255.255.0

190.0.1.2
255.255.255.0

190.0.1.3
255.255.255.0

Third
Floor

Second
Floor

Ground
Floor

Class B Subnet Outline
For network management purposes, special IP addresses are assigned.
1. Host address is set to all “0”
2. Host address is set to all “1”
Reserved for IP broadcasting to all subnet stations.
3. All 4 octets are set to all “1”
IP broadcast of 255.255.255.255 can be passed over the router when the network address is specified.
Normally, this is used for DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) network.
4. All 4 octets are set to all “0”
Reserved for default route for non-destination address
5. Most significant bit starting with “127”
Reserved for loop back address

243
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

7.3.3.

Internet Protocol

The IP (Internet Protocol) operating at the OSI Network layer, is a connectionless protocol that provides
datagram service, and IP packets are most commonly referred to as IP data grams.
It performs the following typical functions:
1. Identifies the IP address
2. Packet disassembly and reassembly of the IP datagram
3. Routing of the IP address

4 byte
Version

Internet
Header Length

Type Of Service

Total Length

ID
Time To Live

Flags

Fragment Offset
Header Checksum

Protocol
Source Address
Destination Address
Option + Padding (size varies)
Data

IP Datagram
Terms
Version
Internet Header
Length
Type Of Service
ID
Flags
Fragment Offset
Time To Live
Protocol
Header Checksum
Source Address
Destination Address
Option
Padding

Detail
Currently version 4
IP Header field length
Service priority requested by IP Datagram (3 bits are reserved for
precedence)
Identification frame number for upper layer communication
Packet disassembly information
Offset from most significant bit
Decrement the counter until 0 every time packet pass over the router
Upper layer protocol identification number. ie TCP (06h), UDP (11h)
Checksum is used for error checking on the header data
Sender’s IP Address
Destination’s IP Address
When implemented
Fill bit field to add up to 32 bit

244
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

7.3.4.

Router

Routers, operating at the OSI Network layer, organize the large network in terms of logical network
segments. Each network segment is assigned an address so that every packet has both a destination
network address and a destination device address.
Routers are more intelligent than bridges. Not only do routers build tables of network locations, but they
also use algorithms to determine the most efficient path for sending a packet to any given network by
identifying its header information.
These are the typical functions:
1. Routing
This controls the traffic according to a specified routing table.
2. Packet Filtering
This performs the access and security control for specified routing.

access-list permit tcp 192.168.32.0 0.0.0.255 192.168.33.1 0.0.0.0 eq 23
192.168.32/24

PC-A
192.168.32.1/24

192.168.33/24
Router B

PC-C
192.168.33.1/24

PC-B
192.168.32.2/24

OK

PC-D
192.168.33.2/24

OK
permission denied

permission denied
Packet Filtering Sample
3. Address Conversion
NAT (Network Address Translator), This performs conversion of a single global IP Address from/to
single private IP Address.
4. IP Masquerade:
This performs a conversion of single global IP Address from/to multiple private IP Address.
At the same time the port number is automatically assigned.
Occasionally, the conversion creates a bottleneck in the network overhead. For a typical solution, PIX
(Private address Internet address exchange) is available from Cisco, which is a well-known
manufacturer.
5. Designated Reply
These are reply that keep a connection alive by responding with a signal periodically.
Watch Dog in IPX/SPX, TCP/IP in TCP, and Net BT (NetBIOS on TCP/IP) in Windows NT are all well
known techniques to keep a live connection.

245
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

7.4.
7.4.1.

Transport Layer
TCP (Transmission Control Protocol)

The TCP (Transmission Control Protocol) is an internetwork connection-oriented protocol that corresponds
to the OSI Transport layer. TCP provides full-duplex, end-to-end connections. When the end-to-end
communication acknowledgement is not required, the UDP (User Datagram Protocol) can be substituted for
the TCP at the Transport (host-to-host) level. TCP and UDP operate at the same layer.
The UDP is a connectionless oriented protocol.

IP Datagram
TCP segment
IP Header
(20 byte)

TCP Header
(20 byte)

Application D ata
(vary)

TCP Segment in IP Datagram
Source Port (2 byte)
Destination Port (2 byte)
Sequence Number (4 byte)
Acknowledgment Number (4 byte)
Header Length
(4 bit)

Reserved
(6 bit)

Control Flag
(6 bit)

Checksum (2 byte)
Option

Window (6 byte)
Urgent Pointer (2 byte)
PAD

Data (Segment)

TCP Segment Outline

TCP Header Monitoring Sample

246
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

Client

SYN, Se

quential

No.=453

8970

Increments No. sequentially

538971
K No.=4
000
ACK, AC
1919424
.=
o
N
l
a
ti
quen
SYN, Se
ACK, AC
K

No.=191

9724001

Server

Panasonic
Device
TCP 3 Handshake General Flowchart
The client generates random sequential numbers initially and sends them to the server. The initial
sequential numbers are synchronized with the clock and increments the counter every 4 msec.
The Server responds with an acknowledgement that increments the initial sequential number by one. The
ACK bit number is also changed to a "1" value. The "SYN" can have and identical "ACK" response for each
packet, thus, the server and the client can establish a connection.

247
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

7.5.
7.5.1.

Upper Layer
DNS (Domain Name System)

The DNS (Domain Name System) protocol provides host name and IP address resolution as a service to
client applications. DNS servers enable humans to use logical node names, utilizing a fully qualified domain
name structure, to access network resources.
Domain Names are comprised of 2 or more parts, separated by dots. The part on the left is the most
specific, and the part on the right is the most general. A given device may have more than one Domain
Name but a given Domain Name points to only one device. For example, the Domain Names below:
Panasonic.com
Mail.panasonic.com
ifax.panasonic.com
can all refer to the same device, but each domain name can refer to no more than one device.
Usually, all of the devices on a given network will have the same right-hand portion of their Domain Names
(i.e. panasonic.com in the examples above). It is also possible for a Domain Name to exist but not be
connected to an actual device.
This is often done so that a group or business can have an Internet email address without having to
establish a real Internet site. In these cases, some real Internet machine must handle the email on behalf of
the listed Domain Name.
Specification for this name system follows this basic guideline.
• The name must be separated by dots and must start with ASCII code.
• Only Alpha numeric and hyphen are available.
• Up to 63 characters maximum, separated by dots.
• Up to 255 characters maximum, including all dots.
• Capital letters and small letters are not identical. (Case Sensitive.)

DNS Server (root)
DNS Server (jp)

3
2
1

Panasonic
Device

5
4
6

10
8
DNS Server
(panasonic.com)

DNS Server (co.jp)

7

9

DNS Server Mail Server
mlsv.panafax.co.jp
(panafax.co.jp)
domain

DNS Name Resolution Sample
The advantage of using a DNS server over a host lookup table, for host name resolution, is to avoid the
need for a single centralized clearinghouse for all names. The authority for this information can be
delegated to different organizations on the network responsible for it.
There are at least 10 Root DNS servers installed all over the world.

248
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

The Name resolution flow is shown in the illustration above and follows the sequence below:
1. Query the local DNS Server.
2. Query the root DNS Server because the domain belongs to a destination outside of the company.
3. Com root DNS Server sends the query to the jp root DNS Server.
4. The procedure repeats until a final name resolution is available.
5. The panafax.co.jp server responds with an IP address for the query name.
6. Finally, the name resolution is completed and the destination IP address is determined.
All DNS servers makes an effort to resolve the query name with an IP address, however, a response is not
always sent out every time. Once a name resolution is completed, the information from the DNS Server IP
address table is kept in cache memory at each DNS server in accordance with a minimum TTL (Time To
Live) of SOA (Start Of Authority) record. There are two types of Name Servers, Primary and Secondary
Name Server.

7.5.2.

Primary Name Server

A primary server has the original copy of a zone file. Any changes made to the zone file are made to the
copy on the primary server. When a primary server receives a query about a host name in its own zone, it
retrieves the host resolution locally from its own zone files.

7.5.3.

Secondary Name Server

A secondary server gets a copy of zone files from another server. This zone file is a read-only copy of the
original file from the primary server. Any changes made to the zone file are made at the primary server, then
the changes are copied down to the secondary server through a zone transfer. Multiple secondary servers
in a domain improves performance.

249
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

7.5.4.

SOA (Start of Authority) Record

Each database file starts with a Start of Authority (SOA) record for the file. This record specifies the zone’s
primary server, the server that maintains the read/write copy of the file. The syntax of this record is as
follows:
IN SOA 
An example of the syntax is shown below:
;
; File:
db.127.0.0 file
; Purpose: This file establishes the identity of this DNS.
;
SOA stands for 'start of authority' and sets the
;
default parameters for information this DNS is
;
authoritative for:
;
@
IN SOA
nwr42.rdmg.mgcs.mei.co.jp. hostmaster.rdmg.mgcs.mei.co.jp. (
951213
; serial number
43200
; refresh every 12 hours
; retry after 2 hours
7200
1209600 ; expire after 2 weeks
172800) ; default ttl is 2 days
;
IN NS
nwr42.rdmg.mgcs.mei.co.jp.
1
IN PTR
localhost.rdmg.mgcs.mei.co.jp.
;

SOA Record (Bind 4.9.5 for NT) in "db.127.0.0" file
The "@" symbol in this example indicates the local server; "IN" indicates an Internet record. The FQDN for
the name server NWR18 must end in a period. Note that the email address for the administrator must have
a period instead of the "@" symbol. Also, if the SOA record is on more than one line, an open parenthesis
must end the first line, and a close parenthesis must end the last line.
The following list explains the other parameters:
* Source host: The name of the host that has the read/write copy of the zone file.
* Contact email: The Internet email address of the person who maintains this file. This address must be
expressed with a period instead of the "@" that is usually found in email addresses (i.e.
hostmaster.rdmg.mgcs.mei.co.jp instead of hostmaster@rdmg.mgcs.mei.co.jp).
* Serial number: A version number for the zone file. This number should be changed each time the zone
file changes, it changes automatically if you use DNS Manager to change the zone file.
* Refresh time: The time, in seconds, that a secondary server waits before checking the master server for
changes to the database file. If the file has changed, the secondary server requests a zone transfer.
* Retry time: The time, in seconds, that a secondary server waits before trying again if a zone transfer
fails.
* Expiration time: The time, in seconds, that a secondary server keeps trying to transfer a zone. After the
expiration time passes, the old zone information is deleted.
* TTL: The time, in seconds, that a server can cache resource records from this database file. The TTL is
sent as part of the response for any queries that are answered from this database file. An individual
resource record can have a TT: that overrides this value.

250
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

7.5.5.

A (Address) Record

The A (Address) Record, lists the addresses for a given machine. The name field is the machine’s name
and the address is the network address. There should be one A record for each address on the machine.

; BIND version named 4.9.5-Rel+-Monday-dd-Month-yy
; BIND version GregSchueman-LarryKahn-VirajBais
; zone ' rdmg.mgcs.mei.co.jp' last serial 720
; from 133.185.245.7 at Sun Mmm dd:11:35 yyyy
$ORIGIN mgcs.mei.co.jp.
rdmg
IN
SOA
nwmgr.mgcs.mei.co.jp. postmaster.rdmg.mgcs.mei.co.jp. (
721 10800 3600 604800 86400 )
IN
NS
nwmgr.mgcs.mei.co.jp.
IN
MX
10 mlsv2.rdmg.mgcs.mei.co.jp.
$ORIGIN rdmg.mgcs.mei.co.jp.
ifax-gz03
IN
A
172.21.94.216
qmc-cco1
IN
A
133.185.254.212
ifaxos01
IN
A
172.21.97.26
ifpdyna
IN
A
202.244.202.29

A Record (Bind 4.9.5 for NT) in "db zone.info" file

7.5.6.

PTR (Pointer) Record

Pointer records are the reverse-lookup file entries that enable IP addresses to be resolved to host names.
DNS is used to resolve host names to IP addresses, so the opposite process is called reverse lookup.
They specify the IP address in reverse order (like a DNS name, with the most specific information first) and
then corresponding host name. The files are named according to the class of network, but with the octets in
reverse order. The syntax for a PTR record is shown below:
 IN PTR 

1
;

IN NS
IN PTR

nwr42.rdmg.mgcs.mei.co.jp.
localhost.rdmg.mgcs.mei.co.jp.

PTR record (Bind 4.9.5 for NT) in "db.127.0.0" file.
7.5.7.

CNAME (Canonical Name) Record

The CNAME (or canonical name) record is an alias (nickname), enabling you to specify more than one
name for each IP address. The syntax of a CNAME is shown below:
 CNAME 
Using CNAME records, you can combine an FTP and a Web server on the same host. Nicknames are
useful when a well-known host changes its name. In this case, its usually a good idea to have a CNAME
record so people still using the old name, will get to the right place.

251
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

7.5.8.

NS (Name Server) Record

The Name Server record specifies the other name servers for a domain. The syntax for a name server
record is shown below:
 IN NS 
An example of a name server record follows below:
@ IN NS nwmgr.mgcs.mei.co.jp
The "@" symbol indicates the local domain. The server "nwmgr" in the domain "mgcs.mei.co.jp" is the
name server.

7.5.9.

MX (Mail Exchange) Record

The Mail Exchange (MX) record specifies the name of the host that processes mail for this domain. If you
list multiple mail servers, you can set a preference number (value) that specifies the order in which the mail
server should be used. Note that lower values indicate higher precedence, and that mailers are supposed
to randomize same-value MX hosts so as to distribute the load evenly if values are equal. If the first
preferred mail server does not respond, the second one is contacted, and so on.
If you want a host to receive its own mail, you should create an MX record for your host’s name, pointing at
your host’s name. The syntax of this record is shown below:
 IN MX  
For a more detail, please refer to RFC974 document at URL http://www.ietf.org/.

7.5.10. Reverse Lookup
This is a special domain for allowing address to name mapping. As Internet host addresses do not fall
within domain boundaries, this special domain was formed to allow inverse mapping. The IN-ADDR.ARPA
domain has four labels preceding it. These labels correspond to the 4 octets of an Internet address. All four
octets must be specified even if an octet contains zero. The Internet address 128.32.0.4 is located in the
domain 4.0.32.128.IN-ADDR.ARPA. This reversal of the address is awkward to read but allows for the
natural grouping of hosts in a network.

7.5.11.

Forwarding

A Slave Server is a server that always forwards queries it cannot satisfy from its cache, to a fixed list of
forwarding servers instead of interacting with the name servers for the root and other domains. The queries
to the forwarding servers are recursive queries. There may be one or more forwarding servers, and they are
tried in turn until the list is exhausted. A Slave and forwarder configuration is typically used when you do not
wish all the servers at a given site to interact with the rest of the Internet servers. A typical scenario would
involve a number of workstations and a departmental timesharing machine with Internet access. The
workstations might be administratively prohibited from having Internet access. To give the workstations the
appearance of access to the Internet domain system, the workstations could be Slave servers to the
timesharing machine, which would forward the queries and interact with other name servers to resolve the
query before returning the answer. An added benefit of using the forwarding feature is that the central
machine develops a much more complete cache of information that all the workstations can take advantage
of. The use of Slave mode and forwarding is discussed further under the description of the named bootfile
commands.
There is no prohibition against declaring a server to be a slave even though it has primary and/or secondary
zones as well; the effect will still be that anything in the local server’s cache or zones will be answered, and
anything else will be forwarded using the forwarders list.
For more detail, please refer to published book (i.e. DNS and BIND etc) provided from O’ Reilly &
Associates, Inc.

252
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

7.6.

SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol)

The objective of Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) is to transfer mail reliably and efficiently.
SMTP is independent of the particular transmission subsystem and requires only a reliable ordered data
stream channel.
The SMTP design is based on the following model of communication: as the result of a user mail request,
the sender-SMTP establishes a two-way transmission channel to a receiver-SMTP. The receiver-SMTP
may be either the ultimate destination or an intermediate. SMTP commands are generated by the senderSMTP and sent to the receiver-SMTP. SMTP replies are sent from the receiver-SMTP to the sender-SMTP
in response to the commands. Once the transmission channel is established, the SMTP-sender sends a
MAIL command indicating the sender of the mail. If the SMTP-receiver can accept mail it responds with an
OK reply.
The SMTP-sender then sends a RCPT command identifying a recipient of the mail. If the SMTP-receiver
can accept mail for that recipient it responds with an OK reply, if not, it responds with a reply rejecting that
recipient (but not the whole mail transaction). The SMTP-sender and SMTP-receiver may negotiate several
recipients. When the recipients have been negotiated the SMTP-sender sends the mail data, terminating
with a special sequence. If the SMTP-receiver successfully processes the mail data it responds with an OK
reply. The dialog is purposely lock-step, one-at-a-time. For more detail, please refer to the URL http://
www.imc. org/rfc821

Internet
SMTP Server

PC

DNS Server
SMTP

POP Server

PC
POP 3

Internet Mail Sending and Receiving

7.6.1.

Mail Header Sample
Received: from nwr35
by labo.mgcs.com (8.9.3/3.7W-RDMG) with SMTP id PAA09157
Delivery route
for ; Sun, dd Mmm yyyy 15:04:48 +0900 (JST)
Date: Sun, dd Mmm yyyy 15:04:48 +0900 (JST)
Message-Id: <199908200604.PAA09157@mlsv2.labo.mgcs.com>
Message ID
Mime-Version: 1.0
X-Mailer: Internet FAX, MGCS
From: "MGCS" 
Subject: IMAGE from Internet FAX
To: freeport@labo.mgcs.com
Content-Type: multipart/mixed; boundary="+-+-+-MGCS-+-+-+"
Content-Type
X-UIDL: 8f32e4b1d691fdfc28daa812d913f572

253
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

7.7.
7.7.1.

ITU T.37 and RFC2305
Mode of Operation

The Unit conforms to the ITU T.37 standards and RFC2305. This Internet store and forward facsimile uses
approved IETF protocols for posting, relaying and delivery of documents. It requires no changes to Internet
standards or to ITU Facsimile Recommendations.
Store and forward facsimiles may operate in one of two modes.
Communicating in the Simple Mode as defined below provides inter operability. All terminals conforming to
this recommendation and capable of reception must be able to receive in Simple Mode. It is recommended
that terminals conforming to this recommendation and capable of transmitting should, as a minimum, be
capable of transmitting in Simple Mode.
Simple Mode supports the transfer of image data. Capability exchange and confirmation of receipt are not
required for Simple Mode but may be provided using optional email functions outside the scope of this
recommendation.

7.7.2.

Implementation Requirements for T.37 Simple Mode Table
Sender

Required

Strongly
recommended
Optional

Send data as a single MIME multi-page TIFF Profile S file
Provide notice in case of local transmission problem
Provide a return address of an Internet email receiver which is MIME
compliant
Include Message-ID
Use Base 64 encoding for image data
Use other TIFF Profiles if it has prior knowledge that such profiles are
supported by the receiver
Provide notice on receipt of DSN or other notifications
Receiver

Required

Optional

Be MIME compliant except that it is not required to offer to place
MIME attachment in a file and may print a received file rather than
display
Be capable of processing multiple MIME TIFF Profile S image files
within a single message
Provide notice in case of reception or processing problems
Use other TIFF Profiles

254
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

Offramp Gateway (when implemented)

Required

Strongly
recommended
Optional

7.7.3.

Be SMTP compliant
Provide delivery failure notification
Be able to process PSTN/FAX email address
Comply with the relevant ITU Recommendations relating to facsimile
transmission
Attempt to relay authorized email to the corresponding G3 facsimile
terminals
Ensure DSN for delivery failure notification
Use DSN for delivery failure notification
Use an approved mailbox access protocol when serving multiple
users
Translate image data into a format acceptable by the receiving G3
facsimile terminal
Use a mailbox access protocol when serving a single mail recipient

Definitions and Abbreviations
IETF
RFC
MIME
POP3
SMTP
DSN
MDN
TIFF
IFD
Offramp
gateway
Mailstore
Notice

Internet Engineering Task Force
Request For Comment
Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions
Post Office Protocol version 3
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol
Delivery Status Notification
Message Disposition Notification
Tagged Image File Format
TIFF Image File Directory
Equipment capable of receiving email and relaying to one or more G3/
G4 facsimile terminals
Equipment capable of receiving email and storing it for retrievals by
receiver
Provision of status information to the originator or recipient in a
manner to be determined by the device
RFC reference http://www.imc.org/ietf-fax/

File Format for Internet Fax
RFC2301
Tag Image File Format (TIFF) image/tiff MIME Sub-type RFC2302
Registration
Minimal PSTN address format in Internet Mail
RFC2303
Minimal FAX address format in Internet Mail
RFC2304
A simple Mode of Facsimile Using Internet Mail
RFC2305
Tag Image File Format (TIFF)-F Profile for facsimile
RFC2306

255
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

7.7.4.

File Format for Internet Fax

Sending Internet Fax devices must be able to write minimum set TIFF files, according to the rules for
creating minimum set TIFF files defined in TIFF for Facsimile (the S profile) [RFC2301], which is also
compatible with the specification for the minimum subset of TIFF-F in [RFC2306]. Receiving Internet Fax
devices MUST be able to read minimum set TIFF files.
The Following tree diagram shows the relationship among profiles and between profiles and coding
methods.

S (MH)
Color

B/W

C (JPEG)
J
(JBIG)

F
(MMR, MR)

L (JPEG)

M (MRC)

MRC: Mixed Raster Content
A profile is based on a collection of ITU-T facsimile coding methods.
Class
S
F
J
C
L

Color
B/W
B/W
B/W
Color
Color

M

Color

Coding Method
MH
MMR, MR
JBIG
JPEG (lossy)
JPEG (lossless,
grayscale)
Mixed Raster
Content

Remarks
Internet Fax minimal set
Internet Fax full mode
Internet Fax mixed mode
Color minimal set
One bit per color,palletized color image, continuos tone
color and grayscale images
Multiple coders and resolution within a page

256
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

7.7.5.

Minimal Set

The minimum interchange set of TIFF fields that must be supported by all implementations in order to
assure that some form of an image, albeit black-and-white, can be interchanged.
The table below summarizes the TIFF fields that comprise the minimal interchange set for black-and-white
facsimile. The Baseline and Extenuation fields and fields values must be supported by all implementations.
Baseline Fields
Bits Per Sample
Compression
Fill Order
Image Width
Image Length
New Sub File Type
Page Number
Photometric Interpretation
Resolution Unit
Rows Per Strip
Samples Per Pixel
Strip Byte Counts
Strip Offsets
X Resolution
Y Resolution
Extensions Fields
T4 Options

7.7.6.

Values
1
3:1 dimension MH coding set T4 Options = 0 or 4
Least significant bit first
1728 (A-4)
N: total number of scan lines in image
2: Bit 1 identifies single page of a multi-page document
N, m: page number n followed by total page count m
0: pixel value 1 means black
2: inch
Number of scan lines per strip = Image length, with one strip
1
Number of byte in TIFF strip
Offsets from beginnings of file to single TIFF strip
204, 200 (pixels/inch)
98, 196, 100, 200 (pixels/inch)
0: MH coding, EOLs not byte aligned4: MH coding, EOLs
byte aligned

Addressing

A simple method of encoding PSTN addresses in the local-part of Internet email addresses, along with an
extension mechanism to allow encoding of additional standard attributes needed for email gateway to
PSTN-based services.

(1) Offramp

(2) Sub address

(3) Others

FAX= +12125551212@ panafax.com
Global-phone
Service selector

Domain

FAX= +3940 / T33S=183 @ faxworld.org
Sub address
Selector
Global-phone
Service selector
VOICE = +3940183@ panafax.com
Global-phone
Service selector

Domain

Domain

257
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

Note:
For RFC2305, a PSTN address in an email address should follow the above style. The key words
“MUST”, “MUST NOT”, “REQUIRED”, “SHALL”, “SHALL NOT”, “SHOULD”, “SHOULD NOT”,
“RECOMMENDED”, “MAY”, and “OPTIONAL” in this document are to be interpreted as described in
RFC 2119. URL http://www.imc.org/rfc2119
1. MUST
This word, or the terms “REQUIRED” or “SHALL”, means that the definition is an absolute requirement
of the specification.
2. MUST NOT
This phrase, or the phrase “SHALL NOT”, means that the definition is an absolute prohibition of the
specification.
3. SHOULD
These words, or the adjective “RECOMMENDED”, means that there may exist valid reasons in
particular circumstances to ignore a particular item, but the full implications must be understood and
carefully weighed before choosing a different course.
4. SHOULD NOT
This phrase, or the phrase “NOT RECOMMENDED” means that there may exist valid reasons in
particular circumstances when the particular behavior is acceptable or even useful, but the full
implications should be understood and the case carefully weighed before implementing any behavior
described with this label.

7.7.7.

Coding Example of a TIFF Header, IFD and Image Data
Header
Value Offset

IFD (Page 0)
Long Values
Image Data
(Page 0)

Value Offset

IFD (Page 1)
Long Values
Image Data
(Page 1)

First IFD Offset
Next IFD Offset
Strip Offset

Next IFD Offset
Strip Offset

IFD (Page 2)
File Structure

258
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

Message Header Contents

7.7.8.

Delivery Failure

In the event of relay failure, the sending relay must generate a failure message, which should be in the
format of a DSN.

7.7.9.

Image File Format

The Sending Internet Fax devices MUST be able to write minimum set TIFF files, according to the rules for
creating minimum set TIFF files defined in TIFF for Facsimile (the S profile), which is also compatible with
the specifications for the minimum subset of TIFF-F in F Profile for Facsimile, RFC 2306.
The Receiving Internet Fax devices must be able to read minimum set TIFF files.

259
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

7.8.

Communication Protocols

The set of conventions necessary to achieve facsimile-compatible service covers basic data transport,
document data formats, message (document) addressing, delivery confirmation, and message security.
Protocol supported by the your Panasonic Device is as follows:

SMTP Command & Reply Procedure
SMTP Server
(sv2.labo.mgcs.com)

your Panasonic Device
(ef1.labo.mgcs.com)
TCP 3 Way
Handshake &
Opening Session
[5 minutes]

Opening TCP Connection (TCP Port No. 25)
220 sv2.labo.mgcs.com Service ready

SMTP Command

HELO sv2.labo.mgcs.com
250 ef1.labo.mgcs.com
MAIL FROM: 
[5 minutes]

250 OK
RCPT TO: 

[5 minutes]

250 OK
DATA

[2 minutes]

250 Start mail out;end with  . 

DATA BLOCK

DATA BLOCK 1
[3 minutes]
[3 minutes]
DATA BLOCK n
CR/LF . CR/LF
[10 minutes]
Closing

DATA BLOCK 2

250 OK
QUIT
221sv2.labo.mgcs.com Service closing
transmission channel
Closing TCP Connection (TCP Port No. 25)

According to RFC1123, there are two approaches for time-outs in the sender-SMTP:
1. limit the time for each SMTP command separately, or
2. limit the time for the entire SMTP dialogue for a single mail message.
A sender-SMTP SHOULD use option (a), per-command timeouts.Timeouts SHOULD be easily
reconfigurable, preferably without recompiling the SMTP code.
The value of timer [ ] shown above are recommended by RFC1123.

260
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

7.8.1.

Opening and Closing

At the time the transmission channel is opened there is an exchange of commands to ensure that the hosts
are communicating with the hosts they think they are. The following two commands are used in the
transmission channel for opening and closing:
HELO:  
QUIT:
In the HELO command, the host sending the command identifies itself; the command may be interpreted as
saying, “Hello, I am ”.

7.8.2.

Mail (MAIL)

This command is used to initiate a mail transaction in which the mail data is delivered to one or more
mailboxes.

7.8.3.

RECIPIENT (RCPT)

This command is used to identify an individual recipient of the mail data; multiple recipients are specified by
multiple uses of this command.

7.8.4.

Data (DATA)

The receiver treats the lines following the command as mail data from the sender. This command causes
the mail data from this command to be appended to the mail data buffer. The mail data may contain any of
the 128 ASCII character codes. The mail data is terminated by a line containing only a period, that is the
character sequence “.”. This is the end of mail data indication.

7.8.5.

Send

This command is used to initiate a mail transaction in which the mail data is delivered to one or more
terminals. This command is successful if the message is delivered to a terminal.

7.8.6.

Reset (RSET)

This command specifies that the current mail transaction is to be aborted. Any stored sender, recipients,
and mail data must be discarded, and all buffers and state tables cleared. The receiver must send an OK
reply.

7.8.7.

Verify (VRFY)

This command asks the receiver to confirm that the argument identifies a user. If it is a user name, the full
name of the user (if known) and the fully specified mailbox are returned.

7.8.8.

Quit (QUIT)

This command specifies that the receiver must send an OK reply, and then close the transmission channel.

7.8.9.

Reply Codes from SMTP Server

SMTP is independent of the particular transmission subsystem and requires only a reliable ordered data
stream channel. The SMTP design is based on the following model of communication: as the result of a
user mail request, the sender-SMTP establishes a two-way transmission channel to a receiver-SMTP. The
receiver-SMTP may be either the ultimate destination or an intermediate. SMTP commands are generated
by the sender-SMTP and sent to the receiver-SMTP. SMTP replies are sent from the receiver-SMTP to the
sender-SMTP in response to the commands.

261
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

7.8.10.
211
220
221
250
251
354
421
450
451
452
500
501
502
503
504
550
551
552
553
554

NUMERIC ORDER LIST OF REPLY CODES
System status or system help reply
 Service ready
 Service closing transmission channel
Requested mail action okay# completed
User not local; will forward to 
Start mail input; end with .
 Service not available: closing transmission channel
[This may be a reply to any command if the service knows it must shut down]
Requested mail action not taken: mailbox unavailable
[E.g.# mailbox busy]
Requested action aborted: local error in processing
Requested action not taken: insufficient system storage
Syntax error# command unrecognized
[This may include errors such as command line too long]
Syntax error in parameters or arguments
Command not implemented
Bad sequence of commands
Command parameter not implemented
Requested action not taken: mailbox unavailable
[E.g.# mailbox not found# no access]
User not local; please try 
Requested mail action aborted: exceeded storage allocation
Requested action not taken: mailbox name not allowed
[E.g.# mailbox syntax incorrect]
Transaction failed

262
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

7.9.
7.9.1.

POP (Post Office Protocol Version 3)
Introduction

On certain types of smaller nodes in the Internet it is often impractical to maintain a message transport
system (MTS). For example, a workstation may not have sufficient resources (cycles, disk space) in order
to permit a SMTP server and associated local mail delivery system to be kept resident and continuously
running. Similarly, it may be expensive (or impossible) to keep a personal computer interconnected to an
IP-style network for long amounts of time.
The Post Office Protocol - Version 3 (POP3) is intended to permit a workstation to dynamically access a
mail drop on a server host in a useful fashion. Usually, this means that the POP3 protocol is used to allow a
workstation to retrieve mail that the server is holding for it.
For more detail, please refer to URL of http:// www.imc.org/rfc1939

7.9.2.

Basic Operation

Initially, the server host starts the POP3 service by listening on TCP Port No. 110. When a client host
wishes to make use of the service, it establishes a TCP connection with the server host. When the
connection is established, the POP3 server sends a greeting. The client and POP3 server then exchange
commands and responses (respectively) until the connection is closed or aborted.
Commands in the POP3 consist of a case-insensitive keyword, possibly followed by one or more
arguments. All commands are terminated by a CRLF pair. Keywords and arguments consist of printable
ASCII characters. Keywords and arguments are each separated by a single SPACE character. Keywords
are three or four characters long. Each argument may be up to 40 characters long.
Responses in the POP3 consist of a status indicator and a keyword possibly followed by additional
information. All responses are terminated by a CRLF pair. Responses may be up to 512 characters long,
including the terminating CRLF. There are currently two status indicators: positive ("+OK") and negative ("ERR"). Servers MUST send the "+OK" and "-ERR" in upper case.
Responses to certain commands are multi-line. In these cases, which are clearly indicated below, after
sending the first line of the response and a CRLF, any additional lines are sent, each terminated by a CRLF
pair. When all lines of the response have been sent, a final line is sent, consisting of a termination octet
(decimal code 046, ".") and a CRLF pair. If any line of the multi-line response begins with the termination
octet, the line is "byte-stuffed" by pre-pending the termination octet to that line of the response.
Hence a multi-line response is terminated with the five octets "CRLF.CRLF". When examining a multi-line
response, the client checks to see if the line begins with the termination octet. If so and if octets other than
CRLF follow, the first octet of the line (the termination octet) is stripped away. If so and if CRLF immediately
follows the termination character, then the response from the POP server is ended and the line containing
".CRLF" is not considered part of the multi-line response.
A POP3 session progresses through a number of states during its lifetime. Once the TCP connection has
been opened and the POP3 @server has sent the greeting, the session enters the AUTHORIZATION state.
In this state, the client must identify itself to the POP3 server. Once the client has successfully done this, the
server @acquires resources associated with the client’s mail drop, and the session enters the
TRANSACTION state. In this state, the client requests actions on the part of the POP3 server. When the
client has issued the QUIT command, the session enters the UPDATE state. In this state, the POP3 server
releases any resources acquired during @the TRANSACTION state and says goodbye. The TCP
connection is then closed.
A server MUST @respond to an unrecognized, unimplemented, or @syntactically invalid command by
responding with a negative status @indicator. A server MUST respond to a command issued when the
session is in an incorrect state by responding with a negative status indicator. There is no general method
for a client to distinguish between a server which does not implement an optional command and a server
which is unwilling or unable to process the command.

263
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

A POP3 server MAY have an inactivity auto logout timer. Such a timer MUST be of at least 10 minutes’
duration. The receipt of any command from the client during that interval should suffice to reset the auto
logout timer. When the timer expires, the session does NOT enter the UPDATE state--the server should
close the TCP connection without removing any messages or sending any response to the client.

7.9.3.

POP3 Command Summary

Minimal POP3 Commands:
USER name
PASS string
QUIT

valid in AUTHORIZATION state

STAT
LIST [msg]
RETR msg
DELE msg
NOOP
RSET
QUIT

valid in the TRANSACTION state

Optional POP3 Commands:
APOP name digest

valid in AUTHORIZATION state

TOP msg n
UIDL [msg]

valid in the TRANSACTION state

POP3 Replies:
+OK
-ERR
Note:
With the exception of the STAT, LIST, and UIDL commands, the reply given by the POP3 server to any
command is significant only to "+OK" and "-ERR". The client may ignore any text occurring after this
reply.

From:

To:

Sample of a POP3 Protocol Log

264
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

POP 3 Command & Reply Procedure
your Panasonic Device
(ef1.labo.mgcs.com)
TCP 3 way
handshake &
Opening Session

AUTHORIZATION

TRANSACTION

UPDATE

TCP 3 way
handshake &
Opening Session

POP 3 Server
(sv2.labo.mgcs.com)

Opening TCP Connection (TCP Port No. 110)
+OK POP Server ready
<1896.697170952@labo.mgcs.com>
USER s50055
+OK Password required for s50055
PASS !xxxx
+OK s50055 has 2 messages (126040 octets).
STAT
+OK 2 126040
QUIT
+OK POP Server at sv2 signing off.
Closing TCP Connection (Port No. 110)

Opening TCP Connection (TCP Port No. 110)
+OK POP Server ready
<1898.697170952@labo.mgcs.com>
USER s50055
+OK Password required for s50055

AUTHORIZATION

PASS !xxxx
+OK s50055 has 2 messages (126040 octets).
TOP 1 1
+OK 69762 octets
Text DATA
Text DATA
PETR 1
+OK 69752 octets
Text DATA
Text DATA
Text DATA :end with .(period)

TRANSACTION

DELE 1
+OK Message 1 has been deleted.
TOP 2 1
+OK 1 56288 octets
Text DATA
Text DATA
PETR 2
+OK 1 56288 octets
Text DATA
Text DATA
Text DATA :end with .(period)
DELE 2
+OK Message 2 has been deleted.
QUIT
+OK POP Server at sv2 signing off.

UPDATE

Closing TCP Connection (Port No. 110)

265
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

7.10. Troubleshooting from a PC
Troubleshooting is an art of seeking out the cause of a problem and eliminating the problem by managing of
eliminating the cause. No matter what the problem is on your network, the OSI Reference Model serves as
an excellent reference tool to help you locate the area of trouble.
One of the simplest tools available, is the DOS command-line prompt from your Windows PC.
Listed below are the most often used command-line prompts that you can use at the customer’s network
PC. Some commands are available as an option for checking with more detail.
Command
Sample
Ping
Ping 192. 168. 1. 30

Ipconfig /all

Tracert

Netstat

Net view
Nslookup

Purpose
Checking for physical connection between your PC and the target
destination
(192.168.1.30)
Ipconfig /all
Checking for current network configuration (Host Name, DNS
server, IP address, Subnet Mask, Default Gateway, MAC address,
WINS etc)
For Windows 95/98, please type “winipcfg” instead of Ipconfig/all
Tracert 192.168.2.245 Checking for the datagram route between your PC and the target
destination
(192.168.2.245)
NetstatNetstat -nr
Active connection list
Active route for your subnet.
All special assigned IP addresses are also shown
Net view
Checking for the current file sharing Host Name
Nslookup
Checking for the DNS server IP address.
This command is available for Windows NT only.

Note:
Before taking corrective action, you must check the physical connections or wiring first.

266
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

7.11. Verifying the Configuration and Mail Account Type (SMTP or POP)
START

Is the LAN connected
to an ISP

Yes

No
No
DHCP Client?

Is this a Dialup
connection ?

No

Is static IP address
available ?

Yes
Not supported

Yes
Is G3 Gateway
function being used ?

Yes

Is there a MX and A Record
entry for your Panasonic
Device in the DNS table ? No

Yes
Yes

No
Yes

Not supported

Is POP account
available ?

Is POP account
available ?
No

No

Is there a MX and A Record
entry for your Panasonic
Device in the DNS table ?

No

Yes

Not supported

Yes
Set network parameters
for POP receiving

If not ready
Ask the Network
Administrator to setup
a new POP account.

Set network parameters
for SMTP receiving
If not ready
Check the host name by
using the DOS
command-line "ping"
and "nslookup".

Set network parameters for
POP receiving and set G3
Gateway parameters for
your Panasonic Device
If not ready
Ask the Network
Administrator to setup a
new POP account.
Check the host name by
using the DOS
command-line "ping"
and "nslookup".

Important Notice:
The customer who supposed to operate G3 Gateway function at MGCS models,
the total Network Security such as Anti Spam Mail protection must be aware
how the system performs sufficient security levels as designed. So you may
ask Security Policy Manager to allow relay message by changing
configuration of Massage Transfer Agent like Sendmail. Otherwise the system
denied any relay operation.

267
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

7.12. Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) - Extended Feature
DHCP is based on the Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP), adding the capability of automatic allocation of
reusable network addresses and additional configuration options.
The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) provides configuration parameters to Internet hosts.
The Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP) is a UDP/IP-based protocol which allows a booting host to configure itself
dynamically and without user supervision. BOOTP provides a means to notify a host of its assigned IP
address, the IP address of a boot server host, and the name of a file to be loaded into memory and
executed. Other configuration information such as the local subnet mask, the local time offset, the
addresses of default routers, and the addresses of various Internet servers can also be communicated to a
host using BOOTP.
DHCP consists of two components: a protocol for delivering host-specific configuration parameters
from a DHCP server to a host and a mechanism for allocation of network addresses to hosts.
DHCP supports three mechanisms for IP address allocation.
In "automatic allocation", DHCP assigns a permanent IP address to a client.
In "dynamic allocation", DHCP assigns an IP address to a client for a limited period of time (or until the
client explicitly relinquishes the address).
In "manual allocation", a client’s IP address is assigned by the network administrator, and DHCP is used
simply to convey the assigned address to the client. A particular network will use one or more of these
mechanisms, depending on the policies of the network administrator.
"DHCP client"
A DHCP client is an Internet host using DHCP to obtain configuration parameters such as a network
address.
"DHCP server"
A DHCP server is an Internet host that returns configuration parameters to DHCP clients.
Table 1 describes a DHCP message and its purpose of use.
Message
Use
DHCPDISCOVER Client broadcast to locate available servers.
DHCPOFFER
Server to client in response to DHCPDISCOVER with offer of configuration
parameters.
DHCPREQUEST Client message to servers either (a) requesting offered parameters from one server
and implicitly declining offers from all others, (b) confirming correctness of
previously allocated address after, e.g., system reboot, or (c) extending the lease
on a particular network address.
DHCPACK
Server to client with configuration parameters, including committed network
address.
DHCPNAK
Server to client indicating client’s notion of network address is incorrect (e.g., client
has moved to new subnet) or client’s lease as expired
DHCPDECLINE
Client to server indicating network address and in use.
DHCPRELEASE
Client to server indicating network address and canceling remaining lease.
DHCPINFORM
Client to server, asking only for local configuration parameters; client already has
externally configured network address.
Table 1: DHCP messages and purpose of use

268
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

Following figure shows the timeline diagram of messages exchanged between DHCP client and servers
when allocating a new network address.

Client

Server
(not selected)

Server
(selected)

Begins initialization
Determines
configuration

DHCPDISCOVER

DHCPDISCOVER

Determines
configuration

DHCPOFFER
DHCPOFFER
Collects replies
Selects configuration
DHCPREQUEST

DHCPREQUEST

Commits configuration

DHCPACK
Initialization complete

Graceful shutdown
Discards lease

DHCPRELEASE

Timeline diagram of messages exchanged between DHCP client and servers
when allocating a new network address

Following figure shows the timeline diagram of messages exchanged between DHCP client and servers
when reusing a previously allocated network address.

Server

Client

Server

Begins initialization
Locates
configuration

DHCPREQUEST

DHCPREQUEST

DHCPACK

DHCPACK

Locates
configuration

Initialization complete
Subsequent
DHCPACKS ignored

Timeline diagram of messages exchanged between DHCP client and servers when
reusing a previously allocated network address

269
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

Several options have been defined so far. One particular option - the "DHCP message type" option - must
be included in every DHCP message. This option defines the "type" of the DHCP message.
Additional options may be allowed, required, or not allowed, depending on the DHCP message type.

INITIALIZATION

INITIALIZE/
REBOOT

DHCPNAK/
Restart

-/Send DHCPREQUES

DHCPACK
(not accept.)/
Send DHCPDECLINE

-/Send DHCPDISCOVER
DHCPNAK, Lease expired/
Halt network

DHCPNAK/
Discard offer

SELECTING
DHCPOFFER/
Collect replies

REBOOTING

Select offer/
send DHCPREQUEST

REQUESTING

REBINDING

DHCPOFFER/
Discard

DHCPACK/
Record lease, set
timers T1, T2

DHCPNAK/
Halt network

DHCPACK/
Record lease, set
/timers T1,T2

DHCPACK/
Record lease, set
/timers T1,T2

T2 expires/
Broadcast
DHCPREQUEST

BOUND

DHCPACK/
Record lease, set
timers T1, T2

T1 expires/
Send DHCPREQUEST
to leasing server
T1 expires/
Send
DHCPREQUEST
to leasing server

RENEWING

The client maintains two times, T1 and T2, that specify the times at which the client tries to extend its lease on its
network address. T1 is the time at which the client enters the RENEWING state and attempts to contact the server
that originally issued the client’s network address. T2 is the time at which the client enters the REBINDING state and
attempts to contact any server. T1 MUST be earlier than T2, which, in turn, MUST be earlier than the time at which
the client’s lease will expire.
To avoid the need for synchronized clocks, T1 and T2 are expressed in options as relative times.

State-transition diagram for DHCP clients

More detailed information, please refer to RFC2131 document available from following URL.
http://www.ietf.org/rfc.html.

270
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

7.13. Message Disposition Notifications (MDN) - Extended Feature
The confirmation of delivery and processing are extensions to "Simple Mode of Facsimile Using Internet
Mail" [RFC2305]. These are designed to be interoperable with the existing base of mail transfer agents
(MTAs) and mail user agents (MUAs), and take advantage of existing standards for advanced functionality
such as positive delivery confirmation and disposition notification. The following two features are combined.
(1) Delivery confirmation (required)
(2) Additional document features (optional)
In Internet Mail, the operations of Delivery (to the mailbox) and Disposition (to paper or a screen) may be
separated in time (due to store and forwarding of messages) and location (due to separation of delivery
agent (MTA) and user agent (MUA)). The confirmations of these two operations are supplied by two
different standards-track mechanisms: Delivery Status Notifications (DSN) [RFC1891, RFC1894] and
Message Disposition Notifications (MDN) [RFC2298], respectively.
MGCS supports MDN.
Delivery Status Notification (DSN)
A DSN can be used to notify the sender of a message of any of several conditions: failed delivery, delayed
delivery, successful delivery, or the gatewaying of a message into an environment that may not support
DSNs. MGCS Iternet FAX does not request DSN while sending.

fail
SMTP Server

SMTP Server

DSN

DSN returned to sender by Reporting MTAs (Message Transfer Agent) if fail of delivery is occurred.

Message Disposition Notifications (MDN)
A MDN can be used to notify the sender of a message of any of several conditions that may occur after
successful delivery, such as display of the message contents, printing of the message, deletion (without
display) of the message, or the recipient’s refusal to provide MDNs.

SMTP Server

SMTP Server

MDN

Recipient notifies that the message contents have been displayed properly.

The MDNs are expected to serve several purposes such as allow mail user agents (Outlook Express) to
keep track of the disposition of messages sent, by associating returned MDNs with earlier message
transmissions.

271
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

For example, you may configure the MDN parameter from Options menu of Outlook Express.

MDN request

MDN notify

Additional Document Capabilities
Section 4 of "A Simple Mode of Facsimile Using Internet Mail" [RFC2305] allows sending only the minimum
subset of TIFF for Facsimile "unless the sender has prior knowledge of other TIFF fields or values
supported by the recipient." A recipient may support any or all (or any combination) of the TIFF profiles
defined in RFC 2301, in addition to profile S. As a consequence, a sender may use those additional TIFF
profiles when sending to a recipient with the corresponding capabilities.
MDN Response
Read Receipt
Capabilities

(1) MDN Request

Internet FAX

(3)

SMTP Server

SMTP Server

(2)

Internet FAX

Additional Document Capabilities Exchanging Process

(1) Request
If the sender (Internet FAX) desires processing confirmation, the sender must request Message
Disposition Notification when sending the message itself.
Sender provides the Disposition-Notification-To field on address as following formula.

272
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

MDN Request Sample
Mime-Version: 1.0
X-Mailer: Internet FAX, MGCS
Content-Transfer-Encoding: 7bit
Date: Wed, dd Mmm yyyy 15:20:00 -0500
Message-Id: <200202060018.12345@core.mega.edu>
From: "MGCS Internet FAX" 
Subject: IMAGE from Internet FAX
To: fax@huge.com
Disposition-Notification-To: 
Content-Type: multipart/mixed; boundary="+-+-+-MGCS-+-+-+"

(2) Recipient’s MDN Response
Recipient (Internet FAX) starts printing process when the message is received properly. If the
Disposition-Notification-To field is contained in message, recipient generates MDN capability response
after successful delivery and sends to the address indicated on Disposition-Notification-To field as
convey. However, the envelope-from (Return-Path: address) of original sender does not match with
address indicated on Disposition-Notification-To field, and then no MDN response is sent.
MDN Response Sample

MESSAGE
HEADER

BODY
TEXT

Mime-Version: 1.0
X-Mailer: Internet FAX, MGCS
Content-Transfer-Encoding: 7bit
Date: Wed, dd Mmm yyyy 15:42:00 -0500
Message-Id: <20020206154203470001.BE948.fax@huge.com>
From: 
Subject: Read Receipt:IMAGE from Internet FAX
To: fax@core.mega.edu
In-Reply-To: <5.0.2.5.2.20020206153721.00c44448@huge.com>
References: <5.0.2.5.2.20020206153721.00c44448@huge.com>
Content-Type: multipart/report; report-type=disposition-notification; boundary="+-+-+-MGCS-+-+-+"

**********

Read Receipt

**********

This message was opened by
’fax@huge.com’
dd Mmm yyyy 15:42
******************************************

ATTACHED
FILE

Final-Recipient: rfc822;fax@huge.com
Original-Message-ID: <5.0.2.5.2.20020206153721.00c44448@huge.com>
Disposition: automatic-action/MDN-sent-automatically; dispatched
Media-Accept-Features:
(& (type="image/tiff")
(color=Binary)
(image-file-structure=TIFF-minimal)
(MRC-mode=0)
(ua-media=stationery)
(paper-size=[A4,B4,letter,legal])
(image-coding=[MH,MR,MMR])
(| (& (dpi=200) (dpi-xyratio=[200/100,1]) )
(& (dpi=204) (dpi-xyratio=[204/98,204/196,204/391]) )
(& (dpi=408) (dpi-xyratio=408/391) ) ) )

273
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

(3) Processing Confirmation
The processing confirmation provided by recipient is received and take specific services for expected
several conditions respectively. This is unit independent issue.
To see more detailed information, please refer to RFC2532 document.

274
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

7.14. Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) - Extended Feature
The protocol is designed to provide access to directories supporting the X.500 models, while not incurring
the resource requirements of the X.500 Directory Access Protocol (DAP).
This protocol is specifically targeted at management applications and browser applications that provide
read/write interactive access to directories. When used with a directory supporting the X.500 protocols, it is
intended to be a complement to the X.500 DAP.
X.500 is an overall model for Directory Services in the OSI world. The model encompasses the overall
namespace and the protocol for querying and updating it. A major part of X.500 is that it defines a global
directory structure.
It is essentially a directory web in much the same way that http & html are used to define & implement the
global hypertext web. Anyone with an X.500 or LDAP client may peruse the global directory just as they can
use a web browser to peruse the global Web.
From the "Start" menu of Windows client PC, you can search for people on the Internet, using of server at
directory services.

7.15. Lightweight Challenge-response Mechanism POP (APOP)
- Extended Feature
The base POP3 specification (POP3) also contains a lightweight challenge-response mechanism called
APOP. APOP is associated with most of the risks associated with such protocols: in particular, it requires
that both the client and server machines have access to the shared secret in clear text form. ChallengeResponse Authentication Mechanism (CRAM) offers a method for avoiding such clear text storage while
retaining the algorithmic simplicity of APOP in using only MD5.
Normally, each POP3 session starts with a USER/PASS exchange. This results in a server/user-id specific
password being sent in the clear on the network. For intermittent use of POP3, this may not introduce a
sizable risk. However, many POP3 client implementations connect to the POP3 server on a regular basis to
check for new mail. Further the interval of session initiation may be on the order of five minutes. Hence, the
risk of password capture is greatly enhanced.
An alternate method of authentication is required which provides for both origin authentication and replay
protection, but which does not involve sending a password in the clear over the network. The APOP
command provides this functionality.
A POP3 server which implements the APOP command will include a timestamp in its banner greeting. For
example, on a UNIX implementation in which a separate UNIX process is used for each instance of a POP3
server, the syntax of the timestamp might be:

where "process-ID" is the decimal value of the process’s PID, clock is the decimal value of the system
clock, and hostname is the fully-qualified domain-name corresponding to the host where the POP3 server is
running.

275
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

Client

Server
Establish TCP connection (TCP port No. 110)

Challenge Response
<1896.697170952@svr.mgcs.co.jp>
Digest parameter, Challenge + PASSWD
<1896.697170952@svr.mgcs.co.jp>PASSWD

+OK POP3 server ready <1896.697170952@svr.mgcs.co.jp>
APOP USER c4c9334bac560ecc979e58001b3e22fb
+OK maildrop has 1 message (369 octets)

Produces a 16 octet digest value of
c4c9334bac560ecc979e58001b3e22fb

Possible Responses:
+OK
-ERR permission denied

STAT
+OK 1
Continue to follow the POP3 procedure

APOP overview

The POP3 client makes note of this timestamp, and then issues the APOP command. The "name’’
parameter has identical semantics to the "name" parameter of the USER command. The "digest" parameter
is calculated by applying the MD5 algorithm to a string consisting of the timestamp (including anglebrackets) followed by a shared secret. This shared secret is a string known only to the POP3 client and
server. Great care should be taken to prevent unauthorized disclosure of the secret, as knowledge of the
secret will allow any entity to successfully masquerade as the named user. The "digest" parameter
itself is a 16-octet value which is sent in hexadecimal format, using lower-case ASCII characters.
When the POP3 server receives the APOP command, it verifies the digest provided. If the digest is correct,
the POP3 server issues a positive response, and the POP3 session enters the TRANSACTION state.
Otherwise, a negative response is issued and the POP3 session remains in the AUTHORIZATION state.
Note that as the length of the shared secret increases, so does the difficulty of deriving it.

276
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

7.16. SMTP Service Extension for Authentication (SMTP Auth)
- Extended Feature
SMTP is widely deployed and high-quality implementations have proven to be very robust. However, the
Internet community now considers some services to be important that SMTP AUTH is an SMTP service
extension (ESMTP) whereby an SMTP client may indicate an authentication mechanism to the server,
perform an authentication protocol exchange, and optionally negotiate a security layer for subsequent
protocol interactions. This extension is a profile of the Simple Authentication and Security Layer (SASL). To
use SASL, a protocol includes a command for identifying and authenticating a user to a server and for
optionally negotiating protection of subsequent protocol interactions.

Client

Server
Establish TCP connection (TCP port No. 25)
220 smtp.example.com ESMTP server ready
EHLO jgm.example.com
250-smtp.example.com
250 AUTH LOGIN DIGEST-MD5 CRAM-MD5
AUTH CRAM-MD5
334
PENCeUxFREJoU0NnbmhNWitOMjNGNndA
ZWx3b29kLmlubm9zb2Z0LmNvbT4=

ZnJlZCA5ZTk1YWVlMDljNDBhZjJiODRhMGMyYjNiYmFlNzg2ZQ==
235 Authentication successful
Continue to follow the SMTP procedure

SMTP AUTH overview

The AUTH command indicates an authentication mechanism to the server. If the server supports the
requested authentication mechanism, it performs an authentication protocol exchange to authenticate and
identify the user. Optionally, it also negotiates a security layer for subsequent protocol interactions. If the
requested authentication mechanism is not supported, the server rejects the AUTH command with a 504
reply.
Challenge Response
334 PENCeUxFREJoU0NnbmhNWitOMjNGNndAZWx3b29kLmlubm9zb2Z0LmNvbT4=
BASE64 decoded string

Produces a Challenge


Genrates Digest parameter
Challenge + PASSWD with HMAC (keyed-Hashing for Message
USER
Authentication Code) roduces a 16 octet digest value of:
9e95aee09c40af2b84a0c2b3bbae786e
Fred
BASE64 encoded string
ZnJlZCA5ZTk1YWVlMDljNDBhZjJiODRhMGMyYjNiYmFlNzg2ZQ==

The authentication protocol exchange consists of a series of server challenges and client answers that are
specific to the authentication mechanism. A server challenge, otherwise known as a ready response, is a
334 reply with the text part containing a BASE64 encoded string. The client answer consists of a line

277
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

containing a BASE64 encoded string. If the client wishes to cancel an authentication exchange, it issues a
line with a single "*". If the server receives such an answer, it must reject the AUTH command by sending a
501 reply.
If the server cannot BASE64 decode the argument, it rejects the AUTH command with a 501 reply. If the
server rejects the authentication data, it should reject the AUTH command with a 535 reply unless a more
specific error code, such as one listed in Error Codes below, is appropriate. Should the client successfully
complete the authentication exchange, the SMTP server issues a 235 reply.
The service name specified by this protocol’s profile of SASL is "smtp".
Error Codes
The following error codes may be used to indicate various conditions as described.
432: A password transition is needed
This response to the AUTH command indicates that the user needs to transition to the selected
Authentication mechanism. This is typically done by authenticating once using the plain authentication
mechanism.
538: Encryption required for requested authentication mechanism
This response to the AUTH command indicates that the selected authentication mechanism may only
be used when the underlying SMTP connection is encrypted.
454: Temporary authentication failure
This response to the AUTH command indicates that the authentication failed due to a temporary server
failure.
530: Authentication required
This response may be returned by any command other than AUTH, EHLO, HELO, NOOP, RSET, or
QUIT. It indicates that server policy requires authentication in order to perform the requested action.

278
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

7.17. Direct SMTP Transfer - Extended Feature
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) is to transfer mail reliably and efficiently. An important feature of
SMTP is its capability to transport mail across networks, usually referred to as SMTP mail relaying by
employing SMTP server.
Direct SMTP transfer allows you to transmit documents to another Internet Fax directly employing no SMTP
server. To enables this feature, you must configure its static IP address, subnetmask, default gateway and
etc. accordingly. Domain Name System (DNS) must be required to run the system, so that hosts and some
additional records must be properly existed in DNS entries.
Please note that the system runs under DHCP dynamic updates with DNS meets its requirement also.
In other words, DHCP runs non-Dynamic Updates in the Domain Name System can not be applied for
Internet Fax who whish to enables Direct SMTP transfer function.
Further more, in common cases only email and web service from the Internet are permitted into the
corporate intranet, and corporate network administrators are extremely reticent to open the firewall for
other, incoming services, since each opened path represents additional, potential security threats.
So the Direct SMTP transfer can be operating throughout the organization’s Intranet.
Capability exchanges and content negotiations are also available to take advantageous communication
between Internet Fax communications.
Several service extensions are newly assigned.
(1) The EHLO keyword value associated with this extension is "CONNEG"
(2) A parameter using the keyword "CONNEG" is added to the RCPT-TO command
Sender

Recipient
Establish TCP connection
220
EHLO

Check for Capability

250 Response of CONNEG
MAIL FROM:
250

Request for Capability

TCP Port No. 25

RCPT TO: CONNEG
250 Capacity Exchange
Continue to follow the SMTP procedure

Direct SMTP Overview

Capability contents sample
250- recipient ok
250-(&(image-file-structure=TIFF-minimal)
250- (MRC-mode=0)
250- (color=Binary)
250- (|(&(dpi=204)
250- (dpi-xyratio=[204/98,204/196]) )
250- (&(dpi=200)
250- (dpi-xyratio=[200/100,1]) )
250- (&(dpi=400)
250- (dpi-xyratio=1) ) )
250- (|(image-coding=[MH,MR,MMR])
250- (&(imagecoding=JBIG)
250- (image-coding-constraint=JBIG-T85)
250- (JBIG-stripe-size=128) ) )
250- (size-x<=2150/254)
250- (paper-size=[letter,A4,B4]) )
250 (ua-media=stationery) )

279
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

8 Installation
8.1.

Function Key

Any function can be started by first pressing
pressing

or

FUNCTION and then enter the function number, or by
scroll key repeatedly until the desired function appears on the display.

1

Deferred Communication
1 = XMT
2 = Polling

2

Advanced Communication
1 = Not Used
2 = Confidential Communication
3 - 4 = Not Used
5 = LAN Relay XMT

3

Polling
1 = Polling
2 = Polled

6

Print List
1 = Journal (Print/View)
2 = One-Touch/Abbreviated/Directory Search List
3 = Program List
4 = Fax Parameter List
5 = Not Used
6 = Individual XMT Journal
7 = Directory Sheet

7

Set Mode
1 = User Parameters
• Date & Time
• Time Zone
• Logo
• Character ID
• ID Number (Fax Telephone Number)
• IP Address
(This is a partial list, for additional
Functions, see page 49)
2 = One-Touch/Abbreviated Numbers
3 = Program Keys
4 = Fax Parameters
5 - 7 = Not Used
8 = Maintenance
• Cleaning Printer Roller
• Toner Order Form

8

Select Mode
1 = Communication Journal = OFF/ON/INC
2 = Delivery Notice = OFF/ON
3 = Cover Sheet = OFF/ON
4 = Password-XMT = OFF/ON
5 = RCV to Memory = OFF/ON
6 - 8 = Not Used
9 = Memory XMT = OFF/ON

9

Edit File Mode
1 = File List (Print/View)
2 = Change Time/Station
3 = Delete File
4 = Print File
5 = Add Document
6 = Retry Incomplete File

280
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

8.2.

Main Unit and Accessories
Unpack the carton and check that you have all the accessories illustrated.

Machine

Toner Cartridge

Telephone Line Cable

Power Cord

Recording Paper Tray

Operating Instructions

CD-ROM

281
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

8.3.

Installing the Accessories

Final Installed View

Recording Paper Tray
Hook the projections into the square
holes on the machine.

Handset
[Available as an Option]

Handset Cradle [Available as an Option]

Handset Cord
[Available as an Option]

Hook the projections into the square holes on the machine.
Connect the cable into the HANDSET jack on the machine.

NOTE

The handset may not be available in certain destinations due to its regulation or specification.

282
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

8.4.

1

Installing the Toner Cartridge
Unpack the Toner Cartridge and rock it back
and forth as shown 5 or 6 times to even the

Toner Cartridge

toner inside.

2

Remove the protective seal.
Note: Pull on the seal slowly and straight ou

3

Open the Printer Cover.
Printer Cover

Continued on the next page...

283
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

4

Align the projections on both sides of the
Toner Cartridge with the grooves in the
machine as shown and insert the Toner
Cartridge into the machine.
Note: Lock the Toner Cartridge into place
by pressing the handle down and
then pushing towards the rear of the
machine.

5

Close the Printer Cover.

Printer Cover

6

If you are replacing the Toner Cartridge, it is
recommended to clean the Printer Roller to
maintain good printing quality. To clean the
Printer Roller, follow the procedure on next
page.

284
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

Cleaning the Printer Roller
If you find toner on the back of the recording paper, the printer roller in the fuser unit is probably dirty.
To clean the Printer Rollers

1
2

MAINTENANCE
ENTER NO. OR

7

(1-9)

8
* PRINTING *
CLEANING CHARTS

1

1

The machine will print out 3 Cleaning Charts.
Then, return to standby.

HOW TO LOAD THE CLEANING CHARTS
1.REMOVE THE PAPER CASSETTE
(If multiple cassette configuration, REMOVE THE UPPER PAPER CASSETTE)
2.SET THESE 3 CLEANING CHARTS IN THE CASSETTE FACE DOWN
3.RE-INSTALL THE PAPER CASSETTE
4.PRESS [FUNCTION][7][8][SET][1][SET][2]
TO START CLEANING
5.DISPOSE OF THE CLEANING CHARTS

*** SET THIS END TOWARDS THE FRONT, FACE DOWN ***

3
4
5

Load the Cleaning Charts into the cassette face down.
(See Note 1)
MAINTENANCE
ENTER NO. OR

7

(1-9)

8
* CLEANING *
PRINTER ROLLER

1

2

The Machine will feed out the charts and clean the printer roller.

NOTE

1. If y ou have installed the optional cass ette(s), load the Cleaning Charts int o the upper c assette.

285
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

8.5.

Loading the Recording Paper
How to Load the Recording Paper

1

Lift up the Paper Cassette slightly and slide it
out from the machine.

Paper Cassette

2

Remove the Paper Cassette Cover.
Cassette Cover

3

1. Remove the Shipping Screw securing
the Pressure Plate.
2. Store the screw by attaching it to the post
provided under the Paper Cassette
Cover for future use.

Shipping Screw

Cassette Cover

286
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

4
Max. Paper
Capacity Mark

Paper
Width Guide

1. Load the paper into the Paper Cassette.
Slide the paper width guide to the left
until it lightly touches the stack of paper
without bending the paper. The paper
must fit squarely and firmly between the
Paper Width Guide and the right side of
tray. If it does not, the paper may feed
into the printer incorrectly resulting in a
paper jam.
Caution: Make sure that the paper is set
under the metal Paper Separation
Clips and that it does not exceed
the Maximum Paper Capacity
Mark. You can load about 250
sheets (20 lb weight).
2. Re-install the Paper Cassette Cover.
3. Slide the Paper Cassette into the machine.

287
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

8.6.

Adjusting the Paper Cassette for the Paper Length
How to Adjust the Paper Cassette for the Paper Length
The factory default Paper Length setting for the Paper Cassette is on Letter size. To change the paper
length to A4 or Legal size, follow the steps below.

1
Release Latch

1. Remove the paper from the Paper
Cassette and place the cassette upside
down on a flat surface.
2. While pushing down on the release latch,
pull out the Paper Length Guide.
3. Turn the Paper Cassette upright.
4. Insert the Paper Length Guide hooks into
the appropriate paper length slots (A4 or
Legal) and slide the guide towards the
back of the cassette until it locks in place.
5. Load the paper into the Paper Cassette.

Paper Length Guide

Slide the paper width guide to the left
until it lightly touches the stack of paper
without bending the paper. The paper
must fit squarely and firmly between the
Paper Width Guide and the right side of
tray. If it does not, the paper may feed
into the printer incorrectly resulting in a
paper jam.

Paper Width Guide

Max. Paper
Capacity Mark

LTR
A4
LGL

Caution: Make sure that the paper is set
under the metal Paper Separation
Clips and that it does not exceed
the Maximum Paper Capacity
Mark. You can load about 250
sheets (20 lb weight).
6. Replace the Paper Cassette Cover to the
appropriate paper position (LTR, A4 or
LGL).
7. Slide the Paper Cassette into the machine.

2

The Recording Paper Size setting of the Fax
Parameter No. 23 must match the paper
loaded in the cassette. If you change the
Recording Paper Size, please change the
setting accordingly.

NOTE

1. If you forget to change the Recording Paper Size setting in Fax Parameter No. 23 when
different paper is installed in the cassette, the unit will Stop printing after the 1st page of an
Incoming Fax and display a "PAPER SIZE MISMATCH" error. Then, the Recording Paper
Size setting automatically adjusts to the proper size and the unit resumes printing the Incoming
Fax from the 1st page.

288
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

8.7.

Adjusting the Paper Cassette for the Paper Width

How to Adjust the Paper Cassette for the Paper Width
The factory default Paper Width setting for the Paper Cassette is on Letter/Legal size. To change the paper
width to A4 size, follow the steps below.

1

1. Release the left Paper Separation Clip
latch.
2. Pull up the Paper Separation Clip to
remove it.
3. Reposition the Paper Separation Clip
into the A(A4) slot.
4. Swing the Paper Separation Clip
downward to latch it in place.

Paper Separation Clip

2

1. Load the paper into the Paper Cassette.
Slide the paper width guide to the left
until it lightly touches the stack of paper
without bending the paper. The paper
must fit squarely and firmly between the
Paper Width Guide and the right side of
tray. If it does not, the paper may feed
into the printer incorrectly resulting in a
paper jam.

Paper
Width Guide
Max. Paper
Capacity Mark

Caution: Make sure that the paper is set
under the metal Paper Separation
Clips and that it does not exceed
the Maximum Paper Capacity
Mark. You can load about 250
sheets (20 lb weight).

LTR
A4
LGL

2. Replace the Paper Cassette Cover to the
appropriate paper position (LTR, A4 or
LGL).
3. Slide the Paper Cassette into the machine.

3

The Recording Paper Size setting of the Fax
Parameter No. 23 must match the paper
loaded in the cassette. If you change the
Recording Paper Size, please change the
setting accordingly.

NOTE

1. If you forge t to change th e Recordin g Paper Si ze setti ng in Fax Parameter No. 23 when
di ffere nt paper i s ins talled i n the cassette, the unit will Stop printin g after the 1st page of an
Inc oming Fax and dis play a " PAPER SIZE MISMATCH" error. Then, the Recordi ng Paper
Size settin g autom ati cal ly adjusts to th e prop er si ze and the unit resumes pri nti ng the Incoming
Fax fro m the 1s t page.

289
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

8.8.

Connecting the Telephone Line Cable and Power Cord
Power Cord

Plug one end of the power cord into an ordinary 3 prong AC outlet and the other end into the receptacle on
the rear of the machine.
Warning: This apparatus must be properly grounded through an ordinary 3 prong AC outlet.
Do not break off the earth (ground) prong to fit a 2 prong outlet.

Power Cord (Included)

External Telephone (Optional)
You can connect an additional standard
single line telephone to the machine. To
connect the telephone, break off the
protective tab on the TEL jack.

RJ-45 LAN Jack
(10Base-T/100Base-TX)
LINK Lamp
Illuminates when connected to the LAN. Lamp
will not turn ON if the LAN Cable is defective
(contains breaks).

Telephone Line Cable (Included)

ACTIVITY Lamp
Blinks when there is data traffic on the LAN.

RJ-11C Telephone Jack

LAN Cable
(10Base-T/100Base-TX Cable)
Insert the plug until a click is heard.
(LAN Cable is not included with the product.)
Purchase a Category 5 Cable, compliant with
EIA/TIA 568-A-5 standard.

Telephone Line Cable

Plug one end of the telephone line cable into the "RJ-11C" telephone jack supplied by the telephone
company and the other end into the LINE jack on the left side of the machine.

Ethernet LAN Cable
Ethernet-Token-Ring Bridge
(Optional Order No. UE-204006)

10Base-T/100Base-TX Ethernet Hub

NOTE

Ethernet LAN (10Base-T/100Base-TX)
Cable (Not included)

1. Your machine uses little power and you should keep it ON at all times.
If the power is turned OFF for too long, the clock contents may be lost.

290
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

8.9.

Setting the Internet Parameters
Before starting, you will need a completed copy of page 19 (Pre Installation Information). For your machine
to be able to operate on the Network properly, the following five (5) Basic Parameters must be preprogrammed into the machine.

. IP Address
.
Mask
. Subnet
Default Gateway IP Address
.
Server Name or IP Address
. SMTP
Email Address
Note:

If DHCP server is available on your network, the IP Address, Subnet Mask and Default Gateway
IP Address will be acquired automatically.

1
2

SET MODE
ENTER NO. OR

7

(1-8)

1:USER PARAMETERS?
PRESS SET TO SELECT

1

3

IP ADDRESS

repeatedly until display shows;

4

Enter the IP Address using the keypad. Press

or

to enter the period ".". (See Note 3)
Ex: 1 2 3

1 7 8

2 4 0

3

5

SUBNET MASK

To continue setting other parameters, or press
to return to standby.

NOTE

IP ADDRESS
123.178.240.3

STOP

1. To scroll the display to desired User Parameter in Step 3, press
or
.
2. If the DNS Server is not available, change the setting of the Fax Parameter No. 161 (DNS
SERVER) to "Invalid", then enter the IP Address instead.
3. For convenience, you can use
Otherwise

to enter a period "." while programming IP Addresses only.

is used to enter an asterisk under other conditions.

291
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

Setting the User Parameters for the LAN Interface
Depending on how your machine will be configured to communicate on the LAN, the appropriate
parameters listed in the table below must be stored first.
No.

1
2
3
4
5
6

7*
8*
9*
10*

11*
12*
13*
14
15*
16*
17*
18*
19*
20
21
22
23
24
25
26

27

Parameter
DATE & TIME
TIME ZONE

Comments
Current Date and Time.
The Time Zone is required as part of the Email header information when
sending Internet faxes.
LOGO
Up to 25 characters & digits.
CHARACTER ID
Up to 16 characters & digits.
ID NO.
Your Fax Telephone Number. (Up to 20 digits)
(MAC ADDRESS)
Hardware Address hard-coded into your machine. (If required, can be
obtained from the Fax Parameter List printout, by pressing [FUNCTION] [6]
[4] [SET])
IP ADDRESS
IP Address assigned to your machine by the Network Administrator or the
DHCP Server.
SUBNET MASK
Subnet Mask assigned by the Network Administrator or the DHCP Server.
DEFAULT GATEWAY Default Gateway IP Address assigned by the Network Administrator or the
IP ADDR
DHCP Server.
PRIMARY DNS
IP Address of the primary DNS Server. If the DNS Server is not available,
SERVER IP ADDRESS change the setting of the Fax Parameter No. 161 (DNS SERVER) to
"Invalid", then enter the IP Address instead.
SECONDARY DNS IP Address of the secondary DNS Server.
SERVER IP ADDRESS
EMAIL ADDRESS
The Email Address assigned to your machine for sending and receiving.
(Up to 60 characters)
SMTP SERVER NAME The name of the SMTP Mail Server. (Up to 60 characters)
SMTP SERVER IP
IP Address of the SMTP Mail Server.
ADDR
SMTP AUTH NAME User name required to login to the SMTP Server before it allow to send
email messages. (Up to 40 characters).
SMTP PASSWORD Password assigned to your machine. (Up to 10 characters)
POP SERVER NAME The name of the POP Mail Server. (Up to 60 characters).
POP SERVER IP
IP Address of the POP Mail Server.
ADDR
POP USER NAME
User Name assigned to your machine. (Up to 40 characters)
POP PASSWORD
Password assigned to your machine. (Up to 10 characters)
LDAP SERVER NAME The name of the LDAP Server. (Up to 60 characters)
LDAP LOG IN NAME Login Name assigned to your machine. (Up to 40 characters)
LDAP PASSWORD
Password assigned to your machine. (Up to 10 characters)
LDAP SEARCH BASE ID for starting the search in the directory on the LDAP server. (Up to 60
Characters)
HOST NAME
The Host Name assigned to your machine. (Up to 60 characters)
DEFAULT SUBJECT The default information to be added to the Subject Line for all outgoing
Email (up to 40 characters). To manually input this information before
transmission, change the Fax Parameter No. 159 (SUBJECT LINE
ENTRY) to "2:Valid".
DEFAULT DOMAIN When the outgoing email address is incomplete by SMTP standards, the
Frequently Sent Domain specified here will be automatically added to the
email address. This feature is also useful as a shortcut when manually
entering email addresses to a frequently used Domain. (Up to 50
characters)

292
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

No.

28

29

Parameter
SELECTABLE
DOMAINS
(01) ~ (10)
REMOTE PASSWORD

30
31

32

33

RELAY XMT
PASSWORD
MANAGER’S EMAIL
ADDR
RELAY DOMAIN
(01) ~ (10)

Comments
Enter up to 10 Domain Names that can be selected after the Domain "@"
key is pressed using the "\/ or /\" key during Manual email addressing. (Up
to 30 characters)
This is a security password that allows Remote Programming of the
Internet Parameters and Auto Dialer or the retrieval of the Journal via an
Email. (Up to 10 characters)
A password that provides Network security for your Relay Station (used
exclusively for G3 relay purposes). (Up to 10 characters)
Department Manager’s Email Address for notification of all Internet relayed
transmissions for supervision and cost control purposes. (Up to 60
characters)
Enter up to 10 Domain Name(s) that have been authorized to access your
Internet Fax for Relayed XMT Request. (Up to 30 characters)
Relay Domain, a.k.a. Domain Name in your machine.
Community Name used for the Network Device Locator.

COMMUNITY NAME
(01) ~ (02)
34
DEVICE NAME
Device Name used for the Network Device Locator.
35
DEVICE LOCATION Device Location for the Network Device Locator.
* Contact your Network Administrator for this Information.

293
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

8.10. Programming or Retrieving Parameters via Email

Using Email to Program or Retrieve Parameters
This feature is a powerful tool, which provides a convenient and easy way of retrieving or programming
Internet Parameters, One-Touch, ABBR Dialing Numbers, Program keys and Journal retrieval from your PC
by sending a text email message to your machine.
Using your email application s "Subject:" line as a command-input field, you can request your machine to
perform the following commands:
"Subject:" Line Command
1
2
3
4
5
Where:

#set parameters(password)#
#get parameters(password)#
#set abbr(password)#
#get abbr(password)#
#get jnl(password)#

Function
Programs the Internet Parameters
Retrieves the Internet Parameters
Programs the Auto Dialer
Retrieves the Auto Dialer Data
Retrieves the current Journal data

"set" is used to program the data
"get" is used to retrieve the data
"parameters" represents Internet Parameters
"abbr" represents Auto Dialer
"jnl" represents Journal
"password" is the Remote Password programmed in your machine’s User Parameters
(i.e. 123456789). Must be enclosed within the parenthesis "( )".
The command must be enclosed within the hash (#) signs.

Using a PC to Input the Internet Parameters Remotely
This feature provides a convenient and an easy way to input the Internet Parameters right from your PC by
sending a text email message to your machine.
The following parameters can be input remotely via a PC. The other parameters must be entered from the
machine in the User Parameters.
. Sender Selection (up to 24 User Names)
. Default Domain
. Selectable Domains (up to 10 additional Domain Names)
. Remote Password
. Manager s Email Address
. Relay XMT Password
. Relay Domain (up to 10 Domain Names authorized for Relay XMT Request)
. LDAP Server Name
. LDAP Login Name
. LDAP Password
. LDAP Search Base
. Community Name (up to 2 Community Names)
. Device Name
. Device Location
Your machine interprets the command that you enter in the "Subject" line of your email message and
performs one of the following functions, it Retrieves or Stores data into the Internet Parameters (User
Parameters).
The two types of commands that can be entered in the "Subject" line of your email:
1) To Store
data, type

:

#set parameters(password)#

2) To Retrieve :
data, type

#get parameters(123456789)#

NOTE

: where the "password" is the Remote Password programmed in
your machine’s User Parameters (i.e. 123456789).
You can enter the Internet Parameters shown above with this
command the first time. However, if these fields already contain
data, do not use this command as the existing information will
be deleted and overwritten. Use the Retrieve command below
instead.

1. To activate this feature, change the Fax Parameter No. 158 (PC REMOTE UPDATE) to "Valid".

294
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

To Input the Internet Parameters for the First Time
Create a script in the message body of a plain text email and send it to your machine’s email address. The
"Subject" line of the email must be as follows:
#set parameters(password)#

:

Important

:

where the "password" is the Remote Password programmed in your
machine’s User Parameters. For security, always input a Remote
Password in the User Parameters. [If the password was not
programmed, represent it with "( )" and assign a password now.
Ex: #set parameters( )#].
Do not use the above command if these fields already contain data,
the existing information will be deleted and overwritten. Retrieve and
backup the existing data onto your PC first by following the
procedures for Retrieving and Editing the Internet Parameters.

The script sample to input the Internet Parameters is shown below.

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)
(a)

(b)
(5)

(c)
(d)
(a)

(b)
(c)

(6)

(d)
(a)
(b)
(c)

(1)

To
From

:
:

Subject

:

(7)

(d)

Your machine’s email address.
This field is normally not visible when creating new email message(s).
It is your default email address (email application), for retrieving the Internet
Parameters and for error message notification.
(Can be programmed with the configuration tool of your email program.)
To Store data, type: #set parameters(password)#

295
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

To Input the Internet Parameters for the First Time
(2)

@sender to @end

:

(3)

@select-domain to @end

:

(4)

@relay-domain to @end

:

(5)

@system to @end

:

(6)

@ldap to@end

:

(7)

@mib to @end

:

NOTE

Defines the Sender information to be set in section (2) between @sender to @end
block. Register up to 24 User Names and their Email Addresses for the Sender
Selection feature (See page 149).
Separate each data field with a semicolon (;). (If the remaining fields are to remain
blank, insert a semicolon (;) for each blank field)
The data string for each Sender Selection should be defined within a single line.
The syntax is: ;;
(a) 01 to 24: Indicates the Sender Selection Numbers
(b) User Name (25-characters maximum)
(c) Email Address (60-characters maximum)
Defines the Selectable Domains to be set in section (3) between @select-domain
to @end block. Register up to 10 Domain Names that can be selected during
manual email addressing. (30-characters maximum)
The syntax is: ;
Defines the Domain Names to be set in section (4) between @relay-domain to
@end block. Register up to 10 Domain Names that have been authorized to
access your Internet Fax for Relayed XMT Request. (30-characters maximum)
Defines the Internet Parameters to be set in section (5) between @system to
@end block. Register the following Internet Parameters.
(a) Default Domain (50-characters maximum).
The syntax is: domain; 
(b) Manager s Email Address (60-characters maximum).
The syntax is: manager; 
(c) Relay XMT Password (10-characters maximum).
The syntax is: relay; . Quotation marks " " enclosing
the password, is required, as shown in the example above.
(d) Remote Password (10-characters maximum).
The syntax is: remote; . Quotation marks " " enclosing
the password, is required, as shown in the example above.
Defines the LDAP Parameters to be set in section (6) between @ldap to @end
block. Register the following Internet Parameters.
(a) LDAP Server Name (60-characters maximum).
The syntax is: server;
(b) LDAP Login Name (40-characters maximum).
The syntax is: login;
(c) LDAP Password (10-characters maximum).
The syntax is: password;Quotation marks " " enclosing the
password, is required, as shown in the example above.
(d) LDAP Search Base (40-characters maximum).
The syntax is: base;
Defines the MIB to be set in section (7) between @mib to @end block. Register
the following Internet Parameters.
(a) Community Name(1) (32-characters maximum).
The syntax is: com_name1;
(b) Community Name(2) (32-characters maximum).
The syntax is: com_name2;
(c) Device Name(32-characters maximum).
The syntax is: device;
(d) Device Location(32-characters maximum).
The syntax is: location;

1. The machine cannot be programmed via email while it is communicating or printing.

296
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

To Retrieve the Internet Parameters for Backup
To retrieve the existing Internet Parameters, send a plain text email to the your machine’s email address
with the following command in the "Subject" line:
#get parameters(password)#

:

where the "password" is the Remote Password programmed in your
machine’s User Parameters (i.e. 123456789). For security, always
input a Remote Password in the User Parameters. If it was not
programmed, signify with "()" (i.e. #get parameters()#).
Make sure that the CC..., Bcc... lines and the body of the email
message is Blank.

(1)

(1)

To

:

Your machine’s email address.

From

:

This field is normally not visible when creating new email message(s).
It is your default email address (email application), for retrieving the Internet
Parameters and for error message notification.
(Can be programmed with the configuration tool of your email program.)

Subject

:

To Retrieve data, type: #get parameters(password)#

297
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

To Retrieve the Internet Parameters for Backup
After receiving the email message requesting the Internet Parameters, your machine sends back an email
to the address specified in the "From:" line with the Internet Parameters in the body of the email.
Your Machine s Internet Parameters Email Sample

(1)

(8)
[Delete this header before sending the email.]

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(1)

(2)

To

:

Your email address that was used to retrieve the Internet Parameters.

From

:

Your machine’s email address.

Subject

:

Your machine s System Parameter List

@sender to @end

:

Defines up to 24 User Names and their Email Addresses programmed in your
machine for the Sender Selection in section (2) between @sender to @end block.

298
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

To Retrieve the Internet Parameters for Backup
(3)

@select-domain to @end

:

Defines up to 10 alternate Domain Names programmed in your machine for the
Selectable Domains in section (3) between @select-domain to @end block.

(4)

@relay-domain to @end

:

Defines up to 10 Domain Names programmed in your machine that have been
authorized to access your Internet Fax for Relayed XMT Request in section (4)
between @relay-domain to @end block.

(5)

@system to @end

:

Defines the following Internet Parameters programmed in your machine in section
(5) between @system to @end block.
(a) Default Domain
(b) Manager s Email Address
(c) Relay XMT Password
(d) Remote Password

(6)

@ldap to@end

:

Defines the following Internet Parameters programmed in your machine in section
(6) between @ldap to @end block.
(a) LDAP Server Name
(b) LDAP Login Name
(c) LDAP Password
(d) LDAP Search Base

(7)

@mib to @end

:

Defines the following Internet Parameters programmed in your machine in section
(7) between @mib to @end block.
(a) Community Name(1)
(b) Community Name(2)
(c) Device Name
(d) Device Location

:

This header must be deleted before the email is sent to your machine for
reprogramming of Internet Parameters.
The information following the "#" sign is ignored by your machine, therefore, you
can leave it as is, or delete it if you wish.

(8)

To Edit the Retrieved or Backup Internet Parameters File
After receiving your machine s email with the Internet Parameters, store the email file as text (.txt) on your
PC for backup purposes.
To change or update the Internet Parameters, follow the steps below:
1. Create a New Email Message, fill out the "To" and "From" Address line and the Subject line information
for section (1) below:
To

:

Your machine’s email address.

From

:

This field is normally not visible when creating new email message(s).
It is your default email address (email application), for retrieving the Internet
Parameters and for error message notification.

Subject

:

To Store data, type: #set parameters(password)#

2. Open the backup, Internet Parameter text file. Copy the body text and paste it on the body of the newly
created email message.
3. Delete any headers that may be present in the body of the email, as unsupported data will be rejected.
The information following the "#" sign is ignored by your machine.
4. Edit a parameter and/or add additional Sender Name(s) or Domain Name(s).
5. When finished, use the "File/Save as..." command and save the updated file with ".txt" extension as a
backup.
6. Send the email message to your machine to update the Internet Parameters.

299
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

To Edit the Retrieved or Backup Internet Parameters File
Your Machine s Internet Parameters Email Sample

(1)

(8)
[Delete this header before sending the email.]

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(1)

To

:

Your machine’s email address.

From

:

This field is normally not visible when creating new email message(s).
It is your default email address (email application), for retrieving the Internet
Parameters and for error message notification.
(Can be programmed with the configuration tool of your email program.)

Subject

:

To Store data, type: #set parameters(password)#

300
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

To Edit the Retrieved or Backup Internet Parameters File
(2)

@sender to @end

:

Defines the Sender information to be set in section (2) between @sender to @end
block. Edit, Delete or Register up to 24 User Names and their Email Addresses for
the Sender Selection feature (See page 149).
Separate each data field with a semicolon (;). (If the remaining fields are to remain
blank, insert a semicolon (;) for each blank field)
The data string for each Sender Selection should be defined within a single line.
The syntax is: ;;
(a) 01 to 24: Indicates the Sender Selection Numbers
(b) User Name (25-characters maximum)
(c) Email Address (60-characters maximum)

(3)

@select-domain to @end

:

Defines the Selectable Domains to be set in section (3) between @select-domain
to @end block. Register up to 10 alternate Domain Names that can be selected
during manual email addressing. (30-characters maximum)
The syntax is: ;

(4)

@relay-domain to @end

:

Defines the Domain Names to be set in section (4) between @relay-domain to
@end block. Register up to 10 Domain Names that have been authorized to
access your Internet Fax for Relayed XMT Request. (30-characters maximum)

(5)

@system to @end

:

Defines the Internet Parameters to be set in section (5) between @system to
@end block. Register the following Internet Parameters.
(a) Default Domain (50-characters maximum).
The syntax is: domain; 
(b) Manager s Email Address (60-characters maximum).
The syntax is: manager; 
(c) Relay XMT Password (10-characters maximum).
The syntax is: relay; . Quotation marks " " enclosing
the password, is required, as shown in the example above.
(d) Remote Password (10-characters maximum).
The syntax is: remote; . Quotation marks " " enclosing
the password, is required, as shown in the example above.
(Notice that for the above example, we have changed the Manager s Email
Address, Relay XMT Password and the Remote Password)

(6)

@ldap to@end

:

Defines the LDAP Parameters to be set in section (6) between @ldap to @end
block. Register the following Internet Parameters.
(a) LDAP Server Name (60-characters maximum).
The syntax is: server;
(b) LDAP Login Name (40-characters maximum).
The syntax is: login;
(c) LDAP Password (10-characters maximum).
The syntax is: password;Quotation marks " " enclosing the
password, is required, as shown in the example above.
(d) LDAP Search Base (40-characters maximum).
The syntax is: base;

(7)

@mib to @end

:

Defines the MIB to be set in section (7) between @mib to @end block. Register
the following Internet Parameters.
(a) Community Name(1) (32-characters maximum).
The syntax is: com_name1;
(b) Community Name(2) (32-characters maximum).
The syntax is: com_name2;
(c) Device Name(32-characters maximum).
The syntax is: device;
(d) Device Location(32-characters maximum).
The syntax is: location;

:

This header must be deleted before the email is sent to your machine for
reprogramming of Internet Parameters.
The information following the "#" sign is ignored by your machine, therefore, you
can leave it as is, or delete it if you wish.

(8)

301
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

Using a PC to Update the Auto Dialer Remotely
This feature provides a convenient and an easy way to Update, Backup or Restore the Phone Book data
right from your PC by sending a text email message to your machine.
Your machine interprets the command that you enter in the "Subject" line of your email message and
performs one of the following functions, it Retrieves or Stores data into the Auto Dialer (Phone Book).
The two types of commands that can be entered in the "Subject" line of your email:
1) To Store
data, type

:

#set abbr(password)#

2) To Retrieve :
data, type

#get abbr(123456789)#

NOTE

: where the "password" is the Remote Password programmed in
your machine’s User Parameters (i.e. 123456789).
You can program any known unused Auto Dialer location(s)
with this command for the first time, without having to Retrieve
the Phone Book data first. If the desired Auto Dialer location
already contains data, your machine will overwrite the existing
data, therefore, we recommend that you use the Retrieve
command below instead.
To edit existing Auto Dialer locations, refer to pages 65 to 66.

1. To activate this feature, change the Fax Parameter No. 158 (PC REMOTE UPDATE) to "Valid".

302
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

Deleting the Entire Auto Dialer
If you wish to delete the entire Auto Dialer data in your machine, type the following command in the body of
the email message:
@command
delete
@end
This command can also be inserted before the @begin to @end block, to erase the entire Auto Dialer data
first, then reprogram it with new data.
This method will also prevent the "Overwrite Warning Message" that is sent back from your machine, when
the current Auto Dialer station is overwritten.
To erase the entire Auto Dialer data, type the following command in the "Subject" line of your email:
#set abbr(password)#

:

where the password is the Remote Password programmed in your
machine’s User Parameters.
Retrieve and backup the existing data onto your PC first by following
the procedures for Retrieving and Editing.

303
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

To Program One-Touch/ABBR. No. for the First Time
Create a script in the message body of a plain text email and send it to your machine’s email address.The
"Subject" line of the email must be as follows:
:

#set abbr(password)#

where the password is the Remote Password programmed in your
machine’s User Parameters.

The script sample to program the One-Touch/ABBR. No. for the first time is shown in the illustration below:
First Time Remote Programming of One-Touch/ABBR. No. Sample

(1)
(a)

(b)

(c)

(d)

(e)
(2)

Headquarters

(a)

(d)

(c)

(f)

(e)
(f)

(h)

(b)

(3)
(g)

304
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

To Program One-Touch/ABBR. No. for the First Time
Explanation of Contents
(1)

To

:

Your machine’s email address.

From

:

This field is normally not visible when creating new email message(s).
It is your default email address (email application), for retrieving the Phone Book
data and for error message notification.
(Can be programmed with the configuration tool of your email program.)

Subject

:

To Store data, type: #set abbr(password)#
To Retrieve data, type: #get abbr(password)#

(2)

@begin to @end block

:

Defines the data to be set into the Phone Book between @begin to @end block.
Separate each data field with a semicolon (;). (If the remaining fields are to remain
blank, insert a semicolon (;) for each blank field)
The data string for each station should be defined within a single line.
(a) Entry-number: One-Touch, ABBR. No. or Program Keys to be programmed
001 to 100:
indicates ABBR. No. 001 to 100 (100 stations maximum)
1001 to 1028: indicates One-Touch numbers from 01 to 28
2001 to 2004: indicates Program Keys (P1 to P4 programmed as
One-Touch dialing number)
(b) Station-name: Name of the station being programmed (15 alpha-numeric
characters maximum)
(c) Station-address: email address or telephone number of the station being
programmed
(d) Routing-subaddress: sub-address to be used for routing (20-digit maximum)
(e) Routing-id-number: TSI to be used for routing (20-digit maximum)
(f) The End Receiving Station s telephone number is entered after the hash sign
(#).

(3)

@program to @end

:

Defines the data to be set into Program Keys as a Group Key or POP Access Key
between @program to @end block.
(a) Program Key: P01 - P04
(b) Station-name as a Group Key: Name of the station being programmed (15
alpha-numeric characters maximum)
(c) GROUP: The syntax used to set the Program Key as a Group Key
(d) Entry-number: One-Touch, ABBR. No. or Program Keys to be programmed
001 to 100:
indicates ABBR. No. 001 to 100 (100 stations maximum)
1001 to 1028: indicates One-Touch numbers from 01 to 28
2001 to 2004: indicates Program Keys (P1 to P4 programmed as
One-Touch dialing number)
(e) POP: The syntax used to set the Program Key as a POP Access Key
(f) POP User-name: Name of the station being programmed (40 alpha-numeric
characters maximum)
(g) POP Password: POP Password (10 alpha-numeric characters maximum)
(h) Set whether the emails on the POP Server are deleted after retrieving the
emails.

NOTE

1. If a POP user account is programmed into the P1 to P4 program keys, the data programmed
for this key cannot be deleted, even when the delete command is specified.
2. The email address and the telephone number cannot be programmed via email when:
One-Touch Number has been used for communication reservation.
Received documents are stored in the image data memory of the machine.
While the machine is communicating or printing.
3. When the email address and telephone number are programmed via email, a program result
email is sent back.
4. Some email applications automatically insert a line feed in the middle of a line when the
number of characters in a line exceed a specific number. Turn "Off" the automatic line feed, or
define the number of characters per line to prevent a line feed, or the data will be ignored.

305
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

To Retrieve One-Touch/ABBR. No. Data for Backup
To retrieve the existing auto dialer data, send a plain text email to your machine’s email address with the
following command in the "Subject" line:
:

#get abbr(password)#

where the "password" is the Remote Password programmed in your
machine’s User Parameters (i.e. 123456789).

Make sure that the Cc, Bcc lines and the body of the email message is Blank.
Retrieving One-Touch/ABBR. No. Data Sample

(1)

(1)

To

:

Your machine’s email address.

From

:

This field is normally not visible when creating new email message(s).
It is your default email address (email application), for retrieving the One-Touch/
ABBR. No. data and for error message notification.
(Can be programmed with the configuration tool of your email program.)

Subject

:

To Retrieve data, type: #get abbr(password)#

306
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

To Retrieve One-Touch/ABBR. No. Data for Backup
After receiving the email message requesting the existing auto dialer data, your machine sends back an
email to the address specified in the "From:" line with the auto dialer information in the body of the email.
Your Machine s Auto Dialer Email Sample

(1)

fax@mgcs.co.jp
MMM-dd-yyyy 14:15

(2)
Headquarters

(3)

(1)

To

:

Your email address that was used to retrieve the Auto Dialer data.

From

:

Your machine’s email address.

Subject

:

ONE-TOUCH/ABBR. List

(2)

@begin to @end block

:

Defines One-Touch Keys, Abbreviated Dialing Numbers and Program Keys stored
as a One-Touch Key programmed in your machine in section (2) between @begin
to @end block.

(3)

@program to @end

:

Defines Program Keys stored as a Group Key or POP Access Key programmed in
your machine in section (3) between @program to @end block.

307
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

To Edit the Retrieved or Backup One-Touch/ABBR. No. Data File
After receiving your machine email with the auto dialer data, store the email file as text (.txt) on your PC for
backup purposes.
To change or update the auto dialer, follow the steps below:
1. Create a New Email Message, fill out the "To" and "From" Address line and the Subject line information
for section (1) below:
To

:

Your machine’s email address.

From

:

This field is normally not visible when creating new email message(s).
It is your default email address (email application), for retrieving the One-Touch/
ABBR. No. data and for error message notification.

Subject

:

To Store data, type: #set abbr(password)#

2. Open the backup, auto dialer text file. Copy the body text and paste it on the body of the newly created
email message.
3. Delete any headers that may be present in the body of the email, as unsupported data will be rejected.
The information following the "#" sign is ignored by your machine.
4. Edit and/or add additional One-Touch/ABBR. No. stations.
5. When finished, use the "File/Save as..." command and save the updated file with ".txt" extension as a
backup.
6. Send the email message to your machine to update the auto dialer.
Your Machine s Auto Dialer Email Sample

(1)
(5)
[Delete this header before sending email]

fax@mgcs.co.jp
MMM-dd-yyyy

(a) (b)

(c)

(d)

(e)
(2)

(f)

Headquarters

(4)
(a) (b)
(d)
(h)

(f)
(g)

(c)
(e)

(3)

308
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

To Edit the Retrieved or Backup One-Touch/ABBR. No. Data File
(1)

To

:

Your machine’s email address.

From

:

This field is normally not visible when creating new email message(s).
It is your default email address (email application), for retrieving the One-Touch/
ABBR. No. data and for error message notification.
(Can be programmed with the configuration tool of your email program.)

Subject

:

To Store data, type: #set abbr(password)#

(2)

@begin to @end block

:

Defines the One-Touch Keys, Abbreviated Dialing Numbers and Program Keys
stored as a One-Touch Key to be set in section (2) between @begin to @end
block.
Edit, Delete or Register the information.
Separate each data field with a semicolon (;). (If the remaining fields are to remain
blank, insert a semicolon (;) for each blank field)
The data string for each station should be defined within a single line. The syntax
is:;;;;
(a) Entry-number: One-Touch, ABBR. No. or Program Keys to be programmed
001 to 100:
indicates ABBR. No. 001 to 100 (100 stations maximum)
1001 to 1028: indicates One-Touch numbers from 01 to 28
2001 to 2004: indicates Program Keys (P1 to P4 programmed as
One-Touch dialing number)
(b) Station-name: Name of the station being programmed (15 alpha-numeric
characters maximum)
(c) Station-address: email address or telephone number of the station being
programmed
(d) Routing-subaddress: sub-address to be used for routing (20-digit maximum)
(e) Routing-id-number: TSI to be used for routing (20-digit maximum)
(f) The End Receiving Station s telephone number is entered after the hash sign
(#).

(3)

@program to @end

:

Defines the Program Keys stored as a Group Key or POP Access Key to be set in
section (3) between @program to @end block.
Edit, Delete or Register the information.
(a) Program Key: P01 - P04
(b) Station-name as a Group Key: Name of the station being programmed (15
alpha-numeric characters maximum)
(c) GROUP: The syntax used to set the Program Key as a Group Key
(d) Entry-number: One-Touch, ABBR. No. to be programmed
001 to 100:
indicates ABBR. No. 001 to 100 (100 stations maximum)
1001 to 1028: indicates One-Touch numbers from 01 to 28
2001 to 2004: indicates Program Keys (P1 to P4 programmed as
One-Touch dialing number)
(e) POP:The syntax used to set the Program Key as a POP Access Key.
(f) POP User-name: Name of the POP user account (40 alpha-numeric characters
maximum)
(g) POP Password: POP Password (10 alpha-numeric characters maximum)
(h) Set whether the emails on the POP Server are deleted after retrieving the
emails.

(4)

These 2 ABBR. No. stations were added to the list.

(5)

This header must be deleted before the email is sent to your machine for reprogramming of One-Touch/ABBR. No.
The information following the "#" sign is ignored by your machine, therefore, you can leave it as is or delete it if you
wish.

309
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

Using Email to Retrieve the Journal
To retrieve the existing Journal data, send an email to your machine’s email address with the following
command in the "Subject" line:
#get jnl(password)#

:

where the "password" is the Remote Password programmed in your
machine’s User Parameters (i.e. 123456789).

The Journal will be send back to the originating station s email address.
After receiving the journal, use a fixed width font (i.e. Courier), in order to align the received journal s
contents on the PC.
A separate email message is sent by your machine, an "Internet Fax Return Receipt" to the Manager s
email address programmed in the User Parameters, informing of the Journal transfer.

NOTE

1. To activate this feature, change the Fax Parameter No. 158 (PC REMOTE UPDATE) to "Valid".

310
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

8.11. Customizing Your Machine
General Description
Your fac simile machine has a variety of adjustabl e Fax Pa rameter s. Thes e parameters, listed in the
Parameter Table, are pr eset for you a nd d o not need to be ch ang ed. If you do want to mak e a change , read
th e table careful ly. Some paramete rs, suc h as the Resoluti on and Contrast parameter s, can be temporaril y
change d by simp le key op erati on just befor e a tr ans mi ss io n i s made. When t he tr ansm is sion end s,
howev er, th ese parameter s return to thei r preset values (Home positi on) . Other parameter s can only be
change d by th e pr oc edur e desc ribed b elow.

Setting the Fax Parameters

1

SET MODE
(1-8)
EN TER NO. OR

7

2

FA X PARAMETER(01-174)
NO.=

4

3
4

Enter Fax Parameter numb er fr om the Parameter Table.

5
6

Enter th e new setting value .

FA X PARAMETER(01-174)
NO.=01

Ex: 0 1 for CONTRAST

01 CONTRAST
1:NORMAL

01 CONTRAST
2:LIGHTER

Ex: 2 for LIGHTER

02 RESOLUTION
1:STANDARD

To set another par ameter, press sCLEAR to return to ste p
3 or pr ess STOP

NOTE

to return to stand by.

1. To scroll the Fax Parameters in Step 2 or 4, press

or

.

311
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

Fax Parameter Table
No.

Parameter

Setting
Number

Setting

01

CONTRAST

*1

Normal

2

Lighter

3

Darker

02

RESOLUTION

04

STAMP

05

06

MEMORY

DIALING METHOD

07

08

09

HEADER PRINT

HEADER FORMAT

RCV’D TIME PRINT

10

12

KEY/BUZZER
VOLUME

COMM. JOURNAL

1

Standard Setting the home position for the RESOLUTION.
Fine

3

S-Fine

4

Halftone
(Fine)

5

Halftone
(S-Fine)

*1

Off

2

On

1

Off

*2

On

1

Pulse

*2

Tone

*1

Inside

2

Outside

3

No Print

*1

Logo, ID Selecting the header format.
No.

2

From To

*1

Invalid

2

Valid

1

Off

*2

Soft

3

Loud

1

Off

*3
AUTO JOURNAL
PRINT

Setting the home position of the CONTRAST key.

*2

2

13

Comments

Setting the home position of the STAMP key.
To select the stamp function when document is stored
in memory, see Fax Parameter No. 28.
Setting the home position for memory transmission/
copy mode. (This setting can be temporarily changed
by using F8-9 (MEMORY XMT))
Selecting the dialing method.
Selecting the printing position of the header.
Inside : Inside TX copy area.
Outside : Outside TX copy area.
No Print: Header is not printed.

Selecting whether the machine prints the received
date & time, remote ID, percentage of reduction and
page number on the bottom of each received page.
Selecting the volume of the Key/Buzzer tone.

Selecting the home position of printout mode for
COMM.
Journal Off/Always/INC.
Always
Off
: Does not print
Inc. Only Always : Always prints
Inc. Only: Prints only when communication has failed.

1

Invalid

*2

Valid

Selecting whether the machine prints the journal
automatically after every 32 transactions.

312
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

No.

Parameter

Setting
Number

Setting

17

RECEIVE MODE

1

TEL

*2

FAX

3

FAX/TEL
SW.

4

TAM/FAX

*1

20
sec.

2

30
sec.

3

40
sec.

4

50
sec.

1

1
sec.

---

---

60

60
sec.

18

OPERATOR CALL
TIMER

19

20
22

23

24

25

OGM LENGTH
(TAM I/F)

SILENT DETECTION
(TAM I/F)

1

Invalid

*2

Valid

SUBSTITUTE RCV

1

Invalid

*2

Valid

1

A4

*2

Letter

3

Legal

1

Fixed

*2

Auto

70

70%

----

----

*100

100%

RECORDING PAPER
SIZE

PRINT REDUCTION

REDUCTION RATIO

26

POLLING
PASSWORD

27

POLLED FILE SAVE

28

STAMP AT MEM.
XMT

(----)
*1

Invalid

2

Valid

1

Invalid

*2

Valid

Comments

Setting the receive mode.

Selecting the length of time that your machine signals
(rings) for an incoming voice call in Fax/Tel Auto
Switching mode.

Setting for the OGM length of your TAM from 1 to 60
seconds. The machine will not start to detect
SILENCE until the time setting has lapsed.
(Default = 20 sec.)

Selecting the Silent Detection Mode.
Selecting whether the machine receives to memory
when recording paper runs out, toner runs out or
recording paper is jammed.
Setting the recording paper size installed in your
machine.

Selecting print reduction mode.
Fixed:Reduce received document according to setting
of Parameter No. 25.
Auto :Reduce received document according to the
length of received documents.
Selecting fixed print reduction ratio from 70% to 100%.
This parameter functions only when fixed print
reduction is selected on Fax Parameter No. 24.
Setting a 4-digit password for secured polling.
Selecting whether the machine retains the polled
document in memory even after the document is
polled once.
Selecting whether the machine stamps the original
documents when storing the documents into memory.
(Depending on the Stamp setting on the Control
Panel)

313
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

Setting
Number

Setting

Comments

INCOMPLETE FILE
SAVE

*1

Invalid

2

Valid

Selecting whether the machine retains the document
in memory if the document is not successfully
transmitted.

COPY REDUCTION
z

1

Manual

*2

Auto

ENERGY SAVER
MODE

1

Off

2

EnergySaver

DAYLIGHT TIME

1

Invalid

*2

Valid

*1

Invalid

2

Valid

Select a ring pattern for automatic answering.
1: A Standard ring pattern.
2: B Double ring pattern.
3: C Triple ring pattern (Short-Short-Long).
4: D All other triple ring patterns, except the
type C described above.

No.

Parameter

31

32

34

35

36

RING PATTERN
DETECT (DRD)
(See Note 2)

Selecting whether the machine performs the copy
reduction ratio automatically or manually.
Manual :The machine will prompt you for the Zoom
ratio (100% to 70%) when making copies.
Auto :The machine will automatically determine the
reduction ratio according to the length of the
original document.
To reduce the power consumption in standby, select
either Energy-Saver or Sleep mode and specify the
Delay Time (1 to 120 minutes) for the machine to enter
into the selected mode.
The Delay Timer setting is only available in the
Energy-Saver or Sleep Modes.
Off
: The unit will remain in standby
mode and consume more energy
than when in Energy-Saver or
Sleep modes.
Energy-Saver Mode: Saves energy by consuming
less power than when in
standby mode by turning off the
fuser unit after the specified
time.
Selecting whether the clock adjusts for Daylight
Saving Time automatically. The built-in clock will
advance 1 hour at 2:00 am on the first Sunday in April
and fallback 1 hour at 2:00 am on the last Sunday in
October.
All ring patterns.

37

RCV TO MEMORY

(----)

Enter a 4-digit password used to print out the received
document in memory by using F8-5 (RCV TO
MEMORY). When F8-5 is set to On, this parameter
will not be shown on the LCD display.

38

ACCESS CODE

(----)

Enter a 4-digit Access Code to secure the machine
from unauthorized use.

39

PIN CODE ACCESS

*1

None

2

Suffix

Selecting the access method (Prefix or Suffix) to dial a
number with PIN Code.

3

Prefix

*1

Invalid

2

Valid

42

CONF. POLLED FILE
SAVE

Selecting whether the machine saves the confidential
polled file even after the file is polled once.

314
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

No.

Parameter

Setting
Number

Setting

Comments

43

PASSWORD-XMT

*1

Off

2

On

Setting a 4-digit XMT-Password and selecting whether
the machine performs and checks the XMT-Password
of the receiving station when transmitting.

*1

Off

2

On

*1

Invalid

2

Valid

1

Invalid

*2

Valid

*1

Invalid

2

Valid

44

PASSWORD-RCV

46

SELECT RCV

47

REMOTE
RECEPTION

51

REMOTE
DIAGNOSTIC

Setting a 4-digit RCV-Password and selecting whether
the machine performs and checks the RCV-Password
of the transmitting station when receiving.
Selecting whether the machine performs selective
reception.
Selecting whether or not the machine accepts remote
reception command.
Selecting whether or not the machine accepts to
update the firmware or Remote Diagnostics from the
remote station. Please ask your Panasonic Authorized
Dealer for details.

52

DIAGNOSTIC
PASSWORD

(----)

Setting the password for Remote Diagnostic Mode.
Please ask your Panasonic Authorized Dealer for
details.

53

SUB-ADDRESS
PASSWORD

(----)

Setting a 20-digit password for secured sub-address
communication.

54

FAX FORWARD

56

COVER SHEET

58

LANGUAGE

*1

Invalid

2

Valid

*1

Off

2

On

*1
2

65

PRINT COLLATION

82

QUICK MEMORY
XMT

Selecting whether the machine performs
Forwarding to the specified destination.

Fax

Setting the home position of the Cover Sheet
parameter in the Select Mode.

A-English Selecting the language to be shown on the display
C-French and reports.

3

Spanish

1

Invalid

*2

Valid

1

Invalid

*2

Valid

Selecting whether the machine prints out documents
in sequence.
Selecting whether the machine performs Quick
Memory Transmission.
Invalid: Stores all documents into memory first before
dialing the telephone number.
Valid : Starts dialing the telephone number
immediately after storing the first page.

99

MEMORY SIZE
(Flash Memory)

-

-

Displays the amount of base and optional memory
installed.
(Base Memory + Optional Memory)

140

LAN RELAY XMT
REQUEST

*1

Invalid

2

Valid

Selecting whether the machine performs LAN Relay
XMT Request.

RELAY XMT
(a.k.a. LAN RELAY
STATION on UF-770i)

1

Invalid

*2

Valid

142

Selecting whether the machine accepts and performs
G3 relayed transmission. (Relay Station Functions)

315
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

No.

Parameter

143

RELAY XMT
REPORT

Setting
Number

Setting

1

Off

*2
3

Setting how the COMM. Journal for relayed
Always transmission is sent to the originator.
Off
: Don’t send.
Inc. Only Always : Always send.
Inc. Only : Send only if communication has failed.

144 EMAIL CHARACTER
SET

*2

145

SENDER
SELECTION

*1

Invalid

2

Valid

POP TIMER

----

0 to 60
min.

Setting the time interval for the machine to check for
email on the POP Server.
(0 = Does not check the POP Server for email.)

1

Invalid

*2

Valid

Selecting whether the machine automatically
downloads an email from the POP Server.

1

Invalid

*2

Valid

DELETE POP ERR
EMAIL

*1

Invalid

2

Valid

IFAX RETURN
RECEIPT

1

Invalid

*2

Valid

1

All

*2

Subject/
From/To

3

Off

SUB-ADDRESS
ROUTING

*1

Invalid

2

Valid

TSI ROUTING

*1

Invalid

2

Valid

146

1

Comments

Japanese Selecting the Character Set when receiving or sending
English email text.

3
147
148
149

AUTO POP RCV
DELETE POP RCV
EMAIL

150
151

EMAIL HEADER
FORMAT

152
153

154

ROUTING HEADER
FORMAT

*1

PRINT ROUTED
DOCUMENT

*1

155

156 PRINT FORWARDED
DOCUMENT

2

2
*1
2

Selecting a pre-programmed sender’s name and
email address before each transmission.

Selecting whether the email will be deleted
automatically after retrieval from the POP Server.
Selecting whether to delete the email that includes an
incompatible file attachment from the POP Server.
Selecting whether to send a return receipt when
receiving from another Panasonic Internet Fax.
Selecting the header information to print when an
email is received. (Normally used for Troubleshooting.
It shows the path of the email transmission before
arriving at your machine.)
Selecting whether to automatically route a received
fax or email using ITU-T Sub-address.
Selecting whether to route a received fax to a
telephone
number
or
an
email
address
preprogrammed in Phone Book using the originating
fax’s Numeric ID (TSI frame information).

Originator Selecting the type of email header to be included in
the "From" field of each routed faxes.
Relay
Station Originator : The originating fax machine’s TSI will
appear in the "From" field of the routed
email.
Relay Station: The routing station’s email address will
appear in the "From" field of the routed
email.
Inc. Only Selecting whether a received fax to be routed is
Always always printed or only when the routing operation fails.
Inc. Only Selecting whether a memory received fax or email to
Always be forwarded is always printed or only when
forwarding is incomplete.

316
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

Setting
Number

Setting

Comments

TRANSACTION
JOURNAL

*1

Invalid

2

Valid

Selecting whether the machine sends a transaction
journal to the pre-programmed email address.

PC REMOTE
UPDATE

*1

Invalid

2

Valid

SUBJECT LINE
ENTRY

*1

Invalid

2

Valid

DEFAULT DOMAIN

1

Invalid

*2

Valid

1

Invalid

*2

Valid

1

None

*2

English

3

English+
Japanese

*1

Invalid

2

Valid

No.

Parameter

157
158

159
160

161
162

163

164

DNS SERVER
TIFF VIEWER URL

ROUTING HEADER

IFAX XMT HEADER
(Email only)

*1

DHCP CLIENT

1

Invalid

*2

Valid

*1

Invalid

2

Valid

*1

Invalid

2

Valid

169

170

SMTP
AUTHENTICATION
(See Note 3)

171 POP BEFORE SMTP
(See Note 3)

2

Selecting whether the machine will accept commands
from an email application, to:
(a) Program the Internet Parameters
(b) Program the Auto Dialer
(c) Allow retrieval of the Journal
Selecting whether the "Subject" line
programmed during each transmission.

can

be

Selecting whether the machine accepts to insert the
Default Domain when entering Manual Number
Dialing.
Selecting whether to use the DNS Server for the
Internet communication.
Selecting whether to include the URL address in the
email message body.

Selecting whether to add the Header Print information
of the Routing Station on the top edge of each routed
pages.

Included Selecting whether to include the header when sending
a document to an addressee in the same Domain as
Not
Included specified in the Default Domain parameter. (This is
useful when using the machine to scan documents
back to your PC)
Note: When sending to a Domain other than as
specified in the Default Domain parameter, the
header will be included regardless of the
selection.
Select whether the machine would automatically
acquire the Network Parameters from the DHCP
Server. (Such as IP Address, Subnet Mask, Default
Gateway IP Address, etc.)
Note:If you change the setting of this parameter, the
machine will reboot automaticaly.
Selecting whether your SMTP Server (Outgoing Mail
Server) requires authentication with a user name and
password before accepting email. After change the
setting to "Valid", you can enter the user name and
password assigned to your machine by your network
administrator.
Selecting whether your SMTP Server (Outgoing Mail
Server) requires authentication by first retrieving
incoming email from the POP Server before accepting
email.
(Please
consult
with
your
network
administrator).

317
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

No.

Parameter

Setting
Number

Setting

Comments

172

DIRECT IFAX XMT

*1

Invalid

2

Valid

Selecting whether to be prompted during One-Touch/
ABBR registration if the station you are programming
is to receive Internet Fax directly without going
through a Mail Server.

1

Off

*2

On

*1

Invalid

2

Valid

173

174

DELIVERY NOTICE
(HOME)

APOP
AUTHENTICATION
(See Note 3)

NOTE

Setting the home position of requesting a Delivery
Notice (MDN) on the Function Select Mode (F8-2)
when sending an email/Internet Fax.
The delivery notice received will not be printed. It is
used to update the communication status on the
Transaction Journal of the original email sent.
Selecting whether to use APOP authentication method
when retrieving email/Internet Fax from the POP
Server. (This setting is server dependant; consult with
your network administrator).

1.Setting number marked with an asterisk (*) indicates the factory standard setting.
2.This parameter supports an optional telephone service "Distinctive Ring Service" provided by your local
telephone company. It allows up to 4 different telephone numbers to be assigned on a single telephone
line with a distinctive ring for each telephone number. By selecting the appropriate ring pattern
associated with the telephone number assigned for your fax machine. It can differentiate and answer
the incoming call on the fax number. All other calls on the other telephone numbers will not be
answered. This optional service from your local phone company is also called Custom Ringing,
Distinctive Ringing, Ident-a-call, Ident-a-ring, Personalized Ringing, RingMaster, RingMate, Selective
Ringing, Smart Ring or something similar. Check with your local telephone company on the availability
of this service in your area.
3."Valid" can be selected when the SMTP server or the POP server support the capabilities.

318
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

9

Options and Supplies

9.1

Options and Supplies

Please contact your local Panasonic dealer for availability.
1. Options
Order No.

Picture

Description

UE-403176

Handset Kit

UE-409070

250 Sheet Letter / Legal / A4 Size Paper
Cassette with the Feeder Unit

UE-410046
UE-410047

Expansion Flash Memory Card, 2 MB
Expansion Flash Memory Card, 4 MB

UE-410048

Expansion Flash Memory Card, 8 MB

2. Supplies
Order No.
DZHT000027
(For USA /
Canada)

Picture

Description

Verification Stamp

DZHT000004
UG-5510
(For USA /
Canada)
Toner Cartridge
UG-3350

Note:
For some destinations, the Handset Kit may not be available because of the destination’s regulation or
specification.

319
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

9.2

Installing Optional 250 Sheet Paper Cassette (UE-409070)

1. Contents
Qty.
1

Description
250 Sheet Paper Cassette with Feeder Unit

Part No.
UE-409070

Remarks

2. Installation
Note:
Install this Feeder Unit as the 2nd Feeder Unit only.
(3)

(2)

(5)
(1)
(4)

(1) Disconnect the Telephone Line Cable (1009)
and the Power Cord (1008).
(2) Remove the Recording Paper Tray Assembly
(1107).
(3) Open the Printer Cover (106).
(4) Remove the Paper Cassette from the machine.
(5) Remove the Toner Cartridge from the machine.

(6) Remove 1 Screw (B1).
(7) Remove the Connector Access Cover (114).

(7)
(6)

(9)

(10)

(8)

(8) Place the machine on its Rear side over a clean
cloth to prevent damaging the Rear Cover.
(9) Break off the protective tab on the machine.
(10) Remove 4 Screws from the top of the 250 Sheet
Paper Cassette.
(11) Remove the shipping tape and place the CST2SNS2 Harness (1035) to the outside of the cassette.

(11)

320
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

(12) Insert the 250 Sheet Paper Cassette into the
machine.
(12)

(15)
(13)x4

(16)

(13) Secure the 250 Sheet Paper Cassette with the 4
screws removed in step 10.
(14) Place the machine upright.
(15) Connect the CST2-SNS2 Harness (1035) into
the Connector CN66 on the SC PC Board.
(16) Re-install the Connector Access Cover (114).
(17) Re-install the Recording Paper Tray Assembly
(1107), Paper Cassettes and the Toner Cartridge.
(18) Re-connect the Telephone Line Cable (1109)
and the Power Cord (1108).
(19) Print some pages from the Optional Paper Cassette to confirm its operation.

321
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

9.3

Installing Handset Kit (UE-403176)

1. Contents
Qty.
1
1
1

Description

Part No.
DZDU000031
DZFN000066
DZML000436

Handset
Handset Cord
Cradle Assembly

Remarks

2. Installation
(1) Disconnect the Power Cord (1108) and the
Telephone Line Cable (1109).
(2) Break off the protective tab on the TEL/HANDSET Jack on the machine.

(2)

(1)

(1)
(3)

(4)

(3) Hook the projections of the Cradle Assembly into
the holes on the Left Cover.
(4) Connect the Cradle Cable (123) to the
TEL/HANDSET Jack on the rear of the machine.
(5) Connect the Handset Cable (121).
(6) Re-connect the Telephone Line Cable (1109)
and the Power Cord (1108).

(5)

322
Edition 1.0

APR 2002

DX-600/800

10 Schematic Diagram
10.1. General Circuit Diagram
A

B

C

D

CN50
1

3

10
11

3

GND

LCD

5

pPNLRD

LANC

1

nWAKUP

1

8

pPNLRST

Sensors

9

pBZCLK

10

nBPNT

PNL1

11

DZEP000648

51

1

*LAN

LEDV

52

2

GND

LEDV

53

3

GND

GND

54

4

GND

A16

55

5

D15

A15

56

6

D7

A14

57

7

D14

A13
2

(B8B-PH-K-M)

RD+
58

8

D6

A12

59

9

D13

A11

3
4

N.C.

5

RD7

N.C
60

8

1

N.C
5

6

10

D5

6

A10

N.C
7
61

11

D12

A9

62

12

D4

A21

63

13

Vcc

*WE

64

14

Vcc

*RESET

65

15

D11

A20

66

16

D3

A19

67

17

D10

A18

8

2

Keys

A-Point

Keypad

B-Point

One-touch keys

B4 Width

Program keys

S-Door

e.t.c

CN30
CN7

TD-

4

CN201

1-50

TD+

3

RJ-45

LMP202C10-FR

LANB

DZEP000649

2

FR

1

FCK1

(S8B-PH-K-M)

2

FCK2

3

FSG

4

AGND

CCD

5

+5V

6

DOS

DZYC0539C

7

OS

8

FBX8703
2

Link

Activity

+24V

1

68

18

D2

A17

69

19

D9

A8

70

20

D1

A7

71

21

D8

A6

72

22

D0

A5

73

23

*OE

A4

CN1

nLEDON

2

(B2B-PH-K-M)

CN202

3

CN5
(B4B-PH-K-S)

(B4B-PH-K-S)
1
2
3
4

RX-

5

RX+

6

TX-

MTnB

1
2

4

CN200

74

24

GND

A3

75

25

GND

A2

76

26

Vdd

A1

77

27

Vdd

Vdd

78

28

A15

Vdd

79

29

A14

*CE

80

30

A13

D0

81

31

A12

D1

3

MTpB

TRANSMIT

MTnA

MOTOR

MTpA

4

FBX8705
FG

(42S1S22D6NB)

7

TX+

8

FBX8751

* OPTION

Handset Kit

CN28

CN23

CN90

(B2(3)B-PH-K-S)
3

1
82

32

A11

CN12

83

33

A10

D3

84

34

A9

D4

3

35

A8

D5
7

MEMORY CARD

36
537

FROM

39
56

57
41
58

59

25
43

60

61
45
62
46
63

(68-pins)

47
64

(A32-068-020-BGBB)

65

31
49

66

51
68

D10

ID0

GND

40

A3

5

4

3

2

4

3

2

1

1

6

1

(Not Mounted)
(T2)

3

(T1)

4

EXT.TEL

D10

91

41

A2

D11

92

42

A1

D12

93

43

Vdd

D13

94

44

Vdd

D14

95

45

AEN

D15

96

46

ARDY

*WR

97

47

GND

*RD

6

CN20
(T2)

1

(L2(T))

3

(L1(R))

4

USA, CAN:DZEP000499

5

Others

(T1)

98

48

GND

RESET

99

49

GND

INTR0

100

50

GND

GND

LINE

* SRU
:DZEP000168

6

4

nWEL

RDY/nBSY

MJR

nWEH
+5V

17
34

CN91
6

D2
A22

16
33

DZEP000168

A15
D1

A21

15
32

50
67

DZEP000499

A14
D0

A20
D9

(AI)

A9
A1

D8
14

(AIS)

5

6

CN21

A10

A19

13
30

48

4

3

SRU

2

A2

ID1

29

(N.C.)

3
4

A12
A3

A18

12

HLIN2

(HLIN2)

3

5

nOE
A4

ID2

28

5

(AIS)

(B6B-PH-K-S)

A11

RSV

11

2

nCE1

RSV
N.C

27

11

4

2

5

A5

RSV
10

D9

90

A6

N.C

9
26

44

D8

A4

pHKOF

(T1)
(N.C.)

HLIN1

D7

nCE2
nMB4

A5

39

pCTON

3

(HLIN1)

2

A7

N.C
8

38

89

pCMLD

2

(T2)

1

D6

D15

7
24

42

88

GND

CN29
1

FBX8702

A8

RSV

8

D5

D14

6
23

D7

+5VP

(N.C.)
3

D4

A13

N.C

22
40

*:Option

D6

A6

9

A16

D13

5

A7

37

10

A17

D12
N.C

21

55

36

87
D3

D11
N.C

4

86

GND

nCD

3
20

1-17
18-34

N.C

GND

197

38

2MB,4MB,8MB

N.C
2

37
54

GND

1
18

+24V

1

Shield

35-51
52-68
35
52

L1(R)

(B8(11-2.4.5)B-PH-K-S)
6

85

(AI)

1

D2

CN18

(31 5027 068 030 833)

L2(T)

MIC(+)

2

LINK

RCV(+)

3

1

+5V

RCV(-)

2

(A4:LNR304713 / B4:LNR314707)

(S8B-PH-K-S)

ACTIVITY

MIC(-)

1

LED ARRAY

FBX8701

CN97

(B3B-PH-K-S)

4

16

7

DZEP000616

(Solenoid:TDS-SY5-21M)

15

14

6

nPWSAVE

FBX8704
51-100

13

4

pPNLSD

(3-pins)
(B3B-PH-K-S)

12

GND

nSTAMPON

CN93

11

V5

Stamp

2

(FX8C-100P-SV2)

(FX8C-100S-SV5)

1

10

+5V

CN96
CN3

+24V

9

+5V

9

8

GND

8

7

DB7

(B11B-PH-K-M)

6

DB6

(B2B-PH-K-M)

7

5

DB5

CN14

4

DB4

6

(2-pins)

+5VP

3

DB3

5

2

DB2

4

CN9

2

DB1

1

2

FAP8706

(S50C26C-1)

DZEP000712

1

GND

(S11B-PH-K-M)

DB0

3

pSPKOT

Speaker

1

+5V

E

2

GND

R/W

1

RS

SC

+5V
GND

DZEP000635

(Continued on the next page)

Model
DX-600 / 800

Edition 1.0

323

Drawing Name
General Circuit
Diagram (1/2)

APR 2002

DX-600/800

A

B

C

D

DZEA000057 (120V)
DZEA000058 (230V)
CN6

FBX8700

(B11B-PH-K-S)

+24V

1

3

GND

4

4

GND

5

SC

+3.3V

6

+5V

7

-5V

8

DZEP000712

(B16B-PH-K-S)

2

GND

3

1

CN103

1

+24V

2

+5VP

9

Voltage

7

Power

8

Supply

1

10

nSSR

11

Low

6

9

nMPOFF

10

5

11
12
13

CN53

14

(B10B-PH-K-S)

+24VM

15

nDRCK

16

1
2

4
5

1

nHSYNC

2

Tranfer

7

FBX8728

Laser Unit

T

T

T

CN202

FG

6

GND

7

200M

5

nVIDEO

6

Supply

(B7B-PH-K-S)

4

nLDON

5

Power

nTR0

3

GND

4

Voltage

nCR1

2

L+5V

3

LSU

CN68

nS/H

1

(B7B-PH-K-S)

High

nCRCK

3

Toner

Development

Cartridge

CN201

D

D

Charge

1

C

(B5P-VH)

C

(White)

3

2

2
nPMCK

1

1

nPMRY

2

(179123-5)

CN69

DZEP000620A

4

+24VM

5

Fuser Unit

3

MGND

4

(173981-5)

2

nPMON

3

5

CN102

5

Thermal Fuse

Termostat

ACI

(B2P3-VH-M)

FBX8729

HEAT1

1

(Green)

Black/L

(LPA1602F02)

Black

Fuser Lamp

CN101

HEAT2

1

White/N

MMpA

1

(173979-6)

CN52

CN54

CN118

2

4

Motor

5

TH2

2

N

AC Line

E

(White)
3

Thermistor

WHITE/N

INLET

(PHR-2)

3

MMpB

FBX8738

4

+24VM

5

MMnB

6

(B2B-PH-K-S)

(B6B-PH-K-S)

White
L

(B2P3-VH)

FBX8720

2

MMnA

3

Main

1

+24VM

TH1

1

BLACK/L

Not Mounted
FBX8739

6

FAP8708
1

(55SPM25D7NA2)

2

DZEP000427A

FG

CN86
SNS4

(B2B-PH-K-S)
CN56
3

CN58

(B2B-PH-K-S)

+24VM

Pick Up

(B6B-PH-K-M)

1

nCCHK1

1

GND

2

nADF1

2

Solenoid

nRSEN

3
4

+5V

5

(TDS-F08G-21B)

nESEN

6

CN87
1

(B6B-PH-K-M)
CN85

3

nCCHK1

1

(B4B-PH-K-M)

4

2

5

3

6

4

GND
nRSEN
LDRE

Paper Exit Sensor

FBX8713

(B4B-PH-K-M)
1

SNS1

2
3

(B3B-PH-K-M)

FAP8715

CN57
(B2(3)PH-K-M)

ILS

1

+24V

nCCHK1

1

GND

2

Timing Sensor
CNA1003

1

LDSC1

3

USA, CAN:FBX8727
Others

3

Printer Cover Sensor

+24VD

DZEP000377

CN82

CN80

4

CNA1003
DZEP000650

3

DZEP000376

CN81

2

(B3B-PH-K-M)
1

SNS2

2
3

Casette Detect Sensor
CNA1003

:FAP8727

3

DZEP000408

CN83
FBX8717

CN59

CN73

(B5B-PH-K-M)

nPCHK1

1

LDSP1

2

(S2(3)B-PH-K-S)

GND

3

TONER

4

+5V

5
6

(B5B-PH-K-M)
1

SNS3

2
3

No Paper Sensor

4
5

1

CNA1003

FAP8725

2

CN66

3

(B7B-PH-K-M)
1

2

3

4

5

6

CN84

7

GND
TONER
+5V

FAP8724

1

Toner Sensor

2
3

(S-3B-ZR-SM3A-TF)

(B3B-PH-K-S)
(TS0505ANA-83CE)

DZEP000406

1

2

3

5

6

nOP

nCCHK2

pADF2

nPCHK2
4

DZFAP8730

7

CN82

(B7B-PH-K-M)

Pick-Up
Solenoid

+5V

* 2nd Cassette Option

GND

4
+24VM

4

+24VM
nADF2

CST2

1

CN74

CN70

(B3B-PH-K-M)

2

1
2
3

CN71
(B2B-PH-K-S)

No Paper Sensor

nCCHK2
GND
SNCMN

DZEP000377

(B3B-PH-K-M)
1

SNS2

2
3

DZFAP8732

Casette Detect Sensor
CNA1003

CNA1003

Model
DX-600 / 800

Edition 1.0

324

Drawing Name
General Circuit
Diagram (2/2)

APR 2002

DX-600/800

10.2. SC PC Board
A

B

C

D

nSDRAS
002:A4;003:A2

nSDRAS

002:A4;003:A2

nSDCAS

002:A3;003:A1

SDCLK

003:A1

SDCKE

002:D2;003:A1;004:A1;014:B2

A[23-1]

nSDCAS
SDCLK

50MHz

SDCKE

nREVCK

007:C4

nLTCK

007:C4

A[23]

A[22]

A[21]

A[20]

A[19]

A[18]

A[17]

A[16]

A[15]

A[14]

A[13]

A[11]

A[12]

A[8]

A[10]

A[7]

A[9]

A[6]

A[5]

A[4]

A[1]

D[15-0]

A[3]

002:A2;003:A1;004:A3;014:A2

A[2]

+3.3V
C4

R12

47K

R13

47K

0

47K

0

R11

0

47K

0

47K

R10

0

1
R9

16V

22uF

2

+3.3V

1

1

R474

R473

R472

R471

R470

C5

25V
0.1uF

C6

25V
0.1uF

C7

25V
0.1uF

C8

14

D[3]

2

D[4]

13

D[5]

12

D[6]

11
10

D[7]
D[8]

7

D[9]

6

D[10]

5

D[11]

4

D[12]

3

D[13]

2

D[14]

1

D[15]

144

JW15

JW14

JW13

JW78

+3.3V

25V

D2/PDL2

47K

47K

47K

47K

47K

47K

47K

47K

47K

47K

47K

47K

47K

47K

47K

47K

47K

R22

R23

R24

R18

R25

R26

R27

R28

R30

R31

R32

R33

R34

R35

R36

R37

AVDD/AVREF

R20

GND

71

61

134

CVDD

124

98
VDD

VDD

81
VDD

VDD

47
VDD

112

37
VDD

VDD

27
VDD

VDD

8

108

109

110

D1/PDL1

PCD2/*LBE/*SDCAS

D0/PDL0

PCD1/SDCLK

114

111

PAH9/A25

PAH8/A24

PAH7/A23

115

0.1uF

116

PAH6/A22

117

JW77

JW76
118
PAH5/A21

119

120

PAH4/A20

PAH3/A19

121
PAH2/A18

PAH1/A17

PAH0/A16

122

126

123

PAL15/A15

127
PAL14/A14

128

129

PAL13/A13

PAL11/A11

PAL12/A12

130

JW11

JW10
131

132

PAL10/A10

PAL8/A8

PAL9/A9

133

JW9

JW8

JW7
PAL7/A7

PAL6/A6

136

JW6

JW4

JW5

137

138

139

PAL5/A5

PAL4/A4

PAL3/A3

JW2

JW3
140

141

25V
0.1uF

PCD3/*UBE/*SDRAS

15

D[2]

25V
0.1uF

C9

C10

PCD0/SDCKE

16

PAL2/A2

TL2
143
17

D[1]

PAL1/A1

PAL0/A0
D[0]

142

JW1

JW12

GND

107
nFROMP

PCS0/*CS0
106

nSDRAM

PCS2/*CS2/*IOWR
PCS3/*CS3/*RAS3

PCS7/*CS7

D9/PDL9

97

JW17

96

JW18

PCT4/*RD
94

D12/PDL12

PCM0/*WAIT
90

*1

005:A3

nRESET

003:C1;004:A2;014:B2

Mounts at the technical
trial production.

18
*2

JP1

R21

GND

Mounts when DSW1 is not
mounted

47K

58

47K

57

CVSS

AVSS

VSS

VSS

VSS

VSS

VSS

VSS

VSS

pMVOL0

64

72

135

125

113

99

82

48

38

9

28

70

69

68

67

66

3

TL4

+3.3V

nRESOUT

0

002:A4

*1

Serial I/F

GND

1

4

2

3

*1

B7B-PH-K-S
D1

3

1

1
CN98

Vpp

MA704

7.8V

KHS02C
GND
47K

GND

65

5.000MHz*10

56

C3

005:A3

36

47K

nBPNT

pMVOL1

+3.3V

DSW1

PROGRAM MODE

NORMAL MODE

1-4 PIN

OFF

ON

2-3 PIN

ON

OFF

R17

002:D4;012:B4

005:A3

35

47K

CID0

007:C4

pMVOL2
34

R16

014:C3

011:A1

pBRING
33

47K

CID1

011:A1

26

R14

014:C3

011:A2

pCR1

DSW1
CKSEL=0:PLL MODE

R390

CID2

pCR0

pTR0

R15

R5

R4

R3

R2

R1
nCDOPT

004:C1

*1

GND

014:C3

nFRPRST

25

GND

AT-49-5.000MHz

014:C3

005:D2

24

*2

VSS

2

MODE0

VSS

X1

TXD0/SO0/P40

X2

RXD0/SI0/P41

CKSEL

*SCK0/P42

63

50.0V

5.000MHz
27pF

47K

47K

47K

47K

C2

50.0V

1

+3.3V

62

330

X1

MODE1

TL34

R7

PWM1/P10

MODE2_VPP/MODE2

55

0.022uF

GND

27pF

GND

*RESET

TXD1/SO1/P43

60

RXD1/SI1/P44

59

TL33

25.0V

54

1K

C1

47K

R6

012:B4

nMDMRST

23

+3.3V

*SCK1/P45

16.0V

0.1uF

47K

P77/ANI7

53

C263

TI010/INTP010/P11
(pRBT)

P76/ANI6

SO2/INTP130/P30

nLANOPT

INTP011/P12

P75/ANI5

52

014:A2

144-pins

P74/ANI4

SI2/INTP131/P31

73

TO01/P13

*SCK2/INTP132/P32

74

P73/ANI3

TXD2/INTP133/P33

75

PWM0/P00

51

nOP

P72/ANI2

50

nESEN

012:B4

TI000/INTP000/P01

49

012:B1

76

INTP001/P02

P71/ANI1

46

nRSEN

TO00/P03

V850E/MA1

P70/ANI0

TI020/INTP020/P21

012:B1

77

CPU

45

+24LVL

011:C4

pPNLRST

83
P52/TO03
(nPDOR2)

INTP021/P22

TONER

P51/INTP031

*DMAAK1/PBD1

44

012:B3

nPWOFF

84

RXD2/INTP120/P34

79

013:A3

85

*DMAAK2/PBD2

*DMAAK0/PBD0

002:A3

USBENB
86

PCM5/SELFREF
P50/INTP030/TI030

(n3CRST)

INTP121/P35

1K

78

009:B2

PCM4/*REFRQ

*DMARQ0/INTP100/P04

INTP122/P36

80

GND
R78

3

32

002:A3

nHLDRQ
87

uPD703105GJ(mask)

TO02/P23

BATIN
THERM

PCM3/*HLDRQ

*DMARQ1/INTP101/P05

43

012:B1
011:A3

47K

002:A3

nHLDAK
88

*DMARQ2/INTP102/P06

ADTRG/INTP123/P37

31
R8

014:A4

SYSCLK

BLM11A121S

PCM2/*HLDAK

uPD703105GJ

*TC0/INTP110/P24

nPCHK1

50MHz

NF1
89

*DMARQ3/INTP103/P07

42

nCCHK1

012:B3

014:B4

LANRDY

91

*TC1/INTP111/P25

012:B1

pLANRST

92

(PWSVCNCL)

30

002:A4;003:A2

TL3

PCT6/*OE
PCT7/*BCYST

D15/PDL15

NMI/P20

TL1

002:D1;003:A1;004:A1;014:A3

nWE
93

(nG3RST)

D14/PDL14

*DMAAK3/PBD3

nRD
JW19

PCT5/*WE

D13/PDL13

uPD70F3107GJ-UEN(flash)
29

2

95

D11/PDL11

47K
+3.3V

002:D1

nWRU_DQMU002:A3;003:A1;014:B4

PCT1/*UCAS/*UWR/UDQM

47K

22
R80

nI_O2

nWRL_DQML 002:A3;003:A1;004:C1;014:B2

PCT0/*LCAS/*LWR/LDQM

D10/PDL10

*TC2/INTP112/P26

pADF1

002:D1;003:C3

D8/PDL8

*TC3/INTP113/P27

010:C4

21

002:D1

nFROMI
100

D7/PDL7

41

nPCHK2

nI_O1
101

PCS6/*CS6/*RAS6

40

nCCHK2

012:B4

002:D1;003:A3

102
PCS5/*CS5/*IORD

D6/PDL6

39

012:B4

002:D1;004:C2

nSRAM

PCS4/*CS4/*RAS4

D5/PDL5

R19

20

014:B3

nFROMC
103

D4/PDL4

R29

19

nFROML
104

D3/PDL3

PCM1/CLKOUT/BUSCLK
LANINT

002:D1;003:A1

105

IC1
014:B4

003:C1

JW16

PCS1/*CS1/*RAS1

2

4

CN98

nRESET

CN98

DBGTXD

CN98

DBGRXD

CN98

DBGCLK

4

3
4
5
005:B4

nBZHIGH

005:A3

nMNTON

005:B2

nMDMINT

6
CN98

BOOT GND

CN98

GND

7

002:D4

nPRTINT

PNLTXD

012:B3

002:D4

nSCNINT

PNLRXD

012:B3

002:D3

nPCINT

PNLCLK

012:B2

002:A3

nSYSINT

Model
DX-600 / 800

Edition 1.0

325

GND

Drawing Name
SC PC Board (1/14)

APR 2002

DX-600/800

A

B

C

D

+3.3V
for USB i/f

AT-49-8.9806MHz
50.0V

TC7SU04FU
2

R73

2

50V

C20

X5

1M

15.975MHz

LAL02VD2R2K
GND

C29

R71

50V

1

Not Mounted
GND

5pF

C21

75

50V

R65

C26

0.01uF

0

0

GND

47K

47K

25V

D3

001:D2;003:A1

nRD

001:D2;003:A1;004:A1;014:A3

A[23-1]

001:A1;003:A1;004:A1;014:B2

pMPOW

009:A3

PLSD

006:D1;007:C3

pSTAMP

010:C2

nHKOF

006:D4

pCMLD

006:B4;007:C3

R55

47K

D[14]

81

R56

47K

D[15]

80

A[1]

A[3]

A[4]

A[5]

A[6]

A[7]

A[8]

A[9]

A[10]

A[2]

A1

A2

A3

A4

A5

A6

A7

A8

A9

A10

A11

A12

A18

A19

A20

A21

A22

A23

*RD

*CS1

*CS3

*CS4

*CS5

*CS6

*CS7

FR

*SHB

*LEDON

TST0

TST1

CVDD(2.5V)
CVDD(2.5V)

106

R492

0

157

R493

0

181

R494

0

C32

50V

D14
0.01uF

D15

005:B2

nMODEM

PLLGND

*IO1

CPOUT1(PWM)

42
014:A4

nLANC

GND

15
*IO0

41

*IO2

16

R74

5.1K

17

R77

VCOIN1(PWM)

43
TL5
44
TL6

GND

*IO4

IC3

*IO5

DZAC000273

158

45
TL7

BOFST0/ID4

46
TL8

*IO6

BOFST1/ID5

*IO7

BOFST2/ID6

SCANENB

BOFST3/ID7

*WR

BOFST4/ID8

47
TL9
115
013:A3

SCANENB
36

003:A3;005:B2

nWR
107

001:D2;003:A1;004:C1;014:B2 nWRL_DQML

SHINE

*WRL/*DQML
108

001:D2;003:A1;014:B4nWRU_DQMU

*WRU/*DQMU

DATA8

76
001:D3

nHLDAK

DATA7

*HLDAK
77

001:A1;003:A1

SDCLK

001:D2

SYSCLK

DATA6

SDCLK

(System Handling and Image Navigation Engine)

103
SYSCLK

DATA5

35

3

003:A3;005:B2

nUBE

*UBE

DATA4

*LBE

DATA3

34
+3.3V

003:A3;005:B2

nLBE

DATA2
37
001:D3

nHLDRQ

004:C2

nDIRD

004:D2

nDIRV

208-pins

*HLDRQ
100

47K

001:A4

IC2

*SELIN

DIR1

*AUTFD

nSYSINT

*SYSINT

*STRBE

+3.3V

1K

R59

DBT1R

010:A2

IOBR1

010:A2

IOBR0

010:A2

PHBR

4

159

VOUT
2

IN
OUT
GND
1

TL13
160
TL14
161
TL15

GND

162
TL16

GND
DATA[8-1]

203

DATA[8]

202

DATA[7]

201

DATA[6]

200

DATA[5]

198

DATA[4]

197

DATA[3]

196

DATA[2]

195

DATA[1]

204
nSELIN
nAUTFD

013:A2

nSTRBE

013:A2

pPERR

013:A2

206
207
4
nACK
pBUSY

013:A1

nFAULT

013:A1

8
pSELECT

013:A1

pBUSOUT

013:A1

nPCINT

001:A4

9
119
155

*INIT
MMP3

MMP2

013:A2

nCTON

006:D3

MMP0

010:A3

MMP1

010:A4

13

12

nINIT
140

*CTON

R72

VSCD[7]

VSCD[0]

VSCD[1]

VSCD[2]

VSCD[3]

VSCD[4]

013:A2

5
6

MMP2
VSCD[5]

013:A2

205

GND

VSCD[6]

013:A1

3

*PCINT

MMP1/MMON

MMP0/*MMRDY
11

10

*HSYNC

*PMRY
163

30

*ZCRS

VDO/LDCTL
31

19

S/H

PMON

*PMCK
23

21

20

DRCK/HVBCNT
29

28

SSR

LDON

*PRTINT
24

118

*BPNT

VREQ
133

MCLK

*SCNINT
122

117

127

CKVG/DREQ1

MACK/*MOE
141

136

*VSDA
138

*VSEN

*VSCK

*SYNC
137

139

VGSD0/ID3
135

149

VGSD1/ID2

VGSD2/ID1
148

VGSD4/*DACK0

VGSD5/*DACK1

VGSD3/ID0
147

146

145

PHAR

142

IOAR1

DATIR

IOAR0
187

189

190

188

IOBR0

PHBR
191

192

IOBR1

DBTIR
193

194

VSS

CVSS

VSS

VSS
3

14

25

26

VSS
27

VSS
38

58

VSS

CVSS

VSS
78

VSS

VSS
79

87

95

VSS

VSS
102

VSS

VSS
110

120

CVSS

VSS
130

131

VSS

VSS
132

153

VSS
165

VSS

VSS

VSS

1

*WE

144

VGSD6/DREQ0

3

114

R58

1

BUSOUT

*SDCAS

TL12

LM1117MPX-2.5

3

47K

nWE

010:A2

*SDRAS
113

174

nSDCAS

112

182

nSDRAS

001:D2;003:A2

*FAULT

186

nRESOUT

R57

R40
001:D3

MA786

3

MA786
D3

D2

47K

GND

001:A1;003:A2

BUSY

SELECT

GND

001:A1;003:A2

*ACK

+3.3V

47K

=44.9ms

*RESET

*RESOUT

47K

td=0.69*6.5M*C12

129

39
0.1uF

C13

R3112Q29C

47K

*PWRDWN

25V

GND

PERR

32

R39

OUT

199

R38

DATA1

DIR0
101
116

7.5

C34

*IO3

IC6

+5V
C35

nFRIP

25V

004:C1

+2.5V

PLLVDD(2.5V)

1

82

16V

D[13]

D12

22uF

47K

CVDD(2.5V)

D11

0

C42

R54

D10

0

R491

2

83

0

R490

1

84

D[12]

R489

53

22uF

D[11]

47K

2
18

2

47K

R53

CVDD(2.5V)
PLLVDD(2.5V)

0.1uF

R52

PT6/ID15

D8
D9

16V

85

C41

88

D[10]

173

25V

89

D[9]

47K

2

172

C40

D[8]

47K

R51

PT5/ID14

0.1uF

47K

R50

PT4/ID13

25V

R49

D5
D6

0.1uF

90

25V

91

D[7]

TL35
171

C39

D[6]

47K

170

25V

47K

R48

PT3/ID12

0.1uF

R47

D4

C38

92

40

0.01uF

nSDRAM

NCU I/F : positive logic (pPLSD)

TL11

25V

93

D[5]

DAA I/F : negative logic (nPLSD)

169

0.1uF

D[4]

47K

D13

25V

001:D2;004:C2

168

0.1uF

47K

R46

PT2/ID11

D7

0.1uF

001:D2;003:A3

nFROMC

167
PT0/ID9
PT1/ID10

C37

R45

RS/RB/*CISCLK

D2

2

VCOIN0(SYNC)

PLLGND

SCNCLK

CPOUT0(SYNC)

XIN0

CLK48

XIN1

XOUT0

XOUT1

DP

DM

VDD3

VDD3

VDD3

VDD3

VDD3

VDD3

VDD3

VDD3

VDD3

VDD3

VDD3

96

VDD3

D[3]

VDD3

47K

VDD3

97

R44

VDD3

98

D[2]

VDD3

99

D[1]

47K

VDD3

D[0]

47K

R43

VDD3

47K

R42

VDD3

R41

D1

50V

001:D2

nSRAM

D[15-0]

D0

C11

001:D2;003:C3

48

49

50

51

54

55

56

59

A[11]
62

61

63

60

A[12]

A[18]

A[20]

A[21]

A[19]

64

65

66

67

A[22]

A[23]
69

68

75

111

74

109

73

72

TL10
134

71

126

125

124

R67

123

128

178

179

183

164

184

154

175

176

151

152

7

1

33

52

22

57

70

86

94

104

105

121

143

150

156

166

177

185

208

R66

25V
R64

C23

GND

C12

nFROMI

0.1uF

25V

0.1uF

4

001:D2

nI_O1

GND

20K

C22

0.1uF

2

008:D1

nI_O2

25V

180

C19

4

008:D1

FR

0.1uF

25V
0.1uF

VDD

008:D4

RS

25V
0.1uF

25V
0.1uF

C18

CD

L1

25V
0.1uF

C17

3

3pF

25.0V

GND

R482

0
R481

R480

0

0
R479

0

R478

0
R477

R476

0
C16

1

50.0V

1

C30

R75

47K
2

C31
0

1000pF

X4

1M

C36
R76

pLEDON

GND

001:A1;003:A1;004:A3;014:A2

5pF

+3.3V

R475

R511

47K

DM

47K

013:A4

50V

0

R512

DP

50.0V

1

C27

GND
013:A4

R70

1 3
NC

4.7K

27pF

1

C28

2

IC4

50V

R62

0.01uF

50.0V

4
0

R63

C25

7.9312MHz

5

R68

1M

X3

GND

1 3
NC

AT-49-15.975MHz

R510

TC7SU04FU

27pF
4.7K

27pF

C33

3pF
IC5

+3.3V

50.0V

2

R60

1

1

AT-49-7.9312MHz
C24

R61

8.9806MHz

50.0V

AT-49-48.000MHz(8pF)

2

0

1M

X2

27pF

C15

5
4

0.01uF

C14

GND

010:A3

MMP3

010:A4

pHSYNC

009:C3

nPMRY

009:C2

010:A2

DAT1R

010:A1

IOAR1

pS_H

009:C4

010:A1

IOAR0

pVDO

pPMON

009:C1

009:C3

pPMCK

009:C2

010:A1

PHAR

008:B4

nSYNC

pSSRA

011:A3

008:D3

nVSCK

pLDON

009:C3

008:D4

nVSEN

nPRTINT

001:A4

008:D3

nVSDA

008:B4

MACK

DRCK

4

011:A2

nBPNT

001:A4;012:B4

nVREQ

004:C1

JW20

008:D4

VSCD[7-0]

Model
DX-600 / 800

Edition 1.0

326

MCLK

004:C1

nSCNINT

001:A4

Drawing Name
SC PC Board (2/14)

APR 2002

DX-600/800

A

D

D[15-0]
A[23-1]
+3.3V

nRD

JW46

+3.3V
0

C47

1

37

25V

001:D3;004:A2;014:B2

nRESET

0.1uF

+3.3V

13

0

0

47
+3.3V

nSDRAM

001:D2;002:A4

nWE

001:A1;002:A4

nSDCAS

001:A1;002:A4

nSDRAS

15
19 LDQM 0.0
16 *CS

*RAS

DQ3

DQ2

64Mbit

128Mbit

A[1]

23

A[2]

24

A[3]

25

A[4]

26

A[5]

29

A[6]

30

A[7]

31

A[8]

32

A[9]

33

BANK1

A22

A23

A[10]

34

BANK0

A21

A22

A[11]

22

A[12]

64Mbit

128Mbit

JP2

35

A[23]

*1

JP2

A[22]

*1

JP3

JP3

*1

JP4

*1

JP5

JP4
A[21]

JP5

0

21

#

20

A1
A2

DQ5
DQ6
DQ7
DQ8
DQ9
DQ10

A4

DQ11

A5

DQ12

A6

DQ13

A7

DQ14

A8

DQ15

A9

R497

2
4

RA1

5

RA1

7

RA1

8

RA1

10

RA2

11

RA2

13

RA2

42

RA2

44

RA3

45

RA3

47

RA3

48

RA3

50

RA4

51

RA4

53

RA4
RA4

4

5

3

6

2

7

1

8

4

5

3

6

2

7

1

8

4

5

3

6

2

7

1

8

4

5

3

6

2

7

1

8

D[0]
33
33

#

D[1]
D[2]

33

D[3]

33

D[4]

33

D[5]

WORK,PAGE MEMORY
GND

SDRAM 64M

A10/AP

25

A[2]

24

A[3]

23

A[4]

22

A[5]

21

A[6]

20

A[7]

19

A[8]

18

A[9]

8

33

D[7]

A[10]

7

33

D[8]

A[11]

6

33

D[9]

A[12]

5

33

D[10]

A[13]

4

33

D[11]

A[14]

3

33

D[12]

A[15]

2

33

D[13]

A[16]

1

33

D[14]

A[17]

48

33

D[15]

A[18]

17

A[19]

16

A[20]

9

33

#

A[21]

JP6

10
0

52

NC
*BYTE

IC9
90.0ns

#

1

*CE
*OE
*WE

RY/BY

*RESET
NC

DQ0

A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7

DQ1
DQ2
DQ3
DQ4
DQ5
DQ6
DQ7
DQ8
DQ9

A8

DQ10

A9

DQ11

A10

DQ12

A11

DQ13

A12

DQ14

A13

DQ15

A14

15

TL17

29

D[0]

31

D[1]

33

D[2]

35

D[3]

38

D[4]

40

D[5]

42

D[6]

44

D[7]

PROGRAM
FROM 16M

30

D[8]

32

D[9]

34

D[10]

36

D[11]

39

D[12]

41

D[13]

43

D[14]

45

D[15]

2

A15
A16
A17
A18
A19
NC
GND GND
46

VSS
FROM
JP6
JP25

0

:Mounted
:Not Mounted

0

D[6]

VSSQ 46

BA0

14

A[1]

12

A11
BA1

JP25

33

6

0
0

DQ4

A3

28

*1:table

A0

41

2

DQ0
DQ1

40 NC

1K

0.1uF

17 *WE
18 *CAS
36

SDRAM

49

UDQM

R82

0.1uF
C46
25V

VDDQ 43

CKE

12

25V

54

001:D2;002:D1

C45

9

25.0V

39

3

IC7

0.022uF

SDCKE

001:D2;002:A3;014:B4nWRU_DQMU

28
11

C48

37

CLK

HY57V641620HGT-P

001:A1

38

SDCLK

R496

VDD
001:A1;002:A3

26

nFROMP

27

14

1

001:D2

VCC

25V

R495

0.1uF

001:D2;002:A3;004:C1;014:B2 nWRL_DQML

C50

001:A1;002:D2;004:A1;014:B2
001:D2;002:D1;004:A1;014:A3

C

MBM29LV160B-90PFTN-SFKS

001:A1;002:A2;004:A3;014:A2

B

16Mbit
MBM29LV160B

32Mbit
MBM29DL32XBD

Not Mounted

Mounted

27

GND

GND
004:C4;005:B1;014:B4

DD[15-0]

004:C1;005:B1;014:A4;014:C1

AD[15-1]

+3.3V

JW47

37

#

3

41
17

nWR

002:A3;005:B2

nUBE

002:A3;005:B2

nLBE

40
39

*CE
*OE
*WE

4

4

A[3]

3

A[4]

2

A[5]

1

A[6]

44

A[7]

43

A[8]

42

A[9]

27

A[10]

26

A[11]

25

A[12]

24

A[13]

21

A[14]

20

A[15]

19

A[16]

18

nRDD

28
11
12

IC8

R83

15.0ns

*BHE
I/O1

*BLE

I/O3

A0
A1

I/O4

CY7C1021V33-15ZCT

A[2]

5

004:C2;005:B2;014:B4

26

VCC

VCC

I/O2
A[1]

nFROMI

1K

#
25.0V

002:A3;005:B2

nSRAM

001:D2;002:D1

A2
A3
A4
A5
A6

I/O5
I/O6
I/O7
I/O8
I/O9
I/O10

A7

I/O11

A8

I/O12

A9

I/O13

A10

I/O14

A11

I/O15

A12

I/O16

A13
A14
A15

N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
VSS
12

7

D[0]

8

D[1]

9

D[2]

10

D[3]

13

D[4]

14

D[5]

15

D[6]

16

D[7]

29

D[8]

30

D[9]

31

D[10]

32

D[11]

35

D[12]

36

D[13]

37

D[14]

38

D[15]

0.022uF

001:D2;002:D1

6

47
+3.3V

0.1uF

33

11

for CODEC
SRAM 1M
GND

22

14
0

AD[1]

25

AD[2]

24

AD[3]

23

AD[4]

22

AD[5]

21

AD[6]

20

AD[7]

19

AD[8]

18

AD[9]

8

AD[10]

7

AD[11]

6

AD[12]

5

AD[13]

4

AD[14]

3

AD[15]

2

A[16]

1

A[17]

48

A[18]

17

A[19]

16

A[20]

9

23
28

JP26

A[21]

#

JP7

10
0

VCC
NC
*BYTE

IC10
90.0ns

*OE
*WE

RY/BY

*RESET
NC

DQ0

A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7

DQ1
DQ2
DQ3
DQ4
DQ5
DQ6
DQ7
DQ8
DQ9

A8

DQ10

A9

DQ11

A10

DQ12

A11

DQ13

A12

DQ14

A13

DQ15

A14

15

TL18

29

DD[0]

31

DD[1]

33

DD[2]

35

DD[3]

38

DD[4]

40

DD[5]

42

DD[6]

44

DD[7]

30

DD[8]

32

DD[9]

34

DD[10]

36

DD[11]

39

DD[12]

41

DD[13]

43

DD[14]

45

DD[15]

IMAGE
FROM 16M

A15
A16

4

A17
A18
A19
NC
GND GND
46

# Not mounted
FROM
JP7
JP26

GND

16Mbit
MBM29LV160B

32Mbit
MBM29DL32XBD

Not Mounted

Mounted

27

GND

Model
DX-600 / 800

Edition 1.0

3

*CE

VSS
34

25V

25V

0.1uF
C44
25V

C49

#

C43

13

C51

#

MBM29LV160B-90PFTN-SFKS

JW28

0.1uF

+3.3V

327

Drawing Name
SC PC Board (3/14)

APR 2002

DX-600/800

A

001:A1;002:D2;003:A1;014:B2

A[23-1]

001:D2;002:D1;003:A1;014:A3

nRD

B

C

D

AV[2-1]

1

008:D4

IC16
*G

A[1]
AD[15-1]

2

003:C3;005:B1;014:A4;014:C1
A[2]

1

1

2

A[2]

4

A[3]

6

A[4]

8

+3.3V

Y1

A2

Y2

A3

Y3

A4

Y4

4

IC14
*G

A[1]

A1

6

A1

Y1

A2

Y2

A3

Y3

A4

Y4

18

AD[1]

16

AD[2]

18

AV[1]

16

AV[2]

14

8

nRDV

008:D4;014:C3

nWLV

008:D4;014:C3

12

001:D2;002:A3;003:A1;014:B2 nWRL_DQML

TC74VHCT244FT
14

AD[3]

12

AD[4]

To:
19

1

FRIP5

IC16
*G

11

20
IC14

002:A2

nFRIP

001:D3

nFRPRST

002:D4

MCLK

IC14

002:D4

nVREQ

A[5]

11

A[6]

13

A[7]

15

A[8]

17

9

AD[5]

7

AD[6]

Y3
Y4

5

AD[7]

3

AD[8]

25V

1

Y2

A[11]

6

A[12]

8

A3

Y3

A4

Y4

AD[10]

16
14

AD[11]

12

AD[12]

TC74VHC244FT

25V

A2

4

5
VCC
GND

IC42
TC7S04FU

3

2

A[17]

4

A[18]

6

A[19]

8

20

19

TC7S04FU

VCC
GND

GND

IC15

A[13]

11
A1

A[14]

13

A[15]

15

A2
GND

9

AD[13]

7

AD[14]

5

AD[15]

A3

Y3
Y4

Y2

A3

Y3

18

AV[16]

16

AV[17]

14

AV[18]

12

AV[19]

nFROMCV

014:C3

pRESET

012:B2

Y4

To:

TC74VHCT244FT

FROM CARD

19

IC17
*G

GND

11

A[21]

13

A[22]

15

nFROMC

A1

Y1

A2

Y2

A3

Y3

A4

Y4

9

AV[20]

7

AV[21]

5

AV[22]

2

3

TC74VHCT244FT

Y2

A4

Y1

A2

17
001:D2;002:D1

Y1

17

A1

IC17

10

*G

3

014:C1

TC74VHCT244FT

A[20]

IC11

AV[22-15]
IC17

A4

5
VCC
GND

A[16]

+5V

0.1uF

Y1

25.0V

A1

008:D4

*G

10

C58

GND

AD[9]

18

0.1uF

2

008:B4

nVREQV

3

TC74VHCT244FT

GND

+3.3V
A[9]

+3.3V

0.1uF

IC16

LAN CONTROLLER

IC15
*G

10

Y4

20
VCC
GND

FROM CARD
1

TC74VHC244FT

A[10]

C52

0.1uF

MODEM

20

C277

25V

IMAGE FROM

C56

0.1uF

To:

IC15

A4

TC74VHCT244FT

TC74VHC244FT

GND

008:B4

MCLKV

+5V

+3.3V

VCCL

008:D4

nFRPRSTV
5

Y2

A3
A4

nFRIPV
7

Y2
Y3

17

Y1

A2
GND

Y1

A2
A3

15

A1

2

A1

*G

10

9

13

19

TC74VHC244FT

25V

GND

C57

VCCL

C55

0.1uF

25V

TC74VHC244FT

3
nRDD

GND

003:C3;005:B2;014:B4

TC74VHC244FT

GND
2
001:D3;003:C1;014:B2

4

nRESET

+3.3V
1

IC11

+5V
R498

R499

TC7S04FU

0

NC
002:A3

nDIRV

002:A3

nDIRD

2

C59

4

1

0.1uF

IC42

0

25V

C61

1

25V

0.1uF

24

TC7S04FU
VCCA

GND

NC

22
001:A1;002:A2;003:A1;014:A2

D[15-0]

VCCB
23
NC

*G

D[15-0]

GND

IC18

2

To:
*DIR(BA)

FRIP5
FROM CARD

TC74LVXC3245FS
D[0]

4

19
*G

RA13

To:
1

D[1]

MODEM
LAN CONTROLLER

1

8

RA5

3

D[1]
D[2]

RA5

D[3]
+3.3V

RA5

VCCL

C53

0.1uF

25V

D[4]

GND

RA6

D[5]

20
IC12
TC74VHC245FT

RA6

D[6]

RA6

D[7]

3

6

4

5

1

8

2

7

3

6

10

9

8

7

5

4

3

4

5

A1

33
33
33
33
33
33

16
15
14
13
12
11

33

1

3
B2

A2

B3

A3

B4

A4

B5

A5
A6

B6
B7

A7

B8

A8

4
5
6
7
8
9

RA9
RA9
RA10
RA10
RA10

3
4

5

1

8

2

7

3

6

DD[1]

4

5

RA10

33
33
33

RA14

D[5]

DD[2]

D[6]

DD[3]

D[7]

RA14
RA14

10

DD[5]

33

3

6

2

7

1

8

4

5

3
2
1

6
7
8

RA14

DD[4]

33

9

8

7

5

4

3

20

4
33

B2

A3

B3

19
18

6
B4

A4

33

7

33

17
A5

B5

A6

B6

A7

B7

16

8

33
33

A2
5

33

15

9
10

14
A8

33

11

B8

3

4

5

7

8

9

6

6

1

1

19
*G

+3.3V

C60

12

D[8]

1

6

D[9]
RA7

D[10]

RA7

D[11]

RA7

D[12]

RA8

D[13]

RA8

D[14]

RA8

D[15]

RA8
9

8

7

5

8

2

7

3

6

4

5

RA18

DV[2]
DV[3]

33

DV[4]

33

DV[6]

33

DV[7]

33

+5V

3

4

5

7

8

9

10

1

RA27

6

0

4

3

2

B1

33

2

7

3

6

GND

25V

4

5

1

8

2

7

3

6

4

5

33
33
33
33
33
33

16
15
14
13
12
11

B2

A2
A3

B4

A4
A5
A6

B7

A7

B8

A8

TC74VHC245FT

4
5
6
7
8
9

RA11
RA11
RA11
RA12
RA12
RA12
RA12

DD[8]

8

D[8]

1

33

2

7

3

6

4

5

1

8

2

7

3

6

4

5

33
33
33
33
33
33

DD[9]

D[9]

DD[10]

D[10]

DD[11]

D[11]

DD[12]

D[12]

DD[13]

D[13]

DD[14]

D[14]

DD[15]

D[15]

RA15
RA15
RA15
RA16
RA16
RA16

33

RA16
2

3

4

5

7

8

9

10

10

9

8

7

5

4

3

3

8

RA15

33

2

7

3

6

4

5

1

8

2

7

3

6

4

5

21

33
33
33
33
33
33
33

20
A2

B2

A3

B3

A4

B4

5

19

6

18
17

7

10K
6

1

1

6

16
A6

B6

9

15
A7

B7

10

14
A8

B8
GND

2

12

8

2

7

RA19
RA19

3

6

RA19
RA20
RA20
RA20
RA20

DV[8]
33

4

5

1

8

2

7

3

6

4

5

DV[9]
33

DV[10]

33

DV[11]

33

DV[12]

33

RA24

RA26

GND

DV[14]

33

DV[15]

33
2

3

4

5

7

8

9

10

13

10K
GND
6

1

1

6

RA28

003:C3;005:B1;014:B4

DV[15-0]

GND

008:D4;014:C1

GND

Model
DX-600 / 800

328

4

DV[13]

33

10K

DD[15-0]

GND

B5

A5
8

1
RA19

B1

A1
4

11

RA22

GND
23

NC

TC74LVXC3245FS
1
RA11

B3

B6

VCCB

IC19
*G

2

3

B5

0.1uF

*DIR(BA)

A1

17
33

24

VCCA

1

10K

Edition 1.0

3

DV[5]

33

2

C62

1

22

GND

2

18

8

RA7

TC74VHC245FT

10

5

1

33

13

25V

0.1uF

RA23

IC13

20
IC13

4

DV[1]
33

R501

*DIR[BA]
25V

RA18

6

GND

+3.3V

1

GND

0.1uF

RA18

0

GND

C54

RA18

7

3

10K

RA25

10

GND

4

RA17

2

10K

RA21

GND

RA17

10K
2

10K

10

RA17

DD[7]

33

GND

GND

33

GND

2

R500

VCCL

DV[0]

8

RA17

B1

A1

DD[6]

33

TC74VHC245FT

2

RA13

D[4]

7
6

RA13

D[3]

33

2
RA9

DD[0]

8

RA9

17

7

RA6

10

B1

33

2
RA5

2

RA13

D[2]

IC12
18

33

1

IMAGE FROM

*DIR[BA]

D[0]

21

3

5

Drawing Name
SC PC Board (4/14)

APR 2002

DX-600/800

B

C

D

R159

for Intel Endian mode:
Host UB ----- Modem LB
Host LB ----- Modem UB

GND

3.3K

0

0
R487

0
R486

0
R485

R484

53
REGOUT2

AD[6]

93

DPA06/A06

MINTEST

46

AD[7]

94

DPA07/A07

INTEST

48

AD[8]

95

DPA08/A08

MODE0

49

AD[9]

96

DPA09/A09

MODE1

50

AD[10]

98

DPA10/A10

*RESET

41

AD[11]

100

DPA11/A11

IC22
MN195006

DD[8]

2

DPD00/D00

EYECLK

57

DD[9]

4

DPD01/D01

EYEDAT

58

DD[10]

6

DPD02/D02
59

ASPCLK

60

ATXD

63

DD[14]

12

DPD06/D06

ARXD

61

DD[15]

13

DPD07/D07

BBITCLK

65

DD[0]

14

DPD08/D08

BSPCLK

66

DD[1]

16

DPD09/D09

BTXD

69

DD[2]

18

DPD10/D10

BRXD

67

IC21
*G3

DD[3]

19

DPD11/D11

DD[4]

20

DPD12/D12

GPIO0/A12

76

A[0]

DD[5]

22

DPD13/D13

GPIO1/A13

DD[6]

24

DPD14/D14

GPIO2/A14

DD[7]

25

DPD15/D15

GPIO3/A15

81

GPIO4/A16

82

GPIO5/A17

83

14
MAGND

4

Z

BLM11A601S
R172

VEE

-5VA

007:D1

C92

50V

TP1

nMDMRST 001:D3

1000pF

TP2

GND

EYE PATTERN MONITOR CHECK LAND
ABITCLK

006:D2;007:D2

ASPCLK

006:D2;007:D2

ATXD

006:D2;007:D2

ARXD

006:D2;007:D2

+3.3V

TL21

R175

47K

77

R176

47K

79

R177

47K

*1

R178

47K

*1

R179

47K

3
nCOMRST 006:D2;007:D2
ID_0
ID_1

AFE_CLASS0
AFE_CLASS1

VSS

VSS

DAA I/F

NCU I/F

JP15

5

11

VSS

VSS

VSS

17

23

VSS

*1:table

#

#

JP16
R173
R178
R174

25V

R158
2

6.8K

0.022uF

2

R160
3

33K
6

R161
47K

5

+5V
0V

A
+

7

R163

R164
1K

10K
1

+5V
MAGND

0V
-5V
A class AMP

to Speaker
B2B-PH-K-M
C91
1

BA4558F

10k
Q3

Q5
2SD1992A
340
1

IC20
-

3
DTC114EKA

+5V

3

1

16V
2
47uF

Q4
2SB1321A
340
2

CN9

pSPKOT

CN9

GND

4

25V

25V

:Mounted
:Not Mounted
47K

#

0.1uF

220K

MAGND

1K

C93

C79

2200pF

C77

50V

R156

Gi:30min
nBZHIGH

R180

R162

0V

0.047uF

001:A4

AFECLK

R179
3V
-3V

10K

006:D2

GND

C78

4

*1

25V

MAGND

R155

2

DAACLK

24.576MHz

GND

0.1uF

pBZCLK

*1
0
0

GND

7 TC74HC4053AF

012:B4

50.0V
5pF
GND

JP15

47K

# JP16

R165

Z1

C95

NF2

*1 *1

15

Y

24.576MHz

47K

X

2

9

52

REGOUT1

21

42

62

45

ABITCLK

Z0

C76

VDD2

VDD2

VDD2

VDD2

VDD2

86

VDD2

VDD3

97

3

15

VDD3

VDD3

30

44

VDD3

VDDREG

54

55

68

VDD3

VDDREG

AVDD

51

SCANNT

DPD05/D05

C

3

LON

DPA05/A05

DPD04/D04

Y1

5

DPA04/A04

91

DPD03/D03

Y0

9

001:D3 pMVOL2

90

AD[5]

8

B

1

CNT

AD[4]

7

X1

2

DPA03/A03

37

VSS

13

43

10

X0

10

CLKOUT

40

6.8K

MAGND
001:D3 pMVOL1

DPA02/A02

88

VSS

2.2K

12

87

AD[3]

VSS

2.2K

R154

AD[2]

100K

R151

38

50.0V
8pF

TL20

R157

R148

39

CXOUT

AVSS

11

001:D3 pMVOL0

CXIN

DPA01/A01

DD[13]

47K
R152
001:A4 nMNTON

3

DPA00

85

DD[12]

MAGND

6

84

AD[1]

DD[11]

for Intel Endian mode:
D-BUS Up Side Down

+3.3V
MAGND

MAGND

28

47

C75

50V

1
1uF
2

R145

R142

GA

-3V

TDO

56

0V

100K

16
VCC IC21
GND TC74HC4053AF
8

C94

*UB

VSS

470K

AT-49-24.576MHz (7pF)

47K

71

35

R146

25V

2

3V

0.1uF

R150

47K

R171

TDI

VSS

R153

MA152A

+3.3VA

+5VA

1

MAGND

47K

2SC2412K
Q1
560
1

2

2SC2412K
Q2
560
1

C73

3

100K

MAGND

D4

3

R170

*LB

64

BA4558F

47K

47K

31
29

70

IC20

TCK

47K

R169

72

VSS

1

A

*DPWR/*WR

73

R168

TL19

X6
1

nLBE

33

47K

002:A3;003:A3

TMS

47K

nUBE

36

*DPRD/*RD

74

R174

002:A3;003:A3

27

PLLON

*DPCS/*CS

47K

0V

DBGMOD
75

47K

R173

nWR

+3.3V
R167

R166

002:A3;003:A3

3

R144

+5VA

+

+5V

-5V

6800pF

3

nRDD

6.8K

1K

150K

2200pF

C65

2

R143

003:C3;004:C2;014:B4

R149

10V
1uF

100K
50V

0

MAGND

50V

R140

C70

C68
R513

nMODEM

26, 29, 31, 33-pins:
for Emulation board JTAG I/F

26

T3IRQ/*IRQ

VSS

330K

-1.5V

nMDMINT

1

*DBGREQ

1

80

0V

GND

89

50V
100pF

001:A4
002:A2

25V
0.1uF
25V
0.1uF
25V
0.1uF
25V
0.1uF
GND

34

0.1uF

DD[15-0]

16V
2

C87

C90

MAGND

R147

2

003:C3;004:C4;014:B4

47uF
C86
1

C89

99

1.5V

AOUT

AD[15-1]

+1.8V

C88

VDD3

IC20
BA4558F

4
C74

C80
003:C3;004:C1;014:A4;014:C1

MAGND

C71

006:D3;007:C3

C82
C81

A

25V
MAGND

MAGND

C83

-5VA

0.1uF

C72

C69

0.1uF

25V

16V
2
C67
1

0.1uF

C66

47uF

25V

1
2 47uF

C64

16V

8
V+

+5VA

V-

-5VA

R141

R139

+5VA

25V

10

10

1

16V
1
25V
0.1uF
25V
0.1uF
25V
0.1uF
25V
0.1uF
25V
0.1uF

78

47uF
C85
2
C84

92

-5V

VDD3

+5V

R483

0

+3.3V

32

A

2

-5V
GND

10k
1

#

Not Mounted

MAGND

Model
DX-600 / 800

Edition 1.0

329

Drawing Name
SC PC Board (5/14)

APR 2002

DX-600/800

B

C

#

33K

C107

250.0V
1800pF

#

50.0V
1000pF
250V
0.022uF

0

R217

47

SCLK

3

R218

47

VD

4

DCT

2

13

VA

IGND#

3

12

GND#

11

C1A

SDO

5

R219

47

10

M1

SDI

6

R220

47

FC/*RGDT

7

9

AOUT *RESET

R221

1K

VREG2

6

VREG

QB

7

QE

8

D10
5.6
2
1
MMSZ5232B
D11

50V
0.1uF
50V
0.1uF
C111

0.1W
10

D12

RNG2

R211

DE0807B151K-KH
250V
# C121
150pF
250V
# C120
150pF

#

8

4
IGND

1

C125

GND

005:D3;007:D2

ARXD

005:D3;007:D2

ATXD

005:D3;007:D2

2

nCOMRST 005:D3;007:D2

50V

AOUT

005:A2;007:C3

nCTON

002:D4

2200pF

JP17
0

Line side

005:D3;007:D2

ABITCLK

DSP side

C272

#

005:D2

ASPCLK

50.0V
2200pF

3

DAACLK

Si3021

C126

REF

10

DE0807B151K-KH
C118
250V
150pF
C119
250V
150pF
#

0.1W
10

10.0V

11

R207

1uF

5

2

4

3 MA157A

C1B

1
D13
5.6
2
1
MMSZ5232B C123

REXT

REXT2 RNG1

50V
10pF

13
12

Si3015-KS

C109

R199

C101

JP28

2

C122

R200

M0 *FSYNC

2

10K

50V
0.68uF
215

QE2

50V
0.01uF
50V
0.01uF

RX

1

*RGDT/FSD

C114

FILT

14

*OFHK MCLK

14

C113

15

IC24
16
15

+3.3V

50.0V
1000pF
50.0V
1000pF

78.7
402
1%

R197

R196

50V
1800pF
50V
1800pF
C100

K
PTZ43A
150
A

R194

#

GND
#

C98

C271

16V
0.22uF
C110

50V
0.1uF

FILT2

002:D2;007:C3

+3.3V

1

C270

C102

16

PLSD
(nPLSD)

+5V

1

GND

2.2K

IC23

#

C269

100

C103
Q7
2SC3588

R503

150pF

3 MA157A

0.1W

R195

50V
1uF

100
R189

#

C108

R198

50V
1000pF
C267

2
R184

250mW
1%
250mW
1%
4.87K
250mW
1%
4.87K

4.87K

1

2

3

MA152A
3
D31
1

Q9
2SD2136-R

3
R187

3

100

1

1

MA157A

2

Not Mounted

DE0807B151K-KH
C116
250V
150pF
250V
# C117

25.0V

5

R188

1

+3.3V

0.1uF

CN18

C268

N.C.
(No Pin)

4

R206

9

D9

CN18

DE1007E222M-KH
C273
2200pF
DE1007E222M-KH
C274
2200pF

N.C.
(No Pin)

Not Mounted

2.2K

2

D24 3

K
D8

1SR154-400
C99
50V
0.01uF
R183
120K

A

A

1SR154-400

K

D6
C97

R182

#

0.1W
10

DSSA-P3100SB
3

100K

1
A
D7

1SR154-400

K

K

1SR154-400

R79

#

250mW
1%
4.87K
R185
250mW
1%
4.87K
R186
250mW
1%
4.87K

CN18

0.022uF

Q6
2SA1400K

CN18

L1(R)

250V

TL36

N.C.
(No Pin)

C266

# VA1

2

1000pF

2

CN18

#

1

10M

L2(T)

#

A

R181

to MJR PCB

C96

D5

10M

1000pF

4

2

Q8
2SC3588

R205

B8(11-C1)B-PH-K-S

15K

#

R204

#

R203

0

33K

R193

250V
1000pF

R505

R192

C106

2 22uF
1
C128
50V
1000pF

#

Not mounted the parts of this circuit
as for S3000i.

10.0V
1uF
16V

#

1

15K

C127

Not Mounted

R202

47K

250V
1000pF

R504

C105

DAA Circuit

50V

250.0V
1800pF

1000pF

#

C104

C265

33K

250V

33K

R191

D

1000pF

R190

C112

A

3
+24V

+5VP

CN18

GND

CN18

6

+3.3V

+5VP
7

*4:Mounted as for S3000i.

8

10K

CN18

R208

+24V

3

GND

R209

2

pCTON

DTC114EKA

1000pF

pCTON

CN18

10

Q10
10k

GND

1

Gi:30min

*4

+3.3V

R213

GND

007:C3

pHKOF

*4
*5

50V

2.2K
GND

3
2

10k
DTC114EKA

11

22K

CN18

R210

pHKOF

R201

4

22K

Q11
10k
1

Gi:30min

*5

002:D2

nWAKUP

012:B3

4

GND

*4
*5

nHKOF
+5VP

10K

007:C3

3
10k

R215

002:D2;007:C3

1000pF

50.0V

2.2K

*4
pCMLD

C124

C264

100

10K

R502

R212

9

50V

CN18

C115

pCMLD

1000pF

GND

3

GND
2

2SC2412K
Q12
560
1

* :Mounted when having the function,
the hook-off detection of the handset
in the saving energy mode.

R214
22K

GND

Model
DX-600 / 800

Edition 1.0

330

Drawing Name
SC PC Board (6/14)

APR 2002

DX-600/800

A

B

C

D

16.0V

+3.3VA

7

B
+

C140

10V

V11

6

R242

3.3

5

4.3K

31

7

C
+

27

IC26
LMV324MT

28

R249
22K
13

R248

MAGND

22K
12

MAGND

-

30

14

C
+

29

10 2

AVDD

1 11 12 13 14 22 23 24
NC

NC

5

MCM

AUXIN-

XTALOUT
XTALIN/MCLK

IN+
IN-

SCLK

IC27

FS
DIN

STLC7550TQF7

DOUT

+

R245

+5VA

MAGND

C138

25.0V

0.1uF
B
C139

8
V+
V-

2%
10K

VCM

VCM

0.1uF
-5VA

MAGND

20

pHSDT

CN8

pEAKD

CN8

pPLSD

CN8

pTCKD

CN8

pCMLD

CN8

2
4

R224

5
C130

7

100

50.0V

6

100

50.0V

21

6

0

R257

0

45

R258

0

15

2012

CN17

pATELDC

CN17

pBTEL

CN17

pBTELDC

CN17

pBRING

CN17

2

R234

1K

3

R235

1K

4

R236

1K

5

R237

1K

R238

1K

R239

1K

6

005:D3;006:D2

ASPCLK

005:D3;006:D2

ATXD

005:D3;006:D2

ARXD

005:D3;006:D2

16
42
18
43

TL23

41

GND

R259

17

NC

37 38 46 47 48

#

nCOMRST 005:D3;006:D2

1K

2

GND

#

Not Mounted

# JP18

AOUT

005:A2;006:D3

GND

pCTON

006:B4

pHKOF

006:B4

PLSD

002:D2;006:D1

pCMLD

002:D2;006:B4

3

pATEL

008:D2

pATELDC

008:D3

pBTEL

008:D3

pBTELDC

008:D3

pBRING

001:D3

nLTCK

001:D1

nREVCK

001:D1

+3.3V

9

50.0V

0.22uF

C133

0.1uF

#

R232
nLTCK

C142
R233

CN17

+5V

CN17

#:Not Mounted

GND

CN17

560K
1K

C143
1

9

50.0V

1000pF
R240

8
+5V

GND

560K

7

2012
nREVCK

11

CN17

MAGND

50.0V

4

1000pF
GND

NCU Interface Circuit
Mounted the parts of this circuit,only S3000i.
(excluded C155,C156,R252,R253)

GND

Model
DX-600 / 800

Edition 1.0

ABITCLK

52806-0920

25.0V

CN8

0.22uF

50.0V
AGND

C132

#

3
25.0V

CN8

33

R256

44

005:D2

to NCU PCB (for Japan)

pATEL

1

C129

4

GND

AGND2 AGND1 DGND

4

AFECLK

(pPLSD)
R225

C131

+5VP
CN8

NC

0

1000pF

+24V

+5VP

*PWRDWN

R255

8

GND

CN8

*RESET

VCM

3

13

1000pF

+24V

VREFN

TL22

0.1uF

CN8

TSTD1

VREFP

9

JP24

C136

3

pHKOF

TS
M/*S

7
8

0

0
CN8

OUT-

MAGND

AOUT

pCTON

32

HC0

25 26 34 35 36

IC25
BA4558F

4

25.0V

0.01uF

50.0V

3

10K

C

HC1

OUT+

0.1uF

IC26
LMV324MT

2%

40

22.0uF
C153
16.0V
1
2
C154
25.0V

1

10V

0.22uF

39

0.1uF

C141

C147

2%
10K

C150
16.0V
2
1
22.0uF

+

R231

3

2%

19

22.0uF
C151
16.0V
2
1
C152
25.0V

IC25
BA4558F

2

2%

10K
10K

0.1uF
C149
25.0V

B

R244

2%

-

1

2%
560

2

10K

R223

-

R251

R246

TX

2

C144
2%
62K

25.0V

0

1

DVDD

AUXIN+

IC26
LMV324MT

R250

C145

R226

2%
10K
25.0V
560pF

560pF

R241
50.0V
390pF
R228

25.0V

0.1uF
C158
16.0V
1
2
22.0uF

VCM

C134

C157

Mounted

MAGND
-

VCM

R229

IC26
LMV324MT

27K
47K

0.22uF

IC25
BA4558F

VCM

C

25.0V

0.1uF
C156
16.0V
2
1
22.0uF

47K

-

R253
C155

4
V+

R243

1

10K

+3.3VA

47K

5

R227

50.0V
1000pF

3.3

R261

10K

# C146

+3.3V
R252

R260

CN8

10K

MAGND

D14

HYBSR

6

R222

2

R230
RX
10

+3.3VA

IC26
LMV324MT

50.0V

50.0V
2200pF

3 MA157A

C135

+

R247

1

1

C

10

D15

0.1uF

1000pF

C137

C159

12

8

0.1uF
C148
25.0V

CN8

-

100K

HYSIG

+3.3V

9

1.8

52806-1320

R254

2

to NCU PCB

3 MA157A

+3.3VA

331

Drawing Name
SC PC Board (7/14)

APR 2002

DX-600/800

A

B

C

D

CCD I/F
B8B-PH-K-M

LMD[7]

FETD2

AGUR2

*VSDA

23

LMA[12]

2

109

LMA[13]

26

108

LMA[14]

1

A8

I/O4

A9

I/O5

A10

I/O6

A11

I/O7

A12

I/O8

A13
A14

GND

4
116

R291

100K

R297

100K

10K

10K

10K

10K

10K

10K

10K

25V

10K
0.1uF

LMD[0]

LMD[3]
LMD[4]

17

LMD[5]

18

LMD[6]

19

LMD[7]

2

14
#:Not Mounted
GND

R292

100K

R293

100K

121
9

R298

100K

R299

100K

R300

100K

7
6
R294

100K

R295

100K

119

007:C3

pATELDC

007:C3

pBTEL

007:C4

pBTELDC

007:C4

pBATCHK

012:B1

+5V
R303

8

5

pATEL

R301

100K

R302

100K

100K

pADF2

012:B4

PNLDIR

012:B2

nVSDA

002:A4

nVSCK

002:A4

nVSEN

002:A4

3

GND

MCLKV

VSCD[7]

VSCD[6]

VSCD[5]

VSCD[4]

VSCD[3]

DV[7]

DV[6]

DV[5]

DV[4]

DV[3]

DV[2]

DV[1]

DV[0]

VSCD[0]
004:D1

AV[2]

nSYNC

VSCD[2]

JW52
VSCD[1]

+5V

2

nFRPRSTV

R289
1K

C177

50V

004:D1

nVREQV

004:D1

VSCD[7-0]

002:A4

DV[15-0]

004:D4;014:C1

AV[2-1]

004:D1

pLEDON

002:D1

nFRIPV

004:D1

nWLV

004:D1;014:C3

nRDV

004:D1;014:C3

4

GND

MGND

#:Not Mounted

Model
DX-600 / 800

Edition 1.0

#

100K

123

118

#

LMD[2]

124

LBP7

#

16

125

120

#

LMD[1]

126

10

#

15

127

122

#

100K

115
114

R296

#

13

+5V

TL31
R290

#

12

106
98

R311

LMA[11]

GND

I/O3

R310

21

A7

R309

LMA[10]

I/O2

R308

24

A6

11

R307

LMA[9]

I/O1

R306

LMA[8]

TL30

A5

R305

3
25

A4

R304

LMA[7]

A2
A3

51

*VSCK

*VSEN

50

*VREQ

49

47

VSCD7

VSCD6

52

53

54

55

56

57

58

59

69

70

71

72

73

VSCD5

LBP6

MAST

VSCD4

NCO

100

*WE
CY7C199L-15VC
A0
IC31
A1

C178

LMA[13]

LMA[12]

LMA[11]

LMA[10]

LMA[9]

LMA[8]

LMA[7]

LMA[6]

LMA[5]

LMA[14]
105

LMA13
LMA14

2

LMA12

102

103

LMA11

LMA10

104

LMA9

96

97

LMA8

LMA7

88

LMA6

LBP5
VSCD3

LBP4

DVSS

6

*OE

1000pF

1
3

10K

2SD592A
Q14
340
1

10K

LMA[4]

DVSS

MACK

002:A4

Q16
Gi:30min

2

89

LBP3

LMA[4]

+5V

VCC

R270

50V
#

C163

50V

#

0.22uF

4

90

DVDD

AV[1]

R276

10K
DTC114EKA

LMA5

LBP2

VSCD2

LBP1

DVDD

JW50
002:A4

3

2

C162

CN1

91

AVSS

VSCD1

LBP0

VSCD0

AVDD

D7

LAP7

D6

*DACK

D5

LAP6

D4

LAP5

OFOUT2

D3

OFHC2

D2

LAP4

7

107

LAP3

VINIG2

8

LMA[3]

5

111

LAP2

FRIP5

AGDR2

#:Not Mounted

1K

+24V
1

0.22uF

nLEDON

CN1

LMA4

LAP1

LMA[2]

*CS

AGND

GND

B2B-PH-K-M

LMA3

LAP0

AGOUT2

9

4

110

LRA11

FETG2

10

LMA[1]

LMA[6]

112

LRA12

+5V

+24V

92

94

93

LMA2

LMA1

LMA0

MN86075
L-mode

FETS2

0
-5VC

to LED ARRAY

LMA[3]

LMA[2]

LMA[1]

LMD[6]

LMD[5]

LMD[4]

LMD[3]

LMA[0]
95

LMXD7

11

12

LMXD6

LMXD5

13

LMXD4

14

15

LMXD3

LMXD2

16

TL29
LMXD1

79

17

18

SENTIM

LMXD0

TL28
81

84

80

FR2

FR1

FSG

FCK2

TL26

TL27
82

83

FCK1

43

LRA10

LMA[0]

LMA[5]

113

*LROE
*LRWE

VREFL

3
-5V

AGND

44

MN86075

ADIN2

D1

87

ADIN1

74

1

25V

100

0.1uF

117
100K

IC30

# JP8

R275

25V

22

99
101

LSID7

VREFH

MACK

V-

R286
0.1uF

IC28
LM6172IM

2

8
V+
4

C165

1

+5V

C173

0.1uF

25V

22

D

65

AGND

LSID6

D0

R274

C164

64
128

FETS1

75

33

+5VC

22uF
C172
16V

+5V

LSID5

76

10

LSID4

FETD1

A1

30

R281

FETG1

67

MA724

48

+5VF

3

DA1

2

21
+5V

LSID3

A0

23

AGOUT1

*CS

24

AGND

0.1uF

LSID2

*WR

25

AGND

AGUR1

68

26

#
25V

LSID1

63

27

AGDR1

61

29

22

3

LMD[2]

JW51
28

LSID0

*RD

25V

35

VINIG1

62

31

*LMCE

80/68

36

OFHC1

*RESET

R267

AGND

28
20

OFOUT1

*MCLKI

330

IC28
LM6172IM

C170

+5V

GND

*LMOE
*LMWE

60

#

38

32

C176

3.9K

100

R265

220K

R278

1.5K

2

7

D
+

2.2K

R287

34

-

5

R269

1

#

37

220K

D
-

40

150K

AGND

R283

+

3

22K

41

1

1K

6

150K

39

C175
16V
2
1
22uF

DA1

R263

42
R285

AGND

4

8

R277

AGND

LM6172IM
IC28

50.0V
100pF

R273

CN7

1K

C168

MA724

3.9K
CN7

#

50.0V
2200pF

R271

R264
DOS
OS

1K

C166

TL25

50V
1
R284

#

R262

20

ABC

77

C174
2

46
19

1uF

-5V

2

TL24

*SYNC

1

78

Q17

*PEAK2

2.7K
R280

R266

10K

R268

AGND

2SC2412K

MCM1

2

85

10K

R279

3

66

25V

+5VF
+5VF

45

R272

Q13
560
1

LMA[0-14]

27

CLAMP

2

2SC2412K

+5V

1K

AGND

LMD[1]

GND
2

Q15
560
1

3

7

002:D1

LMD[0-7]
IC29
TC7SET08FU

LMD[0]

0.1uF
C169

1uF

3

5
VDD

3
2SC2412K

5

10K

CN7

+5V

GND

0.1uF

AGND

BLM21P300S

C167

C160

25V

NF3

25V

6
0.1uF
C161
10V

CN7

002:D1

FR

1
+5V

+5V

RS

+5V

*PEAK1

JW80

MCM0

2

TC7SET08FU

86

CN7

JW79

2

680

CN7

FCK1

JW49

3

+3.3V

1

IC29

R288

FCK2

4

4

0.1uF

CN7

JW48

0.1uF

FSG

1

25V

CN7

C171

1

FR

332

Drawing Name
SC PC Board (8/14)

APR 2002

DX-600/800

A

B

C

1

#

D

Not Mounted

JP9

+24V

1

0.1W

+24VM

0

173981-5
5

NF5

10K

A
C192

SAS-101KD07

47K

001:A3

1

25V
0.1uF

C187

1

GND

#

4

LSU I/F

IC34
TC7SET04FU

L+5V

3

B7B-PH-K-S
3

2

pVDO

+24V

V-

1

6

2

CN68

nVIDEO

CN68

nLDON

3

4.7K

D16

1

IC33

IC32
BA10393F

5
VCC
GND

100

2
TC7SH14FU

IC35
TC7SH14FU

1
GND

DTC143ZKA

GND
002:D4

pS_H

2

3

4
MGND

laser

R328

4
+3.3V
25V

3

GND

IC35

002:D4 pHSYNC

CN68

nHSYNC

CN68

nS/H

CN68

GND

CN68

GND

50V

2
TA78M05F
OUT
GND

0.1uF

2.0W

IN

0.1uF

1

1

2.0W

47K

SCHMITT INVERTER
for Jitter-Free Output

25V

82

L+5V

2

82

3

C186

R322

82

MA152A

22uF
C185
16V

R321

2.0W

C190

1
R320

1

S
Q20
2SJ327-Z

R330

+24VM

35V

G

3

+5V

47K

100pF

10uF

25V

2

pLDON

C188

E

002:D4

C184

50V
C182

2012

0.22uF

C181
50V

GND

8
V+

0.22uF

2012

L+5V

Q23

D

+24V

R314
GND

NF4

5
DTC143ZKA

22uF

33K

+24VM:
High Voltage Power Supply
Main Motor
Paper Clutch
LSU

2

+

R315

IC32
BA10393F

CN68

BLM11A601S

2

33K
1

E

C183

-

3.3K

R312

10K

3

R318

pMPOW

1

NC

47K
R313
002:D2

4
1 IC34
TC7SET04FU

2

MGND

2

GND
002:D4

3

CN69

GND

GND
GND

nPMCK

MGND

+5V
5
VCC

#

#

to CPU P73
(5V Pressure Proof)

10K

10K

3
DTC114EKA
Q18

+24LVL

1K

CN69

polygon

1000pF

Q22
R325

1
A
K
RD8.2S
C193
50.0V

VA2
4.7K

2

pPMCK

3
VA3

002:D4
R319
47K

2

DTC143ZKA

560.0

R324

+5V

GND

100pF

GND

3

nPMRY

+5V
#

SAS-101KD07
D18

2
2012

CN69

2012

2

50V

GND

nPMON

#

100

1
Q19
2SA1037AK

CN69

2012

R326

nPMRY

C189

10K

2012

R323

#

C180

50V

#

R316

2

D17

47K
002:D4

#

R327

1.0W
2.7K

GND

GND

INTERLOCK SW
(DOOR SENSOR)

50V

47K

0.22uF

+3.3V

0.22uF

4.7K

K

2

Q21

R516

2.7K

1.0W
2.7K

R514

3

33K

CN57

+24VD

(No Pin)

R317

+24VD

2

50V

CN57

1

0.22uF

N.C.

1

C179

CN57

0.22uF

+24V

pPMON

1
1.0W

+24V

002:D4

560.0
3

DTC114EKA
Q51

R515

2

to ILS PCB
B2(3)B-PH-K-S

2

C191

22K
3

+24VM

#

50V

R506
+5V

1
Q52
2SA1037AK

3
RD30S

R507

3
DTC143ZKA

CN69

BL02RN1-R62

#

2

3

4.7K
Q24
4

47K

7

1

GND

GND

4

GND

4

#:Not Mounted

Model
DX-600 / 800

Edition 1.0

333

Drawing Name
SC PC Board (9/14)

APR 2002

DX-600/800

A

B

C

D

+24V

#:Not Mounted

F0805B1R50FW

1

D19

A

F1

+5V

K

1

SFPB54

+3.3V

750mA

*ST:
Mounted with the stamp function.

1

Gi:30min

0.68

10K

5 12 13

400mA

GND

GND

ON

#

#

8

ON

N.C.

CN3

nSTANPON

0.22uF
2012

2

2012

ON
ON

ON

C210

50V
2SD874A
Q35
340
3

R386

*ST
ON

*ST

2
1

ON

7

3

50V

R384

4

*ST

CN3

*ST

2SC2412K
Q32
560
1

47uF

R375

3

6

R353

10k

2
ON

5

1K

R365

2

680

DTC114EKA
Q26

1
ON

4

10

10k

2

DBT1R

4

ON

16

SENSR

COMPI
PLSTM
GND

I1

3

250mW

470

I0

1

R369

R344

PHASE

ON

GND

ON

The rotation direction is CW, as seen
from the mounted surface side

R371

7

2

25V
820pF

9

1K

OB

1

15

25V
820pF

1K

R338

3
002:A4

R352

1K

R337

OA

step

14

C199

IOBR1

8

R336

REF
IC37

2

4

3

C201

150
002:A4

10K

10K
IOBR0

R348

PHBR

002:A4

R346

002:A4

VA

3

16V
2

+24V

0.22uF

4.7K

*ST

VB
VCC

2

C211

R378

002:D2 pSTAMP

TEA3718SDP
6

*ST
C209
1

*ST

3

2012

2

11

*ST

TM

+3.3V

2

*ST

R385

R372

1

CN3

K

2)

+5V

D22

MTpB (

F0805B0R75FW

A

CN5

B3B-PH-K-S
1

F2

1SR154-400

4)

250mW

1)

MTnB (

150

3)

MTpA (

CN5

10K

100K

MTnA (

CN5

*ST

47K

50V

0.22uF

1

500mA

2012
0.22uF

0.68

C203
2

680

Gi:30min

2

CN5

to Stamp

*ST
*FN

+24V

47K

1

C204

10k

R351

Q25

10K

10K

DTC114EKA

47uF
C202
35V

2

5 12 13

4

1K

R364

50V

10

COMPI
PLSTM
GND

I1

1

10k

2

DAT1R

I0

470

3
002:A4

R350

7
R343

4

16

250mW

1K

1

R368

R335

9

SENSR

R370

1K

REF
OA
IC36 OB
PHASE

3

25V
820pF

IOAR1

R334

8

15

25V
820pF

IOAR0

002:A4

1K

B4B-PH-K-S

14

VA

C200

002:A4

R333

to TX MOTOR

3

VB
VCC

C198

PHAR

11

R347

002:A4

R345

10K

150

TEA3718SDP
6

JP10

0.1W
0

MGND

+3.3V

+5V
+24VM

4)
001:A3

4.7K

3

16V
2

2

47uF

1

47K

1W

R376

R367

R366

MGND
1

2SC2412K
Q33
560
1

3

2
1

MM

COM
MGND

C208
1

R377

pADF1

50V

(

GND

2SD874A
Q36
340
3

nADF1

#

#

2012

2012

4

MGND

2 COM

4

MGND

MGND
step
1

MGND

#:Not Mounted

1

2

ON

ON

2

ON

3
4

Edition 1.0

CN56

0.22uF

MMnB

C212

CN54

500mA

50V

2)

K

(

D23

MMpB

1SR154-400

CN54

2

+24VM

A

3)

250mW

1)

(

220

(

MMnA

CN56

0.22uF

6

MMpA

CN54

300mA

C213

15

CN54

R387

0.22uF

47K

1
C206

4

MA152A

REFB OUT*B
GA GB

3

(Com)

1

OUTB

1

2012

6

(Com)

+24VM

47K

RSB

1
10

+24VM

CN54

B2B-PH-K-S
1

10K

2SC2412K
Q28
560.0
1

OUTA
OUT*A

CN54

+24VM

R388

4.7K

RSA
REFA

5

4 12

82

R342

13

IC38

2

R359

MMP3

R357

002:D4

150

3
2

9

1W

R358
MGND

2.2K

3

50V
2200pF

1

50V
470pF
50V
470pF

MGND

2.2K
C196

R363

100mW

4.7K

R362

7

50V
2200pF

C197
+5V

470

MMP1

C194

002:D4

2SC2412K
Q27
560.0
1

C195

3
2

R340

TDA
TDB

+5V

B6B-PH-K-S

D21

11

INB

to Paper Clutch
to MAIN MOTOR

2012

3

2

8
VS

R381

14

INA

R374

50V

47K
R355

47K
R354

47K

47K

47K
R341

R339

5

0.22uF

MMP2

SMA7029M(LF1060)

50V

002:D4

3

K

SFPB54

2

MMP0

D20

47uF
C205
35V

002:D4

R332

R331

47K

A

C207

3

4

GND

3

4

ON
ON

ON

ON
ON

334

Model

Drawing Name

DX-600 / 800

SC PC Board (10/14)

APR 2002

DX-600/800

A

B

C

D

1

1
B5B-PH-K-S

High Voltage
Power Supply
I/F

3
4.7K

C215

DTC143ZKA
Q40

1

4.7K

1

50V
C230

3
4

1

22uF
16V

3

3.3K

C214

4

R402

DTC143ZKA
Q44
47k
1

GA

3
DTC114EKA
Q47
Gi:30min

10k
1

GND

GND

220K
R399

012:B3

nPWSAVE

2

DTC114EKA

3
2

Q45
Gi:30min

10k

2SC2412K
Q43
560
1

1

GND

220K

2SC2412K
Q42
560
1

10k

3
001:D3

nPWOFF

2

10k
DTC114EKA
Q46
Gi:30min

10k
1
GND

Edition 1.0

nMPOFF

10k

10K

1

16V

4.7K

R400

100

CN6

3

2

R395

nSSR

3
2

R403

47uF

7

-

GND

50V

2

CN6

GND

6.8K

1

D25

E

+3.3V

GND

0.01uF

CN52

-5V

2

0.1uF

6

2

IC32

+

3
TH2

GND

CN6

22K

R401

10K

5

GND

0.1uF

C276

#

3

R398

3

1
16.0V

CN52

10

BA10393F

16.0V

2
MA153A

B2B-PH-K-S
TH1

C275

+3.3V

Thermistor I/F

R397

1K

GND

+5VP

C222

MA152A
1

D26

+3.3V

R396

CN6

25V

8
11

10K
R394

THERM

GND

0.1uF

C226

-5V

2

pSSRA

C225

AGND

+3.3V

001:A3

GND

CN6

0
5

3

CN6

2

JP14

GND
002:D4

+5V

0.22uF

C229
50V

0.1W
0

#

GND

Gi:50min

CN6

25V

JP13

DTC143ZKA
Q41
47k

+3.3V

0.1uF

C223

2

7

C227

nDRCK

25V

CN53

3

0.1uF

2

Low:10mA Max

CN6

25V

BL02RN1-R62

C224

Development

+5VP

0.22uF

0.22uF

1

+5V

NF8

GND

CN6

Low Voltage
Power Supply
I/F

25V

0

Gi:50min

DRCK

9

6

0.1W

#

1

1

+24V

2012

BL02RN1-R62

JP12

22uF
16V

2

pCR0

47k

002:D4

nCRCK

+24V

CN6

2012

NF7
CN53

CN6

0.1uF

Low:10mA Max

GND

2

3

#

C228

Electrification

2012

2

0.1uF

+3.3V

Gi:50min

#

2

1

2

22uF
16V

DTC143ZKA
Q39

C217

pCR1

4.7K

1

2

47k

001:D3

+5VP

nCR1

CN53

0

#

25V

001:D3

4

Low:10mA Max
3

C218

Electrification
GND

C221

Gi:50min

0.1W

2012

0.1uF

1

C216

47k

50V

DTC143ZKA
Q38

22uF
16V

pTR0

4.7K

2

001:D3

2

C219

3

50V

nTR0

CN53

1

NF6
JP11

0.22uF

Low:10mA Max

+24VM

CN53

BL02RN1-R62

C220

5

22uF
35V

1
Transcription

B11B-PH-K-S

+24V

2

+24VM

4
#:Not Mounted

GND

335

Model

Drawing Name

DX-600 / 800

SC PC Board (11/14)

APR 2002

DX-600/800

A

B

C

D

1

1

+3.3V

001:A3

1

R419

100
nCCHK1

001:A3

(Casette Check Sensor)
3

R420

nRSEN

001:A3

(Resist Sensor)
008:D3
6

R421

100

CN58

nESEN

560.0

2

25V

CN14

100

25V

*1

A1

100

R468

100

4

47K

5

47K

470

470
R409

R408

R455

47K

6

R456

47K

7

R457

47K

8

R458

47K

9

*1
*1

R414

R422

100

R423

100

nPCHK1

001:A3

TONER

001:A3

47K

*1

(Toner Sensor)
50V

50V

CN59

B3
B4

A5

B5

A6

B6

A7

B7

A8

B8

GND

47K

R461

47K

CN4

pPNLCK

CN4

pPNLSD

CN4

pPNLRD

100pF

*1

*1

*1

14

R462

47K

13

R463

47K

12

R464

47K

11

R465

47K

GND

+5V

*1
*1
*1
*1
*1

5
VDD
GND

IC39
8

TC7SET08FU

3

GND

IC39

GND
4

R433

5

100

2

CN14

pPNLSD

PNLTXD

7
C245
TC7SET08FU

50V
100pF

+5V
47K

GND

C235

C232

R460

15

1

R429
GND

16

50V

+3.3V

100pF

3

100pF

001:D4

B2

A4

47K

TC74VHCT245AFT

R428

(Paper Check Sensor)

A2
A3

R459

25V

47K

R454

17

0.1uF

R453

*1

+3.3V

4

GND

3

*1

1

CN59

47K

*1

2

CN59

R452
*1
+3.3V

CN59

TONER

GND

B1

C239

CN59

nPCHK1

CN4

5

*1

R467

18

2

PNLCLK

+5V
5

LDSP1

GND

2

GND

C261
+5V

GND

4

*1
R469

GND

CN14

*DIR[BA]
IC41

001:D4

CN14
4

*G
1

B5B-PH-K-M

CN4

1

*1

GND

(NO PAPER SENSOR)

0.1uF

25V
+5V

10

47K

PNLDIR

+5VP

TC74VHCT245AFT

R466

pRESET

008:D3

0.1uF

GND

C244

GND

IC41

19
004:D2

CN4

+5VP
3

VCC

GND

to SNS3 PCB

+5V

3

*1

2

CN4
JW54

20
0.1uF

C260

50V

100pF

C237

50V

50V

100pF

C231

GND

100pF

*1

2

+5V

+5VP
1

C234

CN58

CN14

Q48

4
CN58

1

2
DTC114EKA

10k

+5V

GND

B11B-PH-K-M

+5V
JW53

001:A3

(Exit Sensor)

N.C.

PNL I/F

3
10k

2

GND

pBATCHK

*2

*1

C243

nESEN

330K
*BT

*1

100

CN58

R432
330K

*BT

*BT
*1

nRSEN

BATLVL

Mounted when the Battery is used.

2

220K

R431

R427

R416

CN58

R413

nCCHK1

CN4
*BT:

*1
R410

CN58

B13B-PH-K-M

1

*BT

5
+5V

3

BATIN

+5V

PNL I/F (for S3000i)

*2:Not Mounted as for S3000i.

Q49

2SA1037AK

*1

47K

47K

B6B-PH-K-M

47K

*BT
(PAPER EXIT SENSOR)

*1

*1:Mounted as for S3000i.

to SNS4 PCB

R437
001:D4

6

100

PNLRXD

CN14

pPNLRD
6

+5VP

C240
R430

3

50V
100pF

22K

3

GND

R438
011:C4

CN14

nPWSAVE
12

C241

2nd Casette I/F

+3.3V

B7B-PH-K-M

50V

47K

47K

47K

R434
006:D4

CN14

CN4

pPNLRST

9
C246

50V
100pF

R418

R415

R411

CN66

nWAKUP

nWAKUP

+5V

nPCHK2

CN4

8

100

nWAKUP

3
CN66

nPWSAVE

GND

CN66

+5V

CN4

100pF

+24VM
1

+24VM

7

100

nPWSAVE

Option

4

R424

100

6

R425

100

R435
nPCHK2

001:A3

001:D3

100

R439

100

9

pPNLRST

CN14

pPNLRST
11

C247
nCCHK2

CN66

pADF2

CN66

5

R426

nCCHK2

001:A3

pADF2

008:D3

50V
100pF

100

GND
R436
005:B4

10

220

pBZCLK

CN14

pBZCLK

7

10
001:A3

CN4

100pF

50V

50V

50V
C238

GND

100pF

CN66

C236

GND

C233

2

100pF

nOP

47K

CN66

R412

nOP

pBZCLK

+3.3V

001:A4;002:D4

nBPNT

R440

47K

R441

100

11
CN14

nBPNT
13

C242

50V

CN4

nBPNT

100pF

4
GND

4

GND
GND

Edition 1.0

336

Model

Drawing Name

DX-600 / 800

SC PC Board (12/14)

APR 2002

DX-600/800

A

B

+3.3V side

C250

JW55

C251

C252

25V
0.1uF

25V
0.1uF

C253

25V
0.1uF

002:D3

pSELECT

002:D3

nFAULT

002:D3

pBUSY

002:D3

nACK

002:D3

pPERR

002:D4

nINIT

002:D3

nSTRBE

002:D3

nAUTFD

002:D3

nSELIN

DATA[1]

8

DATA[2]

9

DATA[3]

11

DATA[4]

12

DATA[5]

13

DATA[6]

14

DATA[7]

16

DATA[8]

17

DIR

*2

A1

4
5
6
20
21
22
23
19

+5V

24

40
38

A4

B4

37

A5

B5

36

A6

B6

35

A7

B7

33

B8

32

A9

Y9

47

A10

Y10

46

A11

Y11

45

A12

Y12

44

A13

Y13

43

A14

C14

29

R443

100

A15

C15

28

R444

100

A16

C16

27

A17

C17

26

PLHin

PLH

30

HLHin

25

IC40

2

2
JW67

3
4

JW57
JW68

5
6

JW58

7

JW69
JW59

8
JW70

9

JW60

13
32

JW71

11

JW61
JW72

10
12

JW62
JW73

31
1

JW63
JW74

14
36

JW64

18

GND

#

GND
C254

39 34 15 10

1

R41-2181C
JW56

B3

HLH

TL32

41

B2

A8

3

B1

GND

A3

A2

2

1

Centronics i/f
Centronics Connector

+5V

HD

*2:Not Mounted as for S3000i.

+5V side

50V
100pF
50V
100pF

48

pBUSOUT

VCC
VCC

1

D

*1:Mounted as for S3000i.

42 31 18 7

74LVX161284MTD
002:D3

25V
0.1uF

DATA[8-1]

VCC-cable
VCC-cable

002:D3

+5V

JW75

C255

+3.3V

C

GND
GND

15
D27

33

1

20

2

19

3

18

4

17

5

16

6

15

7

14

34
35
JP22
JP23

17

0

FG

20
21
22
23
24

11

10

16
19

12

9

25
26

74F1071MTC

27
28
29

GND

DATA1

CN91

DATA2

CN91

DATA3

CN91

DATA4

CN91

DATA5

CN91

DATA6

CN91

DATA7

CN91

DATA8

CN91

pSLCT

CN91

nFAULT

CN91

pBUSY

CN91

nACK

CN91

pPE

CN91

nINT

CN91

nSTB

CN91

nAFTX

CN91

nSELIN

CN91

PLH

CN91

NC
NC

CN91
CN91

NC

CN91

NC

CN91

FG

CN91

GND

CN91

GND

CN91

GND

CN91

GND

CN91

GND

CN91

GND

CN91

GND

CN91

GND

CN91

GND

CN91

GND

CN91

GND

CN91

GND

CN91

GND

2

0

13

8

CN91

30

#:Not Mounted
GND

3

3
*1

Printer Terminal Board i/f
to PRTA PCB

+3.3V

001:D3

R445

USBENB

2SK680A
Q50
1

3
22K

52806-2220

USB i/f

2

22
20

USB Connector

18

67068-0001

002:A1

1

R451

SCANENB

15K

DP

27

NF9

4
1%

8

0.1uF

25V
C259

2

10
1
19

3
2

CN92

4

D+

6
2

3
2

CN92

17

D-

21

2
NNCD6.2MF

1
6.2

3

#

D28

5pF

50.0V

5pF

50.0V

#

12

VBUS

PLP3216S121SL2

27

C256

4

DM

C257

002:A1

R447

14

CN92

1
1

22uF
16V

0

C258

# JP19

R450

1%

R448

R446

33K

1.5K

002:A3

16

#

0
JP20

3
7
5
4

JP21

CN92

9

GND

11

0
GND

FG

13
GND

15

Not Mounted

CN94

DATA1

CN94

DATA2

CN94

DATA3

CN94

DATA4

CN94

DATA5

CN94

DATA6

CN94

DATA7

CN94

DATA8

CN94

pSLCT

CN94

nFAULT

CN94

pBUSY

CN94

nACK

CN94

pPE

CN94

nINT

CN94

nSTB

CN94

nAFTX

CN94

nSELIN

CN94

PLH

4

CN94
CN94
CN94
CN94

GND

Edition 1.0

337

Model

Drawing Name

DX-600 / 800

SC PC Board (13/14)

APR 2002

DX-600/800

A

B

C

D

Option
FLASH Memory Card I/F
2M,4M,8M
003:C3;004:C1;005:B1;014:A4

AD[15-1]

004:D1,004:D1,004:D1,004:D1,004:D1,004:D1,004:D1,

AV[22-15]

31 5027 068 030 833

1

004:D4;008:D4

AD[1]

29

AD[2]

28

AD[3]

27

AD[4]

26

AD[5]

25

AD[6]

24

DV[15-0]

AD[7]

23

AD[8]

22

AD[9]

12

CN12

A1

CN12

A2

CN12

A3

CN12

A4

CN12

A5

CN12

A6

CN12

A7

CN12
+3.3V
AD[10]

47K

1
CN93

*LAN

LEDV

CN93

CN93

GND

LEDV

CN93

CN93

GND

GND

CN93

CN93

GND

A16

CN93

CN93

D15

A15

CN93

52

D[14]

57

D[6]

58

D7

A14

CN93

CN93

D14

A13

CN93

CN93

D6

A12

CN93

CN93

D13

A11

CN93

59

D[5]

60

D[12]

61

D[4]

62

CN93

D5

CN93

D12

CN93

D4

A10

CN93

A9

CN93

A21

CN93

*WE

CN93

63
Vcc

CN93

Vcc

*RESET

CN93

0.1uF

C249

25V

66

D[10]

67

CN93

D11

A20

CN93

CN93

D3

A19

CN93

CN93

D10

A18

CN93

CN93

D2

A17

CN93

69

D[1]

70

D[8]

71

CN93

D9

A8

CN93

CN93

D1

A7

CN93

CN93

D8

A6

CN93

CN93

D0

A5

CN93

72

D[0]

001:D2;002:D1;003:A1;004:A1

nRD

CN93

*OE

A4

CN93

CN93

GND

A3

CN93

CN93

GND

A2

CN93

CN93

Vdd

A1

CN93

CN93

Vdd

Vdd

CN93

CN93

A15

Vdd

CN93

74
75

GND

AD[15]

78

AD[14]

79

AD[13]

80

AD[12]

81

3

AD[10]

83

AD[9]

84

AD[8]

85

AD[7]

86

AD[6]

87

AD[5]

88

AD[4]

89

AD[3]

90

AD[2]

91

A14

*CE

CN93

A13

D0

CN93

CN93

A12

D1

CN93

CN93

A11

D2

CN93

+3.3V

A10

D3

CN93

CN93

A9

D4

CN93

A8

D5

CN93

CN93

A7

D6

CN93

CN93

A6

D7

CN93

CN93

A5

D8

CN93

CN93

A4

D9

CN93

CN93

A3

D10

CN93

CN93

A2

D11

CN93

CN93

A1

D12

CN93

93
CN93

Vdd

D13

CN93

CN93

Vdd

D14

CN93

CN93

AEN

D15

CN93

94
95
002:A3

nLANC
96

001:D2

LANRDY

CN93
0.1uF

25V

AV[22]

50

A[12]

ARDY

*WR

CN93

*RD

CN93

9

A[11]

10

A[10]

DV[0]

11

A[9]

DV[1]

31

12

A[21]

DV[2]

32

DV[3]

2

DV[4]

3

nRESET

GND

CN93

GND

RESET

CN93

A[20]

CN93

GND

INTR0

CN93

99

A[19]

17

A[18]

18

A[17]

(to FROM for Program)

AD[15-1]

DV[6]

5

DV[7]

6

DV[8]

64

19

A[8]

DV[9]

65

20

A[7]

DV[10]

66

21

A[6]

DV[11]

37

A[5]

GND

A17
A18

CN12

A19

CN12

A20

CN12

A21

CN12

A22

CN12

GND (Not used A23)

CN12

D0

CN12

D1

CN12

D2

CN12

D3

CN12

D4

CN12

D5

2

CN12

D6

CN12

D7

CN12

D8

CN12

D9

CN12

D10

CN12

D11

CN12
23

A[4]

DV[13]

39

24

A[3]

DV[14]

40

A[2]

DV[15]

A[1]

D12

CN12

D13

CN12

D14

CN12

D15

CN12

*CE1

CN12

*CE2

CN12

*OE

CN12

*WEL

CN12

*WEH

41
+5V
R138

+3.3V

100K

7
42

004:D2

nFROMCV
9

nFROML
30

DD[0]

31

DD[1]

001:D2

004:D1;008:D4

nRDV
15

004:D1;008:D4

nWLV
33

DD[2]

33

DD[3]

34

DD[4]

35

DD[5]

36

DD[6]

37

DD[7]

38

DD[8]

39

DD[9]

40

DD[10]

41

DD[11]

42

DD[12]

43

DD[13]

44

DD[14]

45

DD[15]

59
CN12

*MB4

CN12

RDY/*BSY

CN12

*CD

CN12

*ID0

CN12

*ID1

CN12

*ID2

16

+3.3V
R134

3

100K
36

001:A4

nCDOPT

001:A4

CID0

001:A4

CID1

001:A4

CID2

R135

100K
67

R136

(to LAN Controller)

100K
63

R137

100K
62

44
Card ID

Panasonic

ID0

ID1

ID2

H

L

L

HP

H

L

H

PB

H

H

L

Others

H

H

H

CN12

nRDD

003:C3;004:C2;005:B2

pLANRST

001:D2

LANINT

001:A3

RSV

45
CN12

RSV

CN12

RSV

CN12

RSV

CN12

+5V

57
60

nWRU_DQMU001:D2;002:A3;003:A1
+5V
17
51

50
GND

A16

CN12

38

DV[12]

49

CN93

A15

CN12

4

DV[5]

48

100

A14

CN12

30

001:D3;003:C1;004:A2

CN93

GND
003:C3;004:C1;005:B1;014:C1

GND

nWRL_DQML 001:D2;002:A3;003:A1;004:C1

47
CN93

98

CN12

53

46

97

C248

A[13]

32

CN93

A13

48

AV[20]

CN93

92

AD[1]

47

29

CN93

(to LAN Controller)

46

AV[19]

28

82

AD[11]

AV[18]

8

27

CN93

A12

CN12

19

7

16

A11

CN12

20

49

26

77

14

AV[21]

25

76

AD[15]

A[14]

22

73

13

6

15

68

D[9]

A[15]

14

65

D[3]

A[16]

13
CN93

64

D[2]

A10

CN12
GND

5

CN93

AD[14]

DD[15-0]

003:C3;004:C4;005:B1

25V

56

D[11]

21

0.1uF

+3.3V

10

AD[13]

C63

2

AD[12]

AV[17]

4

55

D[7]

D[13]

8

AV[16]

3

54

(to FROM for Program)

AD[11]

001:A1;002:D2;003:A1;004:A1

2

53

D[15]

A[23-1]

C262

nLANOPT

0.1uF

25.0V

FX8C-100P-SV2

51
001:A3

A9

CN12
CN12

to LANB PCB

D[15-0]
R442

001:A1;002:A2;003:A1;004:A3

A8

CN12
11

+5V

LAN Board I/F

1

CN12

+5V

CN12

GND

CN12

GND

CN12

GND

CN12

GND

CN12

NC

CN12

NC

CN12

NC

CN12

NC

CN12

NC

CN12

NC

CN12

NC

CN12

NC

1
34
35
68

GND

4

4

18
GND

43
52
54
55
56
58
61

Edition 1.0

338

Model

Drawing Name

DX-600 / 800

SC PC Board (14/14)

APR 2002

DX-600/800

10.3. PNL1 PC Board
B

D

BAT

nLED[1-0]

SCN_DB[3]

8

SCN_DB[4]

9

SCN_DB[5]

10

SCN_DB[6]

11

SCN_DB[7]

GND

35

4.7K

P64/*RD

53

LCDE

P65/*WR

54

LCDRW

P66/*WAIT

55

LCDRS

P67/ASTB

56

P36/*SCK31

17

R13

100K

P35/SO31

16

R14

100K

R23
100K
1

100K

SCN_DB[1]

58

P41/AD1

P32

13

R17

100K

SCN_DB[2]

59

P42/AD2

P31

12

SCN_DB[3]

60

P43/AD3

P30

11

SCN_DB[4]

61

P44/AD4

SCN_DB[5]

62

47

P45/AD5

P70/TI00/TO0

TL4

SCN_DB[6]

63

P46/AD6

ENERGY SAVER
LED1

P71/TI01

48

TL5

49

64

P47/AD7

P73/TI51/TO51

50

TL6
pBZCLK

KIN[0]

1

P50/A8

P74/PCL

51

CLKOUT

KIN[1]

2

P51/A9

P75/BUZ

52

TLCNT

KIN[2]

3

P52/A10

KIN[3]

4

33

P53/A11

P10/ANI0

KIN[4]

5

P11/ANI1

32

P54/A12

P12/ANI2

31

P13/ANI3

30

nPWSW

P14/ANI4

29

nAPNT

P15/ANI5

28

pSDOOR

P16/ANI6

27

nB4

P17/ANI7

26

nWAKUP

6

P55/A13

KIN[6]

7

P56/A14

KIN[7]

8

P57/A15

39

IC

34

(IC)

AVREF

GND

2
TP1

4.7k

002:A1

0.1W

To: SC PCB

Q6
DTC143ZKA

S11B-PH-K-M
1

+5VP

+5V
2

47k
1

+5VP

+5VP

GND

3

ENERGY SAVER
SW1

R27

1

2

1K
EVQ11L04M-1

TP2

4

GND

R36
C13

GND

1K

5

R30

1K

6
C18

C14

R31

1K

R32

1K

R33

1K

1

C15

R34

1K

+5V

+5V

GND

CN50

pPNLSD

CN50

pPNLRD

8

CN50

nPWSAVE

CN50

9

nWAKUP

R37

1K

C20

50.0V

10

CN50

pPNLRST

CN50

pBZCLK

CN50

nBPNT

3

47k

4

3

11

1K
C21

50.0V

2

100K

*1

SNCMN2
1

3

1

2

RPI-352
PC4
4

GND

R21

100K

0.1W
R20

R19
0.1W

RPI-352
PC1

Q2
DTC143ZKA

1
68

4.7k

*1

2

R35

0.01uF
100

100K

1

3
2

CN50

0.01uF

nBPNT

+5V

SNCMN1

4

R18

KIN[7-0]

R10

470
002:A1

+5VP

0.1W

+5VP

R9

SCN_DB[7-0]

+5VP

(Vpp)

GND

002:A1

50.0V
0.01uF

GND

0.125W
0

7

0.01uF

50.0V
0.01uF

JP2

50.0V

50.0V
0.01uF

470

LMP202C10-FR

+5V

CN50

100K

R29
50.0V
0.01uF

R11

16

GND

CN50

+5V

GND
GND

C19

15

CN50

(for FG strap)

13
14

2

220

+5V

12

002:A1

pLEDCT0

+5VP
R25

2
1
LN376GCPX-2UT

3

pLEDCT1

0.1uF

100K

R16

1

R15

14

25.0V

15

P33

2

2

P34/SI31

P40/AD0

4.7K

C23

P03/INTP3/ADTRG

KIN[5]

Q8
2SA1037AK
560.0
3

R43

TL3

P72/TI50/TO50

Q9
2SA1037AK
560.0
3

2

+5V

0.1uF

nPWSAVE

57

VSS0

7

23

1
R44

46

9

SCN_DB[2]

P25/ASCK0

0.1W

GND

6

PNLTXD

SCN_DB[0]

JP1
0

PNLRXD

22

AVSS

C9
V5

SCN_DB[1]

16.0V

VIN

SCN_DB[0]

5

21

P24/TxD0

100K

22.0uF

VDD

4

0.1uF

VSS

LCDE

P23/RxD0

+5V
R24

GND

2

DB7

10

C8

DB6

R3

P22/*SCK30

20

10K

DB5

3

3

25.0V

DB4

LCDRW

C7

DB3

LCDRS

10

750

DB2

10

R2

R4

DB1

R1

2

19

1

P02/INTP2

P21/SO30

25.0V

45

100K

18

2

P01/INTP1

1
R12

P20/SI30

100K

44

R5

E
DB0

1

IC1

SNSCT

SCN_DB[7]

RS

*RESET
P00/INTP0

TL2

IC4

XT2

36
nPWDWN 43

TL1

LCD MODULE

uPD780022A

37

Q4
DTC143ZKA

R28

0

GND

R/W

XT1

4.7k

2

50.0V

R45

15pF

PST9339U

3
GND

25

2

2

X2

38

VSS1

GND

40

42

R6

3

AVDD

10
G
2

3
4.7K
VOUT

50.0V

NC

50.0V

DT-26-32.768KHz-7.3PF
32.768KHz

100pF

25.0V
0.1uF
C3

1

X1
C2

X1

2

50.0V
12pF

4

25.0V

47k

CST8.00MTW
8MHz

1

C1

24

VDD0

1

41

X2

VDD1

GND

1
nLED[0]

1

GND

GND

VCC

Q3
DTC143ZKA

47k

0.22F
Gold Capacitor
C11

4.7k

0.1uF
1

IC2

5.5V
2

22.0uF
C16
16.0V

Q1
DTC143ZKA

2
C5
1

47k

+5VP

nLED[1]

1000pF

4.7k

002:A1

3

1

C12

0.01uF

50.0V

3
2

A

2

MA748

RN5VD20A

3

K

3
100

CD GND

C6

#

R8
50.0V

25.0V
0.1uF
#

+5VP

D1
NC

1

OUT

5

C4

1

BAT

1000pF

VDD

C10

2

NC

R7

# IC3
4

10K

BAT

C17

#:Not Mounted

C

22.0uF
C22
16.0V

A

4

3

*1 : table-1

2

RPI-352
PC2

RPI-352
PC3
4

3

4
A4 scanning

B4 scanning

PC2

Not Mounted

Mounted Sensor

R18

Mounted 68

Not Mounted

1
GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

A-POINT

Edition 1.0

B4

339

S-DOOR

B-POINT

Model

Drawing Name

DX-600 / 800

PNL1 PC Board (1/2)

APR 2002

DX-600/800

A

001:D2

pLEDCT1

001:D2

pLEDCT0

001:D1

nLED[1-0]

001:A4

SCN_DB[7-0]

001:A4

KIN[7-0]

B

C

D

SCN_DB[7]
3

MA786

1

D9

SCN_DB[6]
3

MA786

1

D8

SCN_DB[5]
3

MA786

1

D7

SCN_DB[4]
3

MA786

1

D6

SCN_DB[3]
3

MA786

1

D5

SCN_DB[2]
3

MA786

1

D4

3

MA786

1

D3

3

MA786

1

D2

SCN_DB[1]

1
SCN_DB[0]

1

*2 :

MEMORY

REDIAL/

INTERNET

FLASH

09/O

STAMP

06/Y

ON LINE

13/S

RESOLUTION

INTERNET

PAUSE

SW2

SW8

SW14

SW22

SW30

SW38

SW46

SW54

*2

LED2
1

: Not Mounted

DX-800 : Mounted

KSCN[7]

KSCN[6]

KSCN[5]

KSCN[4]

KSCN[3]

KSCN[2]

*2

KSCN[1]

KSCN[0]

UF-L7

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

R38

2
2

1

LN376GCPX-2UT
EVQ11L04M-1

EVQ11L04M-1

EVQ11L04M-1

EVQ11L04M-1

EVQ11L04M-1

EVQ11L04M-1

EVQ11L04M-1

*2

LED4

0.1W
220

R40
2

1

0.1W
220

LN376GCPX-2UT

EVQ11L04M-1

KIN[0]

nLED[0]

ABBR

2
SW3

MONITOR

SW9

SW15

10/P

SW23

07/U

SW31

03/E

SW39

STAMP

02/W

SW47

ALARM

LED3
1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

LED21
R39

2
2

1

0.1W
220

R41
2

LN376GCPX-2UT
EVQ11L04M-1

EVQ11L04M-1

EVQ11L04M-1

EVQ11L04M-1

EVQ11L04M-1

EVQ11L04M-1

2

SW55

EVQ11L04M-1

1

0.1W
220

LN28RPX

EVQ11L04M-1

KIN[1]

nLED[1]

20/L

SW16
1

SW24
2

1

EVQ11L04M-1

2

SW40

1

EVQ11L04M-1

05/T

17/H

SW32
2

1

EVQ11L04M-1

12/A

SW48
2

1

EVQ11L04M-1

SW56
2

1

EVQ11L04M-1

2

EVQ11L04M-1

KIN[2]

08/I

04/R

18/J

*3 : Jumper used net list

CONTRAST

net name
SW17
1

SW25
2

1

SW33
2

SW41

1

2

1

SW49
2

1

Ref.No. of jumpers

net name

Ref.No. of jumpers

SW57
2

1

2

JW3

+5V

JW19

10mm

JW21

10mm

10mm

JW13

pSDOOR

JW44

0.125W
0

EVQ11L04M-1

EVQ11L04M-1

EVQ11L04M-1

EVQ11L04M-1

EVQ11L04M-1

EVQ11L04M-1

KIN[3]

nBPNT

19/K

16/G

15/F

SNCMN2

24/C

DIR.SEARCH

1

SW10
2

1

EVQ11L04M-1

+5VP

SW18
2

1

EVQ11L04M-1

SW26
2

1

EVQ11L04M-1

SW34
2

SW42

1

EVQ11L04M-1

2

1

EVQ11L04M-1

SW50
2

1

EVQ11L04M-1

JW22

10mm

JW23

10mm

JW28

10mm

SW58
2

1

EVQ11L04M-1

10mm

JW26

10mm

10mm

JW29

3

SW4

JW18

SW1_nPWSW

JW41

(E.SAVER)

2

JW42

0.125W
0

SCN[4]

EVQ11L04M-1

KIN[4]

3

JW31

10mm

JW30

10mm

JW25

10mm

JW24

10mm

JW20

10mm

JW27

10mm

JW32

10mm

JW34

10mm

JW35

10mm

JW33

10mm

JW14

10mm

0.125W
0

JW43

0.125W

SCN[5]

0

START

P2/-

14/D

27/N

23/X
GND

SW5
1

SW11
2

1

EVQ11L04M-1

SW19
2

1

EVQ11L04M-1

SW27
2

1

EVQ11L04M-1

SW35
2

SW43

1

EVQ11L04M-1

2

1

EVQ11L04M-1

SW51
2

1

EVQ11L04M-1

JW12

10mm

JW15

10mm

JW16

10mm

SCN[6]

SW59
2

1

EVQ11L04M-1

2

SCN[7]

LED1_K

EVQ11L04M-1
10mm

JW17

(E.SAVER)

KIN[5]
JW48

0.125W
0

COPY/ SET

21/@

P3/SPACE

28/M

22/Z

26/B

JW49

0.125W
0

SW6

SW12

SW20

SW28

SW36

SW44

SW52

JW50

SW60

(STAMP)
0.125W

0
1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

LED4_A

2

(MEMORY/

JW61
0
EVQ11L04M-1

EVQ11L04M-1

EVQ11L04M-1

EVQ11L04M-1

EVQ11L04M-1

EVQ11L04M-1

EVQ11L04M-1

INTERNET)

JW62

EVQ11L04M-1

LED3_A

nLED[0]

0
KIN[6]

4

JW1

nAPNT

STOP

11/SYMBOL

CLEAR

P4/SHIFT

P1/.

25/V

1

SW13
2

1

PC1_K

SW21
2

1

SW29
2

1

SW37
2

SW45

1

2

1

SW53
2

1

SW61

EVQ11L04M-1

EVQ11L04M-1

EVQ11L04M-1

EVQ11L04M-1

EVQ11L04M-1

2

EVQ11L04M-1

1

JW11

10mm

2

EVQ11L04M-1

pBZCLK

(A-POINT)

nB4

EVQ11L04M-1

4

01/Q

FUNCTION
SW7

nLED[1]

PNLRXD

JW2

JW47

0.125W
0

PNLTXD

JW45

0.125W
0

JW46

0.125W
0

KIN[7]

Edition 1.0

340

Model

Drawing Name

DX-600 / 800

PNL1 PC Board (2/2)

APR 2002

DX-600/800

10.4. MJR PC Board
A

B

C

#

D

# C107

Not Mounted

#

# L8

#

UF1717V282Y0R5
L4

5

FL05RD200A
6

ARG

1
2
RA-391M-C6-Y
VA2

VA4

#

*1

ARG1

*1

#

*1

(VA4 or VA2)

#

*1

LHL08NB332J

2

3

(VA9 or VA8)

L2(T)

CN28

N.C.(No Pin)

CN28

L1(R)

1
+5VP1
JW11

+24V

8

2

CN29

+5VP

3

CN29

GND

CN29

pCMLD

CN29

pCTON

2

1

12

4

+V

3

+24V

CN29

+5VP

5

JW12

B6B-PH-K-S

+24V

9 10

2
0

CN28

to SC PCB
(CN18)

FG

*1

L7

3
250.0V

2

4

0.033uF

1

RL1
ATXD20428

CN20

JW1

NF3

1

-V

T1

4

FL05RD200A

1

B2(3)B-PH-K-S

JW8

CN20

3

DSSA-P3100SB

CN20

to SC PCB
(CN18)

L3

VA12

CN20

L1(R)

JW3

2

1
2
DSS-401M-S00B

CN20
L2(T)

0.033uF

LHL08NB272J

1
2
RA-391M-C6-Y
VA8

CN20

JW2

VA9

T2

1

1
2
DSS-401M-S00B

1

R41-1396C

C106

LINE

250.0V

0.033uF
C108
250.0V

GND

Table
USA mode
VA4,VA9
or
VA2,VA8

RA-391M-C6-Y
or
DSS-401M-S00B

JP1

Not Mounted

JP2
JP3
JP4

1

RA-501M-C6-Y
or
DSS-601M-S00B

MA152A

3

3

Not Mounted

Mounted

Not Mounted

2

DTC143ZKA
Q10

Mounted

Mounted
Not Mounted

D3

EU mode

4

1

Mounted
GND

5

#

*1
L2

JW4

*1

JP3
VA10
1

FL05RD200A

D6

2

3

3

RD3.6M

T2

CN21

T1

CN21
CN21

4
CN21

1
MA152A

+5VP1

3
4
5

#

* Not Mounted

#

# L12

1

4
PC1
PC814A

2

# R127

3
6

0.25W

Mounted *2 when moduler jack connector
for Ext.TEL is mounted on CN21.

*4

pHKOF

+5VP1
+5VP2
7

#

Mounted *3 or *4 when the function,
the hook-up detection of the handset
in the saving energy mode.
And *5 mounted jamper when not having
this function.

1
2

VCC
IN1
IN2

*4 complies with the standard of the
insertion loss in a certain destinations.

OUT1

6

5
OUT2
4
AOUT
TL1
GND
IC20
THS-56F
3

GND1

#

+5VP1
JW10

2
1

4
IC22
TC7S00F

5
VCC
GND
3

IC22
TC7S00F
JW9

#

#
* Not Mounted

GND1

DX-600 / 800

341

4

#

Model

Edition 1.0

CN29

18
* Not Mounted

*2

*3,*4,*5

FL05RD200A
6

#

220uF

C100
FL05RD200A

#

#

*3,*4

JW6

# L11

2

JW7

#
1

NV390D05

CN21

3

3.83V
2

R41-1396A
CN21

5

*3

VA13

#

3

VR61SS

6

*2
EXT. TEL

2

2
RD3.6M

10K

*3,*4,*5

# JP4

0
D5

PC2
PC817B

3

10K
0.25W

D9

0.25W

R117

R131

R116
JP2

4

25.0V

4

*1

10V

CN23

FL05RD200A
3

1

0.1uF

CN23

# JP11

C183

CN23

# JP1

0.25W

T1

*1

270

3

CN23

JW5

R125

T2

L1

2

NV390D05

CN23

0

1uF
1

VA11

CN23

0.25W

R41-1396A

+5VP1

JW13

250V

4.7K

C103

EXT. TEL/Handset

GND

Drawing Name
MJR PC Board (1/1)

APR 2002

DX-600/800

10.5. SNS1 PC Board
A

B

C

D

1

1

B3B-PH-K-M
3
CN80

LDSC1

CN80

GND

CN80

nCCHK1

CN81

nCCHK1

CN81

GND

CN81

nRSEN

CN81

LDRE

2

2

to SNS2
2

1

1

2

3

1

to SNS4

4

3
CNA1003H01ME
PC1

3

2

B4B-PH-K-M

4

3

4

Edition 1.0

4

342

Model

Drawing Name

DX-600 / 800

SNS1 PC Board (1/1)

APR 2002

DX-600/800

10.6. SNS2 PC Board
A

B

C

D

1

2

1

1

2

3
CNA1003H01ME
PC1

2

4

B3B-PH-K-M
1
CN82

nCCHK1

CN82

GND

CN82

LDSC1

2

3

Edition 1.0

to SNS1 (LPC)

3

3

4

4

343

Model

Drawing Name

DX-600 / 800

SNS2 PC Board (1/1)

APR 2002

DX-600/800

10.7. SNS3 PC Board
A

B

C

D

1

1

to LPC

2

to TONER

CN83
CN83
CN83
CN83
CN83

5

+5V

4

TONER

3

GND

2

LDSP1

1

nPCHK1

+5V 3
TONER 2
GND

1

2

CN84
CN84
CN84

B3B-PH-K-S

B5B-PH-K-M

3

3

3

1

4

2

CNA1003H01ME
PC1

4

Edition 1.0

4

344

Model

Drawing Name

DX-600 / 800

SNS3 PC Board (1/1)

APR 2002

DX-600/800

10.8. SNS4 PC Board
A

B

C

D

1

1

B6B-PH-K-M

B2B-PH-K-S
+5V

5

1

+5V

CN87

CN86

4

6

2

CN86

250mW
68
R1

To:

THERMISTOR

2

THERM

CN87

To:

1/4W

2

nESEN

CN87

PAPER EXIT SENSOR

SC PCB
(CN58)

3

1

4

2

CNA1003H01ME
PC1

B4B-PH-K-M

LDRE

4

nCCHK1

1

nRSEN

3

CN85

3
1

nCCHK1

3

nRSEN

CN87

CN85

CN87

GND

GND

CN87

To:
TIMING SENSOR

CN85

2

3

(CN81)

2
CN85

GND

4

Edition 1.0

4

345

Model

Drawing Name

DX-600 / 800

SNS4 PC Board (1/1)

APR 2002

DX-600/800

10.9. CCD PC Board
A

B

C

D

1

1

+5V

+5V
2

2

3

3

4

4

Model
DX-600 / 800

Edition 1.0

346

Drawing Name
CCD PC Board (1/1)

APR 2002

DX-600/800

10.10. ILS PC Board
A

B

C

D

1

1

2

2

S2(3)B-PH-K-S
1

+24V

CN73

NC
NC

COM

COM

NO
NO

To:
SC PCB

AVM3958

SW101

(CN57)

NC
NC
3

3

+24VD

COM

COM

3

NO

CN73

NO
AVM3958

SW102

4

4

Model
DX-600 / 800

Edition 1.0

347

Drawing Name
ILS PC Board (1/1)

APR 2002

DX-600/800

10.11. ACI PC Board
A

B

C

D

1

1

AC Inlet
2

2

NC-179-L3A

Harness, ACI
1

FBS8701

AC (L)

CN1

ACH1 (Black)

1
CN2

FG (G)

2

ACH1 (White)

2
CN2

3

To:
Power Supply Unit

CN1

(CN101)

AC (N)

CN1

FG Strap

3

3

FBS8702

FG1

1
CN3

FG

4

4

Model
DX-600 / 800

Edition 1.0

348

Drawing Name
ACI PC Board (1/1)

APR 2002

DX-600/800

10.12. Power Supply Unit
A

B

C

D

1

1

2

2

3

3

4

4

Model
DX-600 / 800

Edition 1.0

349

Drawing Name
HVPS (1/4)

APR 2002

DX-600/800

A

B

C

D

1

1

2

2

3

3

4

4

Model
DX-600 / 800

Edition 1.0

350

Drawing Name
HVPS (2/4)

APR 2002

DX-600/800

A

B

C

D

1

1

2

2

3

3

4

4

Model
DX-600 / 800

Edition 1.0

351

Drawing Name
HVPS (3/4)

APR 2002

DX-600/800

A

B

C

D

1

1

2

2

3

3

4

4

Model
DX-600 / 800

Edition 1.0

352

Drawing Name
HVPS (4/4)

APR 2002

DX-600/800

A

B

C

D

1

1

2

2

3

3

4

4

Model
DX-600 / 800

Edition 1.0

353

Drawing Name
LVPS (1/1)

APR 2002

DX-600/800

10.13. LANB PC Board
A

B

C
D4
1

+3.3V

+3.3VA

D

+5V

2

+3.3VA

3 BAV99LT1

+3.3V

AGND

*SRDY

0
R15
50.0V

10pF
C11

TX-

NC

NC2

RD+

RX+

RDC

RXC

RD-

RX-

NC1

NC3

8

12
11

7

13
7

6

5
6

5

9

11K

3

1

6

R23

7
8

+3.3V

R7

# R24

AGND

0.1W

CN97

NC

(No Pin)

75

0.1W
75

RX-

0.1W

24.9
+5V

2

2

BAV99LT1

47K
3

47K

CN97

2
GND

0

9

1

10
11

ACTIVITY

CN97

+5V

CN97

LINK

+3.3V

12

R19

+3.3V JP1

0.1W
6

100

R20

GND

7
TL30

+3.3V

1
3
2

GND

CS

VCC
IC2
0.0

DI
SK

AGND

#
TP1

DO

FG

GND
5298T(molex)

4

GND
5 FM93C46LM8
AT93C46-10SC-2.7

1
TL31

C20

VDD
OSC1
OUT CONT

74

NC

0.1uF
25V

25MHz 4
3

NC

0.1uF
25V

JP2
0

2

0

8

C10

#

1

21

CN97

1

GND

25
5

RX+

AGND
R12

D1

TX-

CN97

#

GND

0.0625W

TX+

CN97

R18

R17
250.0V
C14

C12
R22

4

CN97

1000pF

10pF

C8

24.9

0.01uF

R10

24.9

50.0V

0.1W

+3.3VA

0.1W

0.1W
R9

X25OUT

TX25

RX25

MCLK

MDO

MDI

RX_ER

RX_DV

*CSOUT

TL29

0.0625W
0

24

15

*ADS

GND

2
AT93C46-10SC-2.7

GND
DSO751SV(25.000MHz)

JP1

64wordX16bit

Mounted

128wordX8bit

Not Mounted

3

JP2
Not Mounted
Mounted

GND

D31

D30

D29

51

52

50

TRANSMIT

TL8 TL11 TL14 TL16 TL18
TL22 TL24
TL10 TL13 TL15
TL17 TL20 TL23
TL25

TD+ 16

10 TX+

TDC 14

12 TXC

TD- 15

11 TX-

RECEIVE

RD+ 1

7 RX+

DD[15]

DD[14]

DD[13]

DD[12]

DD[11]

DD[10]

DD[9]

DD[8]

DD[7]

DD[6]

DD[5]

DD[4]

DD[3]

DD[2]

DD[1]

DD[0]

TL6

D28

AGND

TL4

002:C4

COL100

*VLBUS
LCLK

109

GND

14

R6

TL28

110

D27

TL2

30

#

119

53

45

*CYCLE

D26

39

23

105

55

44

*RDYRTN

56

47K

22

95

D25

42

GND

D24

R3

*DATACS
W/*R

TD-

10

20

69

57

37

19

59

D23

3

+3.3V

*LDEV

TXC

R11

17

54

58

48

8

3

16

41

D22

38

1

2

26

D21

47K

(RESET:High Active)

60

36

RESET

61

GND

TL1

(INTR0:High Active)

D20

R2

47

INTR0

62

25.0V
0.022uF

XTAL2

(ARDY:Low Active)

D19

32

1K
C1

ARDY

D18

pLANRST

*WR

63

002:C4

R1

XTAL1

65

pLANINT

*RD

D17

002:C4

31

2

0

D16

40

nLANRDY

3
AGND

TX+

TDC

H1012

A15

66

002:A4

EESK
EECS

A14

D15

34

002:C4nWRU_DQMU

LAN91C111-NC

A13

67

nRDD

EEDI

68

33

A12

D14

94

EEDO

70

93

AD[15]

A11

71

92

AD[14]

ENEEP

IC1

D13

AD[13]

A10

D12

91

IOSO2

D11

AD[12]

IOSO1

A9

72

90

A8

D10

AD[11]

IOSO

73

89

A7

75

88

AD[10]

LEDB

D9

AD[9]

(LEDB:LINK)

A6

D8

87

A5

77

AD[8]

LEDA

78

86

(LEDA:ACTIVITY)

76

85

AD[7]

A4

D7

AD[6]

A3

D6

84

RBAIS

101

83

AD[5]

*CNTRL

D4

82

AD[4]

A1
A2

D5

AD[3]

LBK

102

81

*LNK

(AEN:Low Active)

103

AD[2]

CRS100

TXEN100

TXD0

TXD1

TXD3

TXD2

RXD0

RXD1

RXD2

RXD3

AVDD

VDD
002:C4

80

TPI-

D3

2

AD[1]

AEN

D2

AD[15-1]

TPI+

104

nLANC

002:A4

106

002:A4

GND 43

*BE0

1

D2 BAV99LT1 +5V
2

AGND

TPO(BE1,0=L:word access)

107

96

4

TD+

50.0V

BAV99LT1

D3

TPO+

*BE2
*BE1

49.9

R14
3

*BE3

D1

97

108

98

D0

99

0.1W

#

1

+3.3V

49.9

TL26 TL27

15

24.9

27

128

127

TL19 TL21
114

121

118

113

115

117

116

125

126

124

123

18

13

122

79

112

100

64

3

46

35

TL3 TL5 TL7 TL9 TL12
GND

50.0V
R13

GND

T1

16
14

C21

AGND

to LANC PCB
S7(8-4)B-PH-K-S

4

0.1uF 25V

49

0.1uF 25V

C6

111

C5

47K

120

0.1uF 25V

R5

29

C4

25V

0.1uF

28

1

0.1uF 25V

10pF

C7
C3

R4

3.3

47K

0

0
R28

0
R27

0
R26

R25

R21

0.1W

0.1W

+3.3V

DD[15-0]

5 RXC

4

1CT:1

Edition 1.0

354

4

RD- 2

6 RX-

RDC 3

1CT:1CT

Model

Drawing Name

DX-600 / 800

LANB PC Board (1/2)

APR 2002

DX-600/800

A

B

C

D

+5V

SC I/F

+3.3V

55

D[7]

56

D[14]

57

D[6]

58

D[13]

59

D[5]

60

D[12]

61

D[4]

62
63

25V
C18

2

0.1uF

64

002:C2

D[11]

65

D[3]

66

D[10]

67

D[2]

68

D[9]

69

D[1]

70

D[8]

71

D[0]

72
73

nRD

74
75
76
77

AD[15-1]

GND

3

78

AD[15]
AD[14]

79

AD[13]

80

AD[12]

81

AD[11]

82

AD[10]

83

AD[9]

84

AD[8]

85

AD[7]

86

AD[6]

87

AD[5]

88

AD[4]

89

AD[3]

90

AD[2]

91

AD[1]

92
93

+3.3V

94

nLANRDY

96
97

22uF
C9

98
99
100

CN96

GND

GND

CN96

CN96

GND

A16

CN96

CN96

D15

A15

CN96

CN96

D7

A14

CN96

CN96

D14

A13

CN96

CN96

D6

A12

CN96

CN96

D13

A11

CN96

CN96

D5

A10

CN96

CN96

D12

A9

CN96

CN96

D4

A21

CN96

CN96

Vcc

*WE

CN96

CN96

Vcc

*RESET

CN96

CN96

D11

A20

CN96

CN96

D3

A19

CN96

CN96

D10

A18

CN96

CN96

D2

A17

CN96

CN96

D9

A8

CN96

CN96

D1

A7

CN96

CN96

D8

A6

CN96

CN96

D0

A5

CN96

CN96

*OE

A4

CN96

CN96

GND

A3

CN96

CN96

GND

A2

CN96

CN96

Vdd

A1

CN96

CN96

Vdd

Vdd

CN96

CN96

A15

Vdd

CN96

CN96

A14

*CE

CN96

CN96

A13

D0

CN96

CN96

A12

D1

CN96

CN96

A11

D2

CN96

CN96

A10

D3

CN96

CN96

A9

D4

CN96

CN96

A8

D5

CN96

CN96

A7

D6

CN96

CN96

A6

D7

CN96

CN96

A5

D8

CN96

CN96

A4

D9

CN96

CN96

A3

D10

CN96

CN96

A2

D11

CN96

CN96

A1

D12

CN96

CN96

Vdd

D13

CN96

CN96

Vdd

D14

CN96

CN96

AEN

D15

CN96

CN96

ARDY

*WR

CN96

CN96

GND

*RD

CN96

CN96

GND

RESET

CN96

CN96

GND

INTR0

CN96

CN96

GND

GND

CN96

1

A[21-1]

2
3

A[21-1]

002:C3

GND

4

A[16]

5

A[15]

6

A[14]

7

A[13]

8

A[12]

9

A[11]

10

A[10]

11

A[9]

12

A[21]

13

+3.3V
JW5
#

13

002:A2

28

nRD

11
R16

#1
A[20]

16

A[19]

17

A[18]

18

A[17]

19

A[8]

20

A[7]

21

A[6]

22

A[5]

23

A[4]

24

A[3]

25

A[2]

26

A[1]

1K

12

62.5mW

14
#1
C13

25.0V

0.022uF

GND

+3.3V

27

PROGRAM for LAN

28

FROM 16M

29
30

DD[0]

31

DD[1]

32

DD[2]

33

DD[3]

34

DD[4]

35

DD[5]

36

DD[6]

37

DD[7]

38

DD[8]

39

DD[9]

40

DD[10]

41

DD[11]

42

DD[12]

43

DD[13]

44

DD[14]

45

DD[15]

47
26

14
15

37

#1:Not mounted (Program FROM in SC Board)
FROM
JP4

16Mbit
Not Mounted

32Mbit
Mounted

A[1]

25

A[2]

24

A[3]

23

A[4]

22

A[5]

21

A[6]

20

A[7]

19

A[8]

18

A[9]

8

A[10]

7

A[11]

6

A[12]

5

A[13]

4

A[14]

3

A[15]

2

A[16]

1

A[17]

48

A[18]

17

A[19]

16

A[20]

9

A[21]

#
JP4

10
0

VCC
NC
*BYTE

IC3

#1

90.0ns

#1

*CE
*OE
*WE

RY/BY

*RESET

DQ0

NC

DQ1

A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9

DQ2
DQ3
DQ4
DQ5
DQ6
DQ7
DQ8
DQ9
DQ10
DQ11

A10

DQ12

A11

DQ13

A12

DQ14

A13

DQ15

A14

15
29 TL32

D[0]

31

D[1]

33

D[2]

35

D[3]

38

D[4]

40

D[5]

42

D[6]

44

D[7]

30

D[8]

32

D[9]

34

D[10]

36

D[11]

39

D[12]

41

D[13]

43

D[14]

45

D[15]

2

A15
A16
A17
A18
A19

3
NC
GND GND
46

002:C1

27

A[21-1]
GND

002:A1

46

D[15-0]

nWRU_DQMU
001:A3

47
48
49
50

nRDD

001:A3

pLANRST

001:A3

pLANINT

001:A3

2

C2

25V

001:A3

95

0.1uF

nLANC

1
16V

001:A2

CN96

25V

D[15]

CN96

+5V

0.1uF

54

GND

D[15-0]

+5V

GND

C15

002:C3

*LAN

CN96

MBM29LV160B-90PFTN-SFKS

53

CN96

0

52

A[21-1]

51

1

JP3

C19

FX8C-100S-SV5

1

0.1uF
25V

to SC PCB

DD[15-0]

001:A4

GND
GND

4
001:A2

Edition 1.0

4

AD[15-1]

355

Model

Drawing Name

DX-600 / 800

LANB PC Board (2/2)

APR 2002

DX-600/800

10.14. LANC PC Board
A

B

C

D

1

1

To:LANB PCB(CN97)

RJ-45

B4B-PH-K-S

2

TM11R-5C-88
4

TX+

CN200

TX-

CN200

RX+

CN200

RX-

CN200

1

3

CN201

TX+

CN201

TX-

CN201

RX+

2

2

3

1

2

4
CN201

5
CN201

To:LANB PCB(CN97)
6

B3B-PH-K-S

CN201

3

ACTIVITY

3

K

A

7

CN202

CN201
BVH-410G1G

LED2

R2

270

0.25W

2

+5V

CN202

LINK

CN202

RX-

8
CN201

1

K

A
3

BVH-410G1G

LED1

R1

270

0.25W

TP1

TW-4BS-2K

FG

4

Edition 1.0

4

356

Model

Drawing Name

DX-600 / 800

LANC PC Board (1/1)

APR 2002

memo

DZZSM00184-0



---

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.4
Linearized                      : No
Create Date                     : 2002:04:16 15:01:46Z
Creator                         : FrameMaker+SGML 5.5.6p145J
Modify Date                     : 2002:08:20 10:19:26+09:00
Page Count                      : 358
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Creation Date                   : 2002:04:16 15:01:46Z
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 4.05 for Windows
Mod Date                        : 2002:08:20 10:19:26+09:00
Metadata Date                   : 2002:08:20 10:19:26+09:00
Title                           : Untitled Document

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools